<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" version="2.0">
  <channel>
    <title><![CDATA[New Products from retrieve]]></title>
    <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/rss/catalog/new/</link>
    <description><![CDATA[New Products from retrieve]]></description>
    <pubDate>Wed, 23 May 2012 15:11:51 +0000</pubDate>
    <generator>Zend_Feed</generator>
    <language>en_US</language>
    <docs>http://blogs.law.harvard.edu/tech/rss</docs>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Advanced ArcPad Data Collection]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-arcpad-data-collection.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-arcpad-data-collection.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_adv_arcpad_collection_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this rGuide you will learn how to perform advanced data collection tasks in ArcPad including 2-point offsets, find features, update attributes, update x,y positions, and navigation.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this rGuide you will learn how to perform advanced data collection tasks in ArcPad including 2-point offsets, find features, update attributes, update x,y positions, and navigation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Advanced ArcPad Collection
<ul>
<li>2-Point Offset</li>
<li>2-Point Offset Field Collection</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Find and Update Feature
<ul>
<li>Find/Search</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Select Feature</li>
<li>Update Data and Position of Feature</li>
<li>Navigation Steps
<ul>
<li>Search for Feature/Select Feature to Navigate</li>
<li>Using Navigation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 May 2012 19:06:06 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Designing and Creating a Personal Geodatabase for ArcPad/GPScorrect and GPS Analyst ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/designing-and-creating-a-personal-geodatabase-for-arcpad-gpscorrect-and-gps-analyst.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/designing-and-creating-a-personal-geodatabase-for-arcpad-gpscorrect-and-gps-analyst.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_design_create_geodb_arcpad_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Designing and creating a personal geodatabase is the foundation for having intelligent layers in your GIS.  The geodatabase is the native data structure for ArcGIS and is the primary data format used for editing and data management.  In this rGuide you will learn the structure of a geodatabase, how to design feature classes, and create the geodatabase and associated feature classes in ArcCatalog.
</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Designing and creating a personal geodatabase is the foundation for having intelligent layers in your GIS. The geodatabase is the native data structure for ArcGIS and is the primary data format used for editing and data management.  In this rGuide you will learn the structure of a geodatabase, how to design feature classes, and create the geodatabase and associated feature classes in ArcCatalog. Then using the GPS Analyst extension for ArcGIS you will learn how to GNSS enabled the geodatabase to accept GNSS field collected data in ArcCatalog.  To qualify for PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion. You are responsible for claiming the PDH's.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Designing a Personal Geodatabase
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps to designing a good geodatabase</li>
<li>Geodatabase structure</li>
<li>Create geodatabase schema</li>
<li>Extra considerations</li>
<li>Session Objectives - Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Personal Geodatabase
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps to create a geodatabase</li>
<li>Create a Personal Geodatabase - Demo</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>GNSS/GPS Enabling a Personal Geodatabase
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Required Steps to add GNSS Data to a geodatabase</li>
<li>GNSS enable our personal geodatabase - Demo</li>
<li>Session Objectives - Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 May 2012 13:49:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Designing and Creating a Personal Geodatabase]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/designing-and-creating-a-personal-geodatabase.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/designing-and-creating-a-personal-geodatabase.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_design_create_geodb_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Designing and creating a personal geodatabase is the foundation for having intelligent layers in your GIS. The geodatabase is the native data structure for ArcGIS and is the primary data format used for editing and data management. In this rGuide you will learn the structure of a geodatabase, how to design feature classes,</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Designing and creating a personal geodatabase is the foundation for having intelligent layers in your GIS. The geodatabase is the native data structure for ArcGIS and is the primary data format used for editing and data management. In this rGuide you will learn the structure of a geodatabase, how to design feature classes, and create the geodatabase and associated feature classes in ArcCatalog. To qualify for PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test. Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion. You are responsible for claiming the PDH's.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Designing a Personal Geodatabase
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps to designing a good geodatabase</li>
<li>Attributes</li>
<li>Create geodatabase schema</li>
<li>Extra Considerations</li>
<li>Session Objectives Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Personal Geodatabase
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Open ArcCatalog</li>
<li>Print Geodatabase Schema for exercise</li>
<li>Connect to Folder</li>
<li>Create a New Folder</li>
<li>Create a Personal Geodatabase</li>
<li>Create Domains</li>
<li>Create a Feature Dataset</li>
<li>Create Feature Classes</li>
<li>Session Objectives Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 18 May 2012 20:51:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2013 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2013-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2013-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acad_2013_essen.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This rGuide is a one-year license to a training package equivalent to five full days of classroom training providing the design professional in-depth information regarding the operation of AutoCAD 2013, the world's leading 2D and 3D CAD design tool. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This rGuide is a one-year license to a training package equivalent to five full days of classroom training providing the design professional in-depth information regarding the operation of AutoCAD 2013, the world's leading 2D and 3D CAD design tool.  Upon completion of this rGuide, the user will understand the new features of AutoCAD 2013, the method of using AutoCAD tools for technical drawing and drafting tasks which includes creating and manipulating basic 2D geometry, organizing information and extracting it from drawings; annotating drawings with text and dimensions, plotting drawings and developing and working with reusable content using blocks, Tool Palettes and DesignCenter.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>Welcome Screen</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Title Bar</li>
<li>Customize User Interface</li>
<li>Help System</li>
<li>Ribbon Menu</li>
<li>Drawing Window</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing A Handicapped Parking Sign
<ul>
<li>Getting Started And Drawing Properties</li>
<li>Drawing Units</li>
<li>Saving A New Project</li>
<li>Creating A New Layer</li>
<li>Starting A Drawing</li>
<li>Starting The Body With The Line Command</li>
<li>Offset Command</li>
<li>Drawing The Wheelchair Seat</li>
<li>Temporary Entity</li>
<li>Specifying Relative Units</li>
<li>Rotate Command</li>
<li>More Temporary Entities</li>
<li>More Use Of The Offset Command</li>
<li>Fillet Command</li>
<li>Adding An Arm To The Sign</li>
<li>Extend Command</li>
<li>Using The Perpendicular Command</li>
<li>Trim Command</li>
<li>Finishing Up The Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Drawing A Handicapped Parking Detail
<ul>
<li>Setting Up Drawing Properties And Units</li>
<li>The Design Center</li>
<li>Creating A New Entity With Polyline</li>
<li>Drawing With The Line Command And Using Offset</li>
<li>Drawing A Ramp And Using Match Properties</li>
<li>Using The "From" Snap</li>
<li>Mirror Command</li>
<li>Polar Command</li>
<li>Trim And Extend Commands</li>
<li>Lengthen Command</li>
<li>Inserting A Symbol</li>
<li>Using The Move command</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing A Handicapped Parking Detail Continued
<ul>
<li>Drawing A Sign Symbol</li>
<li>Block Definition</li>
<li>Changing The Symbol's Layer Using Block Editor</li>
<li>Creating A Closed Area</li>
<li>Hatch Command</li>
<li>Creating A New Dimension Style</li>
<li>Adding Dimensions</li>
<li>Adding Leaders</li>
<li>Adding Notes</li>
<li>Setting A Basepoint For Details</li>
<li>Page Setup For Plotting</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Isometric Drafting
<ul>
<li>Setting Up A Metric Drawing</li>
<li>Drawing Overview</li>
<li>This section shows the user how to save as another drawing.</li>
<li>Dimensions Overview</li>
<li>Drawing A Vertical Piece In Isometric View</li>
<li>Stretch Command</li>
<li>List Command</li>
<li>Changing The Isometric Plane</li>
<li>Using The Copy Command</li>
<li>Rotate Command</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cleaning Up An Isometric Drawing
<ul>
<li>Deleting Duplicate And Unnecessary Lines</li>
<li>Drawing Holes</li>
<li>Mounting To Rails</li>
<li>Adding Holes To The Side Rail</li>
<li>Adjusting An Array</li>
<li>Adding More Holes To The Design</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensioning In Isometric Drafting
<ul>
<li>Placing Linear Dimensions</li>
<li>Oblique Command And Defining Text Styles</li>
<li>Vertical Dimensions</li>
<li>Width Dimension</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Three - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Setting Up Multisheet
<ul>
<li>Page Setup</li>
<li>Creating A New Layer And Adding A Border</li>
<li>Adding A Title Block</li>
<li>Viewport Scale</li>
<li>Table Style</li>
<li>Importing From Microsoft Excel</li>
<li>Importing A Note From A Text File</li>
<li>Creating A New Tab</li>
<li>Creating A New Sheet For A Separate View</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting Up Restroom Floorplan
<ul>
<li>Drawing Properties And Drawing Units</li>
<li>Design Center</li>
<li>Importing An External Reference File</li>
<li>Overwriting An Existing Drawing File</li>
<li>Importing An External Reference File Continued</li>
<li>Updating The Bathroom Using Imported Drawings</li>
<li>Creating A Clipping Boundary</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Four - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Computing Cabinet Dimensions
<ul>
<li>The Kind Of Areas Being Dimensioned</li>
<li>Drawing And Offsetting An Arc</li>
<li>Break Command</li>
<li>Divide Command</li>
<li>Creating A 3 Point Angular Dimension</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Reusable Content
<ul>
<li>Adding A Conference Table</li>
<li>Design Center</li>
<li>AutoDesk Seek</li>
<li>AutoDesk 360</li>
<li>Replace Block Command</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fun With Viewports
<ul>
<li>Inserting A Drawing</li>
<li>Dimension Style Manager</li>
<li>Page Setup Manager</li>
<li>Inserting The Bathroom Onto The Blank Layout</li>
<li>Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensioning The Plotting Sheet
<ul>
<li>Linear Dimensions</li>
<li>Angular Dimensions</li>
<li>Recap</li>
<li>Fixing Viewport Plotting Error</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Odds And Ends
<ul>
<li>Hatch Command</li>
<li>Gradiant Hatch</li>
<li>Object Snap Tracking</li>
<li>Fillets</li>
<li>Isolate Objects</li>
<li>Wrap Up</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 18 May 2012 14:18:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Getting Around and Configuring ArcPad and GPScorrect on a Windows Mobile 6.5 Device]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-around-and-configuring-arcpad-and-gpscorrect-on-a-windows-mobile-6-5-device.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-around-and-configuring-arcpad-and-gpscorrect-on-a-windows-mobile-6-5-device.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_getar_config_arcpadgps_wm65_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Before going to the field to collect data using the ArcPad software with the GPScorrect extension understanding you need to know how to optimize the operation of your Windows Mobile 6.5 device. After optimizing the device you will learn how to configure ArcPad and GPScorrect for GNSS data collection.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Before going to the field to collect data using the ArcPad software with the GPScorrect extension understanding you need to know how to optimize the operation of your Windows Mobile 6.5 device. After optimizing the device you will learn how to configure ArcPad and GPScorrect for GNSS data collection. Finally you will learn how to work in the ArcPad software before going to the field to collect GNSS data. To qualify for PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test. Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion. You are responsible for claiming the PDH's.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Data logger Settings for Windows Mobile 6.5
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Optimizing Windows Mobile 6.5 Steps</li>
<li>Swap batteries</li>
<li>Optimizing Windows Mobile 6.5 Demo</li>
<li>Reset</li>
<li>Session Objectives-Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Configuring ArcPad -ArcPad 10 on a Mobile 6.5
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>GPS Preferences</li>
<li>Options</li>
<li>GPScorrect</li>
<li>Configure ArcPad</li>
<li>Session Objectives - Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Getting Around ArcPad
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Starting ArcPad on a Windows Mobile 6.5 Device</li>
<li>Opening Maps</li>
<li>Toolbars</li>
<li>Toolbar Demo</li>
<li>Session Objectives &ndash; Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 11 May 2012 17:33:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Checking In and Processing ArcPad/GPScorrect Field Data Using ArcMap with GPS Analyst]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/checking-in-and-processing-arcpad-gpscorrect-field-data-using-arcmap-with-gps-analyst.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/checking-in-and-processing-arcpad-gpscorrect-field-data-using-arcmap-with-gps-analyst.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_checkproc_acrpad_gpsanalyst_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course goes over how to check in and process ArcPad/GPScorrect field data using ArcMap with GPS Analyst. After collecting field data with the ArcPad field software with the GPScorrect extension the data needs to be brought into and incorporated into the existing mxd in ArcMap.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course goes over how to check in and process ArcPad/GPScorrect field data using ArcMap with GPS Analyst. After collecting field data with the ArcPad field software with the GPScorrect extension the data needs to be brought into and incorporated into the existing mxd in ArcMap. You will learn how to transfer the data from the field device to the computer, check the data in using ArcMap with the GPS Analyst extension, and differentially correct the data. To qualify for the PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will get a certificate of completion.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Checking In ArcPad and GPScorrect Field Data
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps</li>
<li>Copy Data from data logger to computer</li>
<li>Open MXD</li>
<li>Start GNSS Editing Session using GPS Analyst</li>
<li>Check In ArcPad/GPScorrect Field Data</li>
<li>Save GNSS Edits</li>
<li>Session Objectives - Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Differential Correction/Processing Field Data
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Why Use Differential Correction</li>
<li>Steps Overview</li>
<li>Differential Correction</li>
<li>Session Objectives - Recap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>CORS (Continuous Operating Reference Stations)
<ul>
<li>CORS Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 May 2012 15:29:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Subassemblies and Assemblies]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-subassemblies-and-assemblies.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-subassemblies-and-assemblies.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_subassem_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Subassemblies and assemblies are used to create the "typical section" for your corridor model in AutoCAD Civil 3D. This rGuide offers 85 minutes of instructor led teaching on all aspects of subassemblies and assemblies in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Subassemblies and assemblies are used to create the "typical section" for your corridor model in AutoCAD Civil 3D. This rGuide offers 85 minutes of instructor led teaching on all aspects of subassemblies and assemblies in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. The instructor offers a high level overview of subassembly and assembly functionality, and guides you through the processes required for creating, managing and displaying subassembly and assembly objects. Also learn the how subassembly points, links and shapes play a role in corridor modeling and cross section generation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 New Features</li>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Subassembly and Assembly Overview</li>
<li>Subassemblies and Assemblies in UI</li>
<li>Subassembly Catalog</li>
<li>Subassembly Help Files</li>
<li>Input Parameters</li>
<li>Tool Palette - Input Parameters</li>
<li>Target Mapping</li>
<li>Points Links and Shapes</li>
<li>Add Subassemblies to Tool Palette</li>
<li>Create Assembly Object</li>
<li>Assembly Style</li>
<li>Subassemblies and Naming Conventions</li>
<li>Mirror Subassembly</li>
<li>Code Set Styles</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 May 2012 15:29:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Profiles and Profile Views]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-profiles-and-profile-views.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-profiles-and-profile-views.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_profviews_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 Profiles and Profile Views rGuide provides 76 minutes of detailed instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and label profiles and profile views. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 Profiles and Profile Views rGuide provides 76 minutes of detailed instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and label profiles and profile views. Topics of discussion include the user interface, creating surface profiles and profiles views, creating and editing design profiles, design criteria as it relates to profiles, styles and command settings. The instructor uses a real world data set to guide you through the lessons.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 Updates</li>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Overview of Profiles and Profile Views</li>
<li>Profile Components in User Interface</li>
<li>Profile Types</li>
<li>Surface Profile - EG and Stripping</li>
<li>Create Profiles View</li>
<li>Quick Profile</li>
<li>Create Layout Profile</li>
<li>Profile Editing</li>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
<li>Superimposed Profile</li>
<li>Profiles and Design Criteria</li>
<li>Profile Projections</li>
<li>Object Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Command Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:41:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Vectorworks Training Tips]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vectorworks-training-tips.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vectorworks-training-tips.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vectorworks_sst_1202_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In Vectorworks you can use different ways to create 3D work, but for all of them there are basic principles that you have to understand. Working planes are the basis to start a 3D object, whilst extrusions are the primary tool to create a 3D object.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In Vectorworks you can use different ways to create 3D work, but for all of them there are basic principles that you have to understand. Working planes are the basis to start a 3D object, whilst extrusions are the primary tool to create a 3D object. Once you understand this it all gets much easier. This course has over five hours of training material that is designed to help you work with Vectorworks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>What's New in Vectorworks 2012</li>
<li>Creating a Joinery Unit</li>
<li>Creating a Swimming Pool - Introduction</li>
<li>Site Area Analysis</li>
<li>Textures</li>
<li>Lighting and Rendering in Vectorworks</li>
<li>Planar Graphics in Vectorworks</li>
<li>BIM in Action</li>
<li>Setting up Layers and Stories for Buildings</li>
<li>Introduction to 3D Modeling</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 May 2012 16:13:10 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Sample Lines, Sections and Volumes]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-sample-lines-sections-and-volumes.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-sample-lines-sections-and-volumes.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_sampleline_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this rGuide you learn how to create sample lines, attach section data, create section views and calculate end-area volumes using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Learn how to create sample lines and attach the data required for i) volume calculations and ii) viewing in section views.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this rGuide you learn how to create sample lines, attach section data, create section views and calculate end-area volumes using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Learn how to create sample lines and attach the data required for i) volume calculations and ii) viewing in section views. Also learn how to create the section views and calculate volumes for sample lines in different sample line groups. The session ends with an in depth discussion and lesson on creating code set styles for displaying and annotating corridor section data in section views. You also learn how to create sample lines and section views in a separate drawing from the corridor drawing. The two hour instructor-led session is indexed , which makes it easy for you to retrieve specific information on a topic. This course also includes a proof-of-completion exam.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>C3D2012 Overview and Update
<ul>
<li>New Features Overview</li>
<li>Sections - Multiple Baselines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sections in a Separate Drawing
<ul>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Set Scales</li>
<li>Shortcut and Reference Object</li>
<li>Xref Corridor Drawing</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Sample Lines Overview</li>
<li>Sections and User Interface</li>
<li>User Interface - Volumes</li>
<li>Section Data Types</li>
<li>Choosing Section Data</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Prospector - Sample Line Data</li>
<li>Edit Sample Line Geometry</li>
<li>Create Section Views 1</li>
<li>Delete Section Views</li>
<li>Sample Lines and Section Views</li>
<li>Create Section Views 2</li>
<li>Zoom to Section View</li>
<li>Volume Calculation Overview</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff Criteria</li>
<li>Compute Materials 1</li>
<li>Attach Additional Data</li>
<li>Compute Materials 2</li>
<li>Overhang Correction</li>
<li>Volume Reports</li>
<li>Display Section Data</li>
<li>Create Code Set Style</li>
<li>Styles and Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:42:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Plan Production Tools]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-plan-production-tools.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-plan-production-tools.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_planprod_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD Civil 3D Plan Production Tools course helps you automate the creation of plan, profile, plan/profile and cross section sheets.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D Plan Production Tools course helps you automate the creation of plan, profile, plan/profile and cross section sheets. This rGuide offers 68 minutes of instruction on how to create both plan/profile and cross section sheets using the plan production tools. The instructor offers tips for setting up the drawing templates, and the step by step procedures for creating both plan/profile and cross section sheets. This course also contains a proof-of-completion exam which you can take at the completion of the course.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Plan Production Tools Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Plan and Profile Sheets</li>
<li>Setup Drawing Template DWT</li>
<li>Create view Frames</li>
<li>Review and Edit View Frames</li>
<li>Create Sheets</li>
<li>Editing Sheets</li>
<li>Sheet Set Manager</li>
<li>Cross Section Sheets</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Alignment Reference Object</li>
<li>Corridor Xref</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Setup Drawing Template</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
<li>Create Section Sheets</li>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 New Features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:38:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve 2012 Autodesk Manufacturing Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-manufacturing-training-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-manufacturing-training-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_manufacturing_suite2012_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on manufacturing design. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on manufacturing design. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/autocad-2012-essentials-training.html">AutoCAD 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/autodesk-3d-studio-max-design-essentials-2012.html">Autodesk 3D Studio Max Design Essentials 2012</a></li>
<li><a href="/autodesk-inventor-2011-cable-and-harness-design.html">Autodesk Inventor 2011: Cable and Harness Design</a></li>
<li><a href="/inventor-2011-essentials-training.html">Inventor 2011 Essentials Training</a></li>
<li><a href="/inventor-2011-sheet-metal-design-and-advanced-topics.html">Inventor 2011 Sheet Metal Design and Advanced Topics</a></li>
<li><a href="/inventor-2012-essentials-training.html">Inventor 2012 Essentials Training</a></li>
<li><a href="/inventor-lt-2012-essentials.html">Inventor LT 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/vault-vanilla-basics-2012.html">Vault Vanilla Basics 2012</a></li>
</ul>

</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">699.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Apr 2012 18:40:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[The EasyPipe (TM) Tool]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-easypipe-tm-tool.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-easypipe-tm-tool.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_dp_easypipe_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This CloudDVD covers the use of the EasyPipeTM Tool in Trimble RealWorks to model pipes from 3D scan files.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD covers the use of the EasyPipe<sup>TM</sup> Tool in Trimble RealWorks to model pipes from 3D scan files.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course Introduction</li>
<li>Manual Pipe Creation</li>
<li>The EasyPipe Tool</li>
<li>Using the Data Sets in this Course</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:06:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Pipe Networks]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-pipe-networks.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-pipe-networks.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_pipenetwk_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD offers over 2 hours of instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and analyze pipe networks in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. The instructor begins with a high level overview of pipe network functionality, and then walks through an example of a sanitary sewer design in an urban setting.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD offers instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and analyze pipe networks in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. The instructor begins with a high level overview of pipe network functionality, and then walks through an example of a sanitary sewer design in an urban setting. Topics of discussion include surface preparation, projecting invert shots to profile view, creating/editing a pipe network, parts lists, styles, labeling and culvert modeling.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>C3D 2012 Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Agenda and Overview</li>
<li>Pipe Sizing Capabilities</li>
<li>User Interface - Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Surface Preparation</li>
<li>Project Object to Profile View</li>
<li>Catalog and Parts List</li>
<li>Delete Pipe Network Data</li>
<li>Create Sanitary Pipe Network</li>
<li>Analyze Pipe Network Data</li>
<li>Edit Pipe Network</li>
<li>Add Parts to Network</li>
<li>Pipe and Structure Styles</li>
<li>Label Styles</li>
<li>Profile View Band</li>
<li>Style Overrides</li>
<li>Culvert Modeling</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:37:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to SITEOPS]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-siteops.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-siteops.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/2/1/218533012_generated.png" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>SITEOPS provides engineers with the ability to design in real-time, with client input, and perform site revisions in a fraction of the time. With SITEOPS, the civil engineer is capable of easily designing in the 3D model conceptual world.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>SITEOPS provides engineers with the ability to design in real-time, with client input, and perform site revisions in a fraction of the time. With SITEOPS, the civil engineer is capable of easily designing in the 3D model conceptual world.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Getting Started
<ul>
<li>Quick Start</li>
<li>Importing Data</li>
<li>Topo Import</li>
<li>Adding Drives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File Menu
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>File Import</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit
<ul>
<li>Edit Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Draw Menu
<ul>
<li>Drawing Tools</li>
<li>Placing Points</li>
<li>Areas</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manual Topo Options
<ul>
<li>Manual Grade</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Building Properties
<ul>
<li>Working with Buildings</li>
<li>Properties</li>
<li>Building Height</li>
<li>Existing Property</li>
<li>Side Properties</li>
<li>Parking with Building</li>
<li>Grading Links</li>
<li>Roof Drains</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parking Lots
<ul>
<li>Parking Menu</li>
<li>Basic Properties</li>
<li>Parking Points</li>
<li>Parking Bay Points</li>
<li>Parking Aisle Points</li>
<li>Connects Drive Ways</li>
<li>Parking Direction Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Streets
<ul>
<li>Street Menu</li>
<li>Making Connections</li>
<li>Entrance Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Streets
<ul>
<li>Properties for Streets</li>
<li>Swept Paths Routes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Administering SiteOps
<ul>
<li>Administer Projects</li>
<li>Projects</li>
<li>Templates</li>
<li>User Admin</li>
<li>Branding your site</li>
<li>Departments</li>
<li>License Management</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">275.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:33:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Supplier Evaluation and Performance Management]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/supplier-evaluation-and-performance-management.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/supplier-evaluation-and-performance-management.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_suppliereval_perfexc_new_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Do you understand your suppliers' current performance and whether they have the potential to support your ongoing and future requirements? Do you have the right suppliers? Do you have supplier scorecards, but would like to understand how to improve their effectiveness?</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Do you understand your suppliers' current performance and whether they have the potential to support your ongoing and future requirements? Do you have the right suppliers? Do you have supplier scorecards, but would like to understand how to improve their effectiveness? Understanding supplier capabilities and performance is vital to ensuring a well-functioning supply network, avoiding supply risk and achieving customer satisfaction. Sherry Gordon, the leading authority on supplier evaluation and performance management, gives an overview of the key components of a good business process for evaluating suppliers and managing their performance. She outlines best practices for measuring and improving supplier performance and gives real-life company examples.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Agenda</li>
<li>Supplier Performance Management: Definition</li>
<li>Business Case
<ul>
<li>Supplier Performance Today</li>
<li>Cost of Poor Supplier Quality</li>
<li>Failure Total Cost of Ownership</li>
<li>Poor Performance to Cost Ratio</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Value Proposition Summary</li>
<li>The SPM Process
<ul>
<li>Get Your Own House in Order</li>
<li>Getting Started: Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)</li>
<li>Supplier Evaluation Process</li>
<li>Understand, Define and Align SPM Strategy</li>
<li>Develop Performance Expectations &amp; Measurement Data</li>
<li>Choose and Identify Good Metrics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Evaluation Approaches
<ul>
<li>Questionnaires or Surveys</li>
<li>Scorecards</li>
<li>Site Visits</li>
<li>Software Solutions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Performance Feedback and Communication</li>
<li>Supplier Performance Review Agenda Example</li>
<li>Getting From Measurement to Action</li>
<li>Elements of a Successful SPM Process</li>
<li>Barriers to Success</li>
<li>6 Key Success Factors</li>
<li>Additional Information</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">39.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:00:32 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor LT 2012 Essentials]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-lt-2012-essentials.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-lt-2012-essentials.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/f/i/file.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course covers the essentials of part modeling and drawing creation in Autodesk Inventor LT.  Start from 2D sketches, then learn how to turn these into 3D features and parts.  Also get an in-depth look at sheet metal modeling processes.  Finally, learn how to efficiently create documentation for all your 3D designs.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course covers the essentials of part modeling and drawing creation in Autodesk Inventor LT.  Start from 2D sketches, then learn how to turn these into 3D features and parts.  Also get an in-depth look at sheet metal modeling processes.  Finally, learn how to efficiently create documentation for all your 3D designs.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Information Center</li>
<li>Ribbon Menu</li>
<li>Browser</li>
<li>Graphics Window</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Document Settings
<ul>
<li>Units</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parametrics Overview</li>
<li>Sketching in Parts
<ul>
<li>Sketching Geometry</li>
<li>Parameters and Equations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modeling Features
<ul>
<li>Base Features - Extrude</li>
<li>Base Features - Revolve</li>
<li>Secondary Features</li>
<li>Pick and Place Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Work Features
<ul>
<li>Work Points</li>
<li>Work Axes</li>
<li>Work Planes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Complex Parts
<ul>
<li>Reordering Features</li>
<li>Splitting</li>
<li>Shell</li>
<li>Sketch Doctor</li>
<li>Coordinate Systems</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>iProperties</li>
</ul>
<div class="toc">
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Placing Views
<ul>
<li>View Creation Tools</li>
<li>View Modification Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Annotation
<ul>
<li>Dimension Types</li>
<li>Feature Notes</li>
<li>Text Notes</li>
<li>Symbols</li>
<li>Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles and Standards
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customizing Standards</li>
<li>Setting Object Defaults</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Page Setup and Customization
<ul>
<li>Paper Setup</li>
<li>Borders</li>
<li>Title Blocks</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Three - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction to the Sheet Metal Environment</li>
<li>Base Features
<ul>
<li>Face</li>
<li>Contour Flange</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Secondary Flanges
<ul>
<li>Flanges</li>
<li>Contour Flanges</li>
<li>Faces as Secondary Features</li>
<li>Bends</li>
<li>Cuts and Punches</li>
<li>Rounds</li>
<li>Chamfers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Features
<ul>
<li>Lofted Flanges</li>
<li>Rips</li>
<li>Seams</li>
<li>Unfold/Refold</li>
<li>Converting Standard Parts to Sheet Metal</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Annotation
<ul>
<li>Flat Patterns</li>
<li>Bend Annotations</li>
<li>Punch Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Styles
<ul>
<li>Create Custom Styles</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Rules</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Unfold</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 11 May 2012 19:01:06 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve 2012 Autodesk Building Design Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-2012-autodesk-building-design-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-2012-autodesk-building-design-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_building_suite2012_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on building design.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on building design. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/autocad-2012-essentials-training.html">AutoCAD 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/autocad-architecture-2012-first-steps-towards-implementation.html">AutoCAD Architecture 2012</a></li>
<li><a href="/autocad-for-the-microstation-user.html">AutoCAD for the Microstation User</a></li>
<li><a href="autodesk-quantity-takeoff-2012-essentials-training.html">Autodesk Quantity Takeoff 2012</a></li>
<li><a href="/mastering-revit-families-for-architects-and-structural-designers.html">Mastering Revit Families for Architects and Structural Designers</a></li>
<li><a href="/understanding-bim-and-model-based-design.html">Understanding BIM Model Based Design</a></li>
<li><a href="/vault-vanilla-basics-2012.html">Vault Vanilla Basics 2012</a></li>
<li><a href="/revit-project-phasing.html">Revit Project Phasing</a></li>
<li><a href="/autocad-revit-architecture-suite-2012-essentials-training.html">Revit Architecture 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/revit-structure-2012-essentials-training.html">Revit Structure 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/navisworks-manage-2012-concepts-and-coordination.html">Navisworks Manage 2012: Concepts and Coordination</a></li>
</ul></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">699.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 23 Mar 2012 15:24:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve 2012 Autodesk Civil Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-2012-autodesk-civil-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-2012-autodesk-civil-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_civil_suite2012_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give user in-depth information on civil and infrastructure design.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give usesr in-depth information on civil and infrastructure design. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-quick-steps.html">Civil 3D Quick Steps</a></li>
<li><a href="/autodesk-showcase-2012-essentials-training.html">Autodesk Showcase 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/basic-data-collection-with-terrasync-and-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver.html">Basic Data Collection with TerraSync and GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver</a></li>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-2012-essentials-training.html">Civil 3D 2012 Essentials</a></li>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-2012-new-features.html">Civil 3D 2012 New Features</a></li>
<li><a href="/moving-from-geopak-to-autocad-civil-3d.html">Moving from GEOPAK to AutoCAD Civil 3D</a></li>
<li><a href="/surveying-and-mapping-field-to-finish-with-autocad-civil-3d.html">Surveying and Mapping - Field to Finish with AutoCAD Civil 3D</a></li>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-2012-parcels.html">Civil 3D 2012 Parcels</a></li>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-2012-points.html">Civil 3D 2012 Points</a></li>
<li><a href="/civil-3d-2012-surfaces.html">Civil 3D 2012 Surfaces</a></li>
<li><a href="/map-3d-2012-essentials-training.html">Map 3D 2012 Essentials</a></li>
</ul></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">699.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Mar 2012 19:36:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve Microsoft Office 2010 Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-microsoft-office-2010-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-microsoft-office-2010-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_office2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give user in-depth information on the Microsoft Office software suite.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on the Microsoft Office software suite. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/access-2010-complete-bundle.html">Access 2010 Bundle</a></li>
<li><a href="/outlook-2010-complete-bundle.html">Outlook 2010 Bundle</a></li>
<li><a href="/word-2010-complete-bundle.html">Word 2010 Bundle</a></li>
<li><a href="/excel-2010-advanced.html">Excel 2010 Bundle</a></li>
<li><a href="/introduction-to-sharepoint-2010.html">Introduction to SharePoint 2010</a></li>
</ul></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Mar 2012 20:08:05 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve Adobe Creative Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-adobe-creative-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-adobe-creative-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_adobe_creative_2012_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on the Adobe software suite.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on the Adobe software suite. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/photoshop-cs5-basics.html">Photoshop CS5 Basics</a></li>
<li><a href="/acrobat-9-introduction.html">Acrobat 9 - Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="/captivate-4-introduction.html">Captivate CS4 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="/captivate-4-advanced.html">Captivate CS4 Advanced</a></li>
<li><a href="/dreamweaver-cs4-introduction.html">Dreamweaver CS4 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="/illustrator-cs4-introduction.html">Illustrator CS4 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="/illustrator-cs5-basics.html">Illustrator CS5 Basics</a></li>
</ul></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">229.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Mar 2012 19:39:05 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Retrieve Social Media Marketing Suite]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-social-media-marketing-suite.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/retrieve-social-media-marketing-suite.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_social_media_marketing2012_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give user in-depth information on the Adobe software suite.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle is an all encompassing training package designed to give users in-depth information on social media marketing. The bundle contains the following cloudDVD titles:
</p>
<ul>
<li><a href="/how-to-build-a-linkedin-page.html">How to Build a LinkedIn Page</a></li>
<li><a href="/how-to-setup-a-twitter-account.html">How to Setup a Twitter Account</a></li>
<li><a href="/how-to-create-a-facebook-advertisement.html">How to Create a Facebook Advertisement</a></li>
<li><a href="/how-to-create-a-facebook-fan-page.html">How to Create a Facebook Fan Page</a></li>
</ul></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 16 Mar 2012 20:18:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inv_2012_vol1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course covers the essentials of part modeling, assembling, and drawing creation in Autodesk Inventor.  Start from 2D sketching techniques, then learn how to turn these into 3D features and parts.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course covers the essentials of part modeling, assembling, and drawing creation in Autodesk Inventor.  Start from 2D sketching techniques, then learn how to turn these into 3D features and parts.  Then learn how to build assemblies with multiple parts and track design data with the Bill of Materials.  Finally, learn how to efficiently create documentation for all your parts and assemblies.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Information Center</li>
<li>Ribbon Menu</li>
<li>Browser</li>
<li>Graphics Window</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Document Settings
<ul>
<li>Units</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parametrics Overview</li>
<li>Sketching in Parts
<ul>
<li>Sketching Geometry</li>
<li>Parameters and Equations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modeling Features
<ul>
<li>Base Features - Extrude</li>
<li>Base Features - Revolve</li>
<li>Secondary Features</li>
<li>Pick and Place Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Work Features
<ul>
<li>Work Points</li>
<li>Work Axes</li>
<li>Work Planes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Complex Parts
<ul>
<li>Reordering Features</li>
<li>Splitting</li>
<li>Shell</li>
<li>Sketch Doctor</li>
<li>Coordinate Systems</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>iProperties</li>
</ul>
<div class="toc">
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Placing Views
<ul>
<li>View Creation Tools</li>
<li>View Modification Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Annotation
<ul>
<li>Dimension Types</li>
<li>Feature Notes</li>
<li>Text Notes</li>
<li>Symbols</li>
<li>Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles and Standards
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customizing Standards</li>
<li>Setting Object Defaults</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Page Setup and Customization
<ul>
<li>Paper Setup</li>
<li>Borders</li>
<li>Title Blocks</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Three - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction to the Sheet Metal Environment</li>
<li>Base Features
<ul>
<li>Face</li>
<li>Contour Flange</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Secondary Flanges
<ul>
<li>Flanges</li>
<li>Contour Flanges</li>
<li>Faces as Secondary Features</li>
<li>Bends</li>
<li>Cuts and Punches</li>
<li>Rounds</li>
<li>Chamfers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Features
<ul>
<li>Lofted Flanges</li>
<li>Rips</li>
<li>Seams</li>
<li>Unfold/Refold</li>
<li>Converting Standard Parts to Sheet Metal</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Annotation
<ul>
<li>Flat Patterns</li>
<li>Bend Annotations</li>
<li>Punch Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Styles
<ul>
<li>Create Custom Styles</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Rules</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Unfold</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Four - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Project Files</li>
<li>Placing Components</li>
<li>Constraints
<ul>
<li>Basic Constraints</li>
<li>Advanced Constraints</li>
<li>Assemble Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Assemblies
<ul>
<li>Moving Components</li>
<li>Rotating Components</li>
<li>Component Display</li>
<li>Assembly Modeling Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Analysis Tools
<ul>
<li>Measurement Tools</li>
<li>Interference</li>
<li>Contact Solver</li>
<li>Drive Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Representations
<ul>
<li>Design View Representations</li>
<li>Positional Representations</li>
<li>Level of Detail Representations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Bill of Materials
<ul>
<li>Model Data Tab</li>
<li>Structured Tab</li>
<li>Parts Only Tab</li>
<li>BOM Structures</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:29:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk 3D Studio Max Design Essentials 2012]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-3d-studio-max-design-essentials-2012.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-3d-studio-max-design-essentials-2012.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/s/t/store_cvr_3ds_design_2012_essen.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD will go over 3D modeling, animation, rendering, and compositing tools that will help you quickly and easily start increasing your production. This is a three volume series that goes over all of the essentials when working with Autodesk 3D Studio Max.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD will go over 3D modeling, animation, rendering, and compositing tools that will help you quickly and easily start increasing your production. This is a three volume series that goes over all of the essentials when working with Autodesk 3D Studio Max.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Application Button</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Grids and Selection Tools 
<ul>
<li>Grid and Snaps Settings</li>
<li>Create Tab</li>
<li>Selection Tools</li>
<li>Making Copies of an Object</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Folders</li>
<li>Cloning an Object</li>
<li>Other Selection Tools 
<ul>
<li>Select by Name</li>
<li>Lock Selection</li>
<li>The 'Quad' Context Menu</li>
<li>Selection Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Coordinates</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume 2 - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating a Ceiling Grid</li>
<li>Creating a Counter Top 
<ul>
<li>Boolean Tool</li>
<li>Save</li>
<li>Reduce Faces</li>
<li>Extrude Faces</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Soffit 
<ul>
<li>Adjusting Anchor Point</li>
<li>Building Walls</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating the Splash Guard 
<ul>
<li>Editing a Wall</li>
<li>Adjusting a Pivot Point</li>
<li>Using the Boolean Compound Object Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Modifiers</li>
<li>Finishing the 'Service Art'</li>
<li>Creating the Floor and Ceiling</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume 3 - Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cameras 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Camera</li>
<li>Moving and Aiming a Camera</li>
<li>Setting a Viewport to a Camera</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Lighting 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Light</li>
<li>Modify Lights</li>
<li>Light Lister</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Materials 
<ul>
<li>Material Editor</li>
<li>Adding Materials to the Editor</li>
<li>Preview Object Type</li>
<li>Material Parameters</li>
<li>Creating a Material from Scratch</li>
<li>Transparency in Materials</li>
<li>Multi-Material Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>External Files</li>
<li>Rendering Your Model
<ul>
<li>Render Engine Setup</li>
<li>Rendering the Model</li>
<li>Setting up Animation</li>
<li>Outputting and Saving the Animation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:10:56 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Electrical 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sm_acad_electrical_2012_learning.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course demonstrations how to use the AutoCAD Electrical User Interface, how to create and manage projects and their related drawings, how to create schematic and ladder diagrams, </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course demonstrations how to use the AutoCAD Electrical User Interface, how to create and manage projects and their related drawings, how to create schematic and ladder diagrams, how to create and insert schematic and panel layout symbols and circuits, how to select or add catalog content for your symbols, how to insert and edit source/ destination signals, how to insert and edit wire numbers, how to run and export reports and how to use the terminal strip editor.</p>
<div class="toc">
<p>Table of Contents:</p>
<ul>
<li>Navigating the Interface
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Project Manager</li>
<li>Drawing Window</li>
<li>Using F2</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Workflow
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Project Manager</li>
<li>Creating a New Project</li>
<li>Creating a New Drawing</li>
<li>Add Drawings</li>
<li>Title Block Update</li>
<li>Schematics</li>
<li>Catalog Lookup</li>
<li>Associations</li>
<li>Panel Layout</li>
<li>Reports Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Copying a Project
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Projects Tab</li>
<li>Copying Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wire Layers
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Wire Layers</li>
<li>Properties</li>
<li>Creating a Ladder</li>
<li>Converting Wire Layer Type</li>
<li>Insert Components</li>
<li>Wire Numbers</li>
<li>Wire Connections</li>
<li>Source/Destination</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schematic Components
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Multiple Bus</li>
<li>Three Phase Motor</li>
<li>Parent/Child Relationship</li>
<li>Terminals</li>
<li>Edit Jumper</li>
<li>Create a Wire Layer for Wire Jumpers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schematic Editing
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Scoot</li>
<li>Deleting Components</li>
<li>Edit Coils</li>
<li>Copy Information</li>
<li>Swap/Update Block</li>
<li>Change Tagging Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Panel Layouts
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating a Panel</li>
<li>Inserting Schematics</li>
<li>Inserting Terminals</li>
<li>Annotation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:56:36 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Electrical 2012 Advanced Productivity]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2012-advanced-productivity.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2012-advanced-productivity.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sm_acad_electrical_2012_productivity.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course is designed to teach users advanced productivity enhancing tools available in AutoCAD Electrical to improve electrical project design and management processes. After completing this guide, users</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to teach users advanced productivity enhancing tools available in AutoCAD Electrical to improve electrical project design and management processes. After completing this guide, users will have a good understanding of: settings and configurations in AutoCAD Electric, project properties, drawing properties, schematic wiring, components, manipulating components, reporting, and DIN rails and Terminal Strip Editor.</p>
<div class="toc">
<p>Table of Contents:</p>
<ul>
<li>Settings Configuration
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create and Change Wire Layers</li>
<li>Reports</li>
<li>Drawing Properties</li>
<li>Templates</li>
<li>Revise Ladder</li>
<li>Pathing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Custom Components
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Symbol Building</li>
<li>Block Editor</li>
<li>Link Lines</li>
<li>Make Child Symbol and Component</li>
<li>Creating the Footprint</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Icon Menu Wizard
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Add Push Buttons and Symbols</li>
<li>Inserting Buttons</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Custom Data
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Catalog Information</li>
<li>Terminals</li>
<li>Mapping Title Blocks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Automation Tools
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Import/Export Tab</li>
<li>Reports</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Vault Integration
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Add a Folder</li>
<li>Checking In/Out</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PLC Modules
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create a Module</li>
<li>Insert Module</li>
<li>Specify Components</li>
<li>Create Drawings from Excel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Productivity Tools
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Setup Wire Annotation</li>
<li>Fan In/Out</li>
<li>Run a Report</li>
<li>Convert Wire Types</li>
<li>Circuit Builder</li>
<li>Peer to Peer</li>
<li>One Line Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:55:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Architecture 2012: First Steps Towards Implementation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2012-first-steps-towards-implementation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2012-first-steps-towards-implementation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/a/c/acadarch12_1ststeps_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course will demonstrate the initial tools needed to implement AutoCAD Architecture 2012 in your first project. You will learn how to create Walls, Doors, Windows, and Schedules using AEC commands</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will demonstrate the initial tools needed to implement AutoCAD Architecture 2012 in your first project. You will learn how to create Walls, Doors, Windows, and Schedules using AEC commands helping you be more proficient in your everyday workflow. Basic AutoCAD knowledge is a prerequisite for taking this course.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Wall Construction 
<ul>
<li>Adding Walls</li>
<li>Modifying Walls</li>
<li>Curtain Walls</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Openings 
<ul>
<li>Doors</li>
<li>Windows</li>
<li>Door and Window Assemblies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schedules 
<ul>
<li>Tagging Objects</li>
<li>Renumber Data Tool</li>
<li>Adding Schedules</li>
<li>Modifying Schedules</li>
<li>Scheduling External Reference Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Bonus Material 
<ul>
<li>Window Tag Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">39.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:03:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk Showcase 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-showcase-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-showcase-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_showcase2012_essen_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course will teach how to navigate the user interface and import &amp; adjust geometry. Other topics covered include preparing a design for presentation, assigning materials and decals.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will teach how to navigate the user interface and import &amp; adjust geometry. Other topics covered include preparing a design for presentation, assigning materials and decals. Different methods will be explored such as creating alternatives, shots, visual styles and behaviors. This course also includes a proof of completion exams that verifies your understanding of the course material.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Getting Started With Showcase 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Workflow Overview</li>
<li>Interface Layout And Navigation</li>
<li>Importing And Adjusting Imported Geometry</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preparing The Design 
<ul>
<li>Establishing And Using Environments</li>
<li>Controlling Lights And Shadows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Presenting The Design 
<ul>
<li>Creating Alternative Lineups</li>
<li>Animating The Viewing Of The Design</li>
<li>Presentation Mode</li>
<li>Output Options</li>
<li>Visual Styles And Options</li>
<li>Custom Environment Creation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:13:56 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Visio 2010 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/visio-2010-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/visio-2010-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_viso10_essent_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course introduces the viewer to the essentials of Microsoft Visio 2010. The primary focus is to get acquainted with creating the different diagrams using the stencils and templates. Once completed, the viewer will be proficient with this application.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the viewer to the essentials of Microsoft Visio 2010. The primary focus is to get acquainted with creating the different diagrams using the stencils and templates. Once completed, the viewer will be proficient with this application.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Overview of Visio
<ul>
<li>Shape data properties - Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Opening Vision and versions</li>
<li>Visio Templates Overview
<ul>
<li>General Tab</li>
<li>Map zone floor plan</li>
<li>Networking Template</li>
<li>Scheduling Template</li>
<li>Gnatt Chart Template</li>
<li>PERT Chart Template</li>
<li>Timelines Template</li>
<li>Software and Database Tempalte</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>New Interface Changes in 2010</li>
<li>Data Tab</li>
<li>Review Tab</li>
<li>View Tab</li>
<li>Developer Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Shape Data and Link External Data
<ul>
<li>Connecting Shapes</li>
<li>Connection Points</li>
<li>Scenario 1: Managing Processes
<ul>
<li>Shape Layout Changes</li>
<li>Changing Effects</li>
<li>Shape Data Properties</li>
<li>Add Background</li>
<li>Add Border and Titles</li>
<li>Insert Logo</li>
<li>Hyperlink Workflow</li>
<li>Data Graphics</li>
<li>Importing from External Source and Linking</li>
<li>Changes to Data</li>
<li>Reporting</li>
<li>How to Share Information</li>
<li>Checking and Validating</li>
<li>Creating Custom Stencils</li>
<li>Insert Container</li>
<li>Selecting Other Shapes</li>
<li>Auto-Align and Spacing</li>
<li>Creating a Timeline</li>
<li>Expanded Timeline</li>
<li>Exporting the Timline to MS Project</li>
<li>Switching Views in MS Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:25:02 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Access]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_trimble_access.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Access. You are provided detail instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Access with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from</li> 
<li>an OPUS Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy from OPUS Rapid Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from</li>
<li>an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tips and Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li>
<li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li>
<li>from Point Averaging</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install The Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Access
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from 
<li>Trimble Access to the Office Computer</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">69.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:05:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Access for NC Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access-for-nc-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access-for-nc-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_trimbleaccess_ncboardrules.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Access. You are provided detail instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Access with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules and Positional Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Part 3: National Standard for Spatial Data Accuracy (NSSDA)</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy/Session Objectives 
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements 
<ul>
<li>Using the Spreadhseet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Point Averaging</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FAQ's</li>
<li>Positional Accuracy Test</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install The Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Access
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from 
<li>Trimble Access to the Office Computer</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">79.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:08:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Survey Controller for GA Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller-for-ga-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller-for-ga-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_surveycontroller_gaboardrules.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS/GNSS.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS/GNSS. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Survey Controller. You are provided detail instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Survey Controller with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>Georgia Board Rules</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK and Network </li>
<li>RTK Measurements</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy </li>
<li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li> 
<li>from Point Averaging</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install the Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style Sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Survey Controller
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from Trimble 
<li>Survey Controller to the Office Computer
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">59.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:11:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Survey Controller]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_trimble_surveycontroller.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Survey Controller. You are provided detail instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Survey Controller with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from</li> 
<li>an OPUS Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy from OPUS Rapid Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from</li>
<li>an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tips and Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li>
<li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li>
<li>from Point Averaging</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install the Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style Sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Survey Controller
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from Trimble 
<li>Survey Controller to the Office Computer
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">69.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:09:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Access for GA Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access-for-ga-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-access-for-ga-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_trimbleaccess_gaboardrules.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS/GNSS.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS/GNSS. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Access. You are provided detail instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Access with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>Georgia Board Rules</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK and Network </li>
<li>RTK Measurements</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy </li>
<li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li> 
<li>from Point Averaging</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two - Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install The Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Access
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from 
<li>Trimble Access to the Office Computer</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">59.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:07:02 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy Bundle in Survey Controller for NC Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller-for-nc-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-bundle-in-survey-controller-for-nc-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bundle_cpa_surveycontroller_ncboardrules.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision. In this cloud DVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision. In this cloudDVD bundle you will learn the formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy. You will learn how to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS Measurements. As part of this bundle you get the Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet and the Positional Accuracy style sheet for Trimble Survey Controller. You are provided detailed instruction how the spreadsheet works so that it can modified along with how to install the style sheet in Survey Controller with workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it the office computer. As a bonus you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File Generator.
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume One Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules and Positional Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Part 3: National Standard for Spatial Data Accuracy (NSSDA)</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy/Session Objectives 
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements 
<ul>
<li>Using the Spreadhseet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Point Averaging</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FAQ's</li>
<li>Positional Accuracy Test</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume Two Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install the Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style Sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Survey Controller
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from Trimble 
<li>Survey Controller to the Office Computer
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">79.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:12:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/5/2/525517196_generated.png" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In GNSS Surveying the number one question that is asked is how to compute a closure. Positional Accuracy can be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision or closure. In this cloud DVD you will learn the formulas that are using in computing positional accuracy. How to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS measurements. You will be provided a Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet that will be discussed in detail on how it works so that it can be modified. To qualify for the PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test. Upon successful completion of the test you will get a certificate of completion.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy from OPUS Rapid Static Report
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tips and Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from Point Averaging</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:04:00 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy in Trimble Survey Controller]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-in-trimble-survey-controller.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-in-trimble-survey-controller.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/1/6/160816608_generated.png" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Positional Accuracy style sheet is an app that allows users to compute positional accuracy in Trimble Survey Controller on their data collector.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Positional Accuracy style sheet is an app that allows users to compute positional accuracy in Trimble Survey Controller on their data collector. This cloud DVD allows you to download the Positional Accuracy style sheet and provides you with an instructional video that covers installation, workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it to the office computer. Also, you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install the Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style Sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Survey Controller
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from Trimble 
<li>Survey Controller to the Office Computer
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:02:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy in Trimble Access]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-in-trimble-access.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-in-trimble-access.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/8/6/867093820_generated.png" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Positional Accuracy style sheet is an app that allows users to compute positional accuracy in Trimble Access software on their data collector.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Positional Accuracy style sheet is an app that allows users to compute positional accuracy in Trimble Access software on their data collector. This cloud DVD allows you to download the Positional Accuracy style sheet and provides you with an instructional video that covers installation, workflow scenarios, creating a positional accuracy report on the data collector and downloading it to the office computer. Also, you will learn how to use the style sheet to create a positional accuracy report on the office computer using the ASCII File generator.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>Download and Install The Style Sheet
<ul>
<li>Download the Style sheet</li>
<li>Install the Style Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldwork Scenarios
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with the Style Sheet 
<li>in Trimble Access
<ul>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with a Known Point</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy with Averaged Observations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring the Positional Accuracy Report from 
<li>Trimble Access to the Office Computer</li>
<li>Computing Positional Accuracy using the Style Sheet 
<li>and the ASCII File Generator</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:00:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk Quantity Takeoff 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-quantity-takeoff-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-quantity-takeoff-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_qtytakeoff12_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk Quantity Takeoff 2012 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Autodesk Quantity Takeoff Essentials Training will help the user gain an understanding of the basic functions of the Quantity Takeoff software. This will include introduction to the program, proper workflows, and how to best use the data for cost analysis. We cover creating a project, working with catalogs, performing takeoffs with 3D model files, 2D files, and image files. This cloudDVD also includes a proof of completion exam.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating a Project</li>
<li>Exploring QTO</li>
<li>Organizing Your Project 
<ul>
<li>Importing and Organizing Documents</li>
<li>Organizing Takeoff Groups and Items</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Takeoff Items 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Takeoff Item</li>
<li>Creating an Assembly</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Performing Quantity Takeoff 
<ul>
<li>Understanding Takeoff Methods</li>
<li>Specifying Sheet Scale</li>
<li>Using Automatic Takoff Tools 
<ul>
<li>Model Takeoff</li>
<li>Search Takeoff</li>
<li>Single-click Takeoff</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Manual Takeoff Tools 
<ul>
<li>Count Takeoff</li>
<li>Linear Takeoff</li>
<li>Area Takeoff</li>
<li>Markups</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Viewing and Validating Takeoff Data</li>
<li>Creating and Viewing Reports 
<ul>
<li>Creating Custom Reports</li>
<li>Running a Recent Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting Takeoff Data</li>
<li>Publishing a Project to DWF</li>
<li>Reference Files</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:12:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Navisworks Manage 2012: Concepts and Coordination]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-manage-2012-concepts-and-coordination.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-manage-2012-concepts-and-coordination.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_navisworksmng2012cc_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this course we demonstrate the Concepts of the Autodesk&reg; NavisWorks&reg; Manage 2012 features, you will learn how to open, review, and run object-interference checks on 3D models.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course we demonstrate the Concepts of the Autodesk&reg; NavisWorks&reg; Manage 2012 features, you will learn how to open, review, and run object-interference checks on 3D models. Also, how to link to task-scheduling files and create 4D construction simulations. This course provides you with the skills and knowledge to use NavisWorks 2012 effectively. This course also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Interface Overview</li>
<li>Open And Append Files</li>
<li>Saving And Navigation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Core Concepts 
<ul>
<li>Selection Tree And Selecting Objects</li>
<li>Hiding Objects And Overriding Materials</li>
<li>Object Properties</li>
<li>Measuring And Moving Objects</li>
<li>Selection And Search Sets</li>
<li>Viewpoints</li>
<li>Comments And Redlining</li>
<li>Sectioning</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Clash Detective 
<ul>
<li>Overview Of Select Tab For Executive Clash Tests</li>
<li>Create And Save Batches Of Clash Tests</li>
<li>Clash Rules Overview</li>
<li>Clash Results</li>
<li>Clash Test Reporting</li>
<li>Audit Checks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>TimeLiner 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Tasks</li>
<li>Import Tasks From External Source</li>
<li>Configuring And Defining A Simulation</li>
<li>Simulation Export</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:43:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Data Sharing]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-data-sharing.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-data-sharing.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_datashare_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>There are many different ways to share entity and object data in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. This cloudDVD offers over an hour of instruction on how to create AutoCAD Civil 3D reference objects from data shortcuts.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>There are many different ways to share entity and object data in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. This cloudDVD offers over an hour of instruction on how to create AutoCAD Civil 3D reference objects from data shortcuts. The session begins with a high level overview of data sharing capabilities and strategies. The instructor then uses a real life subdivision to demonstrate techniques for developing the drawing and data architecture that allows changes to propagate through dependent drawings.This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 - Data Sharing
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Welcome and Introduction</li>
<li>Agenda and Strategies</li>
<li>Data Sharing Tools</li>
<li>Drawing and Data Architecture</li>
<li>Data Sharing Schematic</li>
<li>Data Sharing Demonstration</li>
<li>Set Working Folder</li>
<li>Data Shortcut Project Folder</li>
<li>Create Data Shortcut for Surface</li>
<li>Create Reference Object for Surface</li>
<li>Reference Object Updates</li>
<li>Data Shortcut Project</li>
<li>Alignment Data Shortcuts</li>
<li>Alignment Reference Objects</li>
<li>Surface Profiles from Surface Reference</li>
<li>Profile Data Shortcut</li>
<li>Alignment Profile and Surface Reference Objects</li>
<li>Create Corridor Model and Surfaces</li>
<li>Sample Lines and Section Views</li>
<li>Production Drawings Open and show note</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:30:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Grading and Feature Lines]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-grading-feature-lines.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-grading-feature-lines.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_grading_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use Feature Lines and Grading Objects, and apply them to create an actual pond design in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. This extensive session delves into the detail on creating, editing, managing, displaying and labeling feature lines and grading objects.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use Feature Lines and Grading Objects, and apply them to create an actual pond design in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. This extensive session delves into the detail on creating, editing, managing, displaying and labeling feature lines and grading objects. The instructor uses a storm water storage pond example to convey the techniques, and offers discussion on general grading strategies, high level overview concepts and calculating earthworks volumes. The session ends with a lesson on how to calculate storage volumes for different water surface elevations. This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 - Grading and Feature Lines
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Grading Strategies</li>
<li>Sites and Topology</li>
<li>Prepare Large Surface</li>
<li>Feature Line Creation Methods</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Elevations</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Geometry</li>
<li>Feature Line Styles</li>
<li>Feature Line Labels</li>
<li>Initialize Pond Grading</li>
<li>Grading Group</li>
<li>Set Target Surface</li>
<li>Create Grading Objects</li>
<li>Grading Object Styles</li>
<li>Calculate Volumes</li>
<li>Storage Volumes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:33:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Parcels]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-parcels.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-parcels.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_parcels_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The "Civil 3D 2012 Parcels" cloudDVD goes deeper into the parcel feature in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Using live recorded lectures we demonstrate and discuss how you can use the parcel tools to subdivided lots as well as use them for other land features such as drainage area, soil types, or contamination areas.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The "Civil 3D 2012 Parcels" cloudDVD goes deeper into the parcel feature in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Using live recorded lectures we demonstrate and discuss how you can use the parcel tools to subdivided lots as well as use them for other land features such as drainage area, soil types, or contamination areas. This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 - Parcels
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Overview</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Parcels Overview</li>
<li>Parcels in UI</li>
<li>Sites and Topology</li>
<li>Define Boundary Parcel</li>
<li>Move Alignment to Site</li>
<li>Create ROW</li>
<li>Parcel Union</li>
<li>Edit Parcel Segments</li>
<li>Parcel Layout Tools</li>
<li>Create Parcels - Minimum Frontage</li>
<li>Create Parcels - Minimum Area</li>
<li>Create Parcels from Objects</li>
<li>Renumber Parcels</li>
<li>Parcels Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Spanning Label</li>
<li>Parcel Reports</li>
<li>Parcel Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:36:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Alignments]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-alignments.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-alignments.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_algnmnts_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This is 90 minutes of instructor led education on horizontal alignment functionality available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Topics of discussion include alignments in the user interface, compound curve, reverse curve, spirals, fixed floating and free entities, edit geometry, design criteria and command settings.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This is 90 minutes of instructor led education on horizontal alignment functionality available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012. Topics of discussion include alignments in the user interface, compound curve, reverse curve, spirals, fixed floating and free entities, edit geometry, design criteria and command settings.  This cloudDVD complements the "Civil 3D 2012 Essentials" cloudDVD. This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 - New Alignment Features
<ul>
<li>New Alignment Features</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
<li>Fixed Floating and Free Entities</li>
<li>Alignment Constraint Parameters</li>
<li>Alignment Tangency Constraints</li>
<li>Implied Tangency Constraint Swapping</li>
<li>Solve for PI</li>
<li>PI Short Tangent Extensions</li>
<li>Alignments and LandXML</li>
<li>Curve Midpoint Label</li>
<li>Navigate to Geometry</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Alignments in Civil 3D</li>
<li>Alignments in the User Interface</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools Overview</li>
<li>Create Tangents and Add Curves</li>
<li>Create Geometry - Design Criteria</li>
<li>Fixed Floating and Free Entities</li>
<li>Fixed Curve and Free Curve</li>
<li>Edit Geometry - Graphical</li>
<li>Edit Geometry - Data</li>
<li>Compound Curve</li>
<li>Reverse Curve</li>
<li>Station Control</li>
<li>Design Criteria and Superelevation</li>
<li>Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Alignment Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:29:35 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Surfaces]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-surfaces.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-surfaces.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_surface_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2012 Surfaces teaches you how to create surfaces in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012.  Learn strategies for surface creation, and sit in on a discussion that addresses basic surface concepts such as point groups and breakline definition.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Civil 3D 2012 Surfaces teaches you how to create surfaces in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012.  Learn strategies for surface creation, and sit in on a discussion that addresses basic surface concepts such as point groups and breakline definition. This live instructor lead presentation offers a full 60 minutes of in-depth coverage on how to optimize your surface modeling process using a real world example. This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 Surfaces
<ul>
<li>New Surface Features</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
<li>Surface Level of Detail</li>
<li>Analysis with Datum Elevation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Surface Overview</li>
<li>Surface and the UI</li>
<li>Point Groups</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Replace Point Group</li>
<li>Breakline Discussion</li>
<li>Other Surface Definition Items</li>
<li>Surface Boundary</li>
<li>Extract Objects</li>
<li>Remove Deleted Dependent Objects</li>
<li>Drawing Objects and Edits</li>
<li>Commands on Contextual Tab</li>
<li>Surface Styles</li>
<li>Surface Label Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:45:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Points]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-points.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-points.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_pnts_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 cloudDVD you learn how to create, edit, display and manage point objects.  </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 cloudDVD you learn how to create, edit, display and manage point objects.    This cloudDVD also has a corresponding Proof of Completion cloudDVD, which can be used to test your knowledge on what you learned.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D 2012 Points - Updates
<ul>
<li>New Features</li>
<li>Proof of Completion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction and All Videos</li>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Points Menu</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
<li>Create Ground Data Panel</li>
<li>Points Contextual Menu</li>
<li>Points in Prospector</li>
<li>Column Management</li>
<li>Right Click Menu</li>
<li>Points in Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Points
<ul>
<li>Interface Review</li>
<li>Import Points From File</li>
<li>Points in Prospector</li>
<li>Point File Formats</li>
<li>Point Creation Settings</li>
<li>Convert Land Desktop Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Styles
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Review Point Styles</li>
<li>Apply Point Styles</li>
<li>Default Point Style</li>
<li>Cross "X" Point Style</li>
<li>Water Valve Point Style</li>
<li>Symbol Scaling and Orientation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Label Styles
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Apply Point Label Styles</li>
<li>Create Elevation Only</li>
<li>Create Num Elev Desc</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Description Keys
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Enable Description Keys</li>
<li>Create a description key</li>
<li>Apply Description Keys</li>
<li>Description Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Groups
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Update Point Group Definitions</li>
<li>Point Group by Description</li>
<li>Point Group by Other Point Groups</li>
<li>Point Group by Exclusion Criteria</li>
<li>Case Sensitivity Matching</li>
<li>Style Priority</li>
<li>Point Group Sort Order</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Grips
<ul>
<li>Drag Point</li>
<li>Drag Label</li>
<li>Reset Point Label</li>
<li>Toggle Sub-ItemGrips</li>
<li>Rotate Point Grip</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Cloud
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create a Point Cloud</li>
<li>Review Point Cloud</li>
<li>Point Cloud Styles</li>
<li>Point Cloud Visualization</li>
<li>Create a Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transparent Commands
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Point Number</li>
<li>Point Object</li>
<li>Northing and Easting</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Tables
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create Point Table</li>
<li>Point Table Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Command Settings
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Default Point Layer</li>
<li>Default Point Style</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:40:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Accelerating Lean Six Sigma Results: How to Achieve Improvement Excellence (TM) in the New Economy]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/accelerating-lean-six-sigma-results-how-to-achieve-improvement-excellence-sup-tm-sup-in-the-new-economy.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/accelerating-lean-six-sigma-results-how-to-achieve-improvement-excellence-sup-tm-sup-in-the-new-economy.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sm_accelerate_6sigma.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>As all organizations emerge from the 2008 meltdown and slow recovery, too many leaders remain stuck in short-term, reactionary survival mode.  As a consequence, too many organizations have placed a freeze on improvement when they need it the most.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>As all organizations emerge from the 2008 meltdown and slow recovery, too many leaders remain stuck in short-term, reactionary survival mode.  As a consequence, too many organizations have placed a freeze on improvement when they need it the most.  Today over 80 % of Lean Six Sigma deployments are failing, but the need and opportunities for improvement are higher than any time in history.  This cloudDVD provides practical guidance for accelerating strategic improvement initiatives in any organization, and particularly in industries that have been insulated from improvement in the past.  The author also provides a proven roadmap for breakthrough improvement in the new economy that is based on a combined strategy of back-to-basics, innovation, technology, and adaptive improvement.  Public and private corporations, hospitals, financial services, airline and transportation, and federal, state, and local governments all have a huge opportunity to achieve strategic and operating benefits beyond what was thought to be possible.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Improvement: Where are we now?
<ul>
<li>Continuous Improvement</li>
<li>Traditional Improvement</li>
<li>Burton's Law of Continous Improvement</li>
<li>'Toyota Kata'</li>
<li>The Current Dilemma</li>
<li>Essentials of Improvement</li>
<li>The Empty Tub Zone</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Resetting the Improvement Course
<ul>
<li>Improvement Excellence</li>
<li>Simple Physics of Improvement Excellence</li>
<li>Framework of Improvement Excellence</li>
<li>Philosophy of Improvement</li>
<li>Formal Sustaining Infrastructure</li>
<li>Integration of Methodologies</li>
<li>Scalable Lean Six Sigma</li>
<li>How is Scalable Lean Six Sigma Different</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Accelerating Improvement in the New Economy
<ul>
<li>Formal Sustaining Improvement Infrastructure</li>
<li>Enlightened Leadership</li>
<li>Reset Improvement Strategy and Vision</li>
<li>Robust Deployment Planning</li>
<li>Customized Education and Development</li>
<li>Communication</li>
<li>Lead with the Best in Mind</li>
<li>Provide Leveraged Mentoring</li>
<li>DMAIC the Deployment Process</li>
<li>Accelerate Project Paths</li>
<li>Implement the Change</li>
<li>Concurrent Continuous Improvement</li>
<li>Improvement Excellence Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Getting Started - The First 30-60 Day Plan
<ul>
<li>Improvement Excellence</li>
<li>First 30-60 Day Plan
<ul>
<li>Assemble Core Team</li>
<li>Pilot Strategy</li>
<li>Shared Understanding</li>
<li>Assign Activities</li>
<li>Provide Training and Skill</li>
<li>Lessons Learned and 6-12 Month Plan</li>
<li>Implementation Resources</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Personal Lessons</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Appendix</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">39.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:44:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk Maya Essentials]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-maya-essentials.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-maya-essentials.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_template-small.png" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This video will introduce students to the basics of Maya.  Starting with a tour of the user interface, we will then look at creating primitive objects, transforming them, and navigating through 3D space.  Next we will examine the concepts of duplication, pivots, and hierarchy.  Finally, we will tackle a simple project involving polygon modeling.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This video will introduce students to the basics of Maya.  Starting with a tour of the user interface, we will then look at creating primitive objects, transforming them, and navigating through 3D space.  Next we will examine the concepts of duplication, pivots, and hierarchy.  Finally, we will tackle a simple project involving polygon modeling.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Interface</li>
<li>Creating a Primitive Object</li>
<li>Navigating Through 3D Space
<ul>
<li>Perspective and Orthographic Views</li>
<li>Switching Between Viewport Layouts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wireframe and Shaded Views
<ul>
<li>Deleting and Undo</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transforming Objects in the Viewport
<ul>
<li>Move Tool</li>
<li>Changing Values in the Channel Box</li>
<li>Rotate Tool</li>
<li>Scale Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Car Out of Primitives
<ul>
<li>Creating a Polygon Cube for the Car Body</li>
<li>Creating a Polygon Cylinder for the Tire</li>
<li>Duplicating Objects</li>
<li>Framing Selected Objects or All Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Changing Pivots</li>
<li>Creating a Hierarchy
<ul>
<li>Opening the Outliner</li>
<li>Parenting the Tires to the Car Body</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating and working with Project Folders
<ul>
<li>Saving Scene Files</li>
<li>Maya Ascii and Maya Binary File Formats</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modeling a Gear
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Scene</li>
<li>Creating a Polygon Cylinder</li>
<li>Components of Polygonal Objects</li>
<li>Displaying Vertices, Edges, and Faces</li>
<li>Making Changes to Primitive Object Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Extruding Edges and Merging Vertices</li>
<li>Ending</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">25.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:03:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Print Organizer - MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries)]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/print-organizer-microstation-v8i-selectseries.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/print-organizer-microstation-v8i-selectseries.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_envcad_print_org_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Print Organizer has replaced the Batch Print tool for multiple file printing. This cloundDVD will demonstrate the basic Print Organizer Workflow as well as configuration and setup of Print Drivers, Pen Tables, Print Styles, and Named Expressions.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Print Organizer has replaced the Batch Print tool for multiple file printing. This cloundDVD will demonstrate the basic Print Organizer Workflow as well as configuration and setup of Print Drivers, Pen Tables, and Print Styles.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Printing
<ul>
<li>Print Dialog</li>
<li>Print Drivers</li>
<li>Pentables</li>
<li>Print Organizer</li>
<li>Transitioning from Batch Print</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">25.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:48:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Structure 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-structure-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-structure-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitstruc2012essen_bundle.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>After completing this three volume training bundle, you will be able to: set up a new building information model project, work with basic structural elements (columns, walls, beams, slabs, foundations, bracing), create section and detail views.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>After completing this three volume training bundle, you will be able to: set up a new building information model project, work with basic structural elements (columns, walls, beams, slabs, foundations, bracing), create section and detail views. This training bundle also includes a proof of completion exam cloudDVD.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Intro And Foundation Elements</li>
<li>What Is Building Information Modeling?
<ul>
<li>BIM Concepts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Interface
<ul>
<li>Recent Files</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>New Project</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Name Of File</li>
<li>Communication Center</li>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Project Browser</li>
<li>Properties Palette</li>
<li>View/Work Area</li>
<li>View Control Bar</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Save</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Level Lines And Grid Lines
<ul>
<li>Level Lines</li>
<li>Grid Lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Foundation Elements
<ul>
<li>Walls And Wall Footings</li>
<li>Pilasters And Piers</li>
<li>Floors (Slab On Grade)</li>
<li>View Range</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Superstructure Modeling</li>
<li>Structural Columns
<ul>
<li>Placing Structural Columns</li>
<li>Placing Multiple Structural Columns</li>
<li>Roof Columns</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Analytical Models</li>
<li>Structural Beams</li>
<li>Framing Element Properties</li>
<li>On Grid Command</li>
<li>Beam Systems</li>
<li>Sketching a Beam System</li>
<li>Floors (Slab on Metal Deck)
<ul>
<li>Floor Types</li>
<li>Floor Edge Conditions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Beam Coping Tool</li>
<li>View Types
<ul>
<li>Building Sections</li>
<li>Wall Sections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Copy/Paste
<ul>
<li>Filtering Element Selections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sloped Framing
<ul>
<li>Start/End Attachment Property</li>
<li>Beam Systems</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sloped Floors
<ul>
<li>Shape Editing</li>
<li>Edge/Slope Display</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Shaft Openings</li>
<li>Framing Elevations</li>
<li>Braced Frames
<ul>
<li>Braced Frames in Plan View</li>
<li>Structural Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Moment Frames</li>
<li>3D View Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Dimensioning Tools
<ul>
<li>Dimension Text</li>
<li>Spot Elevation</li>
<li>Spot Coordinate</li>
<li>Spot Slope</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tags and Tag All Method</li>
<li>Beam Annotations</li>
<li>Symbols</li>
<li>Text</li>
<li>Drafting Views</li>
<li>Detail Lines</li>
<li>Detail Components</li>
<li>Repeating Details</li>
<li>Regions</li>
<li>Import CAD Details</li>
<li>Insert Drafting Views From Library</li>
<li>Graphical Column Schedule</li>
<li>Schedules / Quantities</li>
<li>Sheets</li>
<li>Drawing Lists</li>
<li>Printing</li>
<li>Outro</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:14:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries) Fundamentals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-selectseries-fundamentals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-selectseries-fundamentals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/8/v8i_store_cvr.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Welcome to MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries) Fundamental training. This 18 chapter is based on our 3-day training class that focuses on all the essential tools to achieve MicroStation mastery. The Civil Edition contains realistic civil engineering lab examples to complement the reference material.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Welcome to MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries) Fundamental training. This 18 chapter is based on our 3-day training class that focuses on all the essential tools to achieve MicroStation mastery. The Civil Edition contains realistic civil engineering lab examples to complement the reference material. Civil discipline readers can now enjoy a self-paced learning environment with industry-praised authoring. Each cloudDVD includes a dataset with civil engineering examples.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume I Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>MicroStation Basics
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>MicroStation Basics</li>
<li>Starting MicroStation</li>
<li>MicroStation Manager</li>
<li>Saving and Closing Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The MicroStation Graphics Environment
<ul>
<li>MicroStation Interface</li>
<li>MicroStation Tasks</li>
<li>MicroStation Dialogs</li>
<li>MicroStation Mouse Mechanics</li>
<li>Key-in Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Viewing Your Drawing
<ul>
<li>Views</li>
<li>View Attributes</li>
<li>Saved Views</li>
<li>Clip Volume - Clip Mask</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Basics
<ul>
<li>Workflow Basics</li>
<li>Linear Task</li>
<li>Circle Task</li>
<li>Polygons Task</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Locks and Snapping
<ul>
<li>Locks</li>
<li>Snaps</li>
<li>Snap Mode Button Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>AccuDraw
<ul>
<li>AccuDraw Basics</li>
<li>Working with AccuDraw - Mailbox Lab</li>
<li>Working with AccuDraw - Parcel lab</li>
<li>AccuDraw Shortcut Keys Open and show note</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume II Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Modify and Manipulate
<ul>
<li>Manipulate Toolbox</li>
<li>Manipulate Toolbox Lab</li>
<li>Modify Toolbox</li>
<li>Modify Toolbox Lab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Element Selection
<ul>
<li>Element Selection Tool</li>
<li>Element Selection Tool Lab</li>
<li>Fences</li>
<li>Fences Lab</li>
<li>Select by Attributes</li>
<li>Select by Attributes Lab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Complex Elements and Grouping
<ul>
<li>What is a Complex Element?</li>
<li>Creating Complex Elements</li>
<li>Create Region</li>
<li>Group Hole</li>
<li>Drop Element</li>
<li>Quickset and Displayset</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Levels
<ul>
<li>Active Level</li>
<li>Level Manager</li>
<li>Level Display Dialog</li>
<li>Level Filters</li>
<li>Change Element Attributes Toolbox</li>
<li>Element Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotating Drawings
<ul>
<li>Text Styles</li>
<li>Place Text</li>
<li>Word Processor Dialog</li>
<li>Text Fields</li>
<li>Inserting Symbols</li>
<li>Text Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Models
<ul>
<li>Compare DGN to XLSX</li>
<li>Design Model</li>
<li>Sheet Model</li>
<li>Drawing Model</li>
<li>Models Lab</li>
<li>Models Dialog</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume III Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Cells
<ul>
<li>Types of Cells - Graphic and Point</li>
<li>Cell Library</li>
<li>Cells Toolbox</li>
<li>Create a Cell</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Patterning and Hatching
<ul>
<li>Hatch and Cross Hatch</li>
<li>Pattern Area</li>
<li>Pattern Toolbox</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensioning
<ul>
<li>Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Linear Dimensioning</li>
<li>Element Dimensioning</li>
<li>Angular Dimensioning</li>
<li>Working with Dimensions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Measuring
<ul>
<li>Measure Distance</li>
<li>Measure Toolbox</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Referencing
<ul>
<li>Reference Dialog</li>
<li>Attach Reference</li>
<li>Workflow Plan and Profile Sheet</li>
<li>Workflow Detail Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing
<ul>
<li>Print Dialog</li>
<li>Print Drivers</li>
<li>Pentables</li>
<li>Print Organizer</li>
<li>Transitioning from Batch Print</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:38:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[InRoads Data Acquisition Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inroads-data-acquisition-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inroads-data-acquisition-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sm_ec_data_acq.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle contains both the InRoads Data Acquisition cloudDVD and the InRoads TechNotes cloudDVD. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle contains both the InRoads Data Acquisition cloudDVD and the InRoads TechNotes cloudDVD.
<br/>InRoads Data Acquisition Description: <br />The Data Acquisition tools provided in the SELECTseries 2 release are a precursor to Bentley Survey. DA provides data capture, editing, and reduction from disparate sources including traditional survey, lidar, GPS, and other sources. DA is used to generate graphics, geometry and surfaces. This course was shot without the use of a green-screen, but still shows the instructor and the software application.
<br/>InRoads TechNotes Description: <br />A collection of tips and tutorials using InRoads Software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>InRoads Data Acquisition Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Data Acquisition&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Resource Files&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Output&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Operation&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Civil Application&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>MicroStation Settings&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Importing data&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Annotation scale&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Layers&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Scale&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Surfaces&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>CAD Graphics&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Surface export&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Acquistion using Lidar Data&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Surface Constraints&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Saving data&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Acquisition using Point Cloud Data&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Creating graphics and saving surfaces</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>InRoads TechNotes Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Surfaces&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Delete Triangles by Filter and Create Exterior Boundary&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Dynamic Update and Editing a Feature Point&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Data Acquisition Tools - Import Lidar Data LAS and Create DTM&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Import Surface from Graphics&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Text Import Wizard &amp; Exterior Boundary Creation&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Site Modeler - Create Pad Design&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Thinning a Surface&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Geometry&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Place Horizontal Alignment - Arc Spiral Arc&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Persistent Annotation with Geometry&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Import Geometry from Graphics&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Merge two InRoads Survey Fieldbook Files&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Rotate Cell Planimetrics&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Using Keyins with InRoads&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drafting&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Plan and Profile Generator - Title Block Data Field&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Display Crossing and Projected features&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Templates&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Element Priorities</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">20.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:27:41 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Mastering Revit Families for Architects and Structural Designers]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/mastering-revit-families-for-architects-and-structural-designers.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/mastering-revit-families-for-architects-and-structural-designers.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_mastering_revit_fam_vanilla.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Explore the various skills and techniques necessary to create, test, and optimize the family creation process. Volume 1 covers the essential skills and techniques. Volume 2 covers advanced skills and techniques.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Explore the various skills and techniques necessary to create, test, and optimize the family creation process. Volume 1 covers the essential skills and techniques. Volume 2 covers advanced skills and techniques.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Introduction to Revit Families
<ul>
<li>Environmental System Families</li>
<li>Datum System Families</li>
<li>Annotation System Families</li>
<li>Model System Families</li>
<li>In-Place System Families</li>
<li>Model Component Families</li>
<li>Annotation Component Families</li>
<li>Categories and Visibility/Graphics</li>
<li>Categories and Scheduling</li>
</ul>
<li>Customizing Existing Families
<ul>
<li>Customizing Existing Annotation System Families</li>
<li>Customizing Existing Model System Families</li>
<li>Customizing Existing Component Families</li>
<li>Customizing Window/Door Component Families</li>
<li>Customizing Existing In-Place Component Families</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working in the Family Editor
<ul>
<li>Add and Edit Reference Planes</li>
<li>Add and Edit Reference Lines</li>
<li>Add and Edit Dimensions</li>
<li>Add and Edit Text</li>
<li>Add and Edit Labels</li>
<li>Adding Masking or Filled Regions</li>
<li>Masking Region</li>
<li>Masking with Model Family</li>
<li>Moving Masking Region</li>
<li>Adding Symbolic Lines</li>
<li>Adding 3D Solid and Void Forms</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defining Detail Levels
<ul>
<li>Detail Levels to 2D Elements</li>
<li>Detail Levels to 3D Elements</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Testing Families for Quality Assurance
<ul>
<li>Loading the Family Into Project</li>
<li>Placing the Instance in Model</li>
<li>Verifying the Subcategory Assigned</li>
<li>Dimensioning the Loaded Family</li>
<li>Parametric Family - New Type</li>
<li>Tagging with Annotation</li>
<li>Tag Family Element</li>
<li>Create Schedule</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Parameters
<ul>
<li>Exploring Parameter Types</li>
<li>Creating Family Parameter</li>
<li>Creating Shared Parameter</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Nesting Families
<ul>
<li>How to Nest into Host Family</li>
<li>Associating Parameters with Host Family</li>
<li>Tagging and Scheduling</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enhancing Parameters
<ul>
<li>Functional Formulas</li>
<li>Conditional Formulas</li>
<li>Array Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Type Catalogs
<ul>
<li>Rules for Catalog</li>
<li>Structure of the Catalog</li>
<li>Creating the Type Catalog</li>
<li>Using Excel for the Catalog</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:38:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 New Features]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-new-features.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-new-features.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d12_newfeat_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 New Features cloudDVD offers in depth explanations of all new features, which are oriented mostly towards transportation design applications and styles management.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 New Features cloudDVD offers in depth explanations of all new features, which are oriented mostly towards transportation design applications and styles management.  Topics of discussion include alignment tangency and parameter constraints, alignment PI solving, and a review of fixed floating and free entities.  The 66 minute lesson on superelevation covers the details of new superelevation functionality where the instructor creates an assembly, and corridor model for a variety of cross sectional and superelevation configurations.  Other lessons address new features such as corridor section editor, label rotation,  and styles management (importing and purging), PI labeling, PI/PVI indexing and Storm and Sanitary analysis.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Introduction</li>
<li>Fixed Floating and Free</li>
<li>Parameter Constraints</li>
<li>Tangency Constraints</li>
<li>Implied Tangency Constraint Swapping</li>
<li>Solve for PI</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Superelevation 
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Introduction</li>
<li>Superelevation Calculations</li>
<li>Axis of Rotation Pivot Methods</li>
<li>Superelevation Help Files</li>
<li>Assembly Properties</li>
<li>Create Undivided Crown Assembly</li>
<li>Create Undivided Planar Assembly</li>
<li>Create Divided Crowned Assembly</li>
<li>Create Divided Planar Assembly</li>
<li>Undivided Crowned Corridor</li>
<li>Divided Planar Corridor</li>
<li>Profile Grade Line Adjustment</li>
<li>Superelevation Error Messages</li>
<li>Superelevation Shoulder Rollover</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridor Section Editor 
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Introduction</li>
<li>Viewport Configuration</li>
<li>Navigate Through Different Sections</li>
<li>View Multiple Baselines</li>
<li>Region Selection and Navigation</li>
<li>Change Region Assembly</li>
<li>Modify Corridor Targets</li>
<li>Add Corridor Regions</li>
<li>Object Display</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles Management 
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Introduction</li>
<li>Import Styles</li>
<li>Purge Styles</li>
<li>Replace Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Other New Features 
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Introduction</li>
<li>Remove and Insert Assemblies</li>
<li>Alignment PI Labels and Indexing</li>
<li>Profile PVI Indexing</li>
<li>Alignments and LandXML</li>
<li>Curve Midpoint Label</li>
<li>Alignment Geometry Navigation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sample Lines - Multiple Baselines</li>
<li>New Features on the WEB</li>
<li>Storm and Sanitary Analysis</li>
<li>Rotating Labels</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:34:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Getting Started With Trimble Business Center 2.50]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-started-with-trimble-business-center-2-50.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-started-with-trimble-business-center-2-50.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sm_getting_started_tbc_250.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course provides the new Trimble Business Center user with the basic tools needed to get started importing, editing, and exporting their survey data.  To qualify for the PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will get a certificate of completion.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course provides the new Trimble Business Center user with the basic tools needed to get started importing, editing, and exporting their survey data.  To qualify for the PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will get a certificate of completion.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Objectives </li>
<li>The Start Page </li>
<li>Customizing Trimble Business Center </li>
<li>Creating Templates </li>
<li>Creating a Project </li>
<li>Importing Data </li>
<li>Viewing Data   
<ul>
<li>Viewing Data Graphically </li>
<li>Spreadsheets, 3D View, Google Earth </li>
<li>Inverse and Measure </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Selecting Data </li>
<li>Editing Data   
<ul>
<li>Basic Editing </li>
<li>Advanced Editing </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting Data   
<ul>
<li>Basic Exports </li>
<li>Export to a Data Collector </li>
<li>Reports </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;:</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:10:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[The Role of the Home Visitor]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-role-of-the-home-visitor.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-role-of-the-home-visitor.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_rolehomevisitor_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>A discussion of the skills necessary for anyone who visits a private home for the purpose of instruction, observation, assessment, and support.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>A discussion of the skills necessary for anyone who visits a private home for the purpose of instruction, observation, assessment, and support. This is the first in a series of 13 modules highlighting each individual skill.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Quality Assurance  
<ul>
<li>Prior To Making Visit</li>
<li>The Visit</li>
<li>Efficient Data Collection Tools</li>
<li>Objective Assessment Vs. Subjective Opinion</li>
<li>Closure</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Communicator  
<ul>
<li>Being An Effective Communicator  
<ul>
<li>Increase Comfort Level</li>
<li>Guarantee Your Message Is Received</li>
<li>Accomplishing Goals</li>
<li>Ensure Retention Of Clients</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Communication And Other Home Visitor Roles</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Role Model  
<ul>
<li>Model Professionalism</li>
<li>Sound Check</li>
<li>Coming Prepared</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Public Relations Manager  
<ul>
<li>Job Qualifications</li>
<li>Job Duties  
<ul>
<li>Create Positive Relations</li>
<li>Communicate On Behalf Of...</li>
<li>Gather Facts And Data</li>
<li>Develop Level Of Trust</li>
<li>Maintain Professionalism</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Me Vs. Them</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:09:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Peerless Power Skating]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/peerless-power-skating.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/peerless-power-skating.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_peerlesspwrskt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Eileen Peerless Power Skating Method offers proven techniques from a power skating expert who has helped hockey skaters of all ages, abilities, and levels to improve power, speed, and overall performance on the ice.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Eileen Peerless Power Skating Method offers proven techniques from a power skating expert who has helped hockey skaters of all ages, abilities, and levels to improve power, speed, and overall performance on the ice.  Her proper body placement method allows a skater to improve skating technique, speed, and balance so that with practice, both beginning and advanced hockey athletes can achieve unlimited success on the ice.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Balance</li>
<li>Edge Drills</li>
<li>Edge Work and Balance</li>
<li>Balance through Edgework</li>
<li>Stride</li>
<li>Backward Stride</li>
<li>Stride Paths</li>
<li>Foreward Stride Review</li>
<li>Backward Stride Review</li>
<li>Agility</li>
<li>Stops</li>
<li>Rotation Turns</li>
<li>Power Turns</li>
<li>Stepovers</li>
<li>Forward Starts</li>
<li>Drills for Power</li>
<li>Agility Review</li>
<li>Credits</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:30:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Basic Data Collection with TerraSync and GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/basic-data-collection-with-terrasync-and-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/basic-data-collection-with-terrasync-and-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bscdatacoll_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD is designed to guide you through basic data collection using the TerraSync software on a GeoExplorer 6000 receiver. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD is designed to guide you through basic data collection using the TerraSync software on a GeoExplorer 6000 receiver.  To qualify for PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certification of completion.  You are responsible for claiming the PDH's.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Data Collection Best Practices</li>
<li>Overview of Field Session</li>
<li>GNSS Status Section</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Creating a Rover File</li>
<li>Collecting Point Features 
<ul>
<li>Collecting a Point Feature using Log Now</li>
<li>Collecting a Point Feature using Log Later</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Collecting Line Features 
<ul>
<li>Collecting a Line Feature using Log Now</li>
<li>Collecting a Line Feature using Log Later</li>
<li>Collecting a Line Feature using Vertex Method</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Collecting Area Features 
<ul>
<li>Collecting an Area Feature using Log Now</li>
<li>Collecting an Area Feature using Log Later</li>
<li>Collecting an Area Feature using Vertex Method</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reviewing and Editing Data</li>
<li>Working in the Map Section 
<ul>
<li>Map Tools</li>
<li>Collecting Data</li>
<li>Reviewing and Editing Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Closing a Rover File</li>
<li>Opening an Existing Rover File</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">34.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:59:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Vendor Management]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vendor-management.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vendor-management.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vendormgmt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Best practices in vendor management have always been important to IT leaders and will only be more so should outsourcing continue to increase.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Best practices in vendor management have always been important to IT leaders and will only be more so should outsourcing continue to increase. This class covers key elements of excellence in vendor management including sourcing, using vendors to build a business case, communicating priorities, the competitive vendor landscape, contracts and negotiating, collaboration and partnership with key vendors, vendor risk assessment, vendor performance issues, transparency and other best practices.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Definitions 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>What Is Salary Planning?</li>
<li>Salary Ranges</li>
<li>Salary Surveys</li>
<li>Salary Range Quartiles</li>
<li>Job Families</li>
<li>Job Levels And Salary Ranges</li>
<li>Parity Pay Among Peers</li>
<li>Exempt Vs. Non-Exempt Job Types</li>
<li>Base Compensation Components</li>
<li>Types Of Other Cash Compensation</li>
<li>Non-Cash Based Compensation</li>
<li>Advanced Compensation Types</li>
<li>Types Of Pay Raises</li>
<li>Video: Stanley Cupp demands more service</li>
<li>Text: Stanley Cupp demands more service</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Salary Planning Process 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Salary Planning Cycle</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 1</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 2</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 3</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 4</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 5</li>
<li>Video: Seymour and his very dedicated tester</li>
<li>Text: Seymour and his very dedicated tester</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Salary Planning Mathematics 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Raises Given On The Anniversary Of Hire Date</li>
<li>Raises Given To All Employees At Once</li>
<li>Additional Tip On Percentage Based Raises</li>
<li>Raises Tied To Performance Review Value</li>
<li>Raises Tied To Performance And Quartile</li>
<li>Annualized Raises</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:23:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[The Salary Planning Process]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-salary-planning-process.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-salary-planning-process.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_salaryplanprocess_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Salary Planning Process</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class is designed to provide managers with an understanding and working knowledge of the salary planning process. It discusses salary ranges, job families, job levels, cash and non-cash based compensation, types of raises, needed math calculations, and the annual salary planning process.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Definitions 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>What Is Salary Planning?</li>
<li>Salary Ranges</li>
<li>Salary Surveys</li>
<li>Salary Range Quartiles</li>
<li>Job Families</li>
<li>Job Levels And Salary Ranges</li>
<li>Parity Pay Among Peers</li>
<li>Exempt Vs. Non-Exempt Job Types</li>
<li>Base Compensation Components</li>
<li>Types Of Other Cash Compensation</li>
<li>Non-Cash Based Compensation</li>
<li>Advanced Compensation Types</li>
<li>Types Of Pay Raises</li>
<li>Video: Stanley Cupp demands more service</li>
<li>Text: Stanley Cupp demands more service</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Salary Planning Process 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Salary Planning Cycle</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 1</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 2</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 3</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 4</li>
<li>The Planning Process - Part 5</li>
<li>Video: Seymour and his very dedicated tester</li>
<li>Text: Seymour and his very dedicated tester</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Salary Planning Mathematics 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Raises Given On The Anniversary Of Hire Date</li>
<li>Raises Given To All Employees At Once</li>
<li>Additional Tip On Percentage Based Raises</li>
<li>Raises Tied To Performance Review Value</li>
<li>Raises Tied To Performance And Quartile</li>
<li>Annualized Raises</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:10:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Negotiation Skills for IT Professionals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/negotiation-skills-for-it-professionals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/negotiation-skills-for-it-professionals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_negotiationsklsit_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Negotiation Skills for IT Professionals</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>IT managers negotiate with vendors about price, delivery dates, service levels, and a myriad of other topics. IT managers also negotiate with their business users on everything from budget, to software application features. As a result, negotiation skills are a key element of both IT organization success and individual IT manager career enhancement.</p>
<p>This class describes negotiation styles, keys to successful negotiation, how to deal with difficult negotiation tactics, and other related topics.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Initial Thoughts 
<ul>
<li>What Is Negotiation?</li>
<li>We All Negotiation At Work And Home</li>
<li>Why People Hate To Negotiate</li>
<li>Overcoming Dislike Of Negotiation</li>
<li>Finding Your Own Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Important Concepts 
<ul>
<li>Negotiation Process</li>
<li>Win-Win, Win-Lose, Lose-Win</li>
<li>Distributive Vs. Integrative Negotiation</li>
<li>Competitive Vs. Cooperative Negotiation</li>
<li>Needs Vs. Wants</li>
<li>The Flinch</li>
<li>Value Of Flexibility</li>
<li>Power Of The Parking Lot</li>
<li>BATNA, WATNA, And ZOPA</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Negotiation Styles 
<ul>
<li>Know Your Style And Opponents Style</li>
<li>Avoidance</li>
<li>Accommodating</li>
<li>Assertive</li>
<li>Aggressive</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Negotiating Preparations 
<ul>
<li>Value Of Preparation</li>
<li>Understand What You're Negotiating</li>
<li>Know Your Objectives</li>
<li>Know Your Bottom Line</li>
<li>Know Your Ability To Walk Away</li>
<li>Rank List Your Priorities</li>
<li>Know Your Potential Risks</li>
<li>Learn Other Person's Needs And Wants</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Negotiating Strategies 
<ul>
<li>Compare Needs And Wants</li>
<li>Look For Mutual Gain</li>
<li>Invent Creative Options</li>
<li>Negotiate Problem Not Person</li>
<li>Trade Effectively</li>
<li>Focus On Interests, Not Positions</li>
<li>Use Objective Criteria</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dealing With Difficult Tactics 
<ul>
<li>Aggression</li>
<li>Threats</li>
<li>Withdrawal</li>
<li>Pressure For Quick Decision</li>
<li>Nibbling</li>
<li>Cries Poor</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:22:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Fostering IT Innovation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/fostering-it-innovation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/fostering-it-innovation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_fosteritinnov_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Fostering IT Innovation</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Innovation in IT is the successful creation, implementation, enhancement and/or improvement of a technical process, business process, software product, hardware product, or cultural factor that reduces costs, enhances productivity, increases company competitiveness, or provides other business value.</p>
<p>This class is designed to provide IT management with the information, insights, and tools needed to foster innovation within their organization.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction  
<ul>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Thoughts On Innovation  
<ul>
<li>What Is IT Innovation?</li>
<li>Innovation Outcomes</li>
<li>IT Innovation Types</li>
<li>Barriers To IT Innovation</li>
<li>Interesting CIO Quotes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enablers of IT Innovation  
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Supportive Culture within IT</li>
<li>Understanding Business Goals and Objectives</li>
<li>Collaboration Between IT and Business</li>
<li>Proactive and Creative Staff</li>
<li>Commitment to Quality Improvement</li>
<li>Delegating Department Fire Fighting</li>
<li>Willingness to Seek and Accept Criticism</li>
<li>Ability to Think Outside the Box</li>
<li>Ability to Use Existing Technologies in Innovative Ways</li>
<li>Video: Kerry learns what enables innovation within IT</li>
<li>Text: Kerry learns what enables innovation within IT</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drivers Of IT Innovation  
<ul>
<li>Constrained Or Reduce Resources</li>
<li>Competition/Survival</li>
<li>Greed</li>
<li>Entrepreneurial Mentality</li>
<li>Video: Kerry tries to inspire his group to be innovative</li>
<li>Text: Kerry tries to inspire his group to be innovative</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Innovation Facilitation Tools  
<ul>
<li>Brainstorming  
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Five Whys  
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Six Hats  
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Hat Types</li>
<li>Process</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Trial And Error (Fast Fail)  
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Video: Tools that help drive innovation</li>
<li>Text: Tools that help drive innovation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Innovation Opportunities For IT  
<ul>
<li>Cloud Computing</li>
<li>Mobile Device Deployment</li>
<li>Social Media And Active Listening</li>
<li>Data Visualization</li>
<li>Video: Where can IT innovation be done?</li>
<li>Text: Where can IT innovation be done?</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:31:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Methodology and Key Process Overview]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/methodology-and-key-process-overview.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/methodology-and-key-process-overview.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_methodkeyprocess_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Methodology and Key Process Overview</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class is designed to provide you with a general understanding of various industry leading software development methodologies. These methodologies include Waterfall, Agile, Extreme Programming, Rational Unified Process, and Scrum.</p>
<p>This class goes on to discuss, from a technical management viewpoint, a variety of the key processes needed to facilitate the development of quality production software including source code control, developer/tester coordination, software movement from development though production, and much more.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Backround on cases</li>
<li>Initial Perspective 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Class Goals</li>
<li>Methodology Perspective</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Waterfall 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>General Description</li>
<li>Methodology Steps</li>
<li>Advantages</li>
<li>Disadvantages</li>
<li>Video: Kerry Oki brings in a methodology consultant</li>
<li>Text: Kerry Oki brings in a methodology consultant</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Agile Development Process 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>General Description</li>
<li>Common Agile Method Attributes</li>
<li>Advantages</li>
<li>Disadvantages</li>
<li>Video: Justin Thyme explains Agile methodology</li>
<li>Text:Justin Thyme explains Agile methodology</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Rational Unified Process (RUP) 
<ul>
<li>General Description</li>
<li>Content Elements</li>
<li>Project Lifecycle Phases</li>
<li>Six Engineering Disciplines</li>
<li>Three Supporting Disciplines</li>
<li>Advantages</li>
<li>Disadvantages</li>
<li>Video: Justin Thyme explains the Rational Unified Process</li>
<li>Text: Justin Thyme explains the Rational Unified Process</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scrum 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>General Description</li>
<li>Development Phases</li>
<li>Team Member Types</li>
<li>Product Backlog</li>
<li>Release Backlog</li>
<li>Sprint Backlogs</li>
<li>Sprint Cycles</li>
<li>Burndown Chart</li>
<li>Sprint Daily Meetings</li>
<li>Scrum Advantages</li>
<li>Scrum Disadvantages</li>
<li>Video: Justin Thyme explains Scrum</li>
<li>Text: Justin Thyme explains Scrum</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Extreme Programming (XP) 
<ul>
<li>General Description</li>
<li>Methodology Steps</li>
<li>Advantages</li>
<li>Disadvantages</li>
<li>Video: Justin Thyme explains Extreme Programming</li>
<li>Text: Justin Thyme explains Extreme Programming</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Key Software Processes 
<ul>
<li>Multi-Programmer Projects</li>
<li>Source Code Control</li>
<li>Software Compilation</li>
<li>Moving Software Into Test</li>
<li>Thoughts On Software Testing</li>
<li>Developer/Tester Coordination</li>
<li>Moving Software Into Production</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Key Production Processes 
<ul>
<li>Installing Emergency Software Fixes</li>
<li>Application Security</li>
<li>Hardware Upgrades</li>
<li>Operating System Upgrades</li>
<li>Software Licensing</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:58:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[InRoads V8i (SELECTseries) Surface Creation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inroads-v8i-selectseries-surface-creation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inroads-v8i-selectseries-surface-creation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inroadssurf_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>InRoads V8i (SELECTseries) Surface Creation</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Welcome to InRoads V8i (SELECTseries) Surface Creation training. This course was developed to help users that are using either InRoads V8 2004, XM or V8i Editions. The goal of this cloudDVD is to present a variety of methods to create or enhance surfaces that represent existing or design surfaces.</p>
<p>This bundle also includes InRoads TechNotes which is a collection of tips and tutorials using InRoads Software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - InRoads Surface Creation:</h3>
<ul>
<li>InRoads Surface Creation 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Surface Creation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction to labs 
<ul>
<li>MicroStation Models</li>
<li>MicroStation task menu</li>
<li>Activating InRoads</li>
<li>EnvisionCAD.XIN file</li>
<li>InRoads command integration</li>
<li>Task menu integration</li>
<li>Collapsing InRoads Explorer</li>
<li>Active project settings</li>
<li>Tabbed task menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import LandXML 
<ul>
<li>LandXML Lab</li>
<li>InRoads Interface</li>
<li>Completed Exercise Preview</li>
<li>LandXML Translator</li>
<li>LandXML File Selection</li>
<li>Viewing with Web Browser</li>
<li>Graphic Review of LandXML Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Import Wizard 
<ul>
<li>Text Import Wizard Lab</li>
<li>Saving a TIW format</li>
<li>Using a saved format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Import Wizard using filters 
<ul>
<li>Filtered Text Import Wizard Lab</li>
<li>Creating the filter</li>
<li>Building the filter</li>
<li>Saving a filtered TIW format</li>
<li>Creating the surface</li>
<li>Using a saved format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import Graphics 
<ul>
<li>Import graphics lab</li>
<li>Import random points</li>
<li>Import break lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import Contours 
<ul>
<li>Import contours lab</li>
<li>Add inferred breakline</li>
<li>Import Graphic Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface Review and Surface Properties</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - InRoads TechNotes:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Delete Triangles by Filter and Create Exterior Boundary</li>
<li>Dynamic Update and Editing a Feature Point</li>
<li>Data Acquisition Tools - Import Lidar Data LAS and Create DTM</li>
<li>Import Surface from Graphics</li>
<li>Text Import Wizard &amp; Exterior Boundary Creation</li>
<li>Site Modeler - Create Pad Design</li>
<li>Thinning a Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Geometry 
<ul>
<li>Place Horizontal Alignment - Arc Spiral Arc</li>
<li>Persistent Annotation with Geometry</li>
<li>Import Geometry from Graphics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey 
<ul>
<li>Merge two InRoads Survey Fieldbook Files</li>
<li>Rotate Cell Planimetrics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General 
<ul>
<li>Using Keyins with InRoads</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drafting 
<ul>
<li>Plan and Profile Generator - Title Block Data Field</li>
<li>Display Crossing and Projected features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Templates 
<ul>
<li>Element Priorities</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">20.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:29:14 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Configuring TerraSync v5.10 and higher for the GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/configuring-terrasync-v5-10-and-higher-for-the-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/configuring-terrasync-v5-10-and-higher-for-the-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_configterrasyncgeo_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Configuring TerraSync v5.10 and higher for the GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Before collecting field data with the TerraSync software on the GeoExplorer 6000 Series receivers it is important to setup the equipment correctly.  You will understand how to properly configure GNSS Settings, Logging Settings, Real-Time Settings, Coordinate System and Units for autonomous and satellite based augmentation system (SBAS) data collection.  To qualify for PDH&rsquo;s you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion.  You are responsible for claiming the PDH&rsquo;s.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction to TerraSync</li>
<li>Configuring TerraSync for Data Collection 
<ul>
<li>GNSS Settings</li>
<li>Autonomous Data Collection</li>
<li>SBAS Data Collection</li>
<li>Logging Settings</li>
<li>Real-Time Settings</li>
<li>Autonomous Data Collection</li>
<li>SBAS Data Collection</li>
<li>Coordinate System</li>
<li>Units</li>
<li>External Sensors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:17:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performing an OPUS Session with a Trimble Receiver with or without Trimble Access on a TSC3]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-access-on-a-tsc3.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-access-on-a-tsc3.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_opus_access_tsc3_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Performing an OPUS Session with a Trimble Receiver with or without Trimble Access on a TSC3</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using a Trimble Receiver with or without the Trimble Access software.  You will be taken from configuring Access or the receiver, to collecting static GNSS data, downloading the data, converting it to Rinex and submitting the data to OPUS. Included in this bundle is a certification exam</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>OPUS Requirements</li>
<li>Logging into Access</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Receiver</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Access</li>
<li>Collecting OPUS Field Data with Access 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview using Access and Receiver</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Survey in Access</li>
<li>Ending the OOPUS Survey in Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading the OPUS Data from the Data Collector 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Download Data from the Data Collector</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data in the Trimble Receiver 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data Logging in the Trimble Receiver</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Trimble Receiver Stand Alone Data Collection 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview Using a Receiver</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Field Session</li>
<li>Ending an OPUS Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading OPUS Data from a Trimble Receiver 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Using Data Transfer</li>
<li>Downloading Using Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Converting Trimble Receiver Files into a Rinex Format 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Converting Receiver Files to Rinex</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Submitting Files to OPUS</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test </li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:50:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performing an OPUS Session with an Epoch 50 Receiver with or without Survey Pro on a Ranger 3]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-an-epoch-50-receiver-with-or-without-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-an-epoch-50-receiver-with-or-without-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_epoch50rngr3_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Performing an OPUS Session with an Epoch 50 Receiver with or without Survey Pro on a Ranger 3</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using an Epoch 50 Receiver with or without the Spectra Precision Survey Pro Software.  You will be taken from configuring the receiver or Survey Pro, to collecting static GPS data, downloading the data, converting it to Rinex and submitting the data to OPUS.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>OPUS Requirements</li>
<li>Creating a Short Cut to Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to an Epoch 50</li>
<li>Post Process Setting in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Collecting OPUS Field Data with Survey Pro 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a Field Session</li>
<li>Ending a Field Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Epoch 50 Stand Along Data Collection Steps 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a Field Session</li>
<li>Ending a Field Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading Data from a Data Collector or an Epoch 50 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Using Data Collector 
<ul>
<li>Transferring Files from Receiver to Data Collector</li>
<li>Downloading OPUS Files from Data Collector to Computer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading Files from Epoch 50</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Converting Epoch Receiver Files into a Rinex Format 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Converting Receiver Files to Rinex</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Submitting Files to OPUS</li>
<li>Summary </li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:33:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PMP/CAPM Preparation/Review]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pmp-capm-preparation-review.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pmp-capm-preparation-review.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_pmpcapm_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course is for anyone who needs a refresher course on contents of the 2008 4th Edition PMBOK (Project Management Body of Knowledge) in preparation for taking the PMP® or the CAPM® Certification exam. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is specifically designed to maximize the probability that attendees will succeed/pass the exams on the first try by providing an intensive review of the fundamentals of the 9 knowledge areas, and the 42 PMBOK processes and their interrelations across these knowledge areas.  Every PMBOK major topic is covered, plus additional data that might also occur on the test.</p>
<p>PMI certification is considered to be the "De-Facto" standard for project management certification around the globe. Becoming certified is recognition that recipients have met the knowledge, education, and experience requirements of the Project Management Institute (PMI).  The class contributes 14 hours towards the application&rsquo;s educational requirement.</p>
<p>It is recommended that the students purchase a PMBOK (4th Edition), as a reference.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Framework And Essentials 
<ul>
<li>Project Management Framework Introduction</li>
<li>Project Life Cycle And Organization</li>
<li>Project Management Life Cycle And Process</li>
<li>Typical Project Stakeholders</li>
<li>Role Of The PMO</li>
<li>Organizational Structures</li>
<li>9 Knowledge Areas</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Integration 
<ul>
<li>Develop Project Charter</li>
<li>Develop Project Management Plan</li>
<li>Direct And Manage Project Execution</li>
<li>Monitor And Control Project Work</li>
<li>Perform Integrated Change Control</li>
<li>Close Project Or Phase</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scope 
<ul>
<li>Collect Requirements</li>
<li>Define Scope</li>
<li>Create WBS</li>
<li>Verify Scope</li>
<li>Scope Control</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Time 
<ul>
<li>Define Activities</li>
<li>Sequence Activities</li>
<li>Estimate Activity Resources</li>
<li>Estimate Activity Durantions</li>
<li>Develop Schedule</li>
<li>Control Schedule</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cost 
<ul>
<li>Estimate Costs</li>
<li>Determine Budget</li>
<li>Control Costs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Quality 
<ul>
<li>Plan Quality</li>
<li>Perform Quality Assurance</li>
<li>Perform Quality Control</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Human Resources 
<ul>
<li>Develop Human Resource Plan</li>
<li>Acquire Project Team</li>
<li>Develop Project Team</li>
<li>Manage Project Team</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Communication 
<ul>
<li>Identify Stakeholders</li>
<li>Plan Communications</li>
<li>Distribute Information</li>
<li>Manage Stakeholders</li>
<li>Report Performance</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Risk 
<ul>
<li>Plan Risk Management</li>
<li>Identify Risks</li>
<li>Perform Qualitative Risk Analysis</li>
<li>Perform Quantitative Risk Analysis</li>
<li>Plan Risk Responses</li>
<li>Monitor And Control Risk</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Procurement 
<ul>
<li>Plan Procurements</li>
<li>Conduct Procurements</li>
<li>Administer Procurements</li>
<li>Close Procurements</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Ethics And Professional Responsibility</li>
<li>Preparing For And Taking The Exam</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Change For September</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">150.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:53:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS5 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs5-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs5-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cs5photoshpinter_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Photoshop CS5 - Intermediate</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This lesson covers some of the more intermediate tools and tactics that designers use when manipulation digital images.  The fundamentals lessons from the Photoshop CS5 Basics class are also re-touched upon.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Tools 
<ul>
<li>Type</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Type 
<ul>
<li>Point Type</li>
<li>Character Menu</li>
<li>Paragraph Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Masks 
<ul>
<li>Quick Masking</li>
<li>Layer Mask</li>
<li>Shape Layer Mask</li>
<li>Clipping Mask</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blending Modes 
<ul>
<li>Dissolve</li>
<li>Darken</li>
<li>Multiply</li>
<li>Color Burn</li>
<li>Linear Burn</li>
<li>Lighten</li>
<li>Overlay</li>
<li>Soft &amp; Hard Light</li>
<li>Hue &amp; Saturation</li>
<li>Screen</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Smart Images 
<ul>
<li>Edit Smart Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Content Aware Scaling</li>
<li>Adjustment Layers 
<ul>
<li>Hue And Saturation</li>
<li>Curves</li>
<li>Color Balance</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:43:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS5 - Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs5-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs5-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cs5photoshpbasics_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Photoshop CS5 - Basics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Photoshop is the basic program used by all designers to create images and designs.  Photoshop is one of the main programs used in the industry for photo manipulation and digital art.  It is a must have program for designers of any level, and the skills learned in these lessons will teach you lessons that can be used in any design programs.</p>
<p>This lesson will cover the basics of Photoshop CS5.  You will learn what the most basic tools of Photoshop CS5 and how to use them properly.  You will also learn the basics for navigating around the digital workspace, or "Canvas", as well how to change some of the basics settings.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Interface 
<ul>
<li>Toolbox</li>
<li>Panel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tools 
<ul>
<li>Pointer/Cursor</li>
<li>Marquee</li>
<li>Lasso</li>
<li>Quick Selection/Magic Wand</li>
<li>Crop, Slice, Slice Select</li>
<li>Eyedropper</li>
<li>Healing</li>
<li>Brush</li>
<li>Layers Tablet</li>
<li>Pattern Stamp</li>
<li>History Brush</li>
<li>Eraser</li>
<li>Gradient/Paint Bucket</li>
<li>Blur, Smudge, &amp; Sharpen</li>
<li>Dodge, Burn, &amp; Sponge</li>
<li>Pen</li>
<li>Type</li>
<li>Path</li>
<li>Shapes</li>
<li>Hand</li>
<li>Magnifying Glass</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Lesson</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:42:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Illustrator CS5 - Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/illustrator-cs5-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/illustrator-cs5-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cs5illustrtbasics_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Illustrator CS5 - Basics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Illustrator is a design program like Photoshop; however the images created in this program are less detailed, but possess the ability to be scaled to any size without losing quality.  Illustrator is the main program designers use in order create logos and other images a company may want to be scaled up to large size.</p>
<p>The Illustrator CS5 Basics lesson covers many of the basic tools that are used by professional designers.  The lesson will also cover how to interact with the workspace, or &ldquo;Art board&rdquo;, as well as methods to change settings used in the program.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Interface 
<ul>
<li>Toolbar</li>
<li>Panels</li>
<li>Customize</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preferences</li>
<li>Create New</li>
<li>Shortcuts 
<ul>
<li>Selection Tool/Black Arrow</li>
<li>White Arrow</li>
<li>Smart Guides</li>
<li>Hand Tool</li>
<li>Pen Tool</li>
<li>Eyedropper</li>
<li>Brush Tool</li>
<li>Zoom</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pen Tool</li>
<li>Swatches Menu 
<ul>
<li>Create New Swatch</li>
<li>Global</li>
<li>Panetone Colors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Live Strace</li>
<li>Live Paint</li>
<li>Type 
<ul>
<li>Point Type</li>
<li>Paragraph Type</li>
<li>Shapes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pencil And Brush Tool 
<ul>
<li>Pencil Tool</li>
<li>Brush Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:06:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[How to Create a Facebook Fan Page]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-create-a-facebook-fan-page.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-create-a-facebook-fan-page.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_facebookfanpage_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>How to Create a Facebook Fan Page</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Join the millions of businesses and organizations that are creating Facebook pages for their companies.  In this training we will teach you how to create a fan page step-by-step so that you can get your business up and running on Facebook. Start generating community, retention, leads and interaction for your company.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Create A Business Page 
<ul>
<li>Type Of Business</li>
<li>Category</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Designing The Page 
<ul>
<li>Add An Image</li>
<li>Invite Your Friends</li>
<li>Import Contacts</li>
<li>Create And Post An Update</li>
<li>Redirect To Other Websites</li>
<li>Deleting A Post</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tour Of The Page 
<ul>
<li>Image</li>
<li>Get Started</li>
<li>Wall</li>
<li>Info</li>
<li>Photos</li>
<li>Suggest To Friends</li>
<li>View Insights</li>
<li>Promote An Add</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:00:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Dealing with Difficult Techies]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dealing-with-difficult-techies.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dealing-with-difficult-techies.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_dealdifftechies_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Dealing with Difficult Techies</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Managing difficult employees isn't easy. It wastes time, takes lots of energy, tends to cause problems and usually creates mounds of paperwork.</p>
<p>The good news is that if you handle the situation correctly, you may be able to dramatically improve their attitude, work quality, and general performance. On the other hand, if the person doesn't or can't improve, you may eventually have to remove them (with the help of HR of course).</p>
<p>This class is designed to help managers effectively deal with difficult staff members by first categorizing their problem type and then acting to correct the situation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Seven Types Of Difficult Employees 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Sleazy</li>
<li>Grumpy</li>
<li>Lazy</li>
<li>Brainy</li>
<li>Tardy</li>
<li>Dummy</li>
<li>Troubled</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Types Of Difficult Techies 
<ul>
<li>Does Not Document</li>
<li>Likes Scope Creep</li>
<li>Upsets Users</li>
<li>Won't Follow Standards</li>
<li>Missing Deadlines</li>
<li>Ultimate Optimist</li>
<li>Perfectionist</li>
<li>Spit And Elastic Experts</li>
<li>Slowpoke Coder</li>
<li>The "Lone Techie"</li>
<li>Spaghetti Coder</li>
<li>Buggy Code Writer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conceptual Discipline Framework 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>The Conceptual Discipline Framework</li>
<li>The Steps</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dealing With Specific Situations 
<ul>
<li>Food For Thought</li>
<li>What Should I Do?</li>
<li>The Classification Of Bad Things</li>
<li>Things Requiring An Immediate Warning</li>
<li>Things Requiring Immediate Disciplinary Action</li>
<li>Things Requiring Immediate termination</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:11:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Surveying and Mapping - Field to Finish with AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surveying-and-mapping-field-to-finish-with-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surveying-and-mapping-field-to-finish-with-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_survymapc3d_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Surveying and Mapping - Field to Finish with AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The "Survey and Mapping - Field to Finish with AutoCAD Civil 3D"  is a comprehensive training course which provides over three days of instructor lead training on the use of AutoCAD Civil 3D to reduce survey field data and produce a survey topographical map and boundary. This course will provide your survey field crews the knowledge they need to properly collect the data that will automatically be processed by AutoCAD Civil 3D to draw points and figures in a Drawing. Additional topics include how to setup the software to achieve the field to finish results, rotate and translate the survey data from assumed coordinates to a known datum, COGO routines and much more.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Civil 3D Setup 
<ul>
<li>Set Drawing Template Path</li>
<li>Missing SHX File Message</li>
<li>Previous Drawing Message</li>
<li>Survey User Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Description Keys 
<ul>
<li>Create Description Key File</li>
<li>Create Description Key</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Styles 
<ul>
<li>Create Point Style</li>
<li>Point Marker</li>
<li>3D Geometry</li>
<li>Display Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Label Styles 
<ul>
<li>Create Label Style</li>
<li>Set Label Anchor Point</li>
<li>Set Text Hight of Label</li>
<li>Label Border</li>
<li>Background Mask</li>
<li>Edit Label Contents</li>
<li>Add Label Component</li>
<li>Set Label Precision</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Figure Prefix Database 
<ul>
<li>Manage Figure Prefix Database</li>
<li>Create New Figure Prefix Database</li>
<li>Set Figure Database Current</li>
<li>Create Figure Prefix</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Figure Styles 
<ul>
<li>Create Figure Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Additional Options 
<ul>
<li>Point Groups</li>
<li>User Defined Properties</li>
<li>Note Label Style</li>
<li>Drawing Settings</li>
<li>Ambient Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey Field Procedures 
<ul>
<li>Traverse Procedure</li>
<li>Recommendations</li>
<li>Line Coding Set</li>
<li>Begin Line</li>
<li>Curves</li>
<li>Three Point Curve</li>
<li>Reverse Curve</li>
<li>Curve with PC and PT Only</li>
<li>Curb Island</li>
<li>Rectangle</li>
<li>Right Turn</li>
<li>Multiple Codes</li>
<li>Connect Points</li>
<li>Recall Point</li>
<li>Offset Figures</li>
<li>Circle</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Field Procedures</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Create Project 
<ul>
<li>Set Project Working Folder</li>
<li>Create Project Folder</li>
<li>Set Survey Working Folder</li>
<li>Create Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Convert Raw Data to Fieldbook 
<ul>
<li>Survey Data Link</li>
<li>Review Raw Data</li>
<li>Review Fieldbook</li>
<li>Find Errors or Note</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import Survey Data 
<ul>
<li>Import Data</li>
<li>Edit Survey Database Settings</li>
<li>Set Drawing Settings</li>
<li>Import Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Translate Survey Database 
<ul>
<li>Point Inverse</li>
<li>Line by Bearing</li>
<li>Point Input Mode</li>
<li>Measure Angle</li>
<li>Translate Survey Database</li>
<li>Re-Import Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Traverse Adjustment 
<ul>
<li>Edit Observation</li>
<li>Define Traverse Loop</li>
<li>Edit Traverse</li>
<li>Edit Loop Properties</li>
<li>Adjust Traverse</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Figures</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Working with Points 
<ul>
<li>Point Object Overview</li>
<li>Zoom to Point</li>
<li>Points Groups</li>
<li>Point Style Overrides</li>
<li>Point Group Display Order</li>
<li>Point Group Options</li>
<li>Apply Description Keys</li>
<li>Edit Label</li>
<li>Import Field Notes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Points Creation 
<ul>
<li>Import Points</li>
<li>Points Settings and Properties</li>
<li>Create Manual Point</li>
<li>Create Point Direction Direction</li>
<li>Add Points to Survey Database</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Surface 
<ul>
<li>Create Point Group</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Add Point Data to Surface</li>
<li>Add Breaklines to Surface</li>
<li>Modify Build Definition</li>
<li>Add Boundary</li>
<li>Edit Surface</li>
<li>Swap Edge</li>
<li>Delete Surface Point</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>COGO Options 
<ul>
<li>Point Inverse</li>
<li>Measure Distance</li>
<li>Measure Area</li>
<li>List Line or Arc Information</li>
<li>List Angle</li>
<li>LIst Distance</li>
<li>Continuous Distance</li>
<li>List Object Info</li>
<li>ID Point</li>
<li>Draw Line by Bearing</li>
<li>Draw by Angle</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Parcel Objects 
<ul>
<li>Create Parcel From Object</li>
<li>Parcel Properties</li>
<li>Map Check</li>
<li>Point of Beginning</li>
<li>Add Parcel Labels</li>
<li>Create Easement</li>
<li>Easement Properties</li>
<li>Parcel Creation Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Production 
<ul>
<li>Create Viewport</li>
<li>Set Viewport Scale</li>
<li>Rotate View</li>
<li>Lock Viewport</li>
<li>Add Labels and Notes</li>
<li>Create Circle Viewport</li>
<li>Plot Page</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:17:14 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Revit Architecture Suite 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-revit-architecture-suite-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-revit-architecture-suite-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarchsuite2012_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Welcome to an “introduction to Revit Architecture 2012”.  The goal of the course is to introduce the key concepts of the program and the step by step procedures for each of the key tools.  The course is geared towards architects but other design professionals such as interior designers should also find the course very applicable. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The course is broken up into 3 sections.  In section 1 we provide an overview of the Key Concepts, techniques and tools.  If you have never used the software before we recommend you start with section 1 which will provide the necessary foundation for Section 2, where we review the key Modeling tools. In section 3 we review the tools to allow you to annotate you model and produce 2D documentation from the model.    

If you are new to the software we recommend you go through the book in the sequence in which it is presented. The building we create is based on a real world project (a school addition) which allows you to learn how to use the tools in the context of a real project.  The sequence also represents the typical workflow in which we would likely assemble this type of project.  If you&rsquo;ve been using the program, but have a few gaps in your knowledge or need a little refresher, each topic was designed to be stand-alone so you can easily jump between topics.

So whether you are brand new to the program or have been trying to figure it out on your own for a while, this course should help you get up to speed quickly so that you can complete a project of your own, on your own.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Opening And Navigating Project 
<ul>
<li>Parts Of The Screen</li>
<li>Zooming And Panning</li>
<li>Opening And Closing Views</li>
<li>Rearranging Views</li>
<li>Project Browser</li>
<li>View Controls &amp; Properties Palate</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Revit Tools And Commands 
<ul>
<li>The Changing Ribbon</li>
<li>The Options Bar</li>
<li>Properties Palette</li>
<li>Sketch Mode</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Selection Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Picking</li>
<li>Escape Key</li>
<li>Windowing</li>
<li>Other Batch Selection Techniques</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Revit Organization 
<ul>
<li>Categories/Families/Types</li>
<li>Properties/Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Levels</li>
<li>Adding Column Grid Lines</li>
<li>Introduction To Walls 
<ul>
<li>Wall Type/Wall Structure</li>
<li>Drawing Options</li>
<li>Modify Walls</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating New Wall Types</li>
<li>Adding Doors, Windows, and Openings 
<ul>
<li>Placing Doors</li>
<li>Placing Windows</li>
<li>Placing Openings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Placing Rooms And Room Objects</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Structural Columns</li>
<li>Architectural Columns</li>
<li>Placing Components</li>
<li>Floor Objects And Openings 
<ul>
<li>Adding Floor</li>
<li>Adding Opening</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Ceiling Plan And Ceiling Components 
<ul>
<li>Ceiling Plan</li>
<li>Placing Ceilings</li>
<li>Placing Components</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pitched Roof</li>
<li>Flat Roof</li>
<li>Railings 
<ul>
<li>Railing Around Opening</li>
<li>Railing To Stairs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Stairs</li>
<li>Curtain Wall</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Annotation Tools 
<ul>
<li>Text Tool</li>
<li>Dimension Tool</li>
<li>Line Drawing Tool</li>
<li>Region Tool</li>
<li>Tagging Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating New Views 
<ul>
<li>Building Section</li>
<li>Wall Section</li>
<li>Section Details</li>
<li>Plan Enlargement</li>
<li>3D View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Plan Variations 
<ul>
<li>View Controls</li>
<li>Colorized Plan</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schedules 
<ul>
<li>Room Area Schedule</li>
<li>Door Schedule</li>
<li>etailing Tools</li>
<li>Creating A Wall Section</li>
<li>Detail Component</li>
<li>Insulation</li>
<li>Detail Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Sheets And Plotting Command 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Sheet</li>
<li>Placing View On Sheet</li>
<li>Plotting Command Open and show note</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:09:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk Inventor 2011: Cable and Harness Design]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-inventor-2011-cable-and-harness-design.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-inventor-2011-cable-and-harness-design.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_invntr2011cable_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk Inventor 2011: Cable and Harness Design</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn the fundamental principles and recommended workflows for creating and documenting 3D electrical parts and wire harness designs using Autodesk&reg; Inventor&reg; software. Users learn how to add electrical components, cables, and wires to a design, route wires through an assembly to create a harness, and create ribbon cables. Users also learn how to document the wire harness assembly in drawings and generate reports used to build the wire harnesses. Hands-on exercises representing real-world, industry-specific design scenarios are included.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Review And Navigate The Design</li>
<li>Create A Harness Assembly</li>
<li>Adding Wires And Cables 
<ul>
<li>Wires</li>
<li>Cables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Routing Wires And Cables 
<ul>
<li>Create A Route Segment</li>
<li>Manually Route Wires And Cables</li>
<li>Automatically Route Wires And Cables</li>
<li>Un-Route Wires And Cables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing Wire And Cable Data 
<ul>
<li>Review Wire And Cable Data</li>
<li>Import Wire And Cable Data</li>
<li>Correct Identified Issues During The Import</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Ribbon Cable 
<ul>
<li>Add Ribbon Cable</li>
<li>Ribbon Cable Properties And Display Settings</li>
<li>Change The Twist Of A Ribbon Cable</li>
<li>Add A Fold To A Ribbon Cable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modifying Wires, Cables, Segments And Ribbon Cables 
<ul>
<li>Edit Display Setting And Properties</li>
<li>Add And Modify Points</li>
<li>Check Bend Radius</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working With Splices 
<ul>
<li>Create Splice</li>
<li>Modify Splice</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Virtual Parts 
<ul>
<li>Add Virtual Parts To An Assembly</li>
<li>Edit Virtual Part Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Drawing Views 
<ul>
<li>Create Nailboard Drawing Views</li>
<li>Modify Nailboard Drawing View</li>
<li>Create Drawing View Of Associated Connectors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotate Drawing Views 
<ul>
<li>Add Harness Properties And Dimensions</li>
<li>Toggle Virtual Part Display</li>
<li>Add Wire And Pin Table</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting And Reporting Design Data 
<ul>
<li>Export Harness Design Data To XML File</li>
<li>Create CSV Report Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Library Definitions And Library Files 
<ul>
<li>Add New Wire Type To Library</li>
<li>Import Library Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Configuration Files For Reports, Imports And Exports 
<ul>
<li>Define A configuration File To Import Or Export</li>
<li>Import/Export Library Objects</li>
<li>Edit The Settings And Options In A Report Configuration File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defining Electrical Parts And Connectors 
<ul>
<li>Add Pins To An Electrical Part</li>
<li>Configure Pin Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Libraries 
<ul>
<li>Adding Custom Library Content Center</li>
<li>Configure Path For Saving And Accessing Content Center</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Library Content 
<ul>
<li>Author Electrical Connector</li>
<li>Publish Electrical Parts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Library Content 
<ul>
<li>Copy Content From One Library To Another</li>
<li>Add And Edit Column Values For Library Part Family</li>
<li>Edit Content Center Family Member Data In Excel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:10:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Export to Trimble Point Creator Pro from Autodesk Revit]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-point-creator-pro-from-autodesk-revit.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-point-creator-pro-from-autodesk-revit.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_exprttrimpntcrt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Export to Trimble Point Creator Pro from Autodesk Revit</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD is a short course on exporting a DXF or DWG file for use as a background in Point Creator Pro.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course Introduction</li>
<li>Export from Revit in Building Coordinates</li>
<li>Export from Revit in Site Coordinates</li>
<li>Verifying Exported Files</li>
<li>Importing inti Trimble Point Creator Pro</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">14.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:36:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Export to Trimble LM80 or LM80 Desktop from Autodesk Revit]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-lm80-or-lm80-desktop-from-autodesk-revit.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-lm80-or-lm80-desktop-from-autodesk-revit.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/placeholder/default/thumbnail.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Export to Trimble LM80 or LM80 Desktop from Autodesk Revit</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD is a short course on exporting a DXF or DWG file for use as a background in LM80, LM80 Desktop.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course Introduction</li>
<li>Exporting from Revit in Building Coordinates</li>
<li>Exporting from Revit in Site Coordinates</li>
<li>Verifying Exported Files</li>
<li>Importing into Trimble LM80</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">14.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:35:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Export to Trimble Construction Products from Autodesk Revit]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-construction-products-from-autodesk-revit.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/export-to-trimble-construction-products-from-autodesk-revit.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_exprttrimconstruct.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Export to Trimble Construction Products from Autodesk Revit</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD is a short course on exporting a DXF or DWG file for use as a background in LM80, LM80 Desktop or Point Creator Pro.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course introduction</li>
<li>Export from Revit in Building Coordinates</li>
<li>Export from Revit in Site Coordinates</li>
<li>Verifying your export</li>
<li>Importing into Trimble LM80 Desktop</li>
<li>Importing into Trimble Point Creator Pro</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:33:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Creating Data Dictionaries for use in TerraSync v5.0 and Higher]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/creating-data-dictionaries-for-use-in-terrasync-v5-0-and-higher.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/creating-data-dictionaries-for-use-in-terrasync-v5-0-and-higher.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_crtdatadict.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Creating Data Dictionaries for use in TerraSync v5.0 and Higher</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>When using the TerraSync software for GIS data collection the data dictionary is your electronic data collection form that allows you to collect the valuable attribute information for point, line and area features.  You will learn how to outline the structure of your data dictionary for assigning simple attributes to features and work up to assigned complex attribution using the conditional attributing capability (If/Then) that is available in TerraSync v5.0 and higher.  Then you will create a project in the Pathfinder Office software, create the data dictionary, transfer it to your mobile device and verify it is on the mobile device before performing field data collection.  To qualify for PDH&rsquo;s you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certification of completion.  You are responsible for claiming the PDH&rsquo;s.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>What is a Data Dictionary?</li>
<li>Features, Attributes, and Attribute Values</li>
<li>Types of Data Dictionaries</li>
<li>Default Data Dictionary in TerraSync</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Building a Data Dictionary 
<ul>
<li>Features and Attributes</li>
<li>Data Dictionary Design Limitations</li>
<li>Sample Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Point Feature</li>
<li>Feature with Conditional Attributes</li>
<li>Line Feature</li>
<li>Area Feature</li>
<li>Data Dictionary Tips and Tricks</li>
<li>Installing TerraSync on Desktop/Laptop Computer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Project in Pathfinder Office</li>
<li>Sample Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary 
<ul>
<li>Starting Data Dictionary Editor</li>
<li>Naming the Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Data Dictionary Areas</li>
<li>How to Create a Point Feature</li>
<li>How to Create a Line Feature</li>
<li>How to Create an Area Feature</li>
<li>Creating a Menu Driven Attribute</li>
<li>Creating a Menu Driven Attribute with a Default and Radio Button</li>
<li>Creating a Menu Driven Conditional Attribute</li>
<li>Creating a Numeric Attribute</li>
<li>How to Disable Numeric Defaults Required for Numeric Attributes</li>
<li>Creating a Text Attribute</li>
<li>Creating a Text Conditional Attribute</li>
<li>Creating a Date Attribute</li>
<li>Creating a File Name Attribute</li>
<li>Reviewing Attributes</li>
<li>Previewing the Data Dictionary in TerraSync</li>
<li>Saving the Data Dictionary</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Dictionary Capabilities 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary from a GNSS Data File</li>
<li>Exiting the Data Dictionary Editior</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transferring Data Dictionary to Receiver/Mobile Device 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Transferring Data Dictionary to Receiver/Mobile Device</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Verifying Data Dictionary is on Receiver/Mobile Device 
<ul>
<li>Verifying Data Dictionary is on GeoExplorer 6000</li>
<li>Verifying Data Dictionary is on older Receiver/Mobile Device</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">34.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:19:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Feedback]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/feedback.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/feedback.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_feedback_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Feedback</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn how to give good constructive feedback and to document performance.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Constructive Criticism 
<ul>
<li>What is the Cost of Not Giving Feedback?</li>
<li>Constructive Feedback</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Components of Giving Feedback 
<ul>
<li>What</li>
<li>How</li>
<li>When</li>
<li>Frequency</li>
<li>Questions to Facilitate Discussion</li>
<li>Common Feedback Mistakes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Documenting Performance 
<ul>
<li>Starting to Document Performance</li>
<li>Progressive Discipline</li>
<li>Things to Do</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:30:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Configuring TerraSync and a GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver with a Mobile Hotspot for VRS Data Collection]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/configuring-terrasync-and-a-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver-with-a-mobile-hotspot-for-vrs-data-collection.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/configuring-terrasync-and-a-geoexplorer-6000-series-receiver-with-a-mobile-hotspot-for-vrs-data-collection.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_conterrasyncgeomob_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Configuring TerraSync and a GeoExplorer 6000 Series Receiver with a Mobile Hotspot for VRS Data Collection</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn the theory of how a Virtual Reference Station or VRS works, the information you need to subscribe to a VRS, how to configure your Mobile WiFi Hotspot, configure the Real-Time settings in the TerraSync software as well as GNSS Settings, Logging Settings, Coordinate System and Unit for VRS data collection and test the VRS connection in the field with your GeoExplorer 6000 Series receiver. To qualify for PDH&rsquo;s you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion.  You are responsible for claiming the PDH&rsquo;s.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>Mobile WiFi Hotspot Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Configuring WiFi Hotspot with GeoExplorer 6000 Receiver</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>TerraSync Real-Time Settings for VRS 
<ul>
<li>Starting TerraSync and Setup Section</li>
<li>Real-Time Settings</li>
<li>GNSS Settings</li>
<li>Logging Settings</li>
<li>Coordinate System</li>
<li>Units</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Testing the VRS Connection in the Field</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:16:32 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Vault Vanilla Basics 2012]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vault-vanilla-basics-2012.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vault-vanilla-basics-2012.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vault2012basics_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Vault Vanilla Basics 2012</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the end user to Autodesk Vault.  The user will learn the vault user interface and basic vault functions.  More advanced tools for searching the vault, reusing designs, renaming files, and editing properties are covered as well.  Users will also receive best practices for managing file versions, working in a collaborative environment, and organizing files.  Vault integration with Autodesk Inventor is the primary focus, but integration with AutoCAD and Microsoft Office products are also covered in depth.  Upon completing the course, the user will have learned all necessary skills to work effectively in a production Vault environment with other users.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Vault Concepts 
<ul>
<li>File Status</li>
<li>Checking Out Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Vault Tasks 
<ul>
<li>Log In To Vault</li>
<li>Create/Save New File</li>
<li>Vault Check In</li>
<li>Vault Check Out</li>
<li>Vault User Interface</li>
<li>Open From Vault</li>
<li>Undo Check Out</li>
<li>Get Check Out</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Vault In Inventor 
<ul>
<li>Project Files</li>
<li>Accessing Vault Information</li>
<li>Making Changes</li>
<li>Where File Is Used</li>
<li>Go To Folder</li>
<li>Get Check Out</li>
<li>DWF File Icon</li>
<li>Opening A File</li>
<li>Refresh From Vault</li>
<li>Add Files Into Vault</li>
<li>Create New Project File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Vault And AutoCAD 
<ul>
<li>Files With External References</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Vault Tasks 
<ul>
<li>Vault User Interface</li>
<li>Quick Search</li>
<li>Shortcuts</li>
<li>Renaming Files</li>
<li>Moving Files</li>
<li>Adding Descriptions</li>
<li>Copying Existing Design</li>
<li>Options</li>
<li>Vault Settings</li>
<li>Deleting Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:06:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Beyond the Basics in MicroStation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/beyond-the-basics-in-microstation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/beyond-the-basics-in-microstation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_beyondbasics.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Beyond the Basics in MicroStation</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Beyond the Basics is for the experienced MicroStation user who needs to build their skills to enhance their designs, use advanced features to organize their project data and maximize the use of available utilities to manage output. We will cover topics on customizing the user interface, using features to increase productivity, ways to organize data, using Project Explorer and a detailed look at printing.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Managing Design File Settings 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>File Settings</li>
<li>User Preferences</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Concepts for Working with Cells 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What are cell libraries?</li>
<li>Creating cell libraries</li>
<li>Creating cells</li>
<li>Importing cells</li>
<li>Cell Properties</li>
<li>Cell index tool</li>
<li>Cell HTML Author</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Custom Line Styles 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Accessing Custom Line Styles</li>
<li>Creating a simple Custom Line Style</li>
<li>Creating a compound Custom Line Style</li>
<li>Managing Line Style Libraries</li>
<li>Editing Line Style Attributes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing File Content 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Standards Checking</li>
<li>Data Clean up</li>
<li>File Comparison</li>
<li>Merging Files</li>
<li>File Fence Command</li>
<li>Compressing Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3><br />Table of Contents - volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>File Open Dialog 
<ul>
<li>-Saved Views</li>
<li>-Resetting the Global Origin</li>
<li>-Exploring the Status Bar</li>
<li>-Special Element Attributes</li>
<li>-Align Elements by Edge</li>
<li>-Curve Tools</li>
<li>-Select by Attribute Tool</li>
<li>-Element Selection Tool</li>
<li>-Change Attribute Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing a Single Sheet 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Print Area</li>
<li>Print Settings</li>
<li>Print Attributes</li>
<li>Save settings file</li>
<li>Print Drivers</li>
<li>Print Preview</li>
<li>Editing Printer Driver</li>
<li>Creating Plot Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing Multiple Pages with Print Organizer 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Print Organizer</li>
<li>Print Styles</li>
<li>Creating a print set</li>
<li>Applying a print style</li>
<li>Printed Output</li>
<li>Using Project Explorer</li>
<li>Using Existing PSET Files</li>
<li>Editing Print Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing with Pen Tables 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What is a pen table?</li>
<li>Editing a pen table</li>
<li>Text Substitution</li>
<li>Pen Color Mapping</li>
<li>Pen Weight Mapping</li>
<li>Advanced element options</li>
<li>Review</li>
<li>AutoCad Interoperability</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing the User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Custom Interface</li>
<li>Importing and Exporting Tools</li>
<li>Context Menus</li>
<li>Migrating Legacy Interfaces</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:01:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Human Resources 101]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/human-resources-101.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/human-resources-101.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_hr101_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Human Resources 101</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Overview of compliance and HR related topics.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Recruiting 
<ul>
<li>Job Related Criteria</li>
<li>Resumes</li>
<li>Applicatoins</li>
<li>Interviewing</li>
<li>Job Offers</li>
<li>Recruiting Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>New Hire Information 
<ul>
<li>I-9 Form</li>
<li>Anti-Harassment Policy</li>
<li>Reporting &amp; Filing Requirements</li>
<li>Onboarding</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Personnel Files 
<ul>
<li>What Is Included?</li>
<li>What Is Not Included?</li>
<li>Who Has Viewing Rights?</li>
<li>Employment Posters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What Benefits To Offer? 
<ul>
<li>Eligibility Decisions</li>
<li>Tax-Saving Strategies</li>
<li>Compliance Considerations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Termination Information 
<ul>
<li>Involuntary Termination</li>
<li>Separation Letter</li>
<li>COBRA Election Notice</li>
<li>Unemployment Pamphlet</li>
<li>Final Pay</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Beyond The Basics 
<ul>
<li>Employment Policies</li>
<li>Compensation Philosophy</li>
<li>Employment Agreements</li>
<li>Performance Management</li>
<li>Social Media</li>
<li>Align Strategies With Business Objectives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">75.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:03:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Giving IT Performance Reviews]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/giving-it-performance-reviews.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/giving-it-performance-reviews.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_reviews_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Giving IT Performance Reviews</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class is designed to assist managers in the creation and presentation of employee performance reviews. To that end, this class discusses common review topics, performance review do's and don'ts, manager/employee interaction and the performance review process.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>The Performance Review Cycle 
<ul>
<li>Should You Still Do A Review</li>
<li>The Performance Review Cycle</li>
<li>Performance Review Process</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General Background 
<ul>
<li>Importance Of Reviews</li>
<li>Types Of Reviews</li>
<li>Common Review Topic Areas</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preparing A Review 
<ul>
<li>Dealing With A Delicate Matter</li>
<li>Preparing For Next Year's Review Starts Now</li>
<li>Schedule Time In Your Calendar To Write Reviews</li>
<li>Use Concrete Examples, Not Vague Statements</li>
<li>Assure Accuracy</li>
<li>Meeting Time And Location</li>
<li>Read From Employee's Perspective</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Giving/Presenting A Review 
<ul>
<li>Reviewing A Friend</li>
<li>You Have A Great Employee</li>
<li>Time Got Short</li>
<li>Be Objective, Not Emotional</li>
<li>Be Constructive, Not Critical</li>
<li>Have A Discussion, Not A Soliloquy</li>
<li>Be Balanced, Discuss Good And Bad</li>
<li>Make Plans Actionable And Measureable</li>
<li>Plan Sufficient Time</li>
<li>Reduce Distractions</li>
<li>Be Respectful</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Technical Review Topics 
<ul>
<li>Using Reviews To Enforce Behavior</li>
<li>Programming Standards</li>
<li>Processes</li>
<li>User Interaction</li>
<li>Project Deliverables</li>
<li>Technical Knowledge</li>
<li>Outro</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:33:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Problem Solving and Decision Making in IT]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/problem-solving-and-decision-making-in-it.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/problem-solving-and-decision-making-in-it.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_problem_solving.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Problem Solving and Decision Making in IT</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class discusses the decision making process and many of the challenges IT leaders face in making timely decisions. It covers the impacts of the human element on decision making, decision constraints, stakeholders, challenges in problem definition, and other related topics. It also includes various structured problem solving tools and exercises such as root cause analysis, multi-voting, brainstorming, and nominal group technique.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Thoughts On Decision Making 
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>The Hidden Choice</li>
<li>Why People Must Make Decisions</li>
<li>Why People Don't Make Decisions</li>
<li>Ways To Make A Decision</li>
<li>Decisions Solve Problems</li>
<li>Decision Making Vs. Problem Solving</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Thoughts On Problem Solving 
<ul>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Decision Making Phases</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Problem Definiton 
<ul>
<li>Realize There Is A Problem</li>
<li>Define The Problem</li>
<li>Define Desired End Estate</li>
<li>Define Stakeholders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Decision To Act On Problem 
<ul>
<li>Analyze Solvability</li>
<li>Decide To Solve A Problem</li>
<li>Estimate Project Size</li>
<li>Define Constraints</li>
<li>Decide To Move Forward</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Define Problem Solving Scope 
<ul>
<li>Define Problem Solving Approach.</li>
<li>Critical Success Factors (CSF)</li>
<li>Level Of Effort/Budget</li>
<li>Team Members</li>
<li>Timeframes</li>
<li>Permission To Move Forward</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finding Root Cause 
<ul>
<li>Brainstorming</li>
<li>Five Whys</li>
<li>Cause Mapping</li>
<li>Ishikawa Diagram</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Prioritizing Root Cause Correction 
<ul>
<li>Decision Trees</li>
<li>User Consensus</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defining Potential Solutions 
<ul>
<li>Brainstorming</li>
<li>Nominal Group Technique</li>
<li>Affinity Diagrams</li>
<li>Six Hats</li>
<li>Trial And Error (Fast Fail)</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Select A Solution 
<ul>
<li>Decision Matrix</li>
<li>Five Finger Method</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:49:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[New IT Manager Essentials]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-it-manager-essentials.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-it-manager-essentials.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_newitmgressent_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>New IT Manager Essentials</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class discusses the core set of personal traits, skills, and knowledge needed to be a great manager including communication skills, interpersonal skills, working with other managers, managing your former peers, dress code, supporting company policies and navigating office politics.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Welcome To Management 
<ul>
<li>Giving Project Assignments</li>
<li>Cube Size</li>
<li>Caring About Your Group</li>
<li>Good Judgment And Interpersonal Skills</li>
<li>Have Kids? You Have Management Experience</li>
<li>Skills Of Both Managers And Parents</li>
<li>Respect</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Management Realities 
<ul>
<li>She Thought She Should Have Your Job</li>
<li>Deciding Who Is Assigned What Tasks</li>
<li>Email-Based Jokes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Now You Get To Manage Your Friends 
<ul>
<li>More On Managing Your Friends</li>
<li>Even More On Managing Your Friends</li>
<li>Why Dress Code Is Important</li>
<li>Ok, What Should You Wear?</li>
<li>Other Managers Are Now Your Peers</li>
<li>Managers Live In Fish Tanks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Communication Is King 
<ul>
<li>Working With Other Managers</li>
<li>Communicating Vs. Bragging</li>
<li>New Vacation Policy</li>
<li>Being The Chief Cheerleader For Your Department</li>
<li>Knowing What Not To Send In An Email</li>
<li>Manager-Level Politics</li>
<li>Managing Up</li>
<li>Managing Down</li>
<li>Good News, Some Politics Go Away</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Politics 
<ul>
<li>Your Business Peers Are Not Your Peers</li>
<li>Getting Dotted Line Resources</li>
<li>Having A Dotted Line Manager</li>
<li>Saying No To Your Business User</li>
<li>Scope Creep On Your Projects</li>
<li>Asking For User Resources</li>
<li>User Acceptance Testing (UAT) Issues</li>
<li>Respecting User Business Cycles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:23:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[IT Manager Ethics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/it-manager-ethics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/it-manager-ethics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_itmgrethics_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>IT Manager Ethics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class discusses both ethical issues and ethical practices with the goal of reminding people to act ethically for the good of the company, their staff and themselves. From an issue perspective, it raises various difficult scenarios, with the goal of providing the manager with food for thought on how to handle these topics if the need arises. From an ethical practices perspective, it highlights a number of important and commonplace topics and suggests appropriate management responses.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Why Study Manager Ethics? 
<ul>
<li>With Good Intentions</li>
<li>Importance Of Doing The Right Thing</li>
<li>Importance Of Not Doing The Wrong Thing</li>
<li>Wow, I Did The Wrong Thing, Now What?</li>
<li>The Golden Rule</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Good Things 
<ul>
<li>Doing What's Right For The Company</li>
<li>Speaking About Others</li>
<li>Following The Company Line</li>
<li>The Rule Of No Surprises</li>
<li>Act Quickly When Issues Arise</li>
<li>Developing Trust</li>
<li>Allowing For Employee's Personal Needs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Bad Things 
<ul>
<li>What To Say To Your Boss</li>
<li>What To Say To Your Subordinates</li>
<li>What To Say, What To Do?</li>
<li>Sexual Harassing Of A Co-Worker</li>
<li>Playing Favorites</li>
<li>Gossiping About Your Staff</li>
<li>Lying To Your Staff</li>
<li>Leaving Employee Data In The Open</li>
<li>Never Make Promises You Can't Keep</li>
<li>Making Racial, Sexual, Or Their Jokes In Bad Taste</li>
<li>Having Sexual Relations With A Subordinate</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The IT Things 
<ul>
<li>What To Say To Your Boss</li>
<li>It's A Small Industry</li>
<li>Lying To A Business User</li>
<li>Following IT Process</li>
<li>Editing Data Outside Audit Trails/Logs</li>
<li>Pirated Software</li>
<li>Distributing Unlicensed Software</li>
<li>Taking Company Source Code When You Leave</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:15:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[The IT Hiring Process]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-it-hiring-process.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/the-it-hiring-process.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_it_hiring_process_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The IT Hiring Process</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class is designed to provide IT managers with an overview of the hiring process, and gain an understanding of various time-tested techniques and practices used in the effort of hiring the best people.  It goes on to discuss specific issues related to hiring programmers and other technical professions.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Key Items 
<ul>
<li>Do You Budget For The Req?</li>
<li>Hiring Good People</li>
<li>Thoughts On The Hiring Process</li>
<li>Interview Related Laws And Regulations</li>
<li>In Office Lingo, It's A 'Req"</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Issues When Hiring Techies 
<ul>
<li>Reading Resume Alphabet Soup</li>
<li>Assessing Programmer Ability</li>
<li>Assessing Code Maintainability</li>
<li>Ability To Talk To Users</li>
<li>Ability To Work Within An IT Team</li>
<li>Willingness To Follow IT Standards</li>
<li>Work Habits</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hiring Steps 
<ul>
<li>Advantages Of Hiring An Employee Referral</li>
<li>What Is Your Job Description</li>
<li>Getting Permission To Hire</li>
<li>Finding People To Interview</li>
<li>Reviewing Resumes</li>
<li>When You Recognize The Name On A Resume</li>
<li>The Interview Process</li>
<li>Choosing The Best Candidate</li>
<li>Do You Really Have To Hire That Candidate?</li>
<li>Deciding Which Person To Hire</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:07:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[IT Cost Center Management]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/it-cost-center-management.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/it-cost-center-management.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cost_center_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>IT Cost Center Management</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class provides an introduction to the budgeting process. It is ideal for new managers that do not have a budgeting background, seasoned managers that have not had cost center responsibility, and/or anyone who does not have experience in corporate budgeting practices.</p>
<p>This class takes a very narrow view of budgeting. It specifically concentrates on the issues, responsibilities, and activities of cost center managers. That is, as a manager responsible for department expenses.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Budget Importance 
<ul>
<li>Budget Importance</li>
<li>The Budget Process</li>
<li>Use Of The Word Budget</li>
<li>Importance Of Your Budget To Others</li>
<li>Importance Of Your Budget To You</li>
<li>Your Relationship With The Finance Department</li>
<li>Working With The Finance Department</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Components Of Your Budget 
<ul>
<li>Components Of Your Budget</li>
<li>No Control Budget Items</li>
<li>Some Control Budget Items</li>
<li>Full Control Budget Items</li>
<li>Expenses Vs. Capitalized Expenses</li>
<li>General Budgeting Terms</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>IT Funding And Allocations 
<ul>
<li>IT Specific Budget Line Items</li>
<li>Budget Processes</li>
<li>Cost Allocations</li>
<li>Charge Backs</li>
<li>Project Based Funding</li>
<li>Budget Philosophies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Budget Process 
<ul>
<li>Your Budget Is Too Small, What Do You Do?</li>
<li>Problems With A No Control Budget Item</li>
<li>Budget Timing</li>
<li>Budget Forecasting Techniques</li>
<li>Creating Budget Contingency</li>
<li>Budget Vs. Actual Reporting Throughout The Year</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Your IT Budget And... 
<ul>
<li>What This Means To Your Budget</li>
<li>Cloud Computing</li>
<li>Increase Use Of Video</li>
<li>Mobile Devices</li>
<li>Remote Working</li>
<li>Legal And Compliance</li>
<li>Social Media And Active Listening</li>
<li>Service Level Agreements (SLAs)</li>
<li>Strength/Weakness Of US Dollar</li>
<li>Strength/Weakness Of US Economy</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:13:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Understanding the NAD 83 Datum for TerraSync and Pathfinder Office Users]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/understanding-the-nad-83-datum-for-terrasync-and-pathfinder-office-users.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/understanding-the-nad-83-datum-for-terrasync-and-pathfinder-office-users.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_nad83datum_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Understanding the NAD 83 Datum for TerraSync and Pathfinder Office Users</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Many Geographic Information Systems (GIS) in the United States utilize the North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83).  When using Trimble MGIS receivers with the TerraSync software and the Pathfinder Office software users need to be aware of software settings that can cause data not to line up correctly when compared against base mapping in the GIS.  You will learn the effects of the software settings in TerraSync and Pathfinder Office to ensure the data going into the GIS will agree with the base mapping.  To qualify for PDH&rsquo;s you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion.  You are responsible for claiming the PDH&rsquo;s.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>The NAD 83 and WGS-84 Datum</li>
<li>NAD 83 Datum in Pathfinder Office and TerraSync 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Autonomous Data Collection and Differential Correction</li>
<li>SBAS Data Collection and Exporting</li>
<li>VRS or Single Base Data Collection and Exporting</li>
<li>Working with the NAD 83 Datum in Pathfinder Office and TerraSync - Workflow Documents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>A New NAD 83 (2011)</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 14:01:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2012_essent1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2012 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2012 Essentials Training is a 3 day training course which provides the users with the knowledge to get started using AutoCAD Civil 3D. There are three volumes full of video which covers the installation and setup through every major feature of Civil 3D 2012. A data set is provided for the student to follow along with each lecture which are indexed to make finding and review a specific topic simple and fast.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Start up Screen</li>
<li>Sample Demo Project</li>
<li>User Interface Overview</li>
<li>Civil 3D Points 
<ul>
<li>Drawing Template</li>
<li>Save Drawing</li>
<li>Drawing Settings</li>
<li>Import Data</li>
<li>Create Points</li>
<li>Import Points</li>
<li>Point Properties</li>
<li>Zoom to Point</li>
<li>Change Point Display</li>
<li>Point Groups</li>
<li>Point Stlyes</li>
<li>Point Label Style</li>
<li>Drag Point Label</li>
<li>Point Group Sort Order</li>
<li>Point Description Key Set</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Surface Concepts</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Surface Style</li>
<li>Level of Detail</li>
<li>Surface Edits</li>
<li>Create Breaklines</li>
<li>Create Surface Boundary</li>
<li>Surface Properties</li>
<li>Slope Analysis</li>
<li>Surface Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Civil 3D Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Alignment from Object</li>
<li>Alignment Properties</li>
<li>Edit Alignment</li>
<li>Create Alignment by Layout</li>
<li>Create Alignment using Transparent Commands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Civil 3D Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Create Surface Profile</li>
<li>Profile View Properties</li>
<li>Profile Properties</li>
<li>Profile Style</li>
<li>Profile View Style</li>
<li>Create Design Profile</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3</h3>
<ul>
<li>Civil 3D Corridor Model 
<ul>
<li>Subassembly Toolpalette</li>
<li>Subassembly Help</li>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
<li>Mirror Subassembly</li>
<li>Modify Assembly Properties</li>
<li>Create Corridor</li>
<li>Modify Region</li>
<li>View Corridor in Object Viewer</li>
<li>Corridor Properties</li>
<li>Corridor Surface</li>
<li>Corridor Section Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Civil 3D Sample Lines and Section Views 
<ul>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
<li>Volume Quantities</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Civil 3D Pipes Network Layout 
<ul>
<li>Create Part List</li>
<li>Create Pipe Network</li>
<li>Draw Parts in Profile View</li>
<li>Add Network Labels</li>
<li>Part Properties</li>
<li>Edit Pipe Network</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Civil 3D Grading 
<ul>
<li>Create Feature Line From Object</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Geometry Tools</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Elevation Tools</li>
<li>Elevation Editor</li>
<li>Create Surface from Feature Line</li>
<li>Insert Elevation Point</li>
<li>Create Stepped Offset</li>
<li>Grading Features</li>
<li>Pond Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:32:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Pipe Networks]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-pipe-networks.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-pipe-networks.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_pipenetwk_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Pipe Networks</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD offers over 2 hours of instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and analyze pipe networks in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  The instructor begins with a high level overview of pipe network functionality, and then walks through an example of a sanitary sewer design in an urban setting.  Topics of discussion include surface preparation, projecting invert shots to profile view, creating/editing a pipe network, parts lists, styles, labeling and culvert modeling.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Agenda and Overview</li>
<li>Pipe Sizing Capabilities</li>
<li>User Interface - Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Surface Preparation</li>
<li>Project Object to Profile View</li>
<li>Catalog and Parts List</li>
<li>Delete Pipe Network Data</li>
<li>Create Sanitary Pipe Network</li>
<li>Analyze Pipe Network Data</li>
<li>Edit Pipe Network</li>
<li>Add Parts to Network</li>
<li>Pipe and Structure Styles</li>
<li>Label Styles</li>
<li>Profile View Band</li>
<li>Style Overrides</li>
<li>Culvert Modeling</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:06:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Plan Production Tools]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-plan-production-tools.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-plan-production-tools.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_planprod_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Plan Production Tools</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D Plan Production Tools help you automate the creation of plan, profile, plan/profile and cross section sheets.  This cloudDVD offers 68 minutes of instruction on how to create both plan/profile and cross section sheets using the plan production tools.  The instructor offers tips for setting up the drawing templates, and the step by step procedures for creating both plan/profile and cross section sheets.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Plan Production Tools Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Plan and Profile Sheets</li>
<li>Setup Drawing Template DWT</li>
<li>Create view Frames</li>
<li>Review and Edit View Frames</li>
<li>Create Sheets</li>
<li>Editing Sheets</li>
<li>Sheet Set Manager</li>
<li>Cross Section Sheets</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Alignment Reference Object</li>
<li>Corridor Xref</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Setup Drawing Template</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
<li>Create Section Sheets</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:22:37 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Data Sharing]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-data-sharing.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-data-sharing.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_datashare_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Data Sharing</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>There are many different ways to share entity and object data in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  This cloudDVD offers 68 minutes of instruction on how to create AutoCAD Civil 3D reference objects from data shortcuts.  The session begins with a high level overview of data sharing capabilities and strategies.  The instructor then uses a real life subdivision to demonstrate techniques for developing the drawing and data architecture that allows changes to propagate through dependent drawings.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Introduction</li>
<li>Agenda and Strategies</li>
<li>Data Sharing Tools</li>
<li>Drawing and Data Architecture</li>
<li>Data Sharing Schematic</li>
<li>Data Sharing Demonstration</li>
<li>Set Working Folder</li>
<li>Data Shortcut Project Folder</li>
<li>Create Data Shortcut for Surface</li>
<li>Create Reference Object for Surface</li>
<li>Reference Object Updates</li>
<li>Data Shortcut Project</li>
<li>Alignment Data Shortcuts</li>
<li>Alignment Reference Objects</li>
<li>Surface Profiles from Surface Reference</li>
<li>Profile Data Shortcut</li>
<li>Alignment Profile and Surface Reference Objects</li>
<li>Create Corridor Model and Surfaces</li>
<li>Sample Lines and Section Views</li>
<li>Production Drawings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:18:35 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit MEP Suite 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-mep-suite-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-mep-suite-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitmep2012suite1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit MEP Suite 2012 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The primary objective of this course is to teach students the core functionality tools of Revit, which are necessary for creating 3D modeling and design projects using Revit MEP 2012. At the end of the course, you will be able to start a project, understand the core concepts of Revit and Bim and be familiar with view creation and project worksharing.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Objective</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Status</li>
<li>View Properties</li>
<li>Revit Families</li>
<li>Element Properties 
<ul>
<li>Instance Properties</li>
<li>Type Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sections Elevations</li>
<li>Linking Arch Model</li>
<li>Copy Monitor 
<ul>
<li>Copy Monitor Tool</li>
<li>Copy Tool</li>
<li>Monitor Tool</li>
<li>Align Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Templates</li>
<li>Worksets</li>
<li>Creating Details 
<ul>
<li>Drafting Views</li>
<li>Anitate Tab</li>
<li>Properties Palate</li>
<li>Import a CAD Drawing</li>
<li>Creating a Sheet</li>
<li>Referencing a Detail in a Model</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Schedules</li>
<li>Creating Spaces</li>
<li>Creating Zones</li>
<li>Space Engineering Data</li>
<li>Load Calculations</li>
<li>Mechanical Settings</li>
<li>Diffusers Insert Modify</li>
<li>Creating Air Systems</li>
<li>Duct Sizing Options</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Insert Plumbing Fixtures 
<ul>
<li>Finding plumbing fixtures</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Auto Pipe Layout 
<ul>
<li>Generate a Layout</li>
<li>Edit Layout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Edit Sanitary 
<ul>
<li>Creating a piping system</li>
<li>Generate a layout for the sanitary system</li>
<li>Editing the sanitary system</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fire Protection 
<ul>
<li>Creating the piping sytem</li>
<li>Generating the layout for the piping</li>
<li>Tagging items within the pipes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Electrical Settings</li>
<li>Insert Lighting 
<ul>
<li>Create a circuit</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Switch Systems</li>
<li>Insert and Modify Panel Schedules</li>
<li>Circuiting Devices 
<ul>
<li>Inserting the circuit devices</li>
<li>Creating a power system</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Panels</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:11:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Navisworks Simulate 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-simulate-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-simulate-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_navsim2011essen_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Navisworks Simulate 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Navisworks Simulate teaches students the basic knowledge needed to use the most common features of Autodesk Navisworks Simulate. Navisworks combines 2D and 3D geometry from multiple disciplines into one application to enable effective model views.   Students will learn how to open, review, and run 4D simulations.</p>
<p>This course is designed to give design professionals the tools they need to be productive within Navisworks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>File Types 
<ul>
<li>NWD Files</li>
<li>NWF Files</li>
<li>NWC Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Appending/Merging Files 
<ul>
<li>Selection Tree</li>
<li>Publishing Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>NavisWorks Interface 
<ul>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Scene View</li>
<li>Dockable Windows</li>
<li>Saving Workspaces</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Navigating The Model 
<ul>
<li>Navigation Bar / View Cube</li>
<li>Coordinate Display</li>
<li>NavisWorks Engine</li>
<li>Selection Tree</li>
<li>Sets</li>
<li>Viewpoints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Animation 
<ul>
<li>Recording Animations</li>
<li>Viewpoint Animations</li>
<li>Editing Animations</li>
<li>Exporting Animations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Timeliner Simulation 
<ul>
<li>Creating Timeliner Tasks</li>
<li>Import Tasks From Project Files</li>
<li>Configure And Define A Simulation</li>
<li>Export A Simulation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:16:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to 3D Laser Scanning]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-3d-laser-scanning.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-3d-laser-scanning.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_intro_3dlaserscan_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to 3D Laser Scanning</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course gives a basic overview of 3D laser scanning. At the end of this course you'll have a good understanding of the basic operating principles, 3D image data, applications and platforms, project planning, scanning procedures, digital modeling and organizational change that comes with 3D laser scanning.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>The Agenda</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Operating Principles 
<ul>
<li>Key Terms</li>
<li>Timelines</li>
<li>Measuring in 3D</li>
<li>Physics- Basic Components</li>
<li>Types of Scanners</li>
<li>Safety Considerations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>3D Image Data 
<ul>
<li>The Point Cloud</li>
<li>Attributes</li>
<li>Data Formats</li>
<li>Integration Issues</li>
<li>Future Trends</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Platforms and Applications 
<ul>
<li>Short Range/Small Scale</li>
<li>Medium Range/Mid-Volume</li>
<li>Long Range</li>
<li>LIDAR System Configurations</li>
<li>Aerosol Research</li>
<li>Laser Altimetry- LIDAR</li>
<li>Process Plant</li>
<li>Architectural</li>
<li>Infrastructure</li>
<li>Mining</li>
<li>Forensics and Security</li>
<li>Digital Historic Preservation</li>
<li>Construction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Planning 
<ul>
<li>Background</li>
<li>Project Scoping</li>
<li>Error Budget</li>
<li>Methodology</li>
<li>QA/QC Plan</li>
<li>Personnel and Logisitics</li>
<li>Equipment Calibration</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scanning Procedures 
<ul>
<li>Mobilization</li>
<li>Project Recon</li>
<li>Scanner Locations</li>
<li>Targeting</li>
<li>Survey Control</li>
<li>Data Collection</li>
<li>Mobile Platforms</li>
<li>Field Validation &amp; Closeout</li>
<li>Field Operations: Quality Assurance</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Digital Modeling 
<ul>
<li>Post Processing</li>
<li>Multiple Scan Registration</li>
<li>Field Operations: Quality Assurance</li>
<li>Georeferencing</li>
<li>Data Visualization</li>
<li>Attribute Creation</li>
<li>Feature Extraction</li>
<li>3D Modeling</li>
<li>Digital Terrain Modeling</li>
<li>DSM- Digital Surface Model</li>
<li>Image Draping</li>
<li>Class Detection</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Organizational Change 
<ul>
<li>Technology Adoption Life Cycle</li>
<li>Disruptive Technology</li>
<li>Plan for Failure</li>
<li>The Tipping Point</li>
<li>Lessons Learned</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:28:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Sample Lines, Sections and Volumes]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-sample-lines-sections-and-volumes.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-sample-lines-sections-and-volumes.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011smplelines_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to create sample lines, attach section data, create section views and calculate end-area volumes using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to create sample lines, attach section data, create section views and calculate end-area volumes using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  The 99 minute instructor-led session is indexed into 25 lessons, making it easy for you to retrieve the specific information you require.  Learn how to create sample lines and attach the data required for i) volume calculations and ii) viewing in section views.  Also learn how to create the section views and calculate volumes for sample lines in different sample line groups.  The session ends with an in depth discussion and lesson on creating code set styles for displaying and annotating corridor section data in section views.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Sample Lines Overview</li>
<li>Sections and User Interface</li>
<li>User Interface - Volumes</li>
<li>Section Data Types</li>
<li>Choosing Section Data</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Prospector - Sample Line Data</li>
<li>Edit Sample Line Geometry</li>
<li>Create Section Views 1</li>
<li>Delete Section Views</li>
<li>Sample Lines and Section Views</li>
<li>Create Section Views 2</li>
<li>Zoom to Section View</li>
<li>Volume Calculation Overview</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff Criteria</li>
<li>Compute Materials 1</li>
<li>Attach Additional Data</li>
<li>Compute Materials 2</li>
<li>Overhang Correction</li>
<li>Volume Reports</li>
<li>Display Section Data</li>
<li>Create Code Set Style</li>
<li>Styles and Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:23:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Constant Contact: How to Create an Email Newsletter]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/constant-contact-how-to-create-an-email-newsletter.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/constant-contact-how-to-create-an-email-newsletter.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_constantcontact_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Constant Contact: How to Create an Email Newsletter</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>One of the best ways to build customer retention is to build value for them.  Constant Contact provides a method for communicating with those in your network.  This training is designed to walk you through the simple step-by-step process of creating a Constant Contact email newsletter.  Newsletters provide significant value to your audience and are a great way to stay &ldquo;top of mind&rdquo;</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Sign Up</li>
<li>Errors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Email Marketing Tab 
<ul>
<li>Verify Email Address</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Email 
<ul>
<li>Enter An Email Name</li>
<li>Choose A Template</li>
<li>Email Message Setting</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Newsletter 
<ul>
<li>Insert A Image</li>
<li>Adding Text</li>
<li>Change Greeting</li>
<li>Editing Text</li>
<li>Resize Image Or Graphic</li>
<li>Moving An Image</li>
<li>Saving</li>
<li>Spellcheck</li>
<li>Add A Link</li>
<li>Add Buttons</li>
<li>Preview Email</li>
<li>Enter Physical Address</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Email Selection 
<ul>
<li>Enter Email Address</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Send Email 
<ul>
<li>Schedule Email</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">15.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:05:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[How to Create a Facebook Advertisement]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-create-a-facebook-advertisement.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-create-a-facebook-advertisement.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_facebookadvert_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>How to Create a Facebook Advertisement</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>There are almost one billion people on Facebook and it has become a proven source of generating business.  In this training we will teach you how to create a Facebook advertisement so that you can reach new customers.  Facebook helps you target specific audiences to make sure your advertisement does not fall on deaf ears.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>How to Create a Facebook Advertisement</li>
<li>Creating a Facebook Company Page 
<ul>
<li>Opening the Personal Page</li>
<li>Create a Page</li>
<li>Designing the Page</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Facebook Advertising 
<ul>
<li>Facebook in our Lives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Designing an Advertisement 
<ul>
<li>The Destination of the Ad</li>
<li>Targeting the Ad</li>
<li>Paying for the Ad</li>
<li>Campaign Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating A Facebook Fan Page 
<ul>
<li>Create A Business Page</li>
<li>Designing The Page</li>
<li>Tour Of The Page</li>
<li>Promote An Add</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
&nbsp;</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">15.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:58:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[How to Build a LinkedIn Page]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-build-a-linkedin-page.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-build-a-linkedin-page.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_linkedin_setup_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>How to Build a LinkedIn Page</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>If you are a business professional and want to use a powerful tool to increase your business; learning how to create a LinkedIn page.  LinkedIn is the ideal business-to-business networking tool.  Building a page helps you start to build relationships with potential customers, vendors and partners.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating An Account</li>
<li>Home Page</li>
<li>Edit Profile 
<ul>
<li>Adding A Photo</li>
<li>Current Position</li>
<li>Add Past Positions</li>
<li>Adding Education</li>
<li>Recommendations</li>
<li>Adding Connections</li>
<li>Adding Websites</li>
<li>Add Twitter Account</li>
<li>Public Profile</li>
<li>Summary</li>
<li>Personal Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Profile</li>
<li>Functionality Of LinkedIn</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">15.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:57:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[How to Setup a Twitter Account]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-setup-a-twitter-account.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/how-to-setup-a-twitter-account.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_setuptwitter_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>How to Setup a Twitter Account</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Do you need to find customers and drive them to your website?  Twitter can help gain exposure for you and/or your business.  Twitter is a great tool to &ldquo;get the word out!&rdquo;  In this training we will walk you through how to set up a Twitter account and more importantly find friends and other clients so you can start to interact and build relationships.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Setting Up An Account 
<ul>
<li>Choosing A Username</li>
<li>Finding Friends</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Update Profile 
<ul>
<li>Confirm The Account</li>
<li>Add A Photo</li>
<li>Search</li>
<li>Changing Background</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Writing A Tweet</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:01:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to SharePoint 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-sharepoint-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-sharepoint-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sharepoint2010_intro_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to SharePoint 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn the basics of SharePoint 2010. Understanding Lists &amp; Libraries, uploading content, creating Team Sites, and setting permissions. The course also demonstrates the integration of SharePoint with Microsoft Office 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction to SharePoint 2010</li>
<li>What is SharePoint?</li>
<li>Using a Team Site 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Team Site</li>
<li>Navigating Sites</li>
<li>Creating a Blog</li>
<li>Understanding Lists and Libraries</li>
<li>Editing a Team Site Page</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Libraries 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Uploading Documents</li>
<li>Working with Documents</li>
<li>Using Versioning</li>
<li>Using Check in/Check out</li>
<li>Managing Documents</li>
<li>Creating Libraries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Lists</li>
<li>Using SharePoint with Office 2010</li>
<li>Customizing SharePoint</li>
<li>Setting Permissions</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:32:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Captivate 5 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-5-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-5-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_captivate5_intro_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Captivate 5 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn the fundamentals of Adobe Captivate 5, the leading e-learning development tool on the market. This course examines how to create software simulations, work with objects such as captions, images, highlights, and zoom boxes. Create quizzes, publish to flash and MS Word, and learn techniques for creating effective courses.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Opening a Project</li>
<li>Using the Interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Project 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>New Project Options</li>
<li>Adding Text Captions</li>
<li>Understanding the Timeline</li>
<li>Previewing the Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Software Simulations 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Preparing to Record</li>
<li>Choosing Recording Options</li>
<li>Recording Modes</li>
<li>Recording in Demo Mode</li>
<li>Recording in Custom Mode</li>
<li>Editing a Simluation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enhancing a Project 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding New Slides</li>
<li>Inserting Animated Text</li>
<li>Using Highlight Boxes</li>
<li>Adding Zoom Boxes</li>
<li>Inserting Images</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Quizzes 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding Question Slides</li>
<li>Creating and Editing Questions</li>
<li>Modifying Quiz Properties</li>
<li>Modifying Quiz Preferences</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Publishing a Project 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Resizing a Project</li>
<li>Using the Skin Editor</li>
<li>Exporting to Word</li>
<li>Publish to Flash</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">52.5000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:55:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Kitchen Microbes 101]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/kitchen-microbes-101.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/kitchen-microbes-101.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_kitchmcrobes101_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle also comes with a certification exam.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This presentation reviews the most common microorganisms that are of concern in the kitchen, including specific foods that are associated with bacteria, viruses, parasites and fungi.  Through easy-to-understand scientific explanations,  the major factors contributing to microorganism growth are discussed as well as barriers that food workers can put in place in order to control growth of harmful microorganisms, and keep foods safer and healthier for customers.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What is a Microorganism</li>
<li>BACTERIA</li>
<li>TCS foods</li>
<li>FATTOM</li>
<li>Infections and Intoxications</li>
<li>Salmonella</li>
<li>Listeria</li>
<li>Campylobacter</li>
<li>Vibrio</li>
<li>Shigella</li>
<li>E.coli O157:H7</li>
<li>Clostridium botulinum</li>
<li>Staphylococcus</li>
<li>Bacillus cereus</li>
<li>VIRUSES</li>
<li>Hepatitis A</li>
<li>Norovirus</li>
<li>Major illlness and employees</li>
<li>PARASITES</li>
<li>FUNGI</li>
<li>Final Comments</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:35:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Food Safety Overview]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/food-safety-overview.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/food-safety-overview.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_foodsafeovrvw_sm_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle also comes with a certification exam.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This presentation reviews the 3 main hazards to food and ways that food workers can prevent Cross-contamination, Poor personal hygiene and Time and temperature Abuse in their food operations.  Practical food safety principles based on the 2009 FDA Food Code are discussed, including proper procedures for preparation, cooking, storage, sanitation, allergens and pest control. This workshop is a must-have for all types of food workers and provides a solid foundation for their activities no matter what their role in their food establishment, market or school.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction for Food Workers</li>
<li>Hidden Hazards in Food</li>
<li>TCS Foods</li>
<li>Bacteria in foods</li>
<li>Viruses and illness</li>
<li>Flow of Food</li>
<li>Personal Hygiene</li>
<li>Gloves and bare hand contact</li>
<li>Illness and injury</li>
<li>Preventing Cross Contamination</li>
<li>Cleaning and Sanitizing</li>
<li>Time and Temperature Controls- Temperature Danger Zone</li>
<li>4-hour Rule</li>
<li>Thawing foods</li>
<li>Cooking foods</li>
<li>Cooling hot foods</li>
<li>Reheating cold foods</li>
<li>Service- Hot and cold holding</li>
<li>Food Allergies</li>
<li>Sanitation and Pest Control</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:25:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Don't Pick Off The Croutons]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/don-t-pick-off-the-croutons.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/don-t-pick-off-the-croutons.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_croutons_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Don't Pick Off The Croutons</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Practical Food Service Guide for Handling Allergens Safely.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What's the Fuss?</li>
<li>Allergen Prevelance and Causes</li>
<li>Allergens 101 and the "Big 8" Allergens</li>
<li>Food Intolerances</li>
<li>Restaurant-Customer Connection</li>
<li>Ingredients</li>
<li>Reading Labels and Revealing Hidden Ingredients</li>
<li>Cross-Contamination</li>
<li>Communication Strategies</li>
<li>Procedures for Servers and Hosts</li>
<li>Procedures for the Kitchen Staff</li>
<li>Training the Front and Back of House Staff</li>
<li>Practical Strategies</li>
<li>Taking Active Managerial Control</li>
<li>Summary... 11 Lessons Learned</li>
<li>Appendix Files 
<ul>
<li>Appendix A - Major Food Allergens and Alternate Names</li>
<li>Appendix B - Emergency Procedures</li>
<li>Appendix C - Facts and Practical Procedures</li>
<li>Appendix D - Active Managerial Control and Self-assessments</li>
<li>Appendix E - Resources Open and show note</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">20.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Nov 2011 17:59:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries) User Update]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-selectseries-user-update.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-selectseries-user-update.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_v8i_select_update_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries) User Update</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>For users migrating to the new V8i (SELECTseries) releases of MicroStation. The goal of EnvisionCAD's cloudDVD is to familiarize you with the new interface and tools so you can be productive with SELECTseries software in a short amount of time. Also included in this training bundle is a certification exam that tests your knowledge on the course content. Complete the exam successfully and you can print a certificate marking your accomplishment.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Download All Lab Files</li>
<li>MicroStation Basics 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to MicroStation Basics</li>
<li>Introduction to Recommended Hardware</li>
<li>Introduction to Directory Changes</li>
<li>Introduction to MicroStation Manager</li>
<li>MicroStation Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The MicroStation Graphics Environment 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction to the Interface</li>
<li>Introduction to the Status Bar</li>
<li>Introduction to MicroStation Tasks</li>
<li>Introduction to MicroStation Dialogs</li>
<li>Introduction to Mouse Mechanics</li>
<li>MicroStation Interface</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Tasks Navigator</li>
<li>Working with Dialogs</li>
<li>Mouse Mechanics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Viewing Your Drawing 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction to Viewing</li>
<li>Introduction to View Options</li>
<li>Introduction to View Attributes</li>
<li>Introduction to Saved Views</li>
<li>Introduction to Mouse View Control</li>
<li>Viewing</li>
<li>View Attributes Dialog</li>
<li>Display Styles</li>
<li>Rotate 3D View</li>
<li>Mouse for View Control</li>
<li>Saved Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction to Design File Settings</li>
<li>Introduction to Colors</li>
<li>Introduction to Tool Enhancements</li>
<li>Introduction to Manipulate and Modify Toolbar</li>
<li>Introduction to Change Attributes</li>
<li>Design File Settings</li>
<li>Colors</li>
<li>Color Table Dialog</li>
<li>Color Books Dialog</li>
<li>Gradient Fill</li>
<li>Place Line and Arc</li>
<li>AccuDraw</li>
<li>Manipulate Toolbar</li>
<li>Modify Toolbar</li>
<li>Change Attributes Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Selection and Information 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction to Element Selection</li>
<li>Introduction to Fences</li>
<li>Introduction to Measuring</li>
<li>Introduction to Element Information</li>
<li>Element Selection</li>
<li>Fences</li>
<li>Measuring</li>
<li>Element Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Levels 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction Level Manager</li>
<li>Introduction Level Display</li>
<li>Level Manager</li>
<li>Level Display</li>
<li>Level Priority and Transparency</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotations 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction Inserting Symbols</li>
<li>Introduction Text Fields</li>
<li>Introduction Misc Text Tools</li>
<li>Inserting Symbols</li>
<li>Text Fields</li>
<li>Place Multiple Leader Lines</li>
<li>Enter Data Field</li>
<li>Change Case</li>
<li>Spell Check in Notes</li>
<li>Cloud Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Models and Cells 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction Models</li>
<li>Introduction Cells</li>
<li>Models</li>
<li>Cells</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Referencing 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction Reference Dialog</li>
<li>Introduction Reference Attachment Settings</li>
<li>Introduction Reference File Attachment Types</li>
<li>Reference Dialog</li>
<li>Activate Reference</li>
<li>Reference File Types to Attach</li>
<li>Raster File Types to Attach</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing 
<ul>
<li>Lab Files</li>
<li>Introduction to Print Drivers</li>
<li>Introduction to Print Dialog</li>
<li>Introduction to Pen Tables</li>
<li>Plot Drivers</li>
<li>Print Dialog</li>
<li>Bentley Driver PDF</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printer Driver Configuration Dialog 
<ul>
<li>Print Dialog Rasterized</li>
<li>Use Full Sheet</li>
<li>Output</li>
<li>Save Print Definition File</li>
<li>Print Attributes</li>
<li>Print Preferences</li>
<li>Create 3D PDF</li>
<li>View 3D PDF</li>
<li>3D Plotting Options</li>
<li>Pen Table</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:36:41 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Roxy and Zav's Barbecue]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-roxy-and-zav-s-barbecue.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-roxy-and-zav-s-barbecue.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_roxyzavbarbecue_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Green Apple Tales - Roxy and Zav's Barbecue</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Roxy Raccoon has a pleasant surprise while she is relaxing by the river. What will her new friend Zav cook at their barbecue picnic, and are these strange, delicious foods safe to eat?</p>
<p>Cooking is what kills bacteria in foods and makes them safe to eat. Learn how Roxy and Zav had a wonderful picnic lunch and cooked various foods to their safe internal temperatures. Food thermometer discussion, as well as temperature chart for safe cooking at home.</p>
<p>2 yummy recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Roxy and Zav and can be prepared easily at home. A fun coloring book is also included for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Roxy and Zav's Barbecue - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:49:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro on a Ranger 3 using a Mobile Hotspot Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsspectra_mobhot_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software on a Ranger 3.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software on a Ranger 3.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration with Ranger 3</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Survey Pro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Short Cut to Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Receiver Profile in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Transferring Data to Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:16:25 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Recruiting and Interview Skills]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/recruiting-and-interview-skills.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/recruiting-and-interview-skills.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_recruitintrview_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Recruiting and Interview Skills</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Manager's Series : Take the mystery out of your next hire by learning how to assess the skills needed to complete the job, asking effective interview questions and avoiding any legal pitfalls.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Assessing Skills &amp; Sourcing Candidates 
<ul>
<li>Defining the Skills You Need</li>
<li>Sourcing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Interview 
<ul>
<li>Interview Structure</li>
<li>Opening</li>
<li>Gathering Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Questioning Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Performance Based Behavioral Questions</li>
<li>The Probing Technique</li>
<li>Direct Questions</li>
<li>Flip Side Questions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Closing the Deal 
<ul>
<li>Active Listening</li>
<li>Providing Information</li>
<li>Closing</li>
<li>Interview Etiquette</li>
<li>Evaluation and Documentation</li>
<li>Reference Checking &amp; Job Offer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Legal Interviewing</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:54:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Grading and Feature Lines]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-grading-and-feature-lines.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-grading-and-feature-lines.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_grade_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Grading and Feature Lines</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use Feature Lines and Grading Objects, and apply them to create an actual pond design in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  This 110 minute session delves into the detail on creating, editing, managing, displaying and labeling feature lines and grading objects.  The instructor uses a storm water storage pond example to convey the techniques, and offers discussion on general grading strategies, high level overview concepts and calculating earthworks volumes.  The session ends with a lesson on how to calculate storage volumes for different water surface elevations.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Grading Strategies</li>
<li>Sites and Topology</li>
<li>Prepare Large Surface</li>
<li>Feature Line Creation Methods</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Elevations</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Geometry</li>
<li>Feature Line Styles</li>
<li>Feature Line Labels</li>
<li>Initialize Pond Grading</li>
<li>Grading Group</li>
<li>Set Target Surface</li>
<li>Create Grading Objects</li>
<li>Grading Object Styles</li>
<li>Calculate Volumes</li>
<li>Storage Volumes</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:32:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Electrical 2011 Advanced Productivity]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2011-advanced-productivity.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2011-advanced-productivity.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadelec11advprd_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD Electrical 2011 Advanced Productivity</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The following demonstrations supply how to use the AutoCAD Electrical for custom wire layers, related reference files, drawing and project properties, custom template files, installation and search paths, custom symbols, Icon menu wizard, custom catalog data, custom pinlists, terminal properties, title block setup and update, updating projects from spreadsheets and generating automated reports.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Settings and Configurations 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Types of Symbols in AutoCAD Electrical</li>
<li>Scratch Database</li>
<li>The Project Manager</li>
<li>The Ribbons</li>
<li>The Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>The Application Menu</li>
<li>The Information Center</li>
<li>Workflow in AutoCAD Electrical</li>
<li>Creating a New Drawing</li>
<li>Adding Content to a Drawing</li>
<li>Adding a Contact</li>
<li>Toggle NO/NC</li>
<li>Creating Wire Layers</li>
<li>Adding Panel Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project and Drawing Properties 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Layers and Wire Layers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Properties 
<ul>
<li>Project Settings Tab</li>
<li>Components Tab</li>
<li>Wire Numbers Tab</li>
<li>Cross-References Tab</li>
<li>Styles Tab</li>
<li>Drawing Format Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Properties 
<ul>
<li>Drawing Settings Tab</li>
<li>Components Tab</li>
<li>Wire Numbers Tab</li>
<li>Cross-Reference Tab</li>
<li>Styles Tab</li>
<li>Drawing Format Tab</li>
<li>Drawing Display</li>
<li>Batch Plotting</li>
<li>Next Previous and Project Surfer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schematic Wiring 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Types of Wires</li>
<li>Applying Wires</li>
<li>Ladders</li>
<li>Placing Components</li>
<li>Associating</li>
<li>Adding Wire Numbers</li>
<li>Wire Number Copies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Components 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Inserting a Component</li>
<li>Insert/Edit Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Catalog Look Up Information</li>
<li>The Parent Child Link</li>
<li>Panel Footprint</li>
<li>Connectors</li>
<li>Terminals</li>
<li>Circuits</li>
<li>Saving Circuits</li>
<li>Applying a Circuit</li>
<li>Multiple Bus</li>
<li>Three Phase</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manipulating Components 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Moving Components</li>
<li>Copying a Component</li>
<li>Swap Block</li>
<li>Editing a Symbol</li>
<li>Electrical Audit</li>
<li>Retagging</li>
<li>Resequence</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reports 
<ul>
<li>verview</li>
<li>Bill of Materials Report</li>
<li>From/To Report</li>
<li>Changing Report Format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>DIN Rails, Terminal Strip Editor, Supplying Item Numbers and Balloons 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a DIN Rail</li>
<li>Adding Item Numbers</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:52:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Tony the Pony's Big Dream]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-tony-the-pony-s-big-dream.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-tony-the-pony-s-big-dream.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_tonyponydream_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Preventing Cross-Contamination</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Tony the Pony has a big dream...he wants to be a rootin' tootin' cowboy! See how he lives the cowboy life, and what he does for fun with his 2 brothers. And how does he keep the foods he is cooking for their Rodeo dinner safe and delicious? Yee- haa! Discussion of preventing cross contamination of bacteria and how to keep hands and items safe.</p>
<p>2 yummy recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Tony and can be prepared easily at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Tony the Pony's Big Dream - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:08:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - The Allergy Buddy Club]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-the-allergy-buddy-club.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-the-allergy-buddy-club.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_allergybuddyclub_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Allergen safety</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Ollie the elephant and his 2 friends are each allergic to a certain food that they love, and they must find ways to protect themselves from getting sick from these foods. Find out how they solve their problems, make new friends and help others along the way. Discussion of the 8 major allergens and how to stay safe at home or when eating outside the home.</p>
<p>Two delicious recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Ollie and his friends, and can be prepared easily at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>The Allergy Buddy Club - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:53:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Speedo Tito and his Sunset Party]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-speedo-tito-and-his-sunset-party.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-speedo-tito-and-his-sunset-party.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_speedotito_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Safe food preparation practices</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Speedo Tito is not like any other turtle... he is very fast! Discover how he throws a fabulous party for his friends, but what happens when he is done with all of the preparations for the party? And how do his friends help him safely enjoy his own party foods in the end?</p>
<p>Keeping foods safe in the kitchen is easy when you know the rules. In this book, Speedo Tito demonstrates how to prepare foods safely, while refrigerating, thawing, cooling, and cooking foods for his friends. Discussion at the end details how to do these practices safely at home.</p>
<p>2 yummy recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Speedo Tito and can be prepared easily at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Speedo Tito and his Sunset Party - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:52:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Sam's Pizza Pies]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-sam-s-pizza-pies.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-sam-s-pizza-pies.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_samspizzapie_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Personal hygiene and safety while cooking</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Sam the Lamb is an expert pizza maker! See how he stretches, flips and spins the dough to make the perfect pizza for his friends. But he needs a helping hand from his Grampa Sam to stay safe from burns and cuts during the process! How does Grampa Sam help make the party a success?</p>
<p>Cooking can be fun and healthy, but care must be taken to protect oneself from burns, cuts, and other kitchen hazards. This story incorporates a fun activity of pizza making with important information on using kitchen equipment and tools safely.</p>
<p>2 fun recipes are included at the end of the story, and you can make pizzas just like Sam. And find out his secret ingredient! There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">Table of Contents: 
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Sam's Pizza Pies - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:50:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Pansy's Garden Party]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-pansy-s-garden-party.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-pansy-s-garden-party.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_pansysgardenparty_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Keeping Foods Safe Through Temperature Control</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Pansy the Pig loves giving parties! But what happens when she leaves her party foods out in the summer sun for too long? You'll find out and see how her friend comes to the rescue!  If foods are left out at room temperature for too long, bacteria can grow to high levels and cause illness.</p>
<p>Learn which foods are the most risky to watch out for, and ways to keep these foods safe from dangerous bacterial growth even in a party situation.</p>
<p>2 delicious recipes are included that Pansy makes in the story, and can be easily prepared at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Pansy's Garden Party - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:47:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Gabby's Sore Throat and the Cherry Chocolate Cupcakes]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-gabby-s-sore-throat-and-the-cherry-chocolate-cupcakes.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-gabby-s-sore-throat-and-the-cherry-chocolate-cupcakes.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_gabbysorethroat_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Illness Behavior - Coughing and Sneezing</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Gabby the Goose is coming down with a cold, but she is supposed to make cupcakes for her friend's party. Can she still go to the party if she is sick? Who will make the cupcakes? And what is the best way for her to cough and sneeze?</p>
<p>Bacteria and viruses that cause colds and flu can easily be transmitted from peoples mouths, noses, and skin onto foods, and also to people around them.</p>
<p>Learn the safest way to cough and sneeze to prevent spread of dangerous microorganisms, and how to protect others from being contaminated by a sick family member or friend.</p>
<p>2 delicious recipes are included that Gabby makes in the story, and can be easily prepared at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Gabby's Sore Throat - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:46:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Delilah Washes her Hands]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-delilah-washes-her-hands.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-delilah-washes-her-hands.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_delilah_wash_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Handwashing, micro-organism awareness</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Delilah loves going to the playground with her friends. But her lunch is ready and there is one important thing she must do before she eats. Do you know what it is?</p>
<p>Handwashing is the most important thing we can do to prevent germs from causing colds, flu and food-related illness. Learn steps for proper handwashing according to USDA and FDA guidelines and when to wash hands for personal safety and for the safety of those around you.</p>
<p>2 delicious recipes are included at the back of the book that Delilah makes in the story, and can be easily prepared at home. There is also a fun coloring book for you to download.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Delilah Washes Her Hands - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:44:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Christabel's Supermarket Spree]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-christabel-s-supermarket-spree.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-christabel-s-supermarket-spree.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cristable_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Shopping Safety</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Cristabel the Cow goes food shopping with her father, which makes her very cheerful and giggle out loud! Learn about the special dinner they will make, and why her visit to the playground will have to wait.</p>
<p>Going food shopping can be fun, but there are certain principles that must be considered in order to keep foods safe. Learn how to keep foods refrigerated properly, and what time limits must be considered to keep foods safe before and during preparation at home.</p>
<p>2 yummy recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Cristabel and can be prepared easily at home. There is also a link to download a fun coloring book.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Christabel's Supermarket Spree - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:43:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Green Apple Tales - Chickita's Salads]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-chickita-s-salads.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/green-apple-tales-chickita-s-salads.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_chickitasalads_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Food Safety Principle: Produce safety</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Chickita is a little chicken who just loves to eat fresh fruits and veggies. But how to keep them safe and delicious? Watch her prepare some of her mother's fruit specialties for her Nana and Papa, and see how she keeps her favorite foods safe until their visit.</p>
<p>Fresh produce is healthy and delicious, but care must be taken to handle and refrigerate them properly. In this story, demonstration of how to wash, cut and handle produce safely so they will be at their peak of goodness and safety.</p>
<p>2 delicious recipes are included at the end of the story, which are prepared by Chickita and can be prepared easily at home.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Cindy's Introduction</li>
<li>Chickita's Salads - Story</li>
<li>Recipe Download Page</li>
<li>Coloring Book Download Page</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">5.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:41:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to Google Chrome]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-google-chrome.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-google-chrome.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_google_chrome_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to Google Chrome</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to familiarize the user to the design and use of the Google Chrome web browser.  Topics include search engine techniques, shortcuts, and settings to protect yourself while surfing the web.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started with Google Chrome 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Internet</li>
<li>The Google Chrome Interface</li>
<li>Finding Help</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Browsing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Accessing Websites</li>
<li>Navigating the Web</li>
<li>Working with Tabs</li>
<li>Creating and Organizing Favorites</li>
<li>Printing Web Pages</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Harnessing Information with Google Chrome 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Search Engines</li>
<li>Searching within a Website</li>
<li>Downloading Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanding Google Chrome 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Organizing Bookmarks</li>
<li>Using History Information</li>
<li>Subscribe to RSS Feeds</li>
<li>Installing Extensions</li>
<li>Shortcut Keys</li>
<li>Managing Memory</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Security and Privacy Settings 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Incognito Browsing</li>
<li>Clear Browsing Data</li>
<li>Privacy Settings</li>
<li>Pop-Up Blocker</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">20.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:29:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Architecture 2011: First Steps towards Implementation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2011-first-steps-towards-implementation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2011-first-steps-towards-implementation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/a/c/acadarch11_1ststeps_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD Architecture 2011: First Steps towards Implementation</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will demonstrate the initial tools needed to implement AutoCAD Architecture 2011 in your first project. You will learn how to create Walls, Doors, Windows, and Schedules using AEC commands helping you be more proficient in your everyday workflow. Basic AutoCAD knowledge is a prerequisite for taking this course.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Wall Construction 
<ul>
<li>Adding Walls</li>
<li>Modifying Walls</li>
<li>Curtain Walls</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Openings 
<ul>
<li>Doors</li>
<li>Windows</li>
<li>Door and Window Assemblies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Schedules 
<ul>
<li>Tagging Objects</li>
<li>Adding Schedules</li>
<li>Modifying Schedules</li>
<li>Scheduling External Reference Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dataset</li>
<li>Bonus Material 
<ul>
<li>Window Tag Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">34.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:51:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Captivate 5 - New Features]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-5-new-features.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-5-new-features.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_captivate5_newfeat_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Captivate 5 - New Features</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn about the biggest feature changes in Adobe Captivate 5. This course examines the new user interface, explores the new object styles and slide masters, and looks at time savers such as captions, images, highlights, and zoom boxes. Create quizzes, publish to flash and MS Word, and learn techniques for creating effective courses.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>New User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Consistent Adobe Interface</li>
<li>Customizing the Workspace</li>
<li>Using the Property Inspector</li>
<li>Opening Multiple Projects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Styles 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Applying Object Styles</li>
<li>Creating Object Styles</li>
<li>Exporting Object Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Master Slides 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Master Slides</li>
<li>Adding Objects</li>
<li>Creating New Master Slides</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Animation Effects and Video Support 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Animations</li>
<li>Saving Animation Effects</li>
<li>Deleting an Animation Effect</li>
<li>Adding Video to a Project</li>
<li>Modifying Video</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tracking and Reporting without an LMS 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the New Quiz Interface</li>
<li>Using LMS Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanded Widget Library 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the Table Widget</li>
<li>Using the "Ask an Expert" Widget</li>
<li>Using the Arrow Widget</li>
<li>Using the Slide Numbering Widget</li>
<li>Using the Playbar Widget</li>
<li>Exploring Other Widgets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">52.5000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:57:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Meetings and Status Reporting]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/meetings-and-status-reporting.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/meetings-and-status-reporting.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_masr_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Meetings and Status Reporting</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class discusses the true value of status reporting and provides various techniques for writing status reports and managing meetings. To that end, this class also provides usable example department status reports, meeting agendas, meeting minutes, project status reports, staff availability reports, project portfolio reports and other usable templates.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Value of Reporting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Giving Due Credit</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Why Write Status Reports?</li>
<li>Difficulty Writing Status Reports</li>
<li>Importance to Your Manager</li>
<li>Importance to Your Users</li>
<li>Importance to Your Staff</li>
<li>Importance to You</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General Department Reporting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Department Status Report</li>
<li>Department Dashboard Report</li>
<li>Staff Project Availability</li>
<li>Staff Project Availability with Schedule</li>
<li>Department Training Needs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Meetings, Agendas, and Minutes 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Importance of Staff Meetings - Part 1</li>
<li>Importance of Staff Meetings - Part 2</li>
<li>Importance of Staff Meetings - Part 3</li>
<li>Importance of Staff Meetings - Part 4</li>
<li>Ways to Run a Staff Meeting - Part 1</li>
<li>Ways to Run a Staff Meeting - Part 2</li>
<li>Ways to Run a Staff Meeting - Part 3</li>
<li>Meeting Agendas</li>
<li>Meeting Minutes</li>
<li>One-On-One Manager Agenda - Part 1</li>
<li>One-On-One Manager Agenda - Part 2</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Single Project Reporting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Documents in this Section</li>
<li>Project Overview Reports</li>
<li>Project Status Reports</li>
<li>Project Risk Matrix</li>
<li>Project Issue Log</li>
<li>Project Post-Mortem</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Portfolio Reporting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>List and Status of All Projects</li>
<li>Simple Project Gaunt Chart</li>
<li>Project Skill Set Matrix</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:57:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Life as a Technical Manager]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/life-as-a-technical-manager.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/life-as-a-technical-manager.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_laatm_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Life as a Technical Manager</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class contains the key information needed by new and would-be technical managers to help assure their success. These topics include the challenges of moving to a technical management role, delegation, the importance of process and standards, and various other essential technology management topics.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introductions</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Personal Growth 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Moving from Technician to Technical Manager</li>
<li>New Required Skills and Challenges - Part 1</li>
<li>New Required Skills and Challenges - Part 2</li>
<li>Maintaining Your Technical Skills</li>
<li>Leading the Work Versus Doing the Work</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Delegation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Letting Your Staff Do the Work</li>
<li>Handing Off Your Old Responsibilities</li>
<li>Relying on Your Team's Ability</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing IT 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Surviving a Technical Audit</li>
<li>Disaster Recovery Planning - Part 1</li>
<li>Disaster Recovery Planning - Part 2</li>
<li>Disaster Recovery Planning - Part 3</li>
<li>Disaster Recovery Planning - Part 4</li>
<li>Maintaining Hardware Standards</li>
<li>Maintaining Software Standards - Part 1</li>
<li>Maintaining Software Standards - Part 2</li>
<li>Dealing with Contradictory IT Goals</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Projects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Project Estimating</li>
<li>Project Resources vs. Maintenance Resources</li>
<li>Project Prioritization</li>
<li>Project Portfolios</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:16:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Matrix Management for IT]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/matrix-management-for-it.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/matrix-management-for-it.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_mmfit_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Matrix Management for IT</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Matrix management has been a way of life within many, if not most, Information Technology (IT) organizations. It comes in many forms. It may be in the form of a tester on loan to the project manager of an important project. It may be an IT manager that has a dotted line reporting relationship with his/her primary business user, or any one a number of other scenarios.</p>
<p>This class provides a definition and background of matrix management. If also discusses its advantages and disadvantages to the company, to IT, to the user community and to the person being matrixed.  It also describes and illustrates various types of matrix management used within IT organizations.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Definitions and Background 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Organization Chart</li>
<li>Solid Line Reports</li>
<li>Dotted Line Reports</li>
<li>Definitions of Matrix Management</li>
<li>Dotted Line Manager - Manager Perspective</li>
<li>Dotted Line Manager - Employee Perspective</li>
<li>Usage within IT</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advantages and Disadvantages for IT 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Advantages of Matrix Management</li>
<li>Disadvantages of Matrix Management</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Permanent Dotted Line Report Model 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Role of the Solid Line Manager</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Leader's Role</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Staff Interactions</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Goals and Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Temporary Dotted Line Report Model 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Role as the Solid Line Manager</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Leader's Role</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Staff Interactions</li>
<li>As the Dotted Line Manager - Goals and Reviews</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In IT and Dotted Line to the Business 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Advantages For You</li>
<li>Disadvantages For You</li>
<li>Advantages for IT</li>
<li>Disadvantages for IT</li>
<li>Advantages for the Business</li>
<li>Disadvantages for the Business</li>
<li>Your Relationship with IT</li>
<li>Your Relationship with the Business</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>In the Business and Dotted Line to IT 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Definition</li>
<li>Advantages for You</li>
<li>Disadvantages for You</li>
<li>Advantages for IT</li>
<li>Disadvantages for IT</li>
<li>Advantages for the Business</li>
<li>Disadvantages for the Business</li>
<li>Your Relationship with IT</li>
<li>Your Relationship with the Business</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:20:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Techies and User Leadership]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/techies-and-user-leadership.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/techies-and-user-leadership.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_technies_user_ldrship_s_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Techies and User Leadership</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The ability to motivate, communicate, stimulate and appreciate your staff and user community is key to your success as a technical manager. To that end, this class discusses how to motivate your staff, manage key staff issues, and gain the support and trust of the users that your technology supports.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Motivating Techies 
<ul>
<li>Techies are People Too</li>
<li>Not All Techies Are Alike</li>
<li>Techie Specific Stuff</li>
<li>Opportunity to Expand Skill Set</li>
<li>Mental Stimulation and Challenge</li>
<li>Recognition of Work</li>
<li>Opportunity to Get Work Done</li>
<li>Cross-training</li>
<li>Succession Planning</li>
<li>Managing Nightly Support Rotation</li>
<li>Issues with Shifted Workday Schedules</li>
<li>Span of Control</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Contractors 
<ul>
<li>Hiring a Contractor vs. Hiring a New Employee</li>
<li>Contractor Advantages</li>
<li>Contractor Disadvantages</li>
<li>Temp-to-Hire</li>
<li>Converting Contractors to Permanent Employees</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Multiple Locations 
<ul>
<li>Managing Multi-Location Staffs</li>
<li>Managing Multi-Country Staffs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Users 
<ul>
<li>Understanding Business Priorities</li>
<li>A Technology Steering Committee</li>
<li>Importance of Transparency</li>
<li>Reporting Project Status to Your Clients</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:03:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Making the IT Management Move]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/making-the-it-management-move.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/making-the-it-management-move.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_itmanagemove_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Making the IT Management Move</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class is designed to help prepare technical individual contributors for future Information Technology (IT) management roles by providing these future leaders with the actionable steps, IT management concepts, and mental insights needed to successfully move their careers forward.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Personal Growth 
<ul>
<li>Make Sure You Want to be a Manager</li>
<li>Defining Your Management Style</li>
<li>Learn From Other Managers</li>
<li>Finding a Mentor</li>
<li>Leadership Versus Management</li>
<li>Cross Training</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanding Your IT Knowledge 
<ul>
<li>Begin Thinking Like a CIO</li>
<li>Move From Being a Mile Deep to a Mile Wide</li>
<li>Learn About Key Applications Supported by IT</li>
<li>Learn About Company-Wide Data Movement</li>
<li>Learn About IT-Based Standards and Methodologies</li>
<li>Learn About the IT Budget, Hiring Practices, Etc.</li>
<li>Learn About Key IT Processes</li>
<li>Learn About Primary IT Hardware and Software Vendors</li>
<li>Learn about 3rd Party Products in Your Technical Area</li>
<li>Learn about 3rd Party Products in Your Business Industry</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanding Your Business Knowledge 
<ul>
<li>Learn Company Processes</li>
<li>Learn More About Your Industry</li>
<li>Learn More About Your Company</li>
<li>Learn More About Your User's/Client's Profession</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanding Your Educational and IT Credentials 
<ul>
<li>Your Future Job Description</li>
<li>Professional Certifications</li>
<li>Educational Level</li>
<li>Internal Company Training Classes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practicing a Leadership Role 
<ul>
<li>Practice Makes Perfect</li>
<li>Volunteer For Cross-Department Committees</li>
<li>Replay Management Decisions</li>
<li>Provide Leadership on Small Projects</li>
<li>Learn to Delegate</li>
<li>Learn Through Volunteerism</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:19:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Great Internal Client Service]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/great-internal-client-service.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/great-internal-client-service.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_gics_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Great Internal Client Service</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>User satisfaction comes from great internal client service. This class is specifically designed for Information Technology (IT) professionals and IT departments that provide services to fellow employees (within their company), rather than to external customers. For example, the Sales, Marketing, Finance and Human Resources groups are all IT clients, because IT provides services to these groups.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is Internal Client Service?</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service - Company</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service - Department</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service - Staff</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service - Customers</li>
<li>The Importance of Internal Client Service - You</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Things to Consider 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Understanding Your Clients' Characteristics</li>
<li>Ideal vs. Realistic Internal Client Service</li>
<li>Required Work vs. Requested Work</li>
<li>Client Service vs. Relationship Management</li>
<li>The Importance of Prioritizing Your Resources</li>
<li>The Importance and Communicating Project Status</li>
<li>The Importance of Meeting Deadlines</li>
<li>The Importance of Proper Measurement</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Manager's Role in Service Success 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Your Role as the Department Manager</li>
<li>Being Proactive vs. Reactive</li>
<li>Prioritization Techniques - Part 1</li>
<li>Prioritization Techniques - Part 2</li>
<li>Processes that Facilitate Efficient Service</li>
<li>Communicating with Your Client Leadership</li>
<li>Showing Service Ownership</li>
<li>Measuring Internal Client Satisfaction</li>
<li>Properly Training Your Staff</li>
<li>Treating Your Group Well</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Ways to Provide Great Service 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Clear Communication</li>
<li>Knowing the Products and Services Being Supported</li>
<li>Being a Good Listener</li>
<li>Keep Your Promises</li>
<li>Be Available</li>
<li>Be Courteous</li>
<li>Provide Proper Follow Up</li>
<li>Properly Record Your Activities</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:39:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Data Quality and Governance]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/data-quality-and-governance.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/data-quality-and-governance.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_dataquality_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Data Quality and Governance</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Data is the life blood of many organizations. Information Technology (IT) managers and individual contributors are the guardians of this data. As a result, IT must understand how data is collected, stored, distributed, used, and in regard to this class, managed.   To that end, this class discusses the data quality requirements for different data types, the business, IT and vendor practices that help create bad data, processes to help identify bad data, and the management practices and data governance needed to help facilitate the distribution of quality information.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Thoughts on Data 
<ul>
<li>Questions about Data</li>
<li>Major Types of Data</li>
<li>Conclusions on Data Quality</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Causes of Bad Data 
<ul>
<li>Data Problems Caused by Vendors</li>
<li>Data Problems Caused by IT</li>
<li>Data Problems Caused by Architecture</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Identifying Bad Data 
<ul>
<li>Intra-Application Health Checks</li>
<li>Cross-Application Health Checks</li>
<li>Random Data Sampling</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Friendly Topologies 
<ul>
<li>Internal Architecture</li>
<li>External Architecture</li>
<li>Modifying Existing Data Architectures</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Governance 
<ul>
<li>Definition of Governance</li>
<li>Definition of Data Governance</li>
<li>DGG Responsibilities</li>
<li>DGG Reporting Location, Level, and Structure</li>
<li>Challenges in Justifying a DGG</li>
<li>Example DGG Department Structure</li>
<li>DGG Department Charter</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&amp;nsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:10:02 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Cloud Computing Management]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cloud-computing-management.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cloud-computing-management.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cloudcomput_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Cloud Computing Management</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Cloud computing has been a huge topic within the Information Technology (IT) community. This class discusses what cloud computing is, how it affects IT organizations and how it can be employed to maximize user satisfaction and IT effectiveness.</p>
<p>It goes on to discuss cloud computing pros and cons from an IT perspective, implications for IT management, the potential to magnify IT resources, possible morale issues, and dealing with high user expectations, capital expenditures, data security and other important issues.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Background Information for Business Scenarios</li>
<li>Description of Cloud Computing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Wiki Wisdom</li>
<li>Simpler Description</li>
<li>Historical Perspective</li>
<li>Today's Perspective</li>
<li>Types of Clouds</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advantages of Cloud Computing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Operational Ease</li>
<li>Ability to Handle Peek Load</li>
<li>Lower Hardware and Software Costs</li>
<li>Faster Implementation</li>
<li>Offsite Storage</li>
<li>As ISP Provider</li>
<li>Group Collaboration</li>
<li>Ease of Early Exit</li>
<li>Reduced Burden on IT</li>
<li>Evens the Power Playing Field</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Disadvantages of Cloud Computing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Less Control</li>
<li>Potential Data Movement Issues</li>
<li>Potential Physical Data Location Issues</li>
<li>Need for Constant Internet Connectivity</li>
<li>Reliance on Cloud Vendor Financial Solvency</li>
<li>Security</li>
<li>Vendor Support and Software Quality</li>
<li>Audits, Compliance, and Legal Regulations</li>
<li>Cost May Not Always be an Advantage</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finances and Usage 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Conceptual Cost Models - During Expansion</li>
<li>Conceptual Cost Models - During Reduction</li>
<li>Accounting Considerations</li>
<li>Selecting Appropriate Applications</li>
<li>Selecting Appropriate Vendor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Perspective 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Food for Thought</li>
<li>Easier to Pilot New Applications and Processes</li>
<li>Quicker Implementation of Software</li>
<li>Easier Exit Strategy</li>
<li>Other Advantages</li>
<li>Internal Information Technology can be Your Friend</li>
<li>Protection of Employee and Client Data</li>
<li>Additional Points of Interest</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:59:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Epoch 50 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro on a Ranger 3 using a Mobile Hotspot Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-50-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-50-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_epoch50_ranger3_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Epoch 50 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro on a Ranger 3 using a Mobile Hotspot Getting Started Guide</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with an Epoch 50 Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software on a Ranger 3.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration 
<ul>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Introduction</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration with Ranger 3</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Installing a Geoid Model into Survey Pro 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Survey Pro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Short Cut to Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Receiver Profile in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:19:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Epoch 35 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro on a Ranger 3 using a Mobile Hotspot Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-35-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-35-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-on-a-ranger-3-using-a-mobile-hotspot-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_epoch35_ranger_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Epoch 35 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro on a Ranger 3 using a Mobile Hotspot Getting Started Guide</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with an Epoch 35 Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software with a TSC3 or Ranger 3.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>WiFi Hotspot Configuration with Ranger 3</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Survey Pro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Short Cut to Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Receiver Profile in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:17:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Access on a TSC3 using a MiFi Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-on-a-tsc3-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-on-a-tsc3-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_trimblevrs_tsc3_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software on a TSC3.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software on a TSC3.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>Activating Trimble Access 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Activating Trimble Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Configuring the MiFi with the TSC3</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Logging into Access</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Receiver</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Survey Style in Access</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Access</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Access</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File in Access</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:15:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Subassemblies and Assemblies]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-subassemblies-and-assemblies.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-subassemblies-and-assemblies.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_subassm_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Subassemblies and Assemblies</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Subassemblies and assemblies are used to create the "typical section" for your corridor model in AutoCAD Civil 3D.  This cloudDVD offers 85 minutes of instructor led teaching on all aspects of subassemblies and assemblies in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  The instructor offers a high level overview of subassembly and assembly functionality, and guides you through the processes required for creating, managing and displaying subassembly and assembly objects.  Also learn the how subassembly points, links and shapes play a role in corridor modeling and cross section generation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Subassembly and Assembly Overview</li>
<li>Subassemblies and Assemblies in UI</li>
<li>Subassembly Catalog</li>
<li>Subassembly Help Files</li>
<li>Input Parameters</li>
<li>Tool Palette - Input Parameters</li>
<li>Target Mapping</li>
<li>Points Links and Shapes</li>
<li>Add Subassemblies to Tool Palette</li>
<li>Create Assembly Object</li>
<li>Assembly Style</li>
<li>Subassemblies and Naming Conventions</li>
<li>Mirror Subassembly</li>
<li>Code Set Styles</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:25:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Corridor Modeling]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-corridor-modeling.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-corridor-modeling.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_corr_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Corridor Modeling</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Corridors are used in AutoCAD Civil 3D to model roads, highways, channels, and any feature that can be represented with a typical section, or an assembly object.  In this session, the teacher offers 77 minutes of instruction on how to create corridor models in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  In addition to learning the different components in the UI for corridor modeling, the instructor discusses the corridor components (baselines, regions, target mapping), how to create corridor models, corridor feature lines, creating corridor surfaces and extracting corridor data.  You also learn how to view and edit sections using the Section Editor.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Corridor Modeling Overview</li>
<li>Corridors in the UI</li>
<li>Corridor Components</li>
<li>Create Corridor Model</li>
<li>Review Corridor in Prospector</li>
<li>Event Viewer</li>
<li>Feature Lines</li>
<li>Corridor Surfaces</li>
<li>Extract Corridor Data</li>
<li>Corridor Reports</li>
<li>Section Editor</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:17:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to Excel 2010 VBA Macro Programming]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-excel-2010-vba-macro-programming.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-excel-2010-vba-macro-programming.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_excel2010_vbmacro1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to Excel 2010 VBA Macro Programming</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the user to Excel 2010 macro programming using Microsoft&rsquo;s Visual Basic for Application (VBA). The overall focus of this course is to teach the user proper Visual Basic programming techniques along with an understanding of Excel&rsquo;s object structure. Other topics in this course include; proper variable declaration, control structure use, looping, and Userform creation. The final section deals with the debugging tools included in the Microsoft VBA editor and methods on how to effectively use them.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Macro Development Basics 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Displaying the Developer Tab</li>
<li>Setting Macro Trust within Excel 2010</li>
<li>Recording and Running a Macro</li>
<li>Examining the VBA Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>VBA Programming Fundamentals 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Reviewing the Excel Object Model</li>
<li>Understanding Functions and Procedures</li>
<li>Understanding Variables and Scope</li>
<li>Commenting your Code</li>
<li>Creating Constants</li>
<li>Using Functions within Excel</li>
<li>Understanding Arguments</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Control Structures 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using If/Then/Else Condition</li>
<li>Using a Select/Case Statement</li>
<li>Creating For/Next Loops</li>
<li>Using the Do Loop</li>
<li>Using the While/Wend Loop</li>
<li>Infinite Loops</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using VBA Functions</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Using VBA Functions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the Object Browser</li>
<li>Using the InputBox() Function</li>
<li>Understand the MsgBox() Function</li>
<li>Using String Functions</li>
<li>Using Date Functions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating UserForms 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Designing a Form</li>
<li>Adding VBA Code to the UserForm</li>
<li>Closing the Form</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Debugging Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understand the Difference Between Syntax and Logic Errors</li>
<li>Running a Macro Within the VBA Editor</li>
<li>Using Breakpoints</li>
<li>Creating a Watch</li>
<li>Adding Error Traps</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">60.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:30:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Insurance: General Liability]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/insurance-general-liability.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/insurance-general-liability.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_ins_genliability_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Insurance: General Liability</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides a brief overview of Commercial General Liability Insurance for business. You will learn what some of the exposures are and how the commercial general liability (CGL) policy covers them. You will learn what limits of insurance are as well as certificates of insurance. The goal of this video is to give you a general understanding on what the policy covers and give you speaking points to discuss with your agent.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction (Exposures)</li>
<li>Liability Coverages</li>
<li>Who is an insured</li>
<li>Limits of Insurance (also Rating &amp; Endorsements)</li>
<li>Certificates of Liability Insurance</li>
<li>Other Insurance Policies</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:11:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble RealWorks 6.5 - The Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-realworks-6-5-the-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-realworks-6-5-the-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_realworksbasics1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Trimble RealWorks 6.5 - The Basics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook part of a multi-volume set for Trimble RealWorks Survey version 6.5.  This volume covers the basic commands and operation of the RealWorks Environment. A certification exam is also included so you can test your knowledge after completing the training.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>The User Interface 
<ul>
<li>System Requirements</li>
<li>The Modules</li>
<li>The User Interface Names and Locations</li>
<li>Shortcut Keys</li>
<li>Chapter Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Data 
<ul>
<li>Importing a RealWorks Project</li>
<li>Importing a PointScape Project</li>
<li>Importing a PocketScape Project</li>
<li>Importing TZS Format Files</li>
<li>Importing CMF Format Files</li>
<li>Importing Data Collector Files</li>
<li>Importing Generic Format Files</li>
<li>Importing CAD format Files</li>
<li>Importing other format files</li>
<li>Chapter Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Basics of Operation 
<ul>
<li>Setting Preferences</li>
<li>The Selection Mechanism</li>
<li>Undo, Redo, Close and Save</li>
<li>Capturing the Screen</li>
<li>Chapter Conclusion </li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>The Basic tools 
<ul>
<li>The Measurement Tool</li>
<li>The Segmentation Tool</li>
<li>The Sampling Tool</li>
<li>The Frame Creation Tool</li>
<li>Shifting a Project</li>
<li>Converting Geometric Entities to a Mesh</li>
<li>Creating a Merged Mesh</li>
<li>The Video Creation Tool</li>
<li>Chapter Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing data 
<ul>
<li>Object Properties</li>
<li>Merging Point Clouds</li>
<li>Merging Projects</li>
<li>Managing Sub-Projects</li>
<li>Partial Loading Manager</li>
<li>Chapter Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Course Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">149.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 14:00:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Salesforce.com]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/salesforce-com.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/salesforce-com.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_salesforce_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Salesforce.com</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD goes over the basic functions of salesforce.com. At the end of this course you will have good understanding of leads, accounts, contacts; opportunities and campaigns; contracts and cases; solutions and products; reports; documents; and dashboards.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Interface Overview 
<ul>
<li>Logging In</li>
<li>The Homepage</li>
<li>Create New</li>
<li>The Search Engine</li>
<li>Recent Items List</li>
<li>Recycle Bin</li>
<li>The Details Section</li>
<li>Tasks</li>
<li>Events</li>
<li>Multi-User Calendar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Leads, Accounts, and Contacts 
<ul>
<li>Leads</li>
<li>Lead Views</li>
<li>Creating a New Lead</li>
<li>Scheduling a Task</li>
<li>Log Call</li>
<li>Add Campaign</li>
<li>Send Email</li>
<li>Converting a Lead</li>
<li>Accounts</li>
<li>Account Options</li>
<li>Associating Accounts</li>
<li>Contact Detail</li>
<li>Request Update Function</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Opportunities and Campaigns 
<ul>
<li>Opportunities</li>
<li>Campaigns</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Contracts and Cases 
<ul>
<li>Contracts</li>
<li>Cases</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Solutions and Products 
<ul>
<li>Solutions</li>
<li>Products</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reports 
<ul>
<li>The Reporting Engine Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Custom Report</li>
<li>Types of Reports</li>
<li>Schedule Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Documents 
<ul>
<li>Documents Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dashboards 
<ul>
<li>Dashboard Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Help 
<ul>
<li>Help Overview</li>
<li>New Features Option</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setup Options 
<ul>
<li>Personal Setup</li>
<li>Email Setup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:57:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to SQL Server 2008]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-sql-server-2008.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-sql-server-2008.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_intr_sqlsrvr2008_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to SQL Server 2008</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the user to SQL Server 2008 and the SQL Server Management Studio.  It covers the basics from creating databases and tables, to learning how to query multiple tables.  Once those basics are covered, the final exercise is understanding and creating Views and simple Stored Procedures.  This course is designed to get the user up and running with SQL Server as quickly as possible.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>SQL Server Overview 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is SQL Server?</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>SQL Server Management Studio 
<ul>
<li>The File Menu</li>
<li>The View Menu</li>
<li>The Tools Menu</li>
<li>The Window Menu</li>
<li>The Community Menu</li>
<li>The Toolbar</li>
<li>The Object Explorer</li>
<li>Databases</li>
<li>Introducing Transact-SQL (T-SQL)</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Databases and Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a New Database 
<ul>
<li>The General Page</li>
<li>Change Atogrowth</li>
<li>Path</li>
<li>Options Page</li>
<li>-Compatibility Level</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a New Table 
<ul>
<li>Rules to Follow When Creating a Database</li>
<li>The Seven Different Category Types</li>
<li>Require and Not Require</li>
<li>Table Opening Options</li>
<li>Creating Tables Using T-SQL</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Constraints 
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Constraint</li>
<li>IN Command</li>
<li>Checking Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Understanding Indexes 
<ul>
<li>Primary Key</li>
<li>Adding Another Index</li>
<li>Concatenated Index</li>
<li>Altering Table Design</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the SELECT Statement 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Basic SELECT Statement</li>
<li>The FROM Clause</li>
<li>The Use Command</li>
<li>Using Star</li>
<li>Query Designer</li>
<li>The FROM Clause</li>
<li>The WHERE Clause</li>
<li>The IN() Command</li>
<li>Using Multiple Select Statements</li>
<li>Querying Text</li>
<li>Using Wildcards</li>
<li>The ORDER BY Clause</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Multi-Table Queries 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Linking Using the MS-SQL Query Method</li>
<li>Linking Using the Ansi-SQL Method</li>
<li>Inner Joins</li>
<li>Using Table Aliases</li>
<li>Outer Joins</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Views and Stored Procedures 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Working with Views</li>
<li>Create Views Using the Interface</li>
<li>Create Views Using T-SQL</li>
<li>Understanding Stored Procedures</li>
<li>Create a Simple Stored Procedure</li>
<li>Create Stored Procedures containing Arguments</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">75.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:34:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Electrical 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-electrical-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadelec11_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD Electrical 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The following demonstrations supply how to use the AutoCAD Electrical User Interface, how to create and manage projects and their related drawings, how to create schematic and ladder diagrams, how to create and insert schematic and panel layout symbols and circuits, how to select or add catalog content for your symbols, how to insert and edit source/ destination signals, how to insert and edit wire numbers, how to run and export reports and how to use the terminal strip editor.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Wire Types 
<ul>
<li>Creating and Editing Wire Types</li>
<li>Additional Properties</li>
<li>Change Convert Wire Type</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reference Files 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Insert/Edit Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Project Related Files</li>
<li>Project Labels</li>
<li>Title Block Update</li>
<li>Shared Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project and Drawing Properties 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Project Properties Dialogue Box</li>
<li>The Project Properties</li>
<li>Drawing Properties</li>
<li>Drawing Settings</li>
<li>The Difference Between the Two</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Intelligent Templates 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Your Own Template</li>
<li>Things to Setup</li>
<li>Saving as a DWT</li>
<li>Using the Template to Create a Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The ENV File 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Current Settings</li>
<li>Pathing</li>
<li>File Locations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Custom Components 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Symbol Builder</li>
<li>Symbol Audit</li>
<li>Wire Connections</li>
<li>Close Block Editor Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Child Contact</li>
<li>The Footprint</li>
<li>Creating a Footprint Symbol</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Custom Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Catalog Lookup Information</li>
<li>Pin List Information</li>
<li>Title Bock Setup and Update</li>
<li>Inserting a Title Block Template</li>
<li>Title Block Update</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reports 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Running a Report</li>
<li>Sorting</li>
<li>Save to File</li>
<li>Setting the Format</li>
<li>Automatic Reports</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The PLC 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Placing a PLC</li>
<li>PLC Database Editor</li>
<li>I/O Address</li>
<li>The PLC I/O Utility</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Productivity Tools 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Demonstrating Wire Connections</li>
<li>Fan In/Out</li>
<li>Adding Cable Information</li>
<li>The Circuit Builder</li>
<li>The Peer Functionality</li>
<li>Using Single Line Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:53:56 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Beyond Bullying: How to Address Bullying and Improve School Climate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/beyond-bullying-how-to-address-bullying-and-improve-school-climate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/beyond-bullying-how-to-address-bullying-and-improve-school-climate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_bullying2_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Dr. William Preble, Professor of Education, New England College, and Executive Director, Center for School Climate and Learning. Author of Transforming School Climate and Learning: Beyond Bullying and Compliance (2011); and co-author of The Respectful School (2003).</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Bullying is problem that many schools are now acknowledging and working hard to address.  Educators are looking for effective ways to prevent bullying, to help students that are bullied, and to improve school climate, respect, and learning. This video training brings together the latest research on bullying prevention and school climate improvement.  It highlights best practices that can help school leaders and teachers more clearly understand what bullying is and isn&rsquo;t.  It provides concrete strategies that will enable students and teachers to stop being passive bystander and take effective action. We share a set of National School Climate Standards that can guide planning and action projects in your school. We also share powerful strategies for empowering your students&mdash;the true experts on bullying&mdash;to work effectively with adults to successfully address these problems.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Bullying, School Climate &amp; Learning 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>The Right to Happiness</li>
<li>Passive Bystanders No More</li>
<li>Key Questions</li>
<li>Is This Bullying? Why?</li>
<li>What is Bullying?</li>
<li>The Ways and Means of Bullying</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>A Continuum of Bullying Behaviors 
<ul>
<li>Level 4: Harassment</li>
<li>Level 3: Bullying</li>
<li>Level 2: Threshold Behaviors</li>
<li>Level 1: Conflict</li>
<li>Participant Roles</li>
<li>Bullying and Contempt</li>
<li>Groups Singled Out for Bullying and Harassment</li>
<li>Most Kids Don't Tell</li>
<li>Role of Bystanders in Instances of Bullying</li>
<li>Effects of Student Harassment and Bullying</li>
<li>Suicide and Bullying</li>
<li>Now What Can We Do?</li>
<li>Cyberbullying: What Parents Can Do</li>
<li>Every Parent Should...</li>
<li>Every School Should...</li>
<li>Every Teacher Should...</li>
<li>Every Student Should...</li>
<li>Respect Continuum</li>
<li>Use Action Research</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 22 May 2012 16:43:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD LT 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-lt-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-lt-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadlt2011_1_sm_1_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD LT 2012 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>At the completion of this course, you'll understand how to use AutoCAD LT's various tools for common technical drawing and drafting tasks, including: creating and manipulating basic 2D geometry; organizing and extracting information from your drawings; annotating your drawings with text and dimensions; plotting your drawings; and developing and working with reusable content using blocks, Tool Palettes, and DesignCenter.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Interface  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Ribbons</li>
<li>Customizing Your Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Help Tools</li>
<li>Customizing the Ribbon</li>
<li>The Command Line</li>
<li>The Status Bar</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Moving In and Out of Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Choosing a Template</li>
<li>Starting to Draw</li>
<li>Drawing a Line</li>
<li>The Different Ways to Draw a Line</li>
<li>Cleaning a File Up</li>
<li>Drawing Geometry</li>
<li>Object Snap</li>
<li>Poly Line</li>
<li>Circle and Arc</li>
<li>Rectangle and Polygon</li>
<li>Ellipse</li>
<li>Creating a Building</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manipulating Objects  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Selection</li>
<li>Deleting</li>
<li>Move</li>
<li>Rotate</li>
<li>Copy</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Stretch</li>
<li>Scale</li>
<li>Trim</li>
<li>Extend</li>
<li>Practical Application of the Tools while Drafting</li>
<li>Fillet and Chamfer</li>
<li>Array</li>
<li>Offset Command</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layers  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Layers</li>
<li>Changing the Color</li>
<li>Changing the Line Weight</li>
<li>Changing the Line Type</li>
<li>Putting Objects on Layers</li>
<li>Transparency</li>
<li>Freezing and Thawing</li>
<li>Isolate and Unisolate</li>
<li>The Properties Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Annotation  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Switching to the Annotate Ribbon</li>
<li>Creating a New Text Style</li>
<li>Multi-Line Text</li>
<li>Single Line Text</li>
<li>Annotative Scaling</li>
<li>Additional Text Options</li>
<li>Fields</li>
<li>Dimensions and Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Most Commonly Used Dimensions</li>
<li>Tools for Cleaning Up Dimensions</li>
<li>Using Leaders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hatch and Blocks  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Hatch</li>
<li>Islands</li>
<li>Blocks</li>
<li>Creating a Block</li>
<li>Bringing in a Block</li>
<li>Editing a Block</li>
<li>Adding a Block to a Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layouts  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Layout Tab</li>
<li>Model Space</li>
<li>Going Back to Paper Space</li>
<li>Creating a New Layout</li>
<li>Setting Up a New Page</li>
<li>Creating a Viewport</li>
<li>Viewport Scale Bar</li>
<li>Controlling Layer by Viewport</li>
<li>Multiple Layouts in a Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inquiry Tools  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Utilities Panel</li>
<li>Subtracting Information</li>
<li>ID Point</li>
<li>Quick Select</li>
<li>Controlling AutoCAD Settings</li>
<li>AutoCAD Options Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Files Tab</li>
<li>Display Tab</li>
<li>Open and Save Tab</li>
<li>Plot and Publish Tab</li>
<li>System Tab</li>
<li>User Preferences Tab</li>
<li>Drafting Tab</li>
<li>3D Modeling Tab</li>
<li>Selection Tab</li>
<li>Profiles Tab</li>
<li>Saving Your Settings</li>
<li>Adding a Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">99.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:06:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Acrobat 9 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/acrobat-9-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/acrobat-9-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_arobat9pro_intr_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Acrobat 9 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course you'll discover how to bring together content from multiple resources that you can customize within Adobe Acrobat 9. You'll learn how to modify text, add bookmarks, and add navigation to guide your users. Additional topics include adding security to your PDF files and creating user-interactive forms.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Presenting the Adobe Acrobat PDF 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Acrobat Environment</li>
<li>Viewing and Navigating PDF's</li>
<li>Finding Text</li>
<li>Organizing PDF Documents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating PDF Documents 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Microsoft Word</li>
<li>Using the Web</li>
<li>Merging PDF Documents</li>
<li>Creating a Portfolio</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modifying PDF Documents 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Reordering Pages</li>
<li>Changing Content</li>
<li>Adding Headers and Footers</li>
<li>Inserting Watermarks</li>
<li>Numbering Pages</li>
<li>Adding Bookmarks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PDF Accessibility 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding Accessibility</li>
<li>Checking Accessibility</li>
<li>Accessibility Tags</li>
<li>Repairing Accessibility Issues</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Security 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Digital Signatures</li>
<li>Using Digital Signatures</li>
<li>Signing Documents</li>
<li>Adding Passwords to a PDF Document</li>
<li>Using Security Envelopes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating PDF Forms 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using an Existing PDF</li>
<li>Using Adobe Lifecycle Designer</li>
<li>Understanding Objects</li>
<li>Setting Object Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:50:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d2012essent_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD Map 3D is the leading engineering platform for creating and managing spatial data. It bridges CAD and GIS by providing direct access to GIS data and AutoCAD® tools for managing design information. This comprehensive course covers a range of topics, from introductory tools to advanced-level techniques combining both CAD and GIS tools.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>After completing this course, students will be able to: create and edit geometry; link and manage attribute data; import mapping data from other applications; set up and manage feature classifications; work with raster images, source drawings, topologies, and Display Manager; plot maps using Map Books.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Ribbon</li>
<li>The Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Searching for Help</li>
<li>The Task Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Data  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Setting the Coordinate System</li>
<li>Creating an Object Data Table</li>
<li>Creating Road Geometry</li>
<li>Drawing a Polygon Object</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing Data  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Setting Your Coordinate System</li>
<li>Map Import</li>
<li>Looking at the Import</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotation  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating an Annotation Template</li>
<li>Inserting the Template</li>
<li>Refresh Annotation</li>
<li>Adding a Row of Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Queries  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Current Query</li>
<li>Define Query</li>
<li>Making Changes</li>
<li>Override</li>
<li>Alter Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cleanup  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Cleanup Tools</li>
<li>Cleanup Method</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Topology  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Topology</li>
<li>A View Within the Topology</li>
<li>Analysis</li>
<li>Cleanup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Classification  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Object Classes</li>
<li>Making a New Definition File</li>
<li>Multiple Classifications</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Introduction  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Making an FDO Connection</li>
<li>Connecting to a Raster Image</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Styles  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Themes</li>
<li>Adding Labels</li>
<li>Adding a Theme with Multiple Styles</li>
<li>Scale Ranges</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Query  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Restricting Information</li>
<li>Multiple Condition Query</li>
<li>Editing FDO Objects</li>
<li>New Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Analysis  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Performing an FDO Analysis</li>
<li>Overlay</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Exporting Out Different Formats</li>
<li>Export Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Opening the Exported Drawing</li>
<li>SDF to Shape File with Bolt Copy</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey Data  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Survey Data Store</li>
<li>Viewing Point Data</li>
<li>Grouping Points</li>
<li>Creating a Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Map Books  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Map Book</li>
<li>Tiling Scheme</li>
<li>Sheet Set</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:52:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2012 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2012-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2012-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acad2012essen_gl3d_store.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD 2012 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>At the completion of this course, you'll understand how to use AutoCAD's various tools for common technical drawing and drafting tasks, including: creating and manipulating basic 2D geometry; organizing and extracting information from your drawings; annotating your drawings with text and dimensions; plotting your drawings; and developing and working with reusable content using blocks, Tool Palettes, and DesignCenter.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Interface 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Ribbons</li>
<li>Customizing Your Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Help Tools</li>
<li>Customizing the Ribbon</li>
<li>The Command Line</li>
<li>The Status Bar</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Moving In and Out of Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Choosing a Template</li>
<li>Starting to Draw</li>
<li>Drawing a Line</li>
<li>The Different Ways to Draw a Line</li>
<li>Cleaning a File Up</li>
<li>Drawing Geometry</li>
<li>Object Snap</li>
<li>Poly Line</li>
<li>Circle and Arc</li>
<li>Rectangle and Polygon</li>
<li>Ellipse</li>
<li>Creating a Building</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manipulating Objects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Selection</li>
<li>Deleting</li>
<li>Move</li>
<li>Rotate</li>
<li>Copy</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Stretch</li>
<li>Scale</li>
<li>Trim</li>
<li>Extend</li>
<li>Practical Application of the Tools while Drafting</li>
<li>Fillet and Chamfer</li>
<li>Array</li>
<li>Offset Command</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layers 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Layers</li>
<li>Changing the Color</li>
<li>Changing the Line Weight</li>
<li>Changing the Line Type</li>
<li>Putting Objects on Layers</li>
<li>Transparency</li>
<li>Freezing and Thawing</li>
<li>Isolate and Unisolate</li>
<li>The Properties Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Switching to the Annotate Ribbon</li>
<li>Creating a New Text Style</li>
<li>Multi-Line Text</li>
<li>Single Line Text</li>
<li>Annotative Scaling</li>
<li>Additional Text Options</li>
<li>Fields</li>
<li>Dimensions and Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Most Commonly Used Dimensions</li>
<li>Tools for Cleaning Up Dimensions</li>
<li>Using Leaders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hatch and Blocks 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Hatch</li>
<li>Islands</li>
<li>Blocks</li>
<li>Creating a Block</li>
<li>Bringing in a Block</li>
<li>Editing a Block</li>
<li>Adding a Block to a Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parametrics 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Making Lines Parallel</li>
<li>Adding a Dimensional Constraint</li>
<li>Perpendicular Constraints</li>
<li>Coincident Constraint</li>
<li>Tangent Constraint</li>
<li>Smooth, Symmetric, and Equal</li>
<li>Auto Constraints</li>
<li>Infer Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layouts 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Layout Tab</li>
<li>Model Space</li>
<li>Going Back to Paper Space</li>
<li>Creating a New Layout</li>
<li>Setting Up a New Page</li>
<li>Creating a Viewport</li>
<li>Viewport Scale Bar</li>
<li>Controlling Layer by Viewport</li>
<li>Multiple Layouts in a Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inquiry Tools 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Utilities Panel</li>
<li>Subtracting Information</li>
<li>ID Point</li>
<li>Quick Select</li>
<li>Controlling AutoCAD Settings</li>
<li>AutoCAD Options Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Files Tab</li>
<li>Display Tab</li>
<li>Open and Save Tab</li>
<li>Plot and Publish Tab</li>
<li>System Tab</li>
<li>User Preferences Tab</li>
<li>Drafting Tab</li>
<li>3D Modeling Tab</li>
<li>Selection Tab</li>
<li>Profiles Tab</li>
<li>Saving Your Settings</li>
<li>Adding a Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:00:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2011 Sheet Metal Design and Advanced Topics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2011-sheet-metal-design-and-advanced-topics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2011-sheet-metal-design-and-advanced-topics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_invntr_sheetmtl_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2011 Sheet Metal Design and Advanced Topics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook covers a variety of topics on sheet metal design.  At the end of this class students should be able to describe terms and sheet metal processes that are used in the industry, review various construction technique, create and automate sheet metal design tools, and document sheet metal designs.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction  
<ul>
<li>Creating a Basic Face</li>
<li>The Flange Tool</li>
<li>Creating a Flat Pattern</li>
<li>Documenting in a 2D Drawing</li>
<li>Placing Fillets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting up the Sheet Metal Environment  
<ul>
<li>Using the Flange Tool</li>
<li>Using the Fold Tool</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Styles</li>
<li>Importing Existing Sheet Metal Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Face Function</li>
<li>Other Flange Tool Options  
<ul>
<li>The Contour Flange Tool</li>
<li>The Hem Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Cut Tool</li>
<li>The Punch Tool</li>
<li>The Corner Seam Tool</li>
<li>The Fold Tool</li>
<li>Assembly Design Workflow</li>
<li>The Hole Command  
<ul>
<li>Countersink Capabilities</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corner Rounding and Chamfering Tools</li>
<li>Work Geometry  
<ul>
<li>Using the Work Plane Tool</li>
<li>Using the Distance Command</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:38:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to Relational Database Design]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-relational-database-design.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-relational-database-design.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_intrreldbasedsn_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to Relational Database Design</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course familiarizes the student with techniques to properly create and normalize a relational database.  This single course can help prevent the new database developer from creating mistakes that add hours and days to a development project.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Database Basics 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is a Database?</li>
<li>Different Types of Databases</li>
<li>The Process of Database Design</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Normalization 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is Normalization?</li>
<li>Basic Steps to Normalization</li>
<li>Brainstorm</li>
<li>Organize</li>
<li>Eliminate Repetition</li>
<li>Assign Relationships</li>
<li>Database Design Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:30:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Profiles and Profile Views]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-profiles-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-profiles-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_profview_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Profiles and Profile Views</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 Profiles and Profile Views vBook provides 76 minutes of detailed instruction on how to create, edit, manage, display and label profiles and profile views.  Topics of discussion include the user interface, creating surface profiles and profiles views, creating and editing design profiles, design criteria as it relates to profiles, styles and command settings.  The instructor uses a real world data set to guide you through the lessons.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Overview of Profiles and Profile Views</li>
<li>Profile Components in User Interface</li>
<li>Profile Types</li>
<li>Surface Profile - EG and Stripping</li>
<li>Create Profiles View</li>
<li>Quick Profile</li>
<li>Create Layout Profile</li>
<li>Profile Editing</li>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
<li>Superimposed Profile</li>
<li>Profiles and Design Criteria</li>
<li>Profile Projections</li>
<li>Object Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Command Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:03:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Alignments]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-alignments-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-alignments-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_align_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Alignments</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook offers 90 minutes of instructor led education on horizontal alignment functionality available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. Topics of discussion include alignments in the user interface, compound curve, reverse curve, spirals, fixed floating and free entities, edit geometry, design criteria and command settings.  This vBook complements the Civil 3D 2011 Alignments Offsets and Widenings and Civil 3D 2011 Superelevation vBooks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome and Agenda</li>
<li>Alignments in Civil 3D</li>
<li>Alignments in the User Interface</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools Overview</li>
<li>Create Tangents and Add Curves</li>
<li>Create Geometry - Design Criteria</li>
<li>Fixed Floating and Free Entities</li>
<li>Fixed Curve and Free Curve</li>
<li>Edit Geometry - Graphical</li>
<li>Edit Geometry - Data</li>
<li>Compound Curve</li>
<li>Reverse Curve</li>
<li>Station Control</li>
<li>Design Criteria and Superelevation</li>
<li>Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Alignment Command Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:15:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy for Compliance with Georgia Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-for-compliance-with-georgia-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-for-compliance-with-georgia-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cpa_georgia_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD covers changes to the Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys that allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD covers changes to the Georgia Board of Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors Technical Standards for Property Surveys that allow for a statement of positional accuracy on surveys performed with GPS. The formulas used to calculate positional accuracy are covered in the cloudDVD along with practical application of those formulas using traditional RTK and Network RTK. You will be provided a Positional Accuracy Calculation spreadsheet and shown how to modify it according to your workflow. To qualify for PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test. Upon successful completion of the test you will receive a certificate of completion.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Georgia Board Rules&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK and Network RTK Measurements&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from Checking into a Monument&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy from Point Averaging&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Session Review&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Course Review&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">39.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:13:57 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Parcels]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-parcels-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-parcels-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_parcel_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Parcels</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 Parcels vBook provides instruction on how to create, manage and display parcel objects. Learn how to locate and use the different components of parcel functionality in the user interface, subdivide a boundary parcel with an alignment, create a ROW on the alignment, and subdivide larger parcels using minimum frontage length and area requirements.  This live instructor led webinar offers 85 minutes of practical exercises using a real world subdivision example.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Parcels Overview</li>
<li>Parcels in UI</li>
<li>Sites and Topology</li>
<li>Define Boundary Parcel</li>
<li>Move Alignment to Site</li>
<li>Create ROW</li>
<li>Parcel Union</li>
<li>Edit Parcel Segments</li>
<li>Parcel Layout Tools</li>
<li>Create Parcels - Minimum Frontage</li>
<li>Create Parcels - Minimum Area</li>
<li>Create Parcels from Objects</li>
<li>Renumber Parcels</li>
<li>Parcels Styles and Label Styles</li>
<li>Spanning Label</li>
<li>Parcel Reports</li>
<li>Parcel Command Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:21:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro using a MiFi Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsspectra_mifi_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This training provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This training provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing a Geoid Model into Survey Pro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Receiver Profile in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Pro 
<ul>
<li>Troubleshooting Wireless Connection</li>
<li>Starting Survey Pro and Opening Job</li>
<li>Starting VRS Survey</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:17:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d11_essen_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Map 3D 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This comprehensive course is for drafters and geospatial analysts who want to learn about the CAD and GIS functions of Map 3D. After completing this course, students will be able to: create coordinate geometry and globally clean up drawings by removing extraneous data and consolidating linework; link attribute data to drawing entities; import mapping data from other applications; work with raster images; attach, manage, and query information from other drawings; as well as create and analyze topologies.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>The Task Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting a Coordinate System 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Importing GIS Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View and Edit Object Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Block Editor Panel</li>
<li>Inserting an Annotation</li>
<li>Updating an Annotation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating New Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Queries 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Importing Structures</li>
<li>Starting a Query</li>
<li>Altering Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Cleanup 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Cleanup Actions</li>
<li>Repeating Cleanup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Topologies 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Topology</li>
<li>Creating a Buffer</li>
<li>Creating a Polygon Topology</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Map Books 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Map Book Wizard</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Classification 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Logging In</li>
<li>Creating a New Definition File</li>
<li>Create a New Object</li>
<li>Classifying Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Stylize 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding to the Map</li>
<li>Adding Styling</li>
<li>Adding Text Entities</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Feature Data Objects Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Connecting to Data</li>
<li>Editing the Coordinate System</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Styles 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Themes</li>
<li>Controlling the Order</li>
<li>Connecting to a Data Source</li>
<li>Polygon Shapes</li>
<li>Adding Feature Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Raster 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Connecting to a DEM File</li>
<li>Changing the Theme</li>
<li>Pulling Additional Information</li>
<li>Saving the File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Query 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Queries in a File</li>
<li>Working with Errors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Edits 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Check Out and Check In</li>
<li>Splitting a Feature</li>
<li>Merging Features</li>
<li>Drawing a New Feature</li>
<li>Drawing a New Town</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Analysis 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Feature Buffer</li>
<li>The Feature Overlay</li>
<li>Creating a Buffer for Roads</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Bulk Copy 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Schemas</li>
<li>Connecting to a SDF File</li>
<li>Bulk Copying Roads</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FDO Joins 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Join</li>
<li>Creating a Calculation</li>
<li>Managing Joins</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Stores 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Survey Data Store</li>
<li>Creating New Point Objects</li>
<li>Grouping Points</li>
<li>Creating a Surface from Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:36:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Surfaces]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-surfaces-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-surfaces-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_surf_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Surfaces</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2011 Surface vBook teaches you how to create surfaces in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.  Learn strategies for surface creation, and sit in on a discussion that addresses basic surface concepts such as point groups and breakline definition.  This live instructor lead presentation offers a full 60 minutes of in-depth coverage on how to optimize your surface modeling process using a real world example.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Surface Overview</li>
<li>Surface and the UI</li>
<li>Point Groups</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Replace Point Group</li>
<li>Breakline Discussion</li>
<li>Other Surface Definition Items</li>
<li>Surface Boundary</li>
<li>Extract Objects</li>
<li>Remove Deleted Dependent Objects</li>
<li>Drawing Objects and Edits</li>
<li>Commands on Contextual Tab</li>
<li>Surface Styles</li>
<li>Surface Label Styles</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:28:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD LT 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-lt-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-lt-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadlt2011_1_sm_1_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD LT 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>AutoCAD LT&reg; software is built for professional drafting, delivering genuine DWG compatibility, reliability, and powerful 2D drawing tools designed to boost your productivity.  At the completion of this course, you'll understand how to use AutoCAD LT various tools for common technical drawing and drafting tasks, including: creating and manipulating basic 2D geometry; organizing and extracting information from your drawings; annotating your drawings with text and dimensions; plotting your drawings; and developing and working with reusable content using blocks, Tool Palettes.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Taking the AutoCAD LT Tour 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Getting Familiar with the User Interface</li>
<li>Customizing Your Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>The Command Line</li>
<li>The Drawing Area</li>
<li>The Status Bar</li>
<li>Workspaces</li>
<li>Shortcuts</li>
<li>Opening a Drawing</li>
<li>Starting a New Drawing</li>
<li>Saving a Drawing</li>
<li>Displaying the Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Drawing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Entering Data</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Entering Relative and Absolute Coordinates</li>
<li>Using Right-Click to Enter Data</li>
<li>Creating Basic Objects</li>
<li>Drawing an Arc</li>
<li>Other Options for Drawing Shapes</li>
<li>The Polygon Tool</li>
<li>Using Snaps</li>
<li>Object Tracking</li>
<li>Measurement Units</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Objects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Selecting Objects in the Drawing</li>
<li>Changing an Objects Position</li>
<li>Creating New Objects from Existing Objects</li>
<li>Changing the Angle of an Object</li>
<li>Creating a Mirror Image</li>
<li>Creating Patterns with Objects using Array</li>
<li>Creating a Polar Array</li>
<li>Changing the Scale of an Object</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Organization 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Layers Defined</li>
<li>The Layer Manager</li>
<li>Creating a New Layer</li>
<li>Assigning a Layer</li>
<li>Controlling Visibility</li>
<li>Controlling Multiple Layer Visibility</li>
<li>Using the Match Property Tool</li>
<li>The Property Palette</li>
<li>Line Types</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Altering Objects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Trimming and Extending Objects</li>
<li>The Offset Tool</li>
<li>The Join Tool</li>
<li>The Break Tool</li>
<li>The Fillet Tool</li>
<li>The Chamfer Tool</li>
<li>The Stretch Tool</li>
<li>Working with Grips</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Text 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Text Tool</li>
<li>Creating Multi-Line Text</li>
<li>Editing Text</li>
<li>Using Find and Replace</li>
<li>Text Styles</li>
<li>Creating a New Text Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hatching and Regions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Hatch</li>
<li>Hatch Settings</li>
<li>Adding the Hatch</li>
<li>Different Hatch Patterns</li>
<li>Using a Gradient</li>
<li>Editing the Hatch</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Dimensions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Dimension Tool</li>
<li>Creating Multiple Dimensions</li>
<li>The Different Types of Dimensions</li>
<li>Customizing Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Using Select Similar to Change Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Working with Blocks 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Behavior of Blocks</li>
<li>Creating Blocks</li>
<li>Inserting a Block</li>
<li>Creating a Block from Blocks</li>
<li>Breaking a Block</li>
<li>Moving Blocks into Drawings</li>
<li>Using Tool Palettes with Blocks</li>
<li>Using the Design Center with the Tool Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Additional Objects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Drawing Polylines</li>
<li>Using Join</li>
<li>The Ellipse Tool</li>
<li>The Spline Tool</li>
<li>Creating Tables</li>
<li>Updating the Table Data Links</li>
<li>Using Table Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layouts and Plotters 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Layouts</li>
<li>Creating a Layout</li>
<li>Page Setup</li>
<li>Working with Viewports</li>
<li>Creating a Viewport</li>
<li>Locking a Viewport</li>
<li>Manipulating the Viewports</li>
<li>Plotting</li>
<li>Printing from Model Space</li>
<li>Previewing a Plot</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Templates 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Saving a File as a Template</li>
<li>Properties and Settings to Save</li>
<li>Pathing to a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:05:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Office 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_complt2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Office 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers the basic, intermediate and advanced concepts of Access 2010, Excel 2010, Outlook 2010, PowerPoint 2010 and Word 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Access 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Access 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Access 2010 - Advanced</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Advanced</li>
<li>Outlook 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Outlook 2010 - Advanced</li>
<li>PowerPoint 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>PowerPoint 2010 - Advanced</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Advanced</li>
<li>Office 2010 - New Features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">315.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:42:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to Office 2010 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-office-2010-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-office-2010-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_intro2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle introduces the basic concepts of the products in Microsoft Office 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle introduces the basic concepts of the products in Microsoft Office 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following cloudDVDs:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Access 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Outlook 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>PowerPoint 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Office 2010 - New Features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">135.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:33:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_access2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Access 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Access 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Access 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Access 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Access 2010 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:55:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_outlook2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Outlook 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Outlook 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Outlook 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Outlook 2010 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:47:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_ppt2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>PowerPoint 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft PowerPoint 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>PowerPoint 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>PowerPoint 2010 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:57:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_excel2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Excel 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate and advanced levels of Microsoft Excel 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Excel 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Excel 2010 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:22:10 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2010 Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interexcel2010_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Excel 2010 Intermediate</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Students will use learn to streamline and enhance spreadsheets with 3D formulas, range names, templates, and outlines and subtotals.  In addition, students will learn to enhance spreadsheets with charts and other graphic objects.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Using Workbooks<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Navigating a Workbook</li>
<li>Renaming Sheets</li>
<li>Applying Tab Color</li>
<li>Inserting and Deleting Sheets</li>
<li>Moving and Copying Sheets</li>
<li>Moving a Sheet to Another Workbook</li>
<li>Grouping Worksheets</li>
<li>Formatting Grouped Worksheets</li>
<li>Creating Formulas Across Worksheets</li>
<li>Adding a Watch Window</li>
<li>Anchoring the Watch Window</li>
<li>Linking to Another Workbook</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Range Names<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Assigning a Range Name</li>
<li>Creating a Range Name from Headings</li>
<li>Moving to a Range Name</li>
<li>Using Range Names in Formulas</li>
<li>Creating 3D Range Names</li>
<li>Using Range Names in 3D Formulas</li>
<li>Inserting Hyperlinks into Range Names</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Applying Outlines and Subtotals<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Applying an Outline Manually</li>
<li>Expanding and Collapsing an Outline</li>
<li>Applying an Automatic Outline</li>
<li>Clearing an Outline</li>
<li>Modifying Outline Settings</li>
<li>Creating Subtotals</li>
<li>Clearing Subtotals</li>
<li>Changing the Function Used in Subtotals</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Templates<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using an Existing Template</li>
<li>Creating and Saving a Template</li>
<li>Opening a Template</li>
<li>Modifying a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Collaborating<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Comments</li>
<li>Sharing a Workbook</li>
<li>Tracking Changes in a Workbook</li>
<li>Comparing and Merging Workbooks</li>
<li>Using the Document Inspector</li>
<li>Saving a Workbook as a PDF</li>
<li>Emailing a Workbook</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Charts<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating an Embedded Chart</li>
<li>Creating a Chart on a Separate Sheet</li>
<li>Moving and Resizing a Chart</li>
<li>Switching Row/Column Data</li>
<li>Changing the Chart Range</li>
<li>Changing the Chart Type</li>
<li>Printing a Chart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting a Chart<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Applying Quick Layouts and Quick Styles</li>
<li>Adding Chart Elements</li>
<li>Formatting Chart Elements</li>
<li>Customizing 3D Effects on a Chart</li>
<li>Scaling an Axis</li>
<li>Creating a Picture Chart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Objects<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding a Text Box</li>
<li>Drawing a Line or Arrow</li>
<li>Drawing a Rectangle or Oval</li>
<li>Moving and Resizing Objects</li>
<li>Removing or Changing the Fill Color</li>
<li>Adding Text to an Object</li>
<li>Inserting SmartArt</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:23:36 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2010 Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advpwrpnt2010-1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>PowerPoint 2010 - Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to bring students to the next level in presentation development.  Students will learn how to add tables, SmartArt, charts and multimedia files to presentations.  Advanced presentation techniques such as animation, broadcasting, creating custom templates and adding slide timings will be covered.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Adding Tables to a Presentation<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Table</li>
<li>Modifying a Table</li>
<li>Formatting a Table</li>
<li>Inserting a Table from Microsoft Word</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding SmartArt<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Introducing SmartArt</li>
<li>Converting a Bulleted List to SmartArt</li>
<li>Changing the Type of Chart</li>
<li>Using the Text Pane to Add Text</li>
<li>Inserting a New SmartArt Chart</li>
<li>Inserting Pictures</li>
<li>Formatting the Chart</li>
<li>Alter the Shapes Individually</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inserting Charts in a Presentation<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create a Chart</li>
<li>Edit a Chart</li>
<li>Format a Chart</li>
<li>Use Excel Charts in PowerPoint</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Audio and Video Effects<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Add Video</li>
<li>Move and Resize Movie Clips</li>
<li>Format Video</li>
<li>Add Sound</li>
<li>Effect the Playback Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Use Animation<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Animate Objects</li>
<li>Animate Text</li>
<li>Customize Animation</li>
<li>Animate SmartArt Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Working with Actions<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Add an Action Button</li>
<li>Modify an Action Button</li>
<li>Add an Action to Any Shape</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing a Design Template<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Relationship Between the Master, the Layouts and the Theme</li>
<li>Add a New Slide Master</li>
<li>Remove a Master</li>
<li>Format a Slide Master via a Theme</li>
<li>Create New Theme Colors</li>
<li>Create New Theme Fonts</li>
<li>Create Custom Layouts</li>
<li>Save a Theme</li>
<li>Use a Custom Template</li>
<li>Create PowerPoint Templates</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing the PowerPoint Environment<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customize the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Change the General Options</li>
<li>Change the Proofing Options</li>
<li>Customize the Ribbon</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Presentation Techniques<br />
<ul>
<li>-Overview</li>
<li>Build Slides from a Word Outline</li>
<li>Customize and Run a Custom Slide Show</li>
<li>Add Slide Timings to a Presentation</li>
<li>Rehearse Slide Timings</li>
<li>Hiding and Unhiding Slides</li>
<li>Annotate a Presentation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finalizing a Presentation<br />
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Compare a Presentation</li>
<li>Accept or Reject Changes</li>
<li>Insert Comments</li>
<li>Review Comments</li>
<li>Delete Comments</li>
<li>Inspect the Presentation</li>
<li>Check Compatibility</li>
<li>Save a Slide as an Image</li>
<li>Save a File to Open Directly in Slide Show Mode</li>
<li>Save Presentation as a Video</li>
<li>Broadcast a Presentation</li>
<li>Package a Presentation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:56:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2010 Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advoutlook2010_2_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Outlook 2010 Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Students will learn advanced techniques for managing stored e-mail messages, working with the Journal, sharing Outlook content, and creating customized templates.  In addition, students will learn how to customize Outlook, search and filter mail folders, and use categories and Quick Steps.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Using Categories<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating New Categories</li>
<li>Applying Categories</li>
<li>Viewing, Sorting, and Grouping by Categories</li>
<li>Assigning Categories with Quick Click</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Quick Steps<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Modifying Existing Quick Steps</li>
<li>Creating a Quick Step</li>
<li>Duplicating a Quick Step</li>
<li>Deleting a Quick Step</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Changing the View<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Sorting</li>
<li>Grouping</li>
<li>Adding Columns</li>
<li>Modifying Views</li>
<li>Saving New Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Searching<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Find</li>
<li>Applying Filters</li>
<li>Using Advanced Find</li>
<li>Access Recent Searches</li>
<li>Creating Search Folders</li>
<li>Deleting Search Folders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working Rules<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Rules</li>
<li>Running Rules</li>
<li>Editing Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Junk Mail<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Senders to the Blocked Senders List</li>
<li>Marking Messages as Junk</li>
<li>Marking a Message as Not Junk</li>
<li>Adding Senders to the Safe Senders List</li>
<li>Changing Junk Mail Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Setting Permissions<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Delegates</li>
<li>Opening a Shared Folder</li>
<li>Viewing Multiple Calendars</li>
<li>Using Overlay View</li>
<li>Setting Permissions on a Folder</li>
<li>Adding Shared Mailbox to a Profile</li>
<li>Adding the From Field</li>
<li>Creating Group Schedules</li>
<li>Sending Meeting Requests to a Group Schedule</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Connecting Outside Outlook<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Emailing a Calendar</li>
<li>Publishing a Calendar to the Internet</li>
<li>Subscribing to an Internet Calendar</li>
<li>Subscribing to an RSS Feed</li>
<li>Removing an RSS Feed</li>
<li>Using Outlook Social Connectors</li>
<li>Monitoring Contact Status</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Archiving Mail<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Mailbox Cleanup</li>
<li>Setup the Archive</li>
<li>Automatically Archiving a Message</li>
<li>Manually Archiving a Message</li>
<li>Opening the Archive Datafile</li>
<li>Set Archive Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the Journal<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Journal</li>
<li>Automatically Creating Journal Entries</li>
<li>Adding a Manual Entry</li>
<li>Viewing the Journal</li>
<li>Deleting Entries</li>
<li>Printing Journal Entries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing Outlook<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customizing Outlook Today</li>
<li>Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Customizing the Ribbon</li>
<li>Setting Preferences</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Templates and Mail Merge<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Applying a Theme</li>
<li>Customizing a Theme</li>
<li>Using Message Stationery</li>
<li>Creating Templates</li>
<li>Using Templates</li>
<li>Creating a Mail Merge</li>
<li>Inserting Merge Fields</li>
<li>Sending Merge Messages</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:46:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Exporting a Custom ASCII File in Pathfinder Office]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/exporting-a-custom-ascii-file-in-pathfinder-office.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/exporting-a-custom-ascii-file-in-pathfinder-office.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_expcustascii_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Exporting a Custom ASCII File in Pathfinder Office</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn how to create and export custom ASCII files out of the Pathfinder Office software that can be used in programs like Microsoft Excel, CAD and GIS.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Why Use ASCII File Export?</li>
<li>Data Sets</li>
<li>Creating a Simple ASCII Export Template<br />
<ul>
<li>ASCII File without a Header using a Generic Data Dictionary</li>
<li>ASCII File with a Header using a Generic Data Dictionary</li>
<li>ASCII File with Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Simple ASCII File Export Template - Notes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Complex ASCII Export Template<br />
<ul>
<li>Creating a Header and Footer for each Feature</li>
<li>Splitting Features Across more than One File</li>
<li>Keeping Points, Lines and Areas in Separate Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:37:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 User Interface and Standards Overview]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-user-interface-and-standards-overview-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-user-interface-and-standards-overview-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_iustd_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD discusses AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 in the context of the user interface and standardized internal components.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD discusses AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 in the context of the user interface and standardized internal components.  The discussion on user interface addresses all interface items, and elaborates on static/contextual ribbons and the Toolspace palette.  The discussion on standards addresses the nuts and bolts of the Civil 3D DWT along with some general strategies for development and management.  This 90 minute instructor led class guides you through the topics using both PowerPoint slides and live Civil 3D application demonstration.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Session Agenda</li>
<li>UI Components</li>
<li>Ribbon Tabs and Panels</li>
<li>Static and Contextual</li>
<li>Toolspace Palette</li>
<li>Panorama Window</li>
<li>Command Line and Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Application Menu and Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Quick Properties</li>
<li>Workspaces</li>
<li>AutoCAD Civil 3D Drawing Template</li>
<li>AutoCAD Standards in DWT</li>
<li>Civil 3D Standards in DWT</li>
<li>Command and Feature Settings</li>
<li>Drawing Settings</li>
<li>Description Keys and Point Groups</li>
<li>Label Style Defaults</li>
<li>Reporting and Queries</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:29:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Moving from GEOPAK to AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/moving-from-geopak-to-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/moving-from-geopak-to-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_geopaktoc3d_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Moving from GEOPAK to AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Moving from GEOPAK to AutoCAD Civil 3D will provide the knowledge and information users need to start the transition from Bentley GEOPAK to AutoCAD Civil 3D. In addition to explaining the features concepts of Civil 3D you will be shown how to migrate CAD and Project data into AutoCAD and Civil 3D Objects.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started</li>
<li>Goals for Training</li>
<li>Civil 3D Concepts</li>
<li>Prepare Your Organization</li>
<li>Compare GEOPAK - C3D</li>
<li>Terminology<br />
<ul>
<li>General Terms</li>
<li>Alignments</li>
<li>Cross Sections</li>
<li>Inquiry</li>
<li>Parcels</li>
<li>Drainage and Pipes</li>
<li>Plan Production</li>
<li>Points</li>
<li>Profiles</li>
<li>Survey</li>
<li>Terrain (Surfaces)</li>
<li>Utilities</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Interface<br />
<ul>
<li>Toolspace</li>
<li>Workspace</li>
<li>Support Paths</li>
<li>Ribbons</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Features<br />
<ul>
<li>Points</li>
<li>Survey Features</li>
<li>Surfaces</li>
<li>Alignments</li>
<li>Profiles</li>
<li>Plan Production</li>
<li>Parcels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles and Customization<br />
<ul>
<li>Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Migration Tools<br />
<ul>
<li>Import DGN</li>
<li>Attach DGN</li>
<li>LandXML Import</li>
<li>Import ASCII Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Managment<br />
<ul>
<li>Create a Project</li>
<li>Data Sharing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Additional Learning Material</li>
<li>Contact Information</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:12:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Understanding BIM and Model Based Design]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/understanding-bim-and-model-based-design.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/understanding-bim-and-model-based-design.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_undrstndbim_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Understanding BIM and Model Based Design</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook is designed to provide a big-picture view of BIM and Model Based Design.  It begins with a review of the concepts of model-based design and BIM - Building Information Modeling.  It then continues with a brief demonstration to help illustrate the concepts and show how BIM technology might be used on a project.  The course then includes a look at how BIM can be used throughout the project lifecycle, a discussion of the advantages of BIM for various people involved on projects, including developers, architects, engineers, contractors, and owners.  The vBook concludes with a chapter that discusses various things to think about when considering using BIM technology.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course introduction</li>
<li>What is BIM and Model Based Design?
<ul>
<li>What do we mean by modeling?</li>
<li>What can be modeled?</li>
<li>Model-based design</li>
<li>What is "BIM"?</li>
<li>What do we mean by "building"?</li>
<li>What do we mean by information modeling?</li>
<li>Chapter review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>BIM in Action
<ul>
<li>Part 1: Setting the stage</li>
<li>Part 2: Intelligent model based design</li>
<li>Part 3: Model-based duct routing</li>
<li>Part 4: Integrated duct sizing</li>
<li>Part 5: Component changes drive sizing</li>
<li>Part 6: Automatic schedules</li>
<li>Key points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>BIM and Project LIfecycles
<ul>
<li>Context: the typical project lifecycle</li>
<li>Lifecycle: Planning</li>
<li>Lifecycle: Design</li>
<li>Lifecycle: Construction</li>
<li>Lifecycle: Operation</li>
<li>Data through the lifecycle</li>
<li>The BIM opportunity: Planning</li>
<li>The BIM opportunity: Design</li>
<li>The BIM opportunity: Construction</li>
<li>The BIM opportunity: Operations</li>
<li>Key points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>BIM Benefits and Challenges
<ul>
<li>BIM benefits for developers</li>
<li>Challenges for developers</li>
<li>Benefits for architects, engineers, and designers</li>
<li>Challenges for architects, engineers, and designers</li>
<li>BIM benefits for contractors and builders</li>
<li>Challenges to consider</li>
<li>BIM benefits for owners</li>
<li>Challenges for owners</li>
<li>Key points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Things to consider about BIM
<ul>
<li>Including BIM in the RFP</li>
<li>The RFP challenge</li>
<li>BAD RFPs: The generic project scope</li>
<li>Bad RFPs: The technology scope</li>
<li>Recommended approach for BIM RFPs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>BIM Return on Investment
<ul>
<li>The near and long term views</li>
<li>Specific ROI data</li>
<li>Achieving a higher return from BIM</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>BIM implementation stages
<ul>
<li>Introducing implementation stages</li>
<li>BIM Stage One: Model-based design</li>
<li>BIM Stage Two: Collaboration</li>
<li>BIM Stage Three: Integration</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Additional information</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:02:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[MicroStation V8i Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/microstation-v8i-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_microstn_intro_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>MicroStation V8i Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Designed for the new MicroStation user this course builds a solid foundation in the concepts, tools and features found in the MicroStation drawing environment. In this course, you will experience a typical workflow from setting up a drawing through plotting. Your will also explore solving real-world design problems from various engineering disciplines using the concepts presented in the course. This offering is taught using MicroStation V8 XM Edition.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching Microstation</li>
<li>File Open Dialog</li>
<li>Workspaces</li>
<li>Interface Features</li>
<li>Main Tool Box</li>
<li>Task Dialogs</li>
<li>Positional Keyboard Mapping</li>
<li>View Windows</li>
<li>View Group Dialog</li>
<li>Mouse Functions</li>
<li>Element Selection Tool</li>
<li>Tips for this Section</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Element Creation<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Element attributes</li>
<li>Level Display</li>
<li>Linear Elements</li>
<li>Circle and Arcs</li>
<li>Polygons</li>
<li>Complex Elements</li>
<li>Undo, Redo and Delete</li>
<li>Element Templates</li>
<li>Working with cells</li>
<li>AccuSnap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Accudraw<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Accudraw basics</li>
<li>Accudraw workflow</li>
<li>Example using Accudraw</li>
<li>Accudraw shortcut keys</li>
<li>Pop up calculator</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working With Existing Elements<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Modification tools</li>
<li>Grouping Elements</li>
<li>Making Measurements</li>
<li>Patterning</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modify Existing Elements<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Modification Tools</li>
<li>Matching and changing attributes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotating Designs<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Text</li>
<li>Revision cloud</li>
<li>Spell Checker</li>
<li>Dimensioning</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Design Files</li>
<li>Organizing Project Data<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>File Structure</li>
<li>Projects Links</li>
<li>Creating Printed Output</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:39:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performing an OPUS Session with a Trimble Receiver with or without Trimble Survey Controller]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-survey-controller.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-survey-controller.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_trimblercvr_svycntlr_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using a Trimble Receiver with or without the Trimble Survey Controller software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using a Trimble Receiver with or without the Trimble Survey Controller software.  You will be taken from configuring Survey Controller or the receiver, to collecting static GPS data, downloading the data, converting it to Rinex and submitting the data to OPUS.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>OPUS Requirements</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Receiver</li>
<li>Creating an OPUS Survey Style in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Collecting OPUS Field Data with Survey Controller<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview using Survey Controller and Receiver</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Survey in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Ending the OPUS Survey in Survey Controller</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading the OPUS Data from the Data Collector<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Download Data from the Data Collector</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data Logging in the Trimble Receiver<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data Logging in the Trimble Receiver</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Trimble Receiver Stand Alone Data Collection<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview Using Only a Receiver</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Field Session</li>
<li>Ending an OPUS Field Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading OPUS Data from a Trimble Receiver<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Using Data Transfer</li>
<li>Downloading Using Survey Controller</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Converting Trimble Receiver File into a Rinex Format<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Converting Files to Rinex</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Submitting Files to OPUS</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:37:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performing an OPUS Session with a Trimble Receiver with or without Trimble Access]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-access.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-a-trimble-receiver-with-or-without-trimble-access.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_trimblercvr_access_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using a Trimble Receiver with or without the Trimble Access software. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using a Trimble Receiver with or without the Trimble Access software.  You will be taken from configuring Access or the receiver, to collecting static GPS data, downloading the data, converting it to Rinex and submitting the data to OPUS.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>OPUS Requirements</li>
<li>Logging into Access</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Reciever</li>
<li>Creating an OPUS Survey Style in Access</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Access</li>
<li>Collecting OPUS Field Data with Access<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview using Access and Receiver</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Survey in Access</li>
<li>Ending the OPUS Survey in Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading the OPUS Data from the Data Collector<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Download Data from the Data Collector</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data Logging in the Trimble Receiver<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Enabling Automatic Data Logging in the Trimble Receiver</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Trimble Receiver Stand Along Data Collection<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Field Session Overview Using Only a Receiver</li>
<li>Starting an OPUS Field Session</li>
<li>Ending an OPUS Field Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading OPUS Data from a Trimble Receiver<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Using Data Transfer</li>
<li>Downloading Using Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Converting Trimble Receiver Files into a RINEX Format<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Converting Receiver Files into a RINEX Format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Submitting Files to OPUS</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:35:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Implementation and Impacts]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-implementation-and-impacts-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-implementation-and-impacts-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d2011_imple_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD offers a high level discussion on strategies for implementing AutoCAD Civil 3D, and how this BIM technology will affect your organization.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD offers a high level discussion on strategies for implementing AutoCAD Civil 3D, and how this BIM technology will affect your organization. The presenter conducts this webinar using PowerPoint and also shows you key functionality in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.   Key topics include a Civil 3D technology overview, BIM, data sharing and best practices for usage.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Civil 3D Technology Overview</li>
<li>Object Reactivity</li>
<li>Civil 3D and BIM</li>
<li>Data and Drawing Architecture</li>
<li>Data Exchange and Sharing</li>
<li>Employee Roles</li>
<li>Best Practices</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:19:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2010 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advexcel2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Excel 2010 - Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course delves into a variety of topics beyond the basics. Learn how to use a wide range of financial, logical, text, and statistical functions, analyze data with the scenario manager, and apply conditional formatting with the new Sparkline feature. Database management and pivot tables are covered in detail, as well as importing and exporting Excel data between applications.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Advanced Functions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Help with Functions</li>
<li>Logical Functions</li>
<li>Nested If Statements</li>
<li>Using "And" and "Or"</li>
<li>The COUNTIF Function</li>
<li>The SUMIF Function</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>More Excel Functions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Financial Functions</li>
<li>Text Functions</li>
<li>Lookup Functions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conditional Formatting and Sparklines 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Applying Conditional Formats</li>
<li>Managing Conditional Formats</li>
<li>Creating Sparklines</li>
<li>Modifying Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Data Validation</li>
<li>Working with Tables</li>
<li>Sorting a List</li>
<li>Filtering Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pivot Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is a Pivot Table?</li>
<li>Create and "Pivot" the Data</li>
<li>Filtering Data</li>
<li>Sorting Data</li>
<li>Filtering with Slicers</li>
<li>Adding a Pivot Chart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Analyzing Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Auditing and Error Checking</li>
<li>Using the Scenario Manager</li>
<li>Using Goal Seek</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing and Exporting Data 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Word/Excel Transfer</li>
<li>Importing Text Files</li>
<li>Excel/Access Transfer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:27:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2010 Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_intrpwrpnt2010-1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>PowerPoint 2010 Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will provide you with the skills you need to create effective and robust presentations in Microsoft PowerPoint 2010. In this course, you will learn how to select a design template, add slides, work with text, and add and format graphical objects in a presentation.  In addition, you will learn how to prepare your presentation for delivery and work with the slide masters.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Start PowerPoint 2010</li>
<li>Use the Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Open a Presentation</li>
<li>Slide Pane: Slide and Outline Tabs</li>
<li>Speaker Notes</li>
<li>Navigate in a Presentation</li>
<li>Change the View</li>
<li>Use Help</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create a Presentation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Start a New Presentation</li>
<li>Select a Design Theme</li>
<li>Create a Title Slide</li>
<li>Add Slides</li>
<li>Understand Slide Layouts</li>
<li>Create a Bulleted List Slide</li>
<li>Add sections</li>
<li>Change Design Theme</li>
<li>Save a Presentation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Use Find and Replace</li>
<li>Rearrange Slides</li>
<li>Edit Slides in the Outline</li>
<li>Delete Slides</li>
<li>Duplicate Slides</li>
<li>Use Cut, Copy,and Paste</li>
<li>Use the Clipboard Task Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Masters and Design Themes 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What Are Masters and How Do They Work?</li>
<li>Change Elements of a Theme</li>
<li>Add a Header and Footer</li>
<li>Elements of the Master</li>
<li>Change the Font</li>
<li>Change the Bullet</li>
<li>Add a Logo</li>
<li>Customize the Handout Master</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Working with Actions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Add an Action Button</li>
<li>Modify an Action Button</li>
<li>Add an Action to Any Shape</li>
<li>Customizing a Design Template</li>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Understanding the Relationship Between the Master, the Layouts and the Theme 
<ul>
<li>Add a New Slide Master</li>
<li>Remove a Master</li>
<li>Format a Slide Master via a Theme</li>
<li>Create New Theme Colors</li>
<li>Create New Theme Fonts</li>
<li>Create Custom Layouts</li>
<li>Save a Theme</li>
<li>Use a Custom Template</li>
<li>Create PowerPoint Templates</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing the PowerPoint Environment 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customize the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Change the General Options</li>
<li>Change the Proofing Options</li>
<li>Customize the Ribbon</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Presentation Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Build Slides from a Word Outline</li>
<li>Customize and Run a Custom Slide Show</li>
<li>Add Slide Timings to a Presentation</li>
<li>Rehearse Slide Timings</li>
<li>Hiding and Unhiding Slides</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:58:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2010 Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advaccess2010_1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Access 2010 Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course goes into more detail on how to make the database objects more interactive within Microsoft Access 2010. Starting with an explanation of the different table relationships and setting advanced properties within a Table, this course shows the user how to effectively use the tools within Microsoft Access to verify data as it gets entered into the database. This course also shows the user how to import an Excel spreadsheet and use the different Action Queries to create a relational database. Finally, the course shows viewers how to create interactive forms and reports by adding calculated controls.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents -&nbsp; Volume 1:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Designing the Access Database Application 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Access Development Phases</li>
<li>Understanding the Access Database Architectures</li>
<li>Installing the Database on the Server</li>
<li>Splitting the Database</li>
<li>Creating a Database Project</li>
<li>Creating a Database Using SharePoint</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Table Data Macro 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Data Macro Types</li>
<li>Creating an Event-Driven Data Macro</li>
<li>Deleting an Event-Driven Macro</li>
<li>Learning about the Application Log</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Advanced Queries 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using Outer Joins</li>
<li>Creating a Crosstab Query</li>
<li>Using Access Functions in a Query</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Form Design 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create an Autofill Form</li>
<li>Understanding Forms</li>
<li>Understanding Subforms</li>
<li>Referencing Controls found in Subforms</li>
<li>Organizing Controls by Using the Tab Control</li>
<li>Using the Option Group Control</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents -&nbsp; Volume 2:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Making Reports More Effective 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Charts to a Report</li>
<li>Canceling the Printing of a Blank Report</li>
<li>Using the On NoData Event</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Automating by Creating Macros 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Macro Types</li>
<li>Reviewing Object Events</li>
<li>Reviewing the Macro Editor</li>
<li>Creating Macros</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>System Wrap-Up and Distribution 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Database Autostart Options</li>
<li>Document the Database</li>
<li>Split a Database</li>
<li>Set a Database Password</li>
<li>Convert an Access Database to an .accde File</li>
<li>Package a Database</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:53:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2010 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introexcel2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Excel 2010 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to teach students the fundamentals of Excel.  Specifically students will understand how to create, save, enter data and print spreadsheets in addition to learning how to create formulas and use functions to calculate in Excel.  Students will learn how to format spreadsheets and use page setup options to prepare them for printing.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Three Primary Functions of Excel</li>
<li>Spreadsheet Terminology</li>
<li>Overview of the Excel Screen</li>
<li>Open a Workbook</li>
<li>Navigate a Worksheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Worksheet Skills 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create a New Workbook</li>
<li>Enter Data</li>
<li>Selecting: Range, Column, Row, Cells</li>
<li>Use a Different Worksheet</li>
<li>Rename Worksheets</li>
<li>Add New Worksheets</li>
<li>AutoFill</li>
<li>Delete Worksheets</li>
<li>Save a Workbook</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Formulas 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understand the Order of Operations</li>
<li>Simple Formulas</li>
<li>Cell Addresses in a Formula</li>
<li>SUM Function</li>
<li>AutoSum</li>
<li>Function Library</li>
<li>MAX Function</li>
<li>MIN Function</li>
<li>Average with AutoSum</li>
<li>COUNT Function</li>
<li>Date Arithmetic</li>
<li>Number Formats in Cells</li>
<li>Relative v. Absolute Cell Addressing</li>
<li>AutoCalculate</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing a Workbook 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Delete a Range</li>
<li>Undo and Redo</li>
<li>Cut, Copy and Paste</li>
<li>Paste Options</li>
<li>Clipboard Task Pane</li>
<li>Find and Replace</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting the Worksheet 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Insert and Delete Columns and Rows</li>
<li>Column Widths and Row Heights</li>
<li>Hide Rows and Columns</li>
<li>Numeric Formats</li>
<li>Text Formats</li>
<li>Align Data</li>
<li>Borders and Shading</li>
<li>Draw Border</li>
<li>Format Painter</li>
<li>Cell Styles</li>
<li>Modify a Cell Style</li>
<li>Create New Cell Styles</li>
<li>Design Theme</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Large Worksheets and Multiple Workbooks 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Zoom</li>
<li>Split a Window</li>
<li>Freeze and Unfreeze Panes</li>
<li>Multiple Workbooks</li>
<li>Tile Workbooks</li>
<li>Side-by-Side View</li>
<li>Move and Resize Windows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Protection and Comment Boxes 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Comments</li>
<li>Protect a Worksheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing and Page Setup 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Print Preview</li>
<li>Page Break Preview</li>
<li>Printing Options</li>
<li>Page Setup</li>
<li>Headers And Footers</li>
<li>Sheet Options</li>
<li>Print Titles</li>
<li>Print Area</li>
<li>Page Layout Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:28:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Project Phasing]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-project-phasing.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-project-phasing.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitprjphasng_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit Project Phasing</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will demonstrate the concepts of phasing inside Revit. You will learn how to create and apply phases to elements and views. Knowledge of Revit Essentials is a prerequisite.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Project Phases 
<ul>
<li>Insert Phases</li>
<li>Combine Phases</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Phases in Views</li>
<li>Filters and Overrides 
<ul>
<li>Phase Filters</li>
<li>Graphic Overrides</li>
<li>Demolishing Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Browser</li>
<li>Phases in Schedules</li>
<li>Phase Mapping</li>
<li>Dataset and Reference File</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:15:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Respectful Workplace - Anti-Harassment & Discrimination Certification]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/respectful-workplace-anti-harassment-discrimination-certification.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/respectful-workplace-anti-harassment-discrimination-certification.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_respctwrkplace_crt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>A discussion of respectful workplaces and the effect communication has on creating a respectful workplace.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>A discussion of respectful workplaces and the effect communication has on creating a respectful workplace. An overview of Harassment and Discrimination law, forms of harassment in the workplace and how to conduct a harassment investigation. The course ends with a quiz to test your knowledge.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What is Respect?</li>
<li>Communication</li>
<li>Respectful Workplace</li>
<li>Harassment &amp; Discrimination Laws</li>
<li>Forms of Harassment</li>
<li>Role</li>
<li>Investigations</li>
<li>Quiz</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:56:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2010 Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interaccess2010_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Access 2010 Intermediate</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course goes into more detail on how to make the database objects more interactive within Microsoft Access 2010. Starting with an explanation of the different table relationships and setting advanced properties within a Table, this course shows the user how to effectively use the tools within Microsoft Access to verify data as it gets entered into the database.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Introducing Access 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Backstage View</li>
<li>Reviewing the Ribbon</li>
<li>Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Understanding the Navigation Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Opening an Existing Database 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Opening a Table</li>
<li>Reviewing the Anatomy of a Table</li>
<li>Using the Navigation Buttons</li>
<li>Using the Search Text Box</li>
<li>Using the Field Quick Filter Button</li>
<li>Navigating the Table Using the Keyboard</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a New Database and Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Advanced Table Design</li>
<li>Creating a New Table Using the Design View</li>
<li>Understanding the Table Design View</li>
<li>Reviewing the Calculated Field</li>
<li>Creating a New Table Using the Datasheet View</li>
<li>Adding Fields</li>
<li>Adding Predefined Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Table 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Finding Data Using the Find Dialog Box</li>
<li>Using Wildcards</li>
<li>Changing Data Using the Replace</li>
<li>Adding Totals</li>
<li>Understanding Table Relationships</li>
<li>Viewing the Subdatasheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Select Query 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Query Types</li>
<li>Using the Query Wizard</li>
<li>Reviewing the Query Design Window</li>
<li>Running Queries</li>
<li>Entering Criteria</li>
<li>Range Operators</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Simple Forms 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Simple Form Using the Form Button</li>
<li>Understanding the Form Design Window</li>
<li>Selecting, Moving and Resizing Controls</li>
<li>Deleting Controls</li>
<li>Creating a New Form Using the Form Wizard</li>
<li>Creating a Navigation Form</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Simple Reports
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Simple Reports Using the Report Wizard</li>
<li>Understanding the Report Design Window</li>
<li>Understanding the Report Bands</li>
<li>Selecting, Moving and Resizing Controls</li>
<li>Changing the Page Layout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:56:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2010 Introduction ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introutlook2010_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Outlook 2010 Introduction </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course will provide students with the skills needed to start sending and responding to email in Microsoft Outlook 2010, as well as maintaining a Calendar, scheduling meetings, and working with tasks and notes.  In this course, students will compose and send email, schedule appointments and meetings, manage contact information and tasks, and use notes.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Oriented 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What Makes up Outlook</li>
<li>Starting Outlook</li>
<li>Understanding the Outlook Interface</li>
<li>Using the Navigation Pane</li>
<li>Accessing Outlook Today</li>
<li>Using the To-Do Bar</li>
<li>Using the Different Views in the Navigation Pane</li>
<li>Understanding the Reading Pane</li>
<li>Using the People Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Email 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating and Sending Mail</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Address Books</li>
<li>Formatting a Message</li>
<li>Using Spell Check</li>
<li>Understanding Message Notification</li>
<li>Setting Spell Check Options</li>
<li>Reading Messages</li>
<li>Replying and Forwarding Messages</li>
<li>Recalling a Message</li>
<li>Adding Attachments</li>
<li>Opening and Previewing Attachments</li>
<li>Saving Attachments</li>
<li>Saving Email</li>
<li>Printing Email</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting Email Options 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Tagging and Flagging a Message</li>
<li>Marking Reminders as Complete</li>
<li>Using Receipts</li>
<li>Tracking Votes</li>
<li>Using Receipts</li>
<li>Delaying Delivery</li>
<li>Creating Drafts</li>
<li>Creating a Signature</li>
<li>Inserting a Signature</li>
<li>Editing a Signature</li>
<li>Creating Autotext Entries</li>
<li>Inserting Autotext</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Email 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Folder</li>
<li>Renaming a Folder</li>
<li>Selecting Messages</li>
<li>Moving and copying Messages</li>
<li>Deleting Email and Folders</li>
<li>Recovering Deleted Items</li>
<li>What are Conversations</li>
<li>Using Conversations</li>
<li>Cleaning Up Conversations</li>
<li>Setting Up Automatic Replies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Calendar 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Viewing the Calendar</li>
<li>Moving to a Specific Date</li>
<li>Entering Calendar Items</li>
<li>Setting Appointment Options</li>
<li>Entering Events</li>
<li>Editing a Calendar Item&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Editing Directly in the Calendar</li>
<li>Creating Recurring Calendar Items</li>
<li>Deleting Calendar Items</li>
<li>Planning a Meeting</li>
<li>Editing a Meeting</li>
<li>Responding to a Meeting</li>
<li>Changing Calendar Defaults</li>
<li>Printing the Calendar</li>
<li>Working with Tasks</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Tasks</li>
<li>Creating Recurring Tasks</li>
<li>Skipping a Recurring Task</li>
<li>Editing a Task</li>
<li>Marking a Task Complete</li>
<li>Deleting Tasks</li>
<li>Working with Task Requests</li>
<li>Using Different Views</li>
<li>Creating an Appointment from a Task</li>
<li>Printing Tasks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Contacts 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Contact&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Adding a Contact from an Email Message</li>
<li>Editing a Contact</li>
<li>Creating a Group Contact</li>
<li>Addressing a Message to a Group Contact</li>
<li>Expanding a Group Contact</li>
<li>Adding a Picture</li>
<li>Reviewing Contact Activity with the People Pane</li>
<li>Using Automatic Mapping</li>
<li>Forwarding a Contact</li>
<li>Changing the Contact View</li>
<li>Finding a Contact</li>
<li>Printing a Contact</li>
<li>Working with Notes</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Notes</li>
<li>Viewing Notes</li>
<li>Forwarding Notes</li>
<li>Deleting Notes</li>
<li>Printing Notes</li>
<li>Placing Notes on the Desktop</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:49:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Visio 2010 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/visio-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/visio-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_intrvisio2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Visio 2010 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the viewer to the basics of Microsoft Visio 2010. The primary focus is to get acquainted with creating the different diagrams using the stencils and templates. Once completed, the viewer will be proficient with more than merely the basics of this application.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Understanding the Visio Environment 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Backstage View</li>
<li>Working with the Ribbon</li>
<li>Working with Windows Stencils</li>
<li>Tab Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Diagrams 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Working with Shapes</li>
<li>Connecting Shapes</li>
<li>Using the AutoConnect Feature</li>
<li>Using Connector Shapes</li>
<li>Adding Text</li>
<li>Adding Large Text</li>
<li>Manipulating Shape Text</li>
<li>Using Drawing Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting a Diagram 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adjusting Spacing</li>
<li>Grouping Objects</li>
<li>Formatting Shapes</li>
<li>Applying Themes</li>
<li>Selecting Different Effects</li>
<li>Modifying the Diagram Colors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Pages 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Modifying File Properties</li>
<li>Creating Background Pages</li>
<li>Adding Fields to Diagrams</li>
<li>Adding Page Links</li>
<li>Working with Page &amp; Printer Setup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating an Organization Chart 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating an Organization Chart Manually</li>
<li>Creating an Organization Chart Using the Wizard and External Files</li>
<li>Creating a Synchronized Link</li>
<li>Modifying the Layout</li>
<li>Creating a Brainstorming Chart</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Topics</li>
<li>Adding Legend Items</li>
<li>Exporting Diagram Data to XML</li>
<li>Importing Diagram Data</li>
<li>Modifying the Diagram</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:26:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[TerraSync and Pathfinder Office v5.0 - Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/terrasync-and-pathfinder-office-v5-0-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/terrasync-and-pathfinder-office-v5-0-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_terrasync_offbsc_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>TerraSync and Pathfinder Office v5.0 - Basics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course assumes you know nothing about GPS, TerraSync, and Pathfinder Office.  It covers basic GPS principles, creating a data dictionary, transferring files to and from the GPS, basic data collection, differential correction, and data export to a CAD or GIS file.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Course Objectives</li>
<li>GPS Fundamentals 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>What is GPS?</li>
<li>The Basic Idea Behind GPS</li>
<li>Satellite Ranging</li>
<li>GPS by Trilateration</li>
<li>How Does GPS Get Our Location</li>
<li>Almanac</li>
<li>Ephemeris</li>
<li>Sources of Error</li>
<li>Differential Correction</li>
<li>GPS Fundamentals Recap- Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps for a Successful Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary for Pathfinder Office 5.X 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Feature Classifications</li>
<li>Understanding Attributes</li>
<li>Designing a Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Understanding GPS Projects</li>
<li>Creating a GPS Project</li>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Transferring a data dictionary to the GPS device</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary for Pathfinder Office 4.2 or earlier 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Feature Classifications</li>
<li>Understanding Attributes</li>
<li>Designing a Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Steps to Starting the Data Dictionary Editor</li>
<li>Creating a Project</li>
<li>Where are GPS Projects Located</li>
<li>Creating a Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Saving the Data Dictionary</li>
<li>Recap - Session Objectives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Equipment and Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Identifying the System Components</li>
<li>Devices with Both the Field Computer and GPS Receiver</li>
<li>Devices that are GPS Receivers</li>
<li>Devices that are Field Computers</li>
<li>Devices that are External Antennas</li>
<li>Recap - Session Objectives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Configuration and TerraSync Software Settings 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps to Transfer a Data Dictionary to a Device</li>
<li>TerraSync Software</li>
<li>TerraSync Settings</li>
<li>Configuring TerraSync</li>
<li>Optimizing Windows Mobile 6.1 for GPS Collection</li>
<li>Recap - Session Objectives</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Getting Around TerraSync 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>TerraSync's 5 Sections and Uses</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Basic TerraSync Options</li>
<li>Basic Data Collection</li>
<li>Lines and Areas</li>
<li>Example of Log and Options</li>
<li>Practicing the Steps for an Area</li>
<li>Field Collection</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Processing 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Steps to Transferring a Data File</li>
<li>Data Transfer</li>
<li>Pathfinder Office Settings</li>
<li>Configuring the Settings</li>
<li>Pathfinder Office - Viewing Data</li>
<li>Differential Correction</li>
<li>Background Data</li>
<li>Exporting Data</li>
<li>Setting up an Export Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">199.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:05:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2010 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advword2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Word 2010 - Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to take students to the next level with Word 2010.  The training will focus on advanced navigation techniques, using web components, working with graphics and images, adding references in a document and advanced automation techniques like macros and inserting objects.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Advanced Table Techniques</li>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Split and Merge Cells</li>
<li>Span Tables Across Pages</li>
<li>Table Headings</li>
<li>Move and Resize Tables</li>
<li>Text Wrapping</li>
<li>Table Alignment</li>
<li>Table Properties</li>
<li>Change Text Direction</li>
<li>Sorting in a Table</li>
<li>Calculations</li>
<li>Indents and Tabs</li>
<li>Drawing a Table</li>
<li>Nested Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Envelopes and Labels 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create an Envelope</li>
<li>Create a Label</li>
<li>Single Sheet of the Same Label</li>
<li>Format Labels</li>
<li>Individual Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Mail Merge 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understand Mail Merges</li>
<li>Mail Merge Wizard</li>
<li>Merge Field Codes</li>
<li>Preview Merge Results</li>
<li>Complete the Merge</li>
<li>Create a Recipient List</li>
<li>Rules</li>
<li>Create Merged Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What are Styles?</li>
<li>Apply Styles</li>
<li>What are Design Themes?</li>
<li>Change Elements of the Design Theme</li>
<li>Modify a Style</li>
<li>Create a New Style</li>
<li>Assign a Shortcut Key to a Style</li>
<li>Importing and Exporting Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Templates 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What are Templates?</li>
<li>Create a Document Using a Template</li>
<li>Build New Templates</li>
<li>Use a Custom Template</li>
<li>Edit a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Quick Parts and the Building Blocks Organizer 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Cover Page</li>
<li>Watermarks</li>
<li>Equations</li>
<li>Accessing Quick Parts from the Building Blocks Organizer</li>
<li>AutoText Entries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Table of Contents 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Table of Contents Based on Heading Styles</li>
<li>Mark Entries to a Table of Contents</li>
<li>Modify Table of Contents Styles</li>
<li>Update the Table of Contents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Index 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Mark Entries for an Index</li>
<li>Generate an Index</li>
<li>Update an Index</li>
<li>Modify Index Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Document Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Page Border</li>
<li>Section Breaks</li>
<li>Page Orientation</li>
<li>Columns</li>
<li>Create Complex Headers and Footers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:34:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2010 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interword2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Word 2010 - Intermediate</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course is designed to expand on the skills learned in the Introduction to Word 2010 training.  Specifically this class will focus on advanced table techniques, using mail merge, creating envelopes and labels, and working with long document functions such as building a table of contents, building an index, using paragraph styles, working with section breaks and creating complex headers and footers.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Advanced Table Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Split and Merge Cells</li>
<li>Span Tables Across Pages</li>
<li>Table Headings</li>
<li>Move and Resize Tables</li>
<li>Text Wrapping</li>
<li>Table Alignment</li>
<li>Table Properties</li>
<li>Change Text Direction</li>
<li>Sorting in a Table</li>
<li>Calculations</li>
<li>Indents and Tabs</li>
<li>Drawing a Table</li>
<li>Nested Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Envelopes and Labels 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create an Envelope</li>
<li>Create a Label</li>
<li>Single Sheet of the Same Label</li>
<li>Format Labels</li>
<li>Individual Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Mail Merge 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understand Mail Merges</li>
<li>Mail Merge Wizard</li>
<li>Merge Field Codes</li>
<li>Preview Merge Results</li>
<li>Complete the Merge</li>
<li>Create a Recipient List</li>
<li>Rules</li>
<li>Create Merged Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What are Styles?</li>
<li>Apply Styles</li>
<li>What are Design Themes?</li>
<li>Change Elements of the Design Theme</li>
<li>Modify a Style</li>
<li>Create a New Style</li>
<li>Assign a Shortcut Key to a Style</li>
<li>Importing and Exporting Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Templates 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What are Templates?</li>
<li>Create a Document Using a Template</li>
<li>Build New Templates</li>
<li>Use a Custom Template</li>
<li>Edit a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Quick Parts and the Building Blocks Organizer 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Cover Page</li>
<li>Watermarks</li>
<li>Equations</li>
<li>Accessing Quick Parts from the Building Blocks Organizer</li>
<li>AutoText Entries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Table of Contents 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Table of Contents Based on Heading Styles</li>
<li>Mark Entries to a Table of Contents</li>
<li>Modify Table of Contents Styles</li>
<li>Update the Table of Contents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Index 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Mark Entries for an Index</li>
<li>Generate an Index</li>
<li>Update an Index</li>
<li>Modify Index Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Document Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Page Border</li>
<li>Section Breaks</li>
<li>Page Orientation</li>
<li>Columns</li>
<li>Create Complex Headers and Footers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:35:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2010 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_intrword2010_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Word 2010 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to enter and edit text, save and navigate documents, enhance the appearance of a document by using various formatting options, create tables, insert headers and footers, and proof and print documents.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Documents and Understand the Screen 
<ul>
<li>Start Word</li>
<li>Review the Word Interface</li>
<li>Change Views</li>
<li>Customize the Status Bar</li>
<li>Customize the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Use the File Tab</li>
<li>Save</li>
<li>Enter Text</li>
<li>Display Non-Printing Characters</li>
<li>Access Help</li>
<li>Work with File Properties</li>
<li>Use Versions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Documents 
<ul>
<li>Open a File</li>
<li>Move around in a File</li>
<li>Select Text</li>
<li>Insert a Symbol</li>
<li>Cut, Copy and Paste</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Essentials of Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Types of Formatting</li>
<li>Character Formatting</li>
<li>Use the Format Painter</li>
<li>Change Alignments</li>
<li>Indent Text</li>
<li>Adjust Spacing</li>
<li>Format Using Keyboard Shortcuts</li>
<li>Bullets and Numbers</li>
<li>Tabs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tables 
<ul>
<li>Create a Table</li>
<li>Convert Text and Tables</li>
<li>Navigate in a Table</li>
<li>Resize Rows and Columns</li>
<li>Select Cells in a Table</li>
<li>Insert and Delete Rows and Columns</li>
<li>Add Table Styles</li>
<li>Adjust Lines and Shading</li>
<li>Alignment a Table</li>
<li>Create a Signature Block</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Essentials of Document Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Change the Margins</li>
<li>Insert Page Breaks</li>
<li>Headers and Footers</li>
<li>Page Orientation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Work Flow Tools 
<ul>
<li>Check Spelling and Grammar</li>
<li>Thesaurus</li>
<li>Find and Replace</li>
<li>AutoCorrect</li>
<li>AutoFormat</li>
<li>Insert Date and Time</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing, Saving and Emailing Documents 
<ul>
<li>Print</li>
<li>Emailing Documents</li>
<li>Save as a PDF or XPS</li>
<li>Inspecting Documents</li>
<li>Check Accessibility</li>
<li>Check Compatibility</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:37:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2010 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2010-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_word2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Word 2010 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Word 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Word 2010 - Introduction</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Word 2010 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 14:04:21 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Office 2010 - New Features]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2010-new-features.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2010-new-features.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_newfeat2010_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Office 2010 - New Features</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Students will learn features new in Office 2010 and Office 2007.  Topics covered during the course will include the Backstage View; Ribbon tabs, groups, and contextual tabs; galleries; live preview; and the mini toolbar.  The benefits and features of the new XML file format will be covered.  In addition, dedicated units for Word, Excel, PowerPoint , Outlook and Access will introduce the new features found in each of these applications.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>What's New Across Office 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Ribbon</li>
<li>Contextual Tabs</li>
<li>Galleries and Live Preview</li>
<li>Dialog Box Launcher</li>
<li>Customize the Status Bar</li>
<li>Mini Toolbar</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Customize the Ribbon</li>
<li>Reset the Ribbon</li>
<li>Backstage View</li>
<li>View and Edit Document Properties</li>
<li>Compatibility Checker</li>
<li>Accessibility Checker</li>
<li>Document Inspector</li>
<li>Recover a Previous Version</li>
<li>Recent Files</li>
<li>New File</li>
<li>Printing and Print Preview</li>
<li>Save as a PDF or XPS</li>
<li>XML File Format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What's New in Word 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Changes in Styles</li>
<li>Using Themes</li>
<li>Table Styles</li>
<li>Text Effects</li>
<li>Picture Effects</li>
<li>The Navigation Pane</li>
<li>Quick Parts</li>
<li>Building Block Organizer</li>
<li>AutoText</li>
<li>Equations</li>
<li>Charts</li>
<li>Capture Screenshots</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What's New in Excel 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>New Worksheet Capacity</li>
<li>Conditional Formatting</li>
<li>Sparklines</li>
<li>Charts</li>
<li>Format Data as a Table</li>
<li>Filter and Sort Data</li>
<li>Expand a Table</li>
<li>PivotTables</li>
<li>Slicers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What's New in PowerPoint 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Apply a Slide Design</li>
<li>Customize Design Theme Elements</li>
<li>Changes in Slide Layouts</li>
<li>Create a New Slide Layout</li>
<li>Insert a Second Master Slide</li>
<li>Add and Rename Sections</li>
<li>Move and Print Sections</li>
<li>Add and Format Video</li>
<li>Set Media Playback Options</li>
<li>Convert a Bulleted List to SmartArt</li>
<li>Create SmartArt on a New Slide</li>
<li>Convert SmartArt to Text</li>
<li>Add Transition Effects</li>
<li>Add Animation</li>
<li>Animation Painter</li>
<li>Broadcast a Slide Show</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What's New in Outlook 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>New Interface</li>
<li>Minimize the Ribbon</li>
<li>Flag a Message</li>
<li>Understanding Conversations</li>
<li>Clean Up a Conversation</li>
<li>Create a Quick Step</li>
<li>Edit Quick Steps</li>
<li>Searching</li>
<li>New Calendar Interface</li>
<li>Sharing Calendars</li>
<li>Side-by-Side Calendar View</li>
<li>Calendar Groups</li>
<li>Plan a Meeting</li>
<li>Send a Calendar via Email</li>
<li>Set Up Categories</li>
<li>Apply a Category</li>
<li>Arrange by Category</li>
<li>Out of Office Messages</li>
<li>People Pane</li>
<li>Search for Contacts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>What's New in Access 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Backstage View</li>
<li>New Database Templates Including Web Databases</li>
<li>Improved Macro Designer</li>
<li>New Table Features</li>
<li>New Form and Report Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:43:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2010 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2010-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/f/i/file_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Access 2010 - Introduction</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the viewer to the basics of Microsoft Access 2010.  The primary focus is to get acquainted with creating the basic database objects within the interface and how to use these objects effectively.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contens:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Introducing Access 2010 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Backstage View</li>
<li>Reviewing the Ribbon</li>
<li>Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Understanding the Navigation Pane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Opening an Existing Database 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Opening a Table</li>
<li>Reviewing the Anatomy of a Table</li>
<li>Using the Navigation Buttons</li>
<li>Using the Search Text Box</li>
<li>Using the Field Quick Filter Button</li>
<li>Navigating the Table Using the Keyboard</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a New Database and Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a New Table Using the Design View</li>
<li>Understanding the Table Design View</li>
<li>Reviewing the Calculated Field</li>
<li>Creating a New Table Using the Datasheet View</li>
<li>Adding Fields</li>
<li>Adding Predefined Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Table 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Finding Data Using the Find Dialog Box</li>
<li>Using Wildcards</li>
<li>Changing Data Using the Replace</li>
<li>Adding Totals</li>
<li>Understanding Table Relationships</li>
<li>Viewing the Subdatasheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Creating a Select Query 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Query Types</li>
<li>Using the Query Wizard</li>
<li>Reviewing the Query Design Window</li>
<li>Running Queries</li>
<li>Entering Criteria</li>
<li>Range Operators</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Simple Forms 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating a Simple Form Using the Form Button</li>
<li>Understanding the Form Design Window</li>
<li>Selecting, Moving and Resizing Controls</li>
<li>Deleting Controls</li>
<li>Creating a New Form Using the Form Wizard</li>
<li>Creating a Navigation Form</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Simple Reports 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Simple Reports Using the Report Wizard</li>
<li>Understanding the Report Design Window</li>
<li>Understanding the Report Bands</li>
<li>Selecting, Moving and Resizing Controls</li>
<li>Changing the Page Layout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:58:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performing an OPUS Session with an Epoch 35 Receiver with or without Survey Pro]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-an-epoch-35-receiver-with-or-without-survey-pro.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performing-an-opus-session-with-an-epoch-35-receiver-with-or-without-survey-pro.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_epoch35_recvr_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using an Epoch 35 Receiver with or without the Spectra Precision Survey Pro Software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to collect static GPS data to be processed by OPUS using an Epoch 35 Receiver with or without the Spectra Precision Survey Pro Software. You will be taken from configuring the receiver or Survey Pro, to collecting static GPS data, downloading the data, converting it to Rinex and submitting the data to OPUS.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to an Epoch 35 Receiver</li>
<li>Post Processing Settings in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Collecting OPUS Field Data with Survey Pro 
<ul>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a Field Data Collection Session</li>
<li>Ending a Field Data Collection Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading OPUS Data from a Data Collector 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Epoch 35 Stand Alone Data Collection Steps 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a Field Data Collection Session</li>
<li>Ending a Field Data Collection Session</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Downloading Data from an Epoch 35 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Downloading Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Converting Epoch Receiver Files to Rinex 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Converting Epoch Static Files to Rinex for Submission to OPUS</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Files to Rinex&nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Submitting Files to OPUS</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:32:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Navisworks Manage 2011: Concepts and Coordination]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-manage-2011-concepts-and-coordination.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/navisworks-manage-2011-concepts-and-coordination.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_naviwrks2011_concpt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Navisworks Manage 2011: Concepts and Coordination</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course we demonstrate the Concepts of the Autodesk NavisWorks Manage 2011 features. You will learn how to open, review, and run object-interference checks on 3D models. Also, how to link to task-scheduling files and create 4D construction simulations. This course provides you with the skills and knowledge to use Navisworks 2011 effectively.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Interface Overview</li>
<li>Open and Append Files</li>
<li>Saving and Navigation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Core Concepts 
<ul>
<li>Selection Tree and Selecting Objects</li>
<li>Hiding Objects and Overriding Materials</li>
<li>Object Properties</li>
<li>Measuring and Moving Objects</li>
<li>Selection and Search Sets</li>
<li>Viewpoints</li>
<li>Comments and Redlining</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Clash Detective 
<ul>
<li>Overview of Select Tab for Executing Clash Tests</li>
<li>Create and Save Batches of Clash Tests</li>
<li>Setting Clash Rules</li>
<li>Clash Results</li>
<li>Clash Test Reporting</li>
<li>Audit Checks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>TimeLiner 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Tasks</li>
<li>Import Tasks from External Source</li>
<li>Configuring and Defining a Simulation</li>
<li>TimeLiner Simulation Overview</li>
<li>Simulate Settings</li>
<li>Simulation Export</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Download Data Set</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">59.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:15:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Epoch 35 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro Using a MiFi Getting Started Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-35-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/epoch-35-vrs-rover-with-spectra-precision-survey-pro-using-a-mifi-getting-started-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_epoch35vrs_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Epoch 35 VRS Rover with Spectra Precision Survey Pro Using a MiFi Getting Started Guide</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS Service with an Epoch 35 Survey Grade GPS Receiver and the Spectra Precision Survey Pro software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration   
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>MiFi Activation</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model   
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Survey Pro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Receiver Profile in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Pro</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Pro   
<ul>
<li>Troubleshooting Wireless Connection</li>
<li>Starting Survey Pro and Opening Job</li>
<li>Starting VRS Survey</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:16:05 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Parcels in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_parcels_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Parcels in Civil 3D 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Parcels in Civil 3D 2011 vBook goes deeper into the parcel feature in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. Using live recorded lectures we demonstrate and discuss how you can use the parcel tools to subdivided lots as well as use them for other land features such as drainage area, soil types, or contamination areas.</p>
<div class="toc">
<p>Table of Contents</p>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Parcels by Object 
<ul>
<li>Begin Create</li>
<li>Create Parcel Dialog Overview</li>
<li>Close Parcel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel Settings 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Parcel Feature Settings</li>
<li>Label Style Defaults</li>
<li>User Defined Properties</li>
<li>Parcel Styles</li>
<li>Lable Styles</li>
<li>Table Styles</li>
<li>Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create ROW Parcel 
<ul>
<li>Create Alignment</li>
<li>Create ROW</li>
<li>ROW Parameters</li>
<li>Subdivide Parcels from ROW</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel Creation Tools 
<ul>
<li>Parcel Creation Overview</li>
<li>Free Form Create</li>
<li>Slide Line Create Tool</li>
<li>Slide Line Edit</li>
<li>Swing Line Create</li>
<li>Swing Line Edit</li>
<li>Multiple Parcel Property Edit</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel Labels 
<ul>
<li>Label Introduction</li>
<li>Add Single Segment</li>
<li>Add Multiple Labels</li>
<li>Add Label Dialog</li>
<li>Flip Label</li>
<li>Add Tag Labels</li>
<li>Add Label to Table</li>
<li>Change Table Sort Order</li>
<li>Renumber Tags</li>
<li>Add Area Label</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Parcels By Layout</li>
<li>Parcel Properties 
<ul>
<li>Inverse Parcel Segments</li>
<li>Map Check Parcel</li>
<li>Change Parcel POB</li>
<li>Parcel User Defined Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel Display Sort Order</li>
<li>Site Properties</li>
<li>Assign User Defined Properties</li>
<li>Zoom to Parcel</li>
<li>Preview Parcel in Prospector</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:33:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Raster Design 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/raster-design-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/raster-design-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_rasterdesn11_essnt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Raster Design 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course we'll talk about inserting and saving images, enhancing the appearance of images and editing images in Raster Design 2011. We will also look at Raster to Vector conversion as well as Raster design options.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Inserting and Saving Images 
<ul>
<li>Image Insert</li>
<li>Supported File Formats</li>
<li>Image Insertions</li>
<li>Image Cropping</li>
<li>Saving an Image to Another File Name, Type or Location</li>
<li>Image Frames</li>
<li>Saving an Image</li>
<li>Image Toolspace</li>
<li>Embedding an Image</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enhancing the Appearance of Images 
<ul>
<li>Correlating Scanned Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Displace</li>
<li>Scale</li>
<li>Rubbersheeting Image</li>
<li>Match</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Image Cleanup 
<ul>
<li>Despeckle</li>
<li>&nbsp;Bias</li>
<li>Invert</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Touchup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Image Processing 
<ul>
<li>Changing the Color Depth</li>
<li>Using Bitonal Filters</li>
<li>Changing Image Density</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Images 
<ul>
<li>Raster Entity Manipulation</li>
<li>Defining REM Region Objects</li>
<li>Manipulating REM Objects</li>
<li>Merging Images</li>
<li>Clearing REM Objects</li>
<li>Defining REM Primitive Objects</li>
<li>Merging Images</li>
<li>Merging Vectors into a Raster Image</li>
<li>Selecting Pen Widths for Vector Merge</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Raster to Vector Conversion 
<ul>
<li>Using Vectorization Tools</li>
<li>Using Text Recognition</li>
<li>Vectorizing Raster Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Raster Design Options 
<ul>
<li>Paths Tab</li>
<li>User Preferences Tab</li>
<li>Feature Settings Tab</li>
<li>Image Default Tab</li>
<li>New Image Tab</li>
<li>Vector Merge Tab</li>
<li>REM Tab</li>
<li>Raster Entity Manipulation Tab</li>
<li>VTools General Tab</li>
<li>VTools Follower Tab</li>
<li>Image Mask Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:12:00 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11civil3d.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2011 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2011 Bundle contains 10 vBooks delivering essential knowledge on civil-related project work including superelevation concepts, generate offset alignments and lane taper, point clouds, &amp; more.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Alignment Offsets and Widenings in Civil 3D 2011</li>
<li>Civil 3D 2011 Essentials Training</li>
<li>Civil 3D 2011 Subdivision Intersection and Bulb Design Webinar</li>
<li>Civil 3D Data Migration</li>
<li>Civil 3D Quick Steps</li>
<li>Design Environment in Civil 3D 2011</li>
<li>New Features in Civil 3D 2011</li>
<li>Points in Civil 3D 2011</li>
<li>Superelevation in Civil 3D 2011</li>
<li>Survey in Civil 3D 2011</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">275.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:26:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Survey in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_survytrn_1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Survey in Civil 3D 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This Survey in Civil 3D course is designed to provide instruction to the Surveyor on the reduction and processing of survey data using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. We'll discuss what is required for the setup of styles and standards, the conversion of raw data through the process of creating a surface from survey data.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Software Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Setup Drawing Template</li>
<li>Description Key Set </li>
<li>Figure Point Style </li>
<li>Survey Figure Styles </li>
<li>Fgure Prefix Database </li>
<li>Line Code Sets </li>
<li>Survey User Settings </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Project  
<ul>
<li>Setup the Project Introduction </li>
<li>Set the Working Folder </li>
<li>Create th Project Folder</li>
<li>Create New Drawing </li>
<li>Import Survey Data </li>
<li>RAW Data overview </li>
<li>Convert Raw Data </li>
<li>Edit the FBK File</li>
<li>Import Survey Data</li>
<li>Resolve Errors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Review the Survey Database  
<ul>
<li>Import Event </li>
<li>Network </li>
<li>Setups </li>
<li>Point and Figures </li>
<li>Review the Data </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Points  
<ul>
<li>Changing Point Properties</li>
<li>Using Point Groups </li>
<li>Point Display </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Figures  
<ul>
<li>Edit Survey Point Properties </li>
<li>Figure Editor </li>
<li>Create a Curve </li>
<li>Edit Point order of a Figure</li>
<li>Join Figures </li>
<li>Delete Figure </li>
<li>Change Figure Style </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Surface  
<ul>
<li>Create Surface Point Group </li>
<li>Create Surface </li>
<li>Add Point Group </li>
<li>Add Figures </li>
<li>Edit Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:40:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Subdivision Intersection and Bulb Design]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-subdivision-intersection-and-bulb-design-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-subdivision-intersection-and-bulb-design-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_blbdsn_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use the intersection wizard to create subdivision intersection and corridor objects.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use the intersection wizard to create subdivision intersection and corridor objects.  You will also learn how to model a bulb for a subdivision road, and tie the corridors together in a subdivision.  This 90 minutes of lessons in this vBook are designed for the intermediate to advanced level user.  An understanding of corridor modeling with multiple regions is essential.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Agenda</li>
<li>Intersection Corridor Overview</li>
<li>Data Org - Sites</li>
<li>Data Org - Alignment Categories</li>
<li>Data Organization - Object Names</li>
<li>Design Strategies</li>
<li>Delete Existing Data</li>
<li>Create 4-way Intersection</li>
<li>General Intersection Parameters</li>
<li>Intersection Alignments</li>
<li>Intersection Profiles</li>
<li>Intersection Corridor Regions</li>
<li>Review Intersection and Corridor Data</li>
<li>PVI Locking</li>
<li>Create 3-way Intersection</li>
<li>Review and Correct Corridor</li>
<li>Roads Between Intersections</li>
<li>Subdivision Bulb Modeling</li>
<li>Composite Top Surface</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:26:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Survey Controller Getting Started Guide using a MiFi]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-survey-controller-getting-started-guide-using-a-mifi.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-survey-controller-getting-started-guide-using-a-mifi.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsrover_srvcntrl_mifi_.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Survey Controller software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Survey Controller software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Configuring the MiFi with the TSC2</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Survey Controller</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Reciever</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Survey Style in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:20:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Survey Controller Getting Started Guide using a Cell Phone]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-survey-controller-getting-started-guide-using-a-cell-phone.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-survey-controller-getting-started-guide-using-a-cell-phone.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsrover_srvcntrl_cell_.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Survey Controller software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Survey Controller software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>Cell Phone Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>AT&amp;T</li>
<li>Sprint</li>
<li>Verizon</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing a Geoid Model into Survey Controller</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Reciever</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Survey Style in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:19:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Access Getting Started Guide using a MiFi]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-getting-started-guide-using-a-mifi.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-getting-started-guide-using-a-mifi.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsrover_access_mifi_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>-Introduction</li>
<li>-Installing Geoid Model into Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>MiFi Configuration 
<ul>
<li>-Introduction</li>
<li>-Configuring the MiFi with the TSC2</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Logging into Access</li>
<li>Configuring the MiFi with Access</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Reciever</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Survey Style in Access</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Survey Controller</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Access</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:13:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Trimble VRS Rover with Access Getting Started Guide using a Cell Phone]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-getting-started-guide-using-a-cell-phone.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/trimble-vrs-rover-with-access-getting-started-guide-using-a-cell-phone.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_vrsrover_access_cell_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD provides you with the necessary steps to get started surveying using a VRS service with a Trimble Survey Grade GPS receiver and the Trimble Access software.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>VRS Theory</li>
<li>VRS Subscription</li>
<li>Install Geoid Model 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Installing Geoid Model into Access</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Logging into Access</li>
<li>Cell Phone Configuration 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Cell Phone</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Bluetooth Connection to a Reciever</li>
<li>Creating a VRS Survey Style</li>
<li>Creating a Job in Access</li>
<li>Field Documentation Available for Printing</li>
<li>Starting a VRS Survey in Access</li>
<li>Measuring Points</li>
<li>Ending a VRS Survey</li>
<li>Exporting a Text File</li>
<li>Transferring Data to a Computer </li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:12:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Design Environment in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_dsnenv_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Design Environment in Civil 3D 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Design Environment in Civil 3D 2011 vBook provides live recorded lecture and knowledge on many of the features found in Civil 3D 2011 that are not Civil 3D Object of Feature specific. The features covered in this vBook include: the tool pallets, design center, dynamic input, object viewer, layer manager, etc. These are the dialog boxes and tools used everyday in AutoCAD Civil 3D but not typically covered in depth in many classes. We will dig deeper into the feature and its use in this vBook.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Tool Palettes 
<ul>
<li>Sharing Palettes</li>
<li>Design Center</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Object Viewer</li>
<li>Event Viewer</li>
<li>Notes</li>
<li>Layer Manager</li>
<li>Viewports</li>
<li>Layer Translator</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:16:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D Data Migration]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-data-migration.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-data-migration.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d_datamigration_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D Data Migration</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will demonstrate how to migrate data and drawings from applications such as Land Desktop and Eagle Point into Civil 3D. If you are in the process of learning Civil 3D and you currently have projects in other design applications or even earlier versions of Civil 3D you'll want to have this vBook.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>AutoCAD Data Import    
<ul>
<li>Import AutoCAD Drawing</li>
<li>Change Objects Layers</li>
<li>Select Similar</li>
<li>Purge Layers</li>
<li>Layer Translator</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Land Desktop Data Import    
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Project Folder</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Insert Drawing</li>
<li>Import Land Desktop Data</li>
<li>Convert Land Desktop Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Eagle Point Data Import    
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Project</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Eagle Point Drawing File</li>
<li>Import LandXML Data</li>
<li>Edit Alignment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey Data Import    
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Project</li>
<li>Store Project Data</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Convert raw data</li>
<li>Edit Field Book</li>
<li>Import Fieldbook</li>
<li>Set Survey Working Folder</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:30:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to HACCP - A Proven System for Food Safety Hazard Prevention]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-haccp-a-proven-system-for-food-safety-hazard-prevention.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-haccp-a-proven-system-for-food-safety-hazard-prevention.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_fsa_introhaccp_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>A Proven System for Food Safety Hazard Prevention</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This provides an introductory overview of the 7 principles of HACCP: the best method to control food safety hazards from farm to fork.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>The Origins of HACCP</li>
<li>Management Commitment</li>
<li>Prerequisite Programs</li>
<li>Sanitation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>5 Preliminary Steps to Developing a HACCP Plan 
<ul>
<li>Assemble a Team</li>
<li>Describe the Product / Process</li>
<li>Describe Intended Use</li>
<li>Create a Flow Chart</li>
<li>Verify the Flow Chart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The 7 Principles of HACCP 
<ul>
<li>Conduct a Hazard Analysis</li>
<li>Determine Critical Control Points</li>
<li>Establish Critical Limits</li>
<li>Establish Monitoring Procedures</li>
<li>Establish Corrective Actions</li>
<li>Establish Procedures for Verification</li>
<li>Establish an Effective Record Keeping System</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Closing Comments</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:37:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Allergen Awareness for Food Service]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/allergen-awareness-for-food-service.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/allergen-awareness-for-food-service.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_fsa_allergenaware_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Allergen Awareness for Food Service</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>An overview of allergens and allergen control to improve safety for guests with food allergies.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Why Increase Allergen Awareness?</li>
<li>What is an Allergy?</li>
<li>What is a Food Allergy?</li>
<li>What is Celiac's Disease?</li>
<li>The Difference Between an Allergy and a Food Intolerance</li>
<li>The Symptoms of a Food Allergic Reaction</li>
<li>Which Foods Cause Reactions?</li>
<li>How Much Food Can Cause a Reaction?</li>
<li>Recognizing Allergenic Ingredients</li>
<li>General Prevention Measures</li>
<li>Front of the House Measures</li>
<li>Back of the House Measures</li>
<li>Responding to an Incident</li>
<li>Helpful Materials and Closing Comments</li>
<li>Quiz</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:38:06 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD Architecture 2010 Training Essentials]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2010-training-essentials.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-architecture-2010-training-essentials.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_10acadarch.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD Architecture 2010 Training Essentials</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This two (2) volume course provides new users with comprehensive training in AutoCAD&reg; Architecture 2010. The hands on lessons cover features, commands, and techniques for creating, editing, and printing drawings with AutoCAD&reg; Architecture 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Navigating the Interface and Using Workspaces 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Ribbon</li>
<li>Drawing Status</li>
<li>Quick Properties</li>
<li>Workspace Switching</li>
<li>View Status</li>
<li>The Content Browser</li>
<li>Moving and Docking Tool Palette.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layer Using AEC Tools, Tool Palettes, and the Content Browser 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Selecting an Object from the Content Browser</li>
<li>Placing an Object on a Layer</li>
<li>Layer Key and Style Manager</li>
<li>Inserting a Window</li>
<li>General AEC Modify Tools</li>
<li>Creating a New Tool Palette from the Content Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating &amp; Modifying Doors, Windows, and Door/Window Assemblies 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Inserting Doors and Windows</li>
<li>Door Size and Properties</li>
<li>Window Size and Properties</li>
<li>Editing Door and Window Styles</li>
<li>Door and Window Assemblies</li>
<li>Converting an Elevation Sketch to a Door or Window Assembly</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating &amp; Editing Column Grids and Structural Members 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Column Grid Tool</li>
<li>Editing a Column Grid</li>
<li>Labeling a Column Grid</li>
<li>Placing Columns</li>
<li>Structural Member Catalog</li>
<li>Placing Beams</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating &amp; Editing Curtain Walls 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Curtain Wall Tool</li>
<li>Creating a Curtain Wall Style</li>
<li>Creating a New Curtain Wall</li>
<li>Converting Walls to Curtain Walls</li>
<li>Override Assignment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Floors 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Finding Slabs in the Content Browser</li>
<li>The SlabAdd Command</li>
<li>SlabAdd Properties</li>
<li>Slab Styles</li>
<li>Adding a Hole to a Slab</li>
<li>Adding a Slab on Top of Existing Walls</li>
<li>Edit Slab Edges</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Roofs 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Roof Object Tool</li>
<li>Roof Properties</li>
<li>Changing the Roof Pitch</li>
<li>Creating a Vertical Ridge</li>
<li>Applying Roof Properties to Walls</li>
<li>Extending a Wall to Meet a Roof</li>
<li>Convert a Roof Object Into Roof Slabs</li>
<li>Adding Holes and Materials</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Creating Ceiling Grids, Adding &amp; Editing Ceiling Fixtures 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Display Configuration</li>
<li>Creating Parameters</li>
<li>Placing a Ceiling Grid in a Large Area</li>
<li>Raising Objects</li>
<li>Creating a Mass Element</li>
<li>Adding Light Fixtures</li>
<li>Bringing in an Anchor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating 3D Stairs &amp; Railings 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Bringing in Stairs</li>
<li>Attaching a Railing</li>
<li>Attaching a Railing to a Flight</li>
<li>Creating Stairs on Line Work</li>
<li>Expanding a Stair</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Callouts and Callout Views 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Generating an Elevation</li>
<li>Making Changes to an Elevation</li>
<li>Editing a Callout Style</li>
<li>Generating Sections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Space Objects 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Space Objects</li>
<li>Bringing in Spaces</li>
<li>Naming Spaces</li>
<li>Creating a Space Separator</li>
<li>Copying Styles for a Space</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Schedule Tags &amp; Tables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Placing a Door Tag</li>
<li>Placing a Window Tag</li>
<li>Placing a Room Tag</li>
<li>Tagging Doors</li>
<li>Tagging Windows</li>
<li>Creating Schedules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the Detail Component Manager 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Detail Component Manager</li>
<li>Modifying Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Publishing &amp; Transmitting Page Setups 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Setting up a Page for Printing</li>
<li>Page Setup Manager</li>
<li>Creating View Ports</li>
<li>Publishing a Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:02:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD MEP 2010 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_10acadmep.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD MEP 2010 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The AutoCAD MEP 2010 Bundle contains three (3) vBooks (AutoCAD MEP 2010 Electrical, AutoCAD MEP 2010 Mechanical, and AutoCAD MEP 2010 Pluming). In each vBook students learn the recommended workflows and fundamental skills required to navigate AutoCAD MEP.

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="../autocad-mep-2010-electrical.html">AutoCAD MEP 2010 Electrical</a></li>
<li><a href="autocad-mep-2010-mechanical.html">AutoCAD MEP 2010 Mechanical</a></li>
<li><a href="autocad-mep-2010-plumbing.html">AutoCAD MEP 2010 Plumbing</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:08:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD MEP 2010 Plumbing]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-plumbing.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-plumbing.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadmep10plumb_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD MEP 2010 Plumbing</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course, students learn the recommended workflows and fundamental skills required to navigate AutoCAD MEP and use its tools to create and modify plumbing and fire protection systems. Given a complete architectural building model, students will be able to add plumbing systems, as well as extract 2D drawings for construction documents.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Software</li>
<li>Changing the Background</li>
<li>Model and Layout Tabs</li>
<li>The Ribbon</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Navigator
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Project Navigator</li>
<li>The Project Tab</li>
<li>The Constructs Tab</li>
<li>Opening an Existing File</li>
<li>The Views Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fixtures and Equipment
<ul>
<li>Changing Workspaces</li>
<li>Inserting Multi-view Parts</li>
<li>m2p Command</li>
<li>Inserting a Multi-view Part with a Variable Size</li>
<li>Adding a Tag to a Plumbing Fixture</li>
<li>Editing Property Set Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sloped Pipe
<ul>
<li>Setting the Pipe Properties</li>
<li>System Definition</li>
<li>Placing Sloped Pipe</li>
<li>Placing a Pipe Fitting</li>
<li>Connecting Plumbing Fixtures to Pipes</li>
<li>Connecting and Editing Pipes in a Section View</li>
<li>Using 3D Isometric Views to Adjust Pipe Elevation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Diagrammatic Plumbing
<ul>
<li>Setting Parameters</li>
<li>The Default Fitting Overrides</li>
<li>Drawing a Diagrammatic Pipe</li>
<li>Add Plumbing Line Command</li>
<li>Adding a General Plumbing Fitting</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fire Systems<br />
<ul>
<li>Placing Sprinklers</li>
<li>Inserting 3D Pressure Pipe</li>
<li>Creating a Vertical Pipe in Plan View</li>
<li>Attaching Sprinklers to the Main</li>
<li>Viewing the Sprinkler System in Isometric View</li>
<li>Creating a Section View for Pipe</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:02:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD MEP 2010 Mechanical]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-mechanical.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-mechanical.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadmep10mech_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD MEP 2010 Mechanical</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course, students learn the recommended workflows and fundamental skills required to navigate AutoCAD MEP and use its tools to create and modify HVAC and piping systems. Given a complete architectural building model, students will be able to add electrical systems, as well as extract 2D drawings for construction Documents.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Project Navigator 
<ul>
<li>The Project Tab</li>
<li>The Constructs Tab</li>
<li>Opening an Existing File</li>
<li>The Views Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Mechanical Equipment 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Turning on the Ceiling Grid</li>
<li>Laying Out Air Terminals</li>
<li>Turning Off the Ceiling Grid</li>
<li>VAV Boxes</li>
<li>Placing a Boiler</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Single Line Duct 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Single Line Tool</li>
<li>Turning Off Snaps</li>
<li>The Plus Grip</li>
<li>Removing the Ceiling Grid</li>
<li>Sizing the Duct</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sizing Ducts 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Open Ends on Ducts</li>
<li>Calculate Duct Sizes Box</li>
<li>Using the Break Command</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modeling Ducts 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Drawing Tools</li>
<li>Drawing Ducts from Scratch</li>
<li>Editing in the Section View</li>
<li>3D Views</li>
<li>Editing a Duct</li>
<li>Drawing Pants</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Style Manager 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>HVAC Objects</li>
<li>System Definition Tabs</li>
<li>Piping System Definitions</li>
<li>Copying Style Definitions</li>
<li>Preferences Button</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modeling Pipe 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Placing Pumps</li>
<li>System Definition</li>
<li>Routing the Pipe</li>
<li>Routing Pumps</li>
<li>Changing Pipe Colors</li>
<li>Inserting Fittings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:00:37 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD MEP 2010 Electrical]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-electrical.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-mep-2010-electrical.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acadmep10elec_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD MEP 2010 Electrical</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this course, students learn the recommended workflows and fundamental skills required to navigate AutoCAD MEP and use its tools to create and modify electrical systems. Given a complete architectural building model, students will be able to add electrical systems, as well as extract 2D drawings for construction documents.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Software</li>
<li>Changing the Background</li>
<li>Model and Layout Tabs</li>
<li>The Ribbon</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Navigator
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching the Project Navigator</li>
<li>The Project Tab</li>
<li>The Constructs Tab</li>
<li>Opening an Existing File</li>
<li>The Views Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Lighting Devices and Panels 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Electrical Workspace</li>
<li>The Display Manager</li>
<li>Laying Out Lights</li>
<li>Device Tools</li>
<li>Inserting Electrical Devices</li>
<li>Tagging a Fixture</li>
<li>Placing Panels</li>
<li>Creating an EPD</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Circuits 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Circuiting a Power Panel</li>
<li>Circuiting Lighting Devices</li>
<li>Adding New Circuits to a Panel</li>
<li>Placing a Panel in a Separate File</li>
<li>Drawing Wire</li>
<li>Tagging a Home Run</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotations 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Turning Off the Ceiling Grids</li>
<li>Tagging Devices</li>
<li>Creating a Schedule</li>
<li>Editing the Schedule Table Style</li>
<li>Creating a Panel Schedule</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Style Manager
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>The Style Manager</li>
<li>Assigning Connectors</li>
<li>Other Device Style Settings</li>
<li>System Groups</li>
<li>Load Category Definitions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conduit Cable Tray 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Drawing the Cable Tray</li>
<li>Cable Tray Preference Dialogue Box</li>
<li>Inserting Conduit</li>
<li>Giving Room to Fit Fittings</li>
<li>Cutting a Section View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:59:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk Quantity Takeoff 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-quantity-takeoff-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-quantity-takeoff-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_qtytkoff_essnt_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk Quantity Takeoff 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Autodesk Quantity Takeoff Essentials Training will help the user gain an understanding of the basic functions of the Quantity Takeoff software.  This will include introduction to the program, proper workflows, and how to best use the data for cost analysis.  We cover creating a project, working with catalogs, performing takeoff with 3 Dimensional model files (dwf files), 2 Dimensional (dwf, dwg) files, and 2 Dimensional image files (pdf, jpeg, gif, tif.).</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating a Project and Setting Preferences 
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Project</li>
<li>Getting to Know the Working Environment</li>
<li>Project Settings</li>
<li>Preferences</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the Pallettes 
<ul>
<li>The Documents Pallette</li>
<li>The Properties Pallette</li>
<li>The Navigator Pallette</li>
<li>The Model Pallette</li>
<li>The Takeoff Pallette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Takeoff Basics 
<ul>
<li>Creating and Editing Item Properties</li>
<li>Creating an Assembly Takeoff Item</li>
<li>Using the Formula Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Takeoff Methods 
<ul>
<li>Using the Model Takeoff</li>
<li>Adding Items to the Catalog</li>
<li>Using the Workbook</li>
<li>Search Takeoff</li>
<li>Single-click Auto Takeoff</li>
<li>DWF Takeoff</li>
<li>Manual Takeoff Tools</li>
<li>Annotating Drawing Sheets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exporting Data 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Takeoff Legend</li>
<li>Generating Reports</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:04:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Update from AutoCAD 2006 to AutoCAD 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/update-from-autocad-2006-to-autocad-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/update-from-autocad-2006-to-autocad-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_acad06acad10.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Update from AutoCAD 2006 to AutoCAD 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook you will learn the new features in AutoCAD 2010 when upgrading from AutoCAD 2006.  Highlights include the interface and general enhancements, new drafting and layout features including a detailed discussion on new annotative features, dynamic blocks, command enhancements, PDF and output updates, customization and setup, and productivity enhancements in AutoCAD 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>1-Interface and General Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>1.1-Application Interface Review</li>
<li>1.2-Application Menu</li>
<li>1.3-Ribbon</li>
<li>1.4-Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>1.5-Status Bar Overview</li>
<li>1.6-Tool Tips</li>
<li>1.7-Drawing Navigation</li>
<li>1.8 - Right Click Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>2-Drafting and Layout Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>2.1-Using Quick Properties</li>
<li>2.2-Layer Properties Manager</li>
<li>2.3-Quick View Layouts Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>3-Command Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>3.1-Layers</li>
<li>3.2-Text Updates</li>
<li>3.3-Annotation Scales</li>
<li>3.4-Dimension Style Enhancements</li>
<li>3.5-Multileaders</li>
<li>3.6-Hatching Updates</li>
<li>3.7-Tables</li>
<li>3.8-Measuring Tools</li>
<li>3.9-General Command Enhancements</li>
<li>3.10-Drawing Recovery Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>4-Parametric Drawing 
<ul>
<li>4.1-Working with Constraints</li>
<li>4.2-Geometric Constraints</li>
<li>4.3-Dimension Constraints</li>
<li>4.4-Dynamic Blocks and Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>5-Output Updates 
<ul>
<li>5.1-Publishing Updates</li>
<li>5.2-Reference Files</li>
<li>5.3-Autodesk Seek</li>
<li>5.4-Design Review</li>
<li>5.5-Markup Set Manager</li>
<li>5.6-Sheet Set Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>6-Customization Updates 
<ul>
<li>6.1-Action Macros</li>
<li>6.2-Workspaces</li>
<li>6.3-Customize User Interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:20:56 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computing Positional Accuracy for Compliance with NC Board Rules]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-for-compliance-with-nc-board-rules.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computing-positional-accuracy-for-compliance-with-nc-board-rules.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_compposaccur.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This cloudDVD covers changes to the NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules that allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This cloudDVD covers changes to the NC Board of Engineers and Surveyors rules that allow for a statement of positional accuracy to be used in lieu of the calculated ratio of precision.  The formulas that are used in computing positional accuracy.  How to compute positional accuracy from OPUS Static, OPUS Rapid Static, RTK and VRS measurements.  You will be provided a Positional Accuracy calculation spreadsheet that will be discussed in detail on how it works so that it can be modified.  To qualify for the PDH's you will need to successfully pass the included test.  Upon successful completion of the test you will get a certificate of completion.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Course Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules and Positional Accuracy 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>NC Board Rules</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Federal Geographic Data Committee 
<ul>
<li>Session Objectives</li>
<li>Part 3: National Standard for Spatial Data Accuracy (NSSDA)</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practical Application of Positional Accuracy/Session Objectives 
<ul>
<li>Spreadsheet and Data Sets</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Static Report</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from an OPUS Rapid Static Report</li>
<li>OPUS Static and Rapid Static Tricks</li>
<li>Calculating Positional Accuracy from RTK or VRS Measurements 
<ul>
<li>Using the Spreadhseet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Checking into a Monument</li>
<li>Using the Spreadsheet to Compute Positional Accuracy</li><li>from Point Averaging</li>
<li>Session Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>FAQ's</li>
<li>Positional Accuracy Test</li>
<li>Course Review</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">59.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:15:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Have You Googled Your Child's Name?]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/have-you-googled-your-child-s-name.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/have-you-googled-your-child-s-name.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_googlename_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Social Media Boot Camp for Parents</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Social Networking and Media Information and Best Practices for parents including a primer on Facebook Privacy and Security.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Join the Social Media Revolution</li>
<li>Video Call Parent Alert 
<ul>
<li>The Social Media Revolution</li>
<li>A Mother's Plea</li>
<li>A Mother's Plea Video Clip</li>
<li>You Want to do WHAT to My Daughter?</li>
<li>You Want to do WHAT to My Daughter? Video Clip</li>
<li>Taking a Stand: Parent Alert</li>
<li>Taking a Stand: Parent Alert Video Clip</li>
<li>Social Networking, Kids and Cyber-Trends</li>
<li>Facebook Security Settings</li>
<li>Best Practices, Monitors and Controls</li>
<li>Take a Values-Based Approach to Social Networking</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9900</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:38:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2008 to AutoCAD 2011 Upgrade]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2008-to-autocad-2011-upgrade.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2008-to-autocad-2011-upgrade.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_acad08acad11_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD 2008 to AutoCAD 2011 Upgrade</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD 2008 to 2011 upgrade vBook offers 5 hours of indexed instructor lead teaching that address new functionality when upgrading from AutoCAD 2008 to 2011.  Chapters are divided into lessons, which in turn contain exercises.  Download datasets so you can practice the lessons on your own.  The 7 chapters in this two volume set access interface and general enhancements, drafting and layout enhancements, command enhancements, parametric drawing, output updates and customization updates.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>1-Interface and General Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>1.1-Interface Enhancements</li>
<li>1.2-Application Menu</li>
<li>1.3-Ribbon</li>
<li>1.4-Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>1.5-Navigation Tools</li>
<li>1.6-Selection and Visibility</li>
<li>1.7-Infocenter</li>
<li>1.8-Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>2-Drafting and Layout Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>2.1-Quick Properties</li>
<li>2.2-Customize Quick Properties</li>
<li>2.3-Layer Management</li>
<li>2.4-Quick View Layouts Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>3-Command Enhancements 
<ul>
<li>3.1-Text Updates</li>
<li>3.2-Annotation Scale</li>
<li>3.3-Dimension Styles</li>
<li>3.4-Multileader Enhancements</li>
<li>3.5-Hatching Updates</li>
<li>3.6-MEASURINGTOOLS</li>
<li>3.7-Command Enhancements</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>4-Parametric Drawing 
<ul>
<li>4.1-Parametric Interface</li>
<li>4.2-Parallel Geometric Contraint</li>
<li>4.3-Coincidental Geometric Constraint</li>
<li>4.4-Tangent Constraint</li>
<li>4.5-Constraint Display Bars</li>
<li>4.6-Dimensional Constraints</li>
<li>4.7-Parameters Manager</li>
<li>4.8-Dimensional Constraint Types</li>
<li>4.9-Formulas in Constraints</li>
<li>4.10-Convert to Dimension</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>5-Output Updates 
<ul>
<li>5.1-Publishing Enhancements</li>
<li>5.2-Reference Files</li>
<li>5.3-Autodesk Seek</li>
<li>5.4-Design Review</li>
<li>5.5-Markup Set Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>6-Customization Updates 
<ul>
<li>6.1-Working With Workspaces</li>
<li>6.2-Action Recorder</li>
<li>6.3-Customize User Interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>7-Dynamic Blocks and Constraints 
<ul>
<li>7.1-Dynamic Block Overview</li>
<li>7.2-Create Dynamic Block</li>
<li>7.3-Move Parameter</li>
<li>7.4-Test Block</li>
<li>7.5-Construction Geometry</li>
<li>7.6-Constraints in Blocks</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 18:52:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Survey Field Procedures ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-field-procedures.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-field-procedures.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_surveyfieldproc_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Survey Field Procedures vBook is designed to provide training and support to you survey field crews on the collection of field data.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook there are training videos which provide instruction on the proper collection process for most software "field to finish" procedures. There is a searchable feature description library with images and collection instructions along with information on basic First Aid. Supporting files for survey controllers are also included. This vBook has also been optimized for use on a Mobile device such as a smart phone. Ask us about customizing this vBook to meet your companies standards.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Collection Training 
<ul>
<li>Collect Points</li>
<li>Curb and Gutter</li>
<li>Curves</li>
<li>Handicap Ramp</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Line Coding Commands 
<ul>
<li>Begin Lines</li>
<li>Curves</li>
<li>Offsets</li>
<li>Close Figure</li>
<li>Right Turn</li>
<li>Additional Commands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Field Codes 
<ul>
<li>Control</li>
<li>Structures</li>
<li>Utility Power</li>
<li>Storm Systems</li>
<li>Sanitary Systems</li>
<li>Roads</li>
<li>Utility Communications</li>
<li>Site Features</li>
<li>Vegetation</li>
<li>Utility Water Service</li>
<li>Traffic Control</li>
<li>Geotechnical</li>
<li>Bridge Codes</li>
<li>Topography</li>
<li>Centerline</li>
<li>Water Natural</li>
<li>Misc - Unknown</li>
<li>Utility Natural Gas</li>
<li>Railroad</li>
<li>Basic First Aid</li>
<li>Insect Bites</li>
<li>Poisonous Plants</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Documents</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:39:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Captivate 4 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_captivate4.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Captivate 4 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic and advanced levels of Adobe Captivate 4.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="captivate-4-introduction.html">Adobe Captivate 4 - Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="captivate-4-advanced.html">Adobe Captivate 4 - Advanced</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">79.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:02:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Captivate 4 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_captivate4_adv_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Captivate 4 - Advanced</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course goes beyond the basics of Adobe Captivate, extending the learner's ability to create dynamic, customized content. The course examines full motion video and panning, how to expand your navigation choices by creating a custom menu and understanding the branching view, how to import graphics from Photoshop, creating an Aggregator Project, and many other features. Several lessons focus on customizing projects using system and user variables, widgets, and templates. Captivate 4's enhanced Accessibility controls are also discussed.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Full Motion Recording 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Understanding Captured Animation</li>
<li>Recording in Full Motion</li>
<li>How to Choose? Full Motion vs Other Recording Choices</li>
<li>Editing Full Motion Recordings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the Panning Feature while Recording 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the Pan Feature</li>
<li>Auto Pan</li>
<li>Manual Pan</li>
<li>Panning Techniques</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Expanding Image Editing 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the Edit Image Panel</li>
<li>Merging an Image to Background</li>
<li>Using the Image Library</li>
<li>Understanding Photoshop Layers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Navigation Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Resizing a Project to Create a Custom Menu</li>
<li>Launching a PDF File from a Project</li>
<li>Managing Multiple Click Box Navigation</li>
<li>Using the Show Action</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Branching View 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Naming Slides</li>
<li>Exploring the Branching View</li>
<li>Creating a Slide Group</li>
<li>Editing Slide Groups</li>
<li>Exporting the Map View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Widgets 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What are Widgets</li>
<li>Creating a Question Widget</li>
<li>Using the Certificate Widget</li>
<li>Using the Printslides Widget</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using System and User Variables 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Document Info</li>
<li>Viewing the Variable List</li>
<li>How to Display Variables in a Project</li>
<li>Using Quiz Variables</li>
<li>Creating User Variables</li>
<li>Incrementing a User Variable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Design and Project Templates 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Design vs Project Templates</li>
<li>Creating a New Design Template</li>
<li>Creating a Project Template</li>
<li>Using Captivate's Project Templates</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sending Projects Out for Review 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Using the Send for Review Button</li>
<li>Publishing Options</li>
<li>Creating Comments</li>
<li>Viewing Comments</li>
<li>Importing XML</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Accessibility Features 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>What is 508 Compliance</li>
<li>Making a Project 508-Compliant</li>
<li>Using the Accessibility Object Property</li>
<li>Adding Keyboard Shortcuts</li>
<li>Considerations for Audio, Color, or Physically Impaired Users</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating an Aggregator Project 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Launching Multiple Projects Manually</li>
<li>Creating a Table of Contents</li>
<li>Launching the Aggregator Tool</li>
<li>Adding Movies to an Aggregator Project</li>
<li>Renaming Titles</li>
<li>Publishing an Aggregator Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">52.5000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:52:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D Quick Steps]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-quick-steps.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-quick-steps.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d_quicksteps_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Civil 3D Quick Steps vBook supplements the Civil 3D Essentials Training Class.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook we created simple step by step instructions for many of the most common tasks used in Civil 3D. This vBook is must have for those who have been through training and have long breaks between actually using the software. A quick search will provide a quick guide to common processes like creating a surface, or corridor.  Due to the dynamic nature of the vBooks this vBook will continue to grow with new quick steps.  As an added bonus this vBook is optimized for your smart phone.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>General Information 
<ul>
<li>Toolspace</li>
<li>Attach Xref</li>
<li>Create Project</li>
<li>Create ShortCut and Reference</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Points 
<ul>
<li>Import Points from File</li>
<li>Create Point Group</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Create Basic TIN Surface</li>
<li>Swap Edge</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Create Alignment from Object</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Create Surface Profile</li>
<li>Create Design Profile</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridors 
<ul>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
<li>Create Simple Corridor</li>
<li>Create Corridor Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipes 
<ul>
<li>Create Pipe Network</li>
<li>Draw Pipes in Profile View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sections 
<ul>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Grading 
<ul>
<li>Create Feature Line From Object</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Elevations</li>
<li>Create Grading</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcels 
<ul>
<li>Create Parcels from Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:33:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Service to Sales]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/service-to-sales.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/service-to-sales.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_serv_to_sales_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Service to Sales</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>A sales initiative, whether to target add-ons to inbound calls or launch outbound campaigns, often wreaks fear in the hearts and minds of Customer Service Representatives. &ldquo;What, me sell?&rdquo; has become a typical mantra of resistance. Kathleen deftly presents fresh and creative ideas for transforming typical calls into those that deepen the customer relationship and &ldquo;lift&rdquo; the CSR to a new level - that of valued advisor.</p>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Today's Consumer</li>
<li>Customer Expectations</li>
<li>Service to Sales</li>
<li>The Truth About Suggestions</li>
<li>Uncovering Opportunities</li>
<li>What Matches the Demand?</li>
<li>Customer Buying Cues</li>
<li>Capturing a Sale</li>
<li>Handling Objections</li>
<li>Thinking About Products and Services</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:59:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Dealing with Difficult People]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dealing-with-difficult-people.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dealing-with-difficult-people.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_difficult_peopl_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Dealing with Difficult People</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Kathleen takes us on a humorous and informative journey to communicating, managing, and minimizing the negative impact of difficult people whether they are co-workers or angry callers. You will see how attitudes and state of mind drive behaviors, influence outcomes, and ultimately determine the quality of the experience. Kathleen pulls from her &ldquo;bag of tricks&rdquo; strategies that facilitate positive and beneficial outcomes within the context of daily interactions.</p>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>The Psychology</li>
<li>Conflict Progression</li>
<li>Power Play</li>
<li>Roles in Dealing with Difficult People</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:59:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Professional Telephone Techniques]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/professional-telephone-techniques.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/professional-telephone-techniques.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_prof_tele_tech_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Professional Telephone Techniques</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Whether you are a phone operator, a Customer Service Representative, a sales person, or any business professional that uses the telephone - the ultimate goal is to WOW the caller. Kathleen shows the importance of &ldquo;managing&rdquo; the contact - from the greeting all the way through call closing. She&rsquo;ll also offer &ldquo;tips&rdquo; for taking messages, placing callers on hold, and transferring calls.</p>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>First Impressions</li>
<li>Introduction to the Five Steps</li>
<li>1. Opening the Call</li>
<li>2. Discovery</li>
<li>3. Responding</li>
<li>4. Taking Action</li>
<li>5. Closing the Call</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:59:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Strategic Business Communication]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/strategic-business-communication.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/strategic-business-communication.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_stra_bus_comm_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Strategic Business Communication</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Kathleen uses her unique style and wit to dissect the &ldquo;requisite&rdquo; elements of business communication especially critical in the 21st century. Via real-world examples, she presents and discuss how rapport, word selection, positivity, speech, and body language blend together to form a powerful union essential to leaders at all levels.</p>

<p><div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Critical Communication Challenges</li>
<li>Listening</li>
<li>Strategic Listening</li>
<li>Rapport</li>
<li>The Power of Words</li>
<li>Speech Elements</li>
<li>Body Language</li>
<li>Wrap Up</li>
</ul>

<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:00:06 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit MEP 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-mep-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-mep-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11revitmep.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit MEP 2011 Essentials</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>An introduction to the concepts of building information modeling, as well as the tools for parametric, MEP engineering design and documentation using Revit MEP 2011.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Revit MEP Basics 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Ribbon Framework</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Linking Revit Models 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Linking an Architectural Model</li>
<li>Viewing the Model</li>
<li>3D Views</li>
<li>Orthographic Views</li>
<li>Model Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Monitoring Changes in Linked Files 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Copy/Monitor</li>
<li>Coordination Review Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Views 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>View Properties</li>
<li>View Templates</li>
<li>Visibility Graphics</li>
<li>Filters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Revit Elements and Families 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Adding Elements</li>
<li>Parameters</li>
<li>Family Types and Instances</li>
<li>Instance and Type Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Secondary Views 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Elevations</li>
<li>Sections</li>
<li>Callouts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Dimensions</li>
<li>Tags</li>
<li>Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Construction Documents 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Sheets</li>
<li>Titleblocks</li>
<li>Adding Views</li>
<li>Sheet View Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Workshare 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Defining Project Worksets</li>
<li>Creating a Central File</li>
<li>Creating a Local File</li>
<li>Opening Specific Worksets</li>
<li>Workset Visibility</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defining Volumes 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Spaces</li>
<li>Creating Zones</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Building Performance Analysis 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Viewing the Analytical Model</li>
<li>Parameters</li>
<li>Calculating Heating and Cooling Loads</li>
<li>Exporting gbXML Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>HVAC Systems 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Placing System Equipment</li>
<li>Editing Values</li>
<li>Creating Systems</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Routing Ductwork 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>System Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Tags and Annotation 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Creating Schedules</li>
<li>Creating Revisions</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3</h3>
<ul>
<li>Creating Plumbing Systems</li>
<li>Domestic Water Systems</li>
<li>Tags and Annotations 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Modifying Tags and Annotations</li>
<li>Creating Schedules</li>
<li>Creating Revisions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Power Systems</li>
<li>Creating Lighting Systems 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Laying Out Lights</li>
<li>Adding Lighting Panels</li>
<li>Laying out Switches</li>
<li>Creating Lighting Circuits</li>
<li>Adding Wires</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Schedules</li>
<li>Creating Panel Schedules 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Customizing Panel Schedules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Laying out Conduit</li>
<li>Laying Cable Trays 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Fire Protection Systems 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Laying Out Sprinklers</li>
<li>Routing Piping</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:10:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11acad_essent.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AutoCAD 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD 2011 Essentials Training is a 3 day training course which provides the users with the knowledge to get started using AutoCAD.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Chapter 1    
<ul>
<li>Adjusting the Ribbon</li>
<li>The Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Using the Command Line</li>
<li>Navigating the Drawing Area</li>
<li>The Line Tool</li>
<li>Cross and Normal Selection Windows</li>
<li>Adjusting the Drawing Units</li>
<li>Object Snaps</li>
<li>Saving the Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 2    
<ul>
<li>The Arc Tool</li>
<li>The Circle Tool</li>
<li>Object Snap Tracking</li>
<li>The Modify Tab</li>
<li>The Coordinate System </li>
<li>Mirroring</li>
<li>The Rectangle Tool</li>
<li>Editing a Rectangle with Grips</li>
<li>The Polyline Tool</li>
<li>The Polygon Tool</li>
<li>Arrays</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Chapter 3    
<ul>
<li>Fillets and Chamfers</li>
<li>Polar Tracking</li>
<li>Layers</li>
<li>Drawing in Layers</li>
<li>Line Types</li>
<li>Object Properties</li>
<li>Managing Layers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 4    
<ul>
<li>The Annotate Tab</li>
<li>Text Styles</li>
<li>Text Scale</li>
<li>Multi-line and Single-line Text</li>
<li>The Text Editor Tab</li>
<li>Placing Text on a Layer</li>
<li>Bullets and Numbering</li>
<li>Adding a Custom Field</li>
<li>Annotative Scaling</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 5    
<ul>
<li>Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Linear and Aligned Dimension</li>
<li>Arc Length</li>
<li>Editing and Moving Dimensions</li>
<li>Radius and Diameter Dimensions</li>
<li>Jogged and Ordinate Dimensions</li>
<li>Dimension Breaks</li>
<li>Baseline Dimensions</li>
<li>Multileaders</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 3</h3>
<ul>
<li>Chapter 6    
<ul>
<li>Table Styles</li>
<li>Table Basics</li>
<li>Entering Data into the Table</li>
<li>Editing the Table</li>
<li>Using Formulas in a Table</li>
<li>Inserting a Block</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 7    
<ul>
<li>The Hatch Command</li>
<li>Adjusting the Hatch Pattern Scale</li>
<li>Hatch Patterns</li>
<li>Hatch Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 8    
<ul>
<li>Overview of Blocks</li>
<li>Creating a Block</li>
<li>The Explode Command</li>
<li>Writing a Block</li>
<li>Using the Design Center</li>
<li>The Tool Palette</li>
<li>Creating a Custom Palette</li>
<li>Importing/Exporting Palettes</li>
<li>External References [Xrefs]</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 9    
<ul>
<li>Model Space vs Paper Space</li>
<li>Paper and Printer Setup</li>
<li>Creating a Title Block</li>
<li>Creating/Choosing Viewports</li>
<li>Adjusting the Paper Space Line Type Scale</li>
<li>Adjusting a Viewport</li>
<li>Rotating the Model in a Viewport</li>
<li>Plotting the Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 10    
<ul>
<li>Parametric Constraints</li>
<li>Removing Constraints</li>
<li>Auto Constrain</li>
<li>Dimensional Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 11    
<ul>
<li>Measure Distance</li>
<li>Measure Radius</li>
<li>Measure Angle</li>
<li>Measure Area</li>
<li>Quick Select</li>
<li>Selection Hints</li>
<li>Using the Built-In Calculator</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Chapter 12    
<ul>
<li>The Options Dialog Box</li>
<li>Adjusting the Window Colors</li>
<li>Toolbars and Tool Tips</li>
<li>Crosshair Size</li>
<li>Open and Save Options</li>
<li>Plot and Publishing Options</li>
<li>System Options</li>
<li>User Preferences</li>
<li>Selection options</li>
<li>Profile Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transparency</li>
<li>Creating a *.dwt Template</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 18:59:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11inventor_essent.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>When you have completed the training you will be proficient in: Basic and Advanced Part Modeling Techniques, Drawing View Creation Techniques, Assembly Modeling Techniques, and  Sheet Metal Design. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>When you have completed the training you will be proficient in: Basic and Advanced Part Modeling Techniques, Drawing View Creation Techniques, Assembly Modeling Techniques, and  Sheet Metal Design. As you are viewing the lessons, you're encouraged to follow along in Autodesk Inventor.
</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface and Options Settings 
<ul>
<li>Create a Project File</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Ribbon Bar</li>
<li>View Cube</li>
<li>View Toolbar</li>
<li>Browser</li>
<li>Creating a New Part</li>
<li>Creating Your own Project File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sketching, Constraining and Dimensioning 
<ul>
<li>Options</li>
<li>Basic Sketching</li>
<li>Inventor Unit Entry</li>
<li>Coordinate Entry</li>
<li>Sketch Constraints</li>
<li>Insert Autocad Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating and Editing Sketched Features 
<ul>
<li>Browser Basics</li>
<li>3D Grip Editing</li>
<li>Direct Model Editing</li>
<li>Revolve Command</li>
<li>Cut, Join and Intersect Options</li>
<li>Using Sliced Graphics</li>
<li>Filling</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Placed  Features 
<ul>
<li>Creating Fillets</li>
<li>Variable Radius FIllets</li>
<li>Face Fillets</li>
<li>Different Hole Types</li>
<li>Shell Command</li>
<li>Work Geometry Creation</li>
<li>Array Command</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating and Editing Drawing Views 
<ul>
<li>Drawing Creation</li>
<li>Assembly Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Volume 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Creating and Documenting Assemblies 
<ul>
<li>Assembly Options</li>
<li>Inserting Components in Assembly</li>
<li>Creating Components in Assembly</li>
<li>Creating and Editing a Sub Assembly</li>
<li>Applying Assembly Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Part Modeling Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Advanced Curve Creation</li>
<li>Embossing Text</li>
<li>Features Related to Injection Molded Parts</li>
<li>Multibody Part Creation</li>
<li>Derived Parts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>iComponents and Parameters 
<ul>
<li>iMate Creation</li>
<li>Parameters</li>
<li>Spreadsheets</li>
<li>iPart Creation</li>
<li>iAssembly</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Assembly Modeling Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Sketch Blocks</li>
<li>Representations</li>
<li>Mirroring Components</li>
<li>Assembly Features</li>
<li>Frame Generator</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Design 
<ul>
<li>Sheet Metal</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Design</li>
<li>Sheet Metal Documentation</li>
<li>Lofted Flange</li>
<li>Hem Feature</li>
<li>Bend Option</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:27:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11revitarchessent.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This class covers the basics of Autodesk® Revit® Architecture 2011, from building design through construction documentation. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This class covers the basics of Autodesk&reg; Revit&reg; Architecture 2011, from building design through construction documentation. Students will be introduced to the concepts of Building Information Modeling and the tools for parametric design and documentation. Upon completion of this course, the student will:</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Vol 1</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>InfoCenter</li>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Options Bar</li>
<li>Properties Palette</li>
<li>Project Browser</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Levels, Grids and Columns 
<ul>
<li>Levels</li>
<li>Grids</li>
<li>Architectural Columns</li>
<li>Structural Columns</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Walls 
<ul>
<li>Architectural vs Structural</li>
<li>Parameters</li>
<li>Flip Arrow</li>
<li>Wall Structure</li>
<li>Temporary Dimension</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Doors and Windows 
<ul>
<li>Doors</li>
<li>Doors - Family and Types</li>
<li>Doors - Parameters</li>
<li>Doors - Duplicate Type</li>
<li>Windows</li>
<li>Windows - Family and Types</li>
<li>Windows - Parameters</li>
<li>Windows - Duplicate Type</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Floors and Views 
<ul>
<li>Floors</li>
<li>Structural vs Regular Floors</li>
<li>Floor Boundary</li>
<li>Floor Family and Type</li>
<li>Floor Slab Edges</li>
<li>Floor Opening</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roof and Views 
<ul>
<li>Roof By Commands</li>
<li>Roof Boundary</li>
<li>Roof Family and Type</li>
<li>Sloped Roof</li>
<li>Roof Overhang</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents - Vol 2</h3>
<ul>
<li>Ceilings 
<ul>
<li>Ceilings</li>
<li>Automatic vs Sketch</li>
<li>Ceiling Fixtures</li>
<li>Ceiling Boundary</li>
<li>Ceiling Family and Type</li>
<li>View Range</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotation 
<ul>
<li>Dimension vs Witness Lines</li>
<li>Dimension Override</li>
<li>Locked Dimensions</li>
<li>EQ Constraints</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Rooms 
<ul>
<li>Room Objects</li>
<li>Color Filled Legend</li>
<li>Room Schedule</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Views 
<ul>
<li>Duplicate Views</li>
<li>Section Views</li>
<li>Callouts</li>
<li>Drafting View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Stairs and Curtain Walls 
<ul>
<li>Stairs and Railings</li>
<li>Curtain Walls</li>
<li>Curtain Mullions</li>
<li>Curtain Panels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Annotate Tab 
<ul>
<li>Annotate Tab</li>
<li>Detail Components</li>
<li>Keynotes</li>
<li>Text</li>
<li>Tags</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheets and Plotting 
<ul>
<li>New Sheets</li>
<li>Naming and Numbering</li>
<li>Project Information</li>
<li>Plotting</li>
<li>Printing to Fit</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:09:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2007 VBA Macro Development]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-vba-macro-development.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-vba-macro-development.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_excel07_vbamd_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course introduces the user to Excel macro programming using Microsoft's Visual Basic for Application (VBA).</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the user to Excel macro programming using Microsoft's Visual Basic for Application (VBA). (The overall focus of this course is to teach the user proper Visual Basic programming techniques along with an understanding of Excel's object structure.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Understanding the Excel Object Model</li>
<li>Creating Recorded Macros 
<ul>
<li>Displaying the Developer Tab</li>
<li>Setting Macro Trust within Excel</li>
<li>Recording a Macro</li>
<li>Running a Macro</li>
<li>Editing a Macro with the Visual Basic Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Understanding the Visual Basic Editor 
<ul>
<li>Examining the VBA Editor Menu and Toolbar</li>
<li>Setting VBA Editor Options</li>
<li>Reviewing your Project Options</li>
<li>Reviewing the Project Explorer</li>
<li>Reviewing the Properties Window</li>
<li>Working within the Code Window</li>
<li>Viewing the Immediate Window</li>
<li>Viewing the Object Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Understanding Programming Basics 
<ul>
<li>Understanding Functions and Procedures</li>
<li>Dimensioning Variables</li>
<li>Understanding Object Variables</li>
<li>Understanding Variables and Scope</li>
<li>Commenting your Code</li>
<li>Creating Constants</li>
<li>Manipulating Strings</li>
<li>Understanding Procedure Arguments</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Visual Basic Functions 
<ul>
<li>Using the InputBox() Function</li>
<li>Understanding the MsgBox() Function</li>
<li>Using String Functions</li>
<li>Using Date Functions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Control Structures 
<ul>
<li>Using the If/Then/Else Statements</li>
<li>Creating a Select/Case Statement</li>
<li>Using the Case Else Option</li>
<li>Creating For/Next Loops</li>
<li>Creating Do/While Loops</li>
<li>Creating While/Wend Loops</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating UserForms 
<ul>
<li>Designing your First Form</li>
<li>Understanding the Different Controls to Use</li>
<li>Working with the Different UserForm Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Debugging your Macros 
<ul>
<li>Syntax Errors Vs. Logic Errors</li>
<li>Running your Macro from the VBA Editor</li>
<li>Using Breakpoints</li>
<li>Stepping Through your Macro</li>
<li>Creating Watches</li>
<li>Adding Error Trapping</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">60.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:25:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Marines Board Preparation Study Guide ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/us-marine-corps-board-preparation-study-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/us-marine-corps-board-preparation-study-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_usmc_boardprep_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This Marines Board Preparation Study Guide vBook will provide a listing of facts and figures the Marine will need to know when going in front of a promotion board, Marine of the Month/Quarter/Year, Commanding General Inspections, and even those recruits preparing to ship off to Bootcamp.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This Marines Board Preparation Study Guide vBook will provide a listing of facts and figures the Marine will need to know when going in front of a promotion board, Marine of the Month/Quarter/Year, Commanding General Inspections, and even those recruits preparing to ship off to Bootcamp. It covers History, Courtesy, Traditions, along with many other topics. Using the retrieve technology you can access this vBook from any web browser and even a mobile phone. So you can study anytime or place!</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>USMC Mission</li>
<li>Chain of Command</li>
<li>History, Traditions, Courtesy</li>
<li>General Orders</li>
<li>Rank Structure</li>
<li>Marine Corps Hymn</li>
<li>Disclaimer</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:40:36 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11c3d_essent_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Civil 3D 2011 Essentials Training is a 3 day training course which provides the users with the knowledge to get started using AutoCAD Civil 3D. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2011 Essentials Training is a 3 day training course which provides the users with the knowledge to get started using AutoCAD Civil 3D. There are three volumes full of video which covers the installation and setup through every major feature of Civil 3D 2011. A data set is provided for the student to follow along with each lecture which are indexed to make finding and review a specific topic simple and fast.</p>
<p>The Civil 3D Quick Steps vBook is also included in this bundle. This vBook supplements the Civil 3D Essentials Training Class by providing simple step by step instructions for many of the most common tasks used in Civil 3D. <a href="civil-3d-quick-steps.html">Click here for more information</a>.</p>
<p><strong>Volume 1</strong><br />In Volume 1 you begin the training with an overview of the application and instructions setting up your system and then you'll begin working with the Points feature.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction </li>
<li>Software Installation         
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Configuration</li>
<li>Setting Folders</li>
<li>Finish Install</li>
<li>Registration</li>
<li>Setting Options</li>
<li>Display Settings</li>
<li>Open Save Settings</li>
<li>Plot Publish Settings</li>
<li>System Settings</li>
<li>User Preferences</li>
<li>Drafting Settings</li>
<li>Selection Settings</li>
<li>User Profiles</li>
<li>AEC Settings</li>
<li>Survey Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Download</li>
<li>User Interface         
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>History of Civil 3D</li>
<li>Ribbons</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Menu Browser</li>
<li>Toolspace</li>
<li>Command Line</li>
<li>Toolbars</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Palette Panel</li>
<li>Create Ground Data</li>
<li>Create Design</li>
<li>Profile Views</li>
<li>Draw and Modify</li>
<li>Import Panel</li>
<li>Blocks and References</li>
<li>Linking and Extraction</li>
<li>Annotate Tab</li>
<li>Modify Tab</li>
<li>Analyze Tab</li>
<li>View Tab</li>
<li>Output Tab</li>
<li>Manage Tab</li>
<li>Express Tools</li>
<li>Context Ribbon</li>
<li>Toolspace</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Starting New Drawing</li>
<li>Points Feature         
<ul>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Create Points Access</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
<li>Import Points</li>
<li>Navigating Points in Drawing</li>
<li>Point Features</li>
<li>Edit Points in Prospector</li>
<li>Edit Multiple Points</li>
<li>Drag Label</li>
<li>Point Styles</li>
<li>Point Groups</li>
<li>Create a Group</li>
<li>Modify Point Group</li>
<li>Description Keys</li>
<li>Create Point Style</li>
<li>Create Label Style</li>
<li>Apply Description Keys</li>
<li>Edit Points</li>
<li>Description Format</li>
<li>Point Group Display Order</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<p><strong>Volume 2</strong><br />In Volume 2 you'll continue building upon the lessons in Volume 1 and use the points to build a surface before learning about alignments, parcels and profiles.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Surface Features        
<ul>
<li>Surfaces Concepts</li>
<li>Surface Introduction</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>DTM Point Group</li>
<li>Surface Object</li>
<li>Surface Styles</li>
<li>Add Point Group</li>
<li>Surface Definition</li>
<li>Add Standard Breaklines</li>
<li>Add Proximity Breakline</li>
<li>Surface Labels</li>
<li>Surface Lecture Conclusion</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments Features        
<ul>
<li>Introduction on Alignments</li>
<li>Alignment Features</li>
<li>Create Alignment from Objects</li>
<li>Alignment Styles</li>
<li>Alignment Labels</li>
<li>Grip Edit Alignment</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools</li>
<li>Create Alignment</li>
<li>Edit Alignment Curve Properties</li>
<li>Delete Sub Entity</li>
<li>Add Curve in Alignment</li>
<li>Create Alignment with Transparent Commands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcels Features        
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Parcel From Objects</li>
<li>Site explanation</li>
<li>Parcel Styles</li>
<li>Parcel Labels</li>
<li>Parcel Properties</li>
<li>User Defined Properties</li>
<li>ROW Parcels</li>
<li>Move object to Sites</li>
<li>Create ROW Parcels</li>
<li>Listing Parcels</li>
<li>Create Cul-de-Sac ROW</li>
<li>Subdivide Parcels</li>
<li>Parcel Sizing-Free Form</li>
<li>Parcel Sizing-by Size</li>
<li>Labeling Parcels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile Features        
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Surface Profile</li>
<li>Sample Offsets</li>
<li>Draw Profile View</li>
<li>Profile View Style</li>
<li>Profile Style</li>
<li>Move Profile View</li>
<li>Create Finish Ground Profile</li>
<li>Design Criteria</li>
<li>Profile Layout Tools</li>
<li>Create Profile using PVIs</li>
<li>Add a Vertical Curve</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
<p><strong>Volume 3</strong><br />In Volume 3 you'll complete the project by learning about the Corridor Model, Sections, Grading and Pipes. Then learn how to assemble your model into plan sheets.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Corridor Feature      
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Assembly Tool Palettes</li>
<li>Subassembly Properties</li>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
<li>Mirror Assembly</li>
<li>Create Corridor Model</li>
<li>Target Mapping</li>
<li>Grip Edit Corridor Model</li>
<li>Corridor Properties</li>
<li>Target Properties</li>
<li>Frequency</li>
<li>Combine Corridors</li>
<li>Intersection</li>
<li>Create intersection</li>
<li>Insert Region</li>
<li>View Corridor Model</li>
<li>Create Surface for Corridor Model</li>
<li>Add Boundary</li>
<li>View/Edit Sections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sections and Section Views      
<ul>
<li>&nbsp;Introduction</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
<li>Placement of Section Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Grading Features      
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Feature Lines</li>
<li>Create Feature Line from Object</li>
<li>Assign Elevations</li>
<li>Edit Feature Lines</li>
<li>Create Surface from Feature Lines</li>
<li>Grading Tools</li>
<li>Edit Feature Line Geometry</li>
<li>Fillet Feature Line</li>
<li>Elevation Edits</li>
<li>Create Grading</li>
<li>Daylight Feature Line</li>
<li>Create Grading Transition</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipe Network Features      
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Set Part Catalog</li>
<li>Part Lists</li>
<li>Part Styles</li>
<li>Part Rules</li>
<li>Create Pipe Network</li>
<li>Define up or Downslope</li>
<li>Adding Structures</li>
<li>Swap a Part</li>
<li>Display Pipes in Profile</li>
<li>Delete Part from Profile</li>
<li>Adding Labels</li>
<li>Pipe Crossing</li>
<li>Interference Check</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Plan Sheet Creation      
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Set Working Folder</li>
<li>Create Project Folder</li>
<li>Create Data Shortcut</li>
<li>Create Data Reference</li>
<li>Create Layout</li>
<li>Label Through Xref</li>
<li>Page Setup</li>
<li>Dview twist</li>
<li>Viewport Scale</li>
<li>Label Parcels</li>
<li>Compile Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:28:06 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS4 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_photoshopcs4.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Photoshop CS4 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic and intermediate levels of Adobe Photoshop CS4.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Adobe Photoshop CS4 - Introduction</li>
<li>Adobe Photoshop CS4 - Intermediate</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">76.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:51:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_09revitarch.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit Architecture 2009 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Bundle was created to deliver a basic 3 part introductory class on Revit Architecture 2009. This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch a portion of the training or the entire session.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 1</li>
<li>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 2</li>
<li>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 3</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">115.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:05:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_revitarch09_fund.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Bundle is a five volume set that covers everything from grids, lines, to walls, doors, roofs, stairs, and annotation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Topics Covered Include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Families</li>
<li>File Extensions</li>
<li>New Project</li>
<li>Simple House</li>
<li>Interface</li>
<li>Toolbars</li>
<li>Design Bar</li>
<li>Project Settings</li>
<li>Project Units</li>
<li>Options Menu</li>
<li>Select Window</li>
<li>Tab Key Selection</li>
<li>Filter Selection</li>
<li>Zooms</li>
<li>Categories</li>
<li>Transfer Project Standards</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Families</li>
<li>Visibility Toolbar</li>
<li>Scale Factor</li>
<li>Keyboard Shortcuts</li>
<li>Grid Lines</li>
<li>Introduction to Levels</li>
<li>Reference Planes</li>
<li>Datum Demos</li>
<li>Elevation Views</li>
<li>Views</li>
<li>Sheets</li>
<li>Siteplan and Topo Surface</li>
<li>Scheduling</li>
<li>Printing</li>
<li>Wall Placement</li>
<li>Wall Types and Properties</li>
<li>Wall Structure Sweep and Reveal</li>
<li>Flip Controls</li>
<li>Wall Profiles</li>
<li>Wall Attach and Detach</li>
<li>Wall Openings</li>
<li>Doors</li>
<li>Windows</li>
<li>Introduction to Floors</li>
<li>Floors by Picking Walls</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tools</li>
<li>Floor Slope Arrow</li>
<li>Roof by Footprint</li>
<li>Roof by Extrusion</li>
<li>Roof Shape Tools</li>
<li>Stairs</li>
<li>Thin Lines</li>
<li>Align Tool</li>
<li>Split Tool</li>
<li>Trim Tool</li>
<li>Offset Tool</li>
<li>Paint Tool</li>
<li>Match Type Tool</li>
<li>General Annotation</li>
<li>Text Placement and Types</li>
<li>Dimensions Aligned</li>
<li>Dimensions Radial, Arc, and Angle</li>
<li>Tagging</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">115.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:06:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Santa Barbara House Kit Revit Architecture 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/santa-barbara-house-kit-revit-architecture-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/santa-barbara-house-kit-revit-architecture-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_sbhk1_sma.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this series we will use a ‘work in progress’ approach to develop the series over a period of time.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>We cover everything from Spanish Clay Tile Roofing to Topo Surfaces and Wall Scallops as we dress up the outside of our Santa Barbara models.</p>
<p>Main objectives:</p>
<ul>
<li>Custom Families, Clay Tile, Materials, Lighting, Rendering, Cameras, Site and Toposurfaces.</li>
<li>Utilize a &lsquo;Santa Barbara California&rsquo; modeling theme to keep it interesting. </li>
<li>Drill down into the new Mental Ray Rendering tools and Materials. </li>
<li>Take advantage of the CADclips supplied Content File which contains ALL the custom families in this series. </li>
<li>Learn to create the custom families yourself, from scratch.</li>
</ul>

<div class="toc">
<h3>This bundle includes information on the following:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Content Management</li>
<li>Mental Ray &ndash; Spanish Tile Material </li>
<li>Modeling Basic 3D Tile on a Sloped Roof</li>
<li>Modeling Detailed 3D Tile</li>
<li>Use Roof Fascia Tool for Tile on Ridges and Rakes</li>
<li>Placing the Wall Vent Family</li>
<li>Placing the Canopy and Coach Light Family</li>
<li>Placing the China and Criss Cross Window Family</li>
<li>Roof and Balcony Beams</li>
<li>Site Objects</li>
<li>Sloped Stair Walls</li>
<li>Exterior Stair</li>
<li>Topo Surface</li>
<li>Site Pads for Excavation</li>
<li>Custom Families</li>
<li>and more</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">115.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:15:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2010 - Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2010-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2010-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_revitarch10_basics.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit Architecture 2010 - Basics</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This is a four volume series for REVIT users new and old. Here we blow the doors wide open on RAC 2010 and use the new Ribbon interface as our road map.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Recent Files and Tutorial Installation</li>
<li>Application Menu and Options</li>
<li>Look at a Completed Project</li>
<li>First New Project</li>
<li>Annotation Scale, Crop Region and Sheets</li>
<li>Interface Overview</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Ribbon Overview</li>
<li>Where is My Command?</li>
<li>Project Browser and Windows Overview</li>
<li>Levels</li>
<li>Grids</li>
<li>Floor Placement</li>
<li>Floor by Pick Walls</li>
<li>Floor by Pick Walls, Lines and Dimension Constraints</li>
<li>Floor Families, Types and Properties</li>
<li>Floor Shape Edit Tools</li>
<li>Floor Slope Arrows</li>
<li>Manage and Settings</li>
<li>Object Selection</li>
<li>Wall Theory</li>
<li>Wall Placement</li>
<li>Wall Placement Demo</li>
<li>Wall Types Structure, Priorities, Sweeps and Reveals</li>
<li>New Wall By Duplicate</li>
<li>Foundation Walls</li>
<li>Wall Edit Profile</li>
<li>Walls Attach and Detach</li>
<li>Visibility Graphics, View Templates and Duplicate View</li>
<li>Underlays and Halftone</li>
<li>Copy Paste Align and 2d Sketch Lines</li>
<li>Roof by Footprint</li>
<li>Roof by Footprint Using Pick Walls</li>
<li>Flat Sloped Roof with Shape Editing Tools</li>
<li>Roof by Footprint Gable Tips</li>
<li>Roof by Extrusion</li>
<li>Roof Join and Unjoin</li>
<li>Roof Properties, Types and Rafter Cut Off</li>
<li>Roof Fascia and Gutters</li>
<li>Doors and Windows</li>
<li>Door and Window Duplicate Types</li>
<li>Ceilings and Lights</li>
<li>View Range and Plan Regions</li>
<li>Railings</li>
<li>Stairs</li>
<li>Text and Annotation</li>
<li>Dimension Theory and Temporary Dimensions</li>
<li>Aligned Dimensions</li>
<li>Linear Dimensions</li>
<li>Angular, Radial and Arclength Dimensions</li>
<li>Dimension Types and Properties</li>
<li>Dimension Grips</li>
<li>Dimensions Drive the Model</li>
<li>Dimension Text Override and Equal Constraint</li>
<li>Edit Tools</li>
<li>Elevations</li>
<li>Sections, Callouts, Sheets and Activate View</li>
<li>Foundation Plan and Walls</li>
<li>Detailing &ndash; Edit Cut Profile</li>
<li>Detailing &ndash; Filled Regions</li>
<li>Detailing &ndash; Masking Regions</li>
<li>Detail Components and Repeat Detail</li>
<li>Detailing Demo</li>
<li>Detaining Samples</li>
<li>Move, Copy, Mirror, Rotate, Array, Pin and Group</li>
<li>Sheets, Camera, Title Blocks, Crop Region and Duplicate View</li>
<li>Printing</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">90.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:07:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Column Schedules for Revit Structure 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/column-schedules-for-revit-structure-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/column-schedules-for-revit-structure-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitstruct09_cs1_sma.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Column Schedules for Revit Structure 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This two volume set shows you all there is to know about Graphic Column Schedules. You will also learn about Quantity Column Schedules, Base Plates, Custom Families, Nested Parameters, Shared Parameters and Various Tagging applications.</p>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Graphic Column Schedules (GSC) Introduction</li>
<li>Base Plate Symbols</li>
<li>Graphic Column Schedules (GSC) Properties</li>
<li>Introduction to Tagging</li>
<li>Tag Placement</li>
<li>Tag All Not Tagged</li>
<li>Custom Column Tag Family</li>
<li>Tagging a Graphic Column Schedule (GCS)</li>
<li>Custom Column Tag by Mark</li>
<li>Column Quantity Schedule</li>
<li>Column Base Plate Information Introduction</li>
<li>Base Plate Shared and Project Parameters</li>
<li>Custom Base Plate Tag Family</li>
<li>Add a Shared Parameter to a Column Family</li>
<li>Quantity Schedule for Base Plate Information</li>
<li>Column Base Plate Model Placement</li>
<li>Custom Model Base Plate Family with Grout</li>
<li>Defining and Placing the Model Base Plate Part 1</li>
<li>Defining and Placing the Model Base Plate Part 2</li>
<li>Custom Column Base Plate Tag Family</li>
<li>Modeling Piers and Footing Pads</li>
<li>Base Plate Family Modification Introduction</li>
<li>Base Plate Family Modification</li>
<li>Base Plate Schedule Part 1</li>
<li>Base Plate Schedule Part 2</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">46.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:46:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Using the RAC Model in Revit Structure 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/using-the-rac-model-in-revit-structure-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/using-the-rac-model-in-revit-structure-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_revitstruc10_rac.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This series will enable a REVIT Structure operator to confidently collaborate with the linked REVIT Architecture Model.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>After we do a thorough investigation into the RAC model we link the architectural model into REVIT Structure. Then one group at a time we copy / monitor the grids, levels, columns, floors and walls. But not before we establish a relationship between the architectural object types and the structural objects types that will replace them on the exchange.</p>
<p>After each group of object types is copy / monitored into RST we go back to the RAC model, make a change and then go through the coordination review to deal with the updates.</p>
<p>* Learn how to maintain a linked relationship between a structural wall and a composite architectural wall.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Investigation Part 1</li>
<li>Investigation Part 2</li>
<li>Check Types and Purge Unused Families</li>
<li>Project Base Point</li>
<li>Link Project and Visibility and View Templates</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Setup, Levels and View Templates</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Grid Lines</li>
<li>Grid and Level Coordination Review</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Columns and View Templates</li>
<li>Column and Grid Coordination Review</li>
<li>Review Architectural Floor Types</li>
<li>Make New Structural Floor Types</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Floors</li>
<li>Coordination Review Floor Systems</li>
<li>Slab Edges, Copy / Paste and Rebar</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Walls and Relocate in Plan</li>
<li>Coordination Review for Walls</li>
</ul>
</div>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
<p>&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">46.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:22:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction and 4 Storey Building in Revit Architecture 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-and-4-storey-building-in-revit-architecture-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-and-4-storey-building-in-revit-architecture-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch11_4strybld1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction and 4 Storey Building in Revit Architecture 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>We start this CADclip series with 15 lessons packed with essential information. Then we start a new project and create the drawings for a 4 storey parametrically controlled building. The building has annotated Plans, Elevations, Perspective Views, Sections, Details and Sheets.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Recent Files Window and Interface</li>
<li>Sample Projects and Folder Places</li>
<li>Help and Information</li>
<li>Application Menu and Program Options</li>
<li>Revit File Extensions</li>
<li>Open a Sample Project</li>
<li>Create First New Project</li>
<li>Interface, Settings and Selection Methods</li>
<li>Annotation, Scale, Text, Dimensions and Additional Settings</li>
<li>Level Datum Basics</li>
<li>2D and 3D Level Control</li>
<li>Levels and Grids</li>
<li>Levels and Crop Regions Part 1</li>
<li>Levels and Crop Regions Part 2</li>
<li>Grid Datums</li>
<li>Lab Introduction</li>
<li>Lab Level Datums</li>
<li>Lab Grids and Dimensions</li>
<li>Lab Exterior Walls</li>
<li>Lab Constrain Walls to Grids</li>
<li>Lab Main Floor</li>
<li>Lab Copy and Paste Align Floors Above</li>
<li>Lab Edit Main Floor Boundary</li>
<li>Lab Create Flat Roof by Footprint</li>
<li>Lab Add in Roof Low Points</li>
<li>Lab Edit Roof Type for Variable Insulation Thickness</li>
<li>Lab Add Windows and Dimensions</li>
<li>Lab Constrain Windows and Copy Paste Align Above</li>
<li>Lab Align and Lock Windows in Elevation</li>
<li>Lab Copy Paste Align Window Dimensions Above</li>
<li>Lab Plan Regions and Cut Plane</li>
<li>Lab Load and Add Entrance Double Doors</li>
<li>Lab Eyebrow Roof by Extrusion</li>
<li>Lab Edit Fun and Fatal Error</li>
<li>Lab Edit Extruded Roof and Constrain</li>
<li>Lab Plan Cleanup, Crop Regions and New Sheet</li>
<li>Lab New Camera View and Add to Sheet</li>
<li>Lab Cleanup Section and Title Block</li>
<li>Lab Change Floor Heights and Add Interior Partition Walls</li>
<li>Lab Create new Stair Shaft Opening</li>
<li>Lab Multi-storey Stair and 3D Section</li>
<li>Lab Copy Paste Align Partitions Above</li>
<li>Lab Modify Wall Brick Base</li>
<li>Lab Detail the Brick Support Angle</li>
<li>Lab Detail the Roof Drain</li>
<li>Lab Roof Plan, Spot Elevations and Visibility Graphics</li>
<li>Lab Elevations and Sheet</li>
<li>Lab Sloped Roof and Adjust Views</li>
</ul>
</div>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
<p>&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">46.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:16:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Getting Geared Up with Revit MEP 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-geared-up-with-revit-mep-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-geared-up-with-revit-mep-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitmep10_gearedup_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Getting Geared Up with Revit MEP 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Everyone who uses REVIT MEP must learn this information before they start to model anything. These CADclips establish a solid platform and get you 'Geared Up' to confidently move forward using RME, regardless of the downstream application.</p>
<p>Half the battle in mastering RME is learning how the project browser works and how to manage the Views, View Templates, Visibility Graphics, Disciplines, Sub-Disciplines, Spaces and Connectors.   This is paramount before you can even think of going near the modeling tools.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and RME Options</li>
<li>Setup Tutorial Places and Open Existing Project</li>
<li>Course Overview</li>
<li>REVIT Windows</li>
<li>Project template Files</li>
<li>Adding Content to the RAC Model</li>
<li>Using the Paste Align tools in the RAC Model</li>
<li>Investigating the RAC Model Using the Section Box</li>
<li>Investigating the RAC Model by Plan and Section Windows</li>
<li>Investigate the RAC Model Using View Templates</li>
<li>Investigate the RAC Model Using Filters and Temporary Visibility</li>
<li>Investigate the RAC Model for Room Instances</li>
<li>Cleanup the RAC Model Using Delete and Purge</li>
<li>New Project, Delete Levels, Import RAC Model</li>
<li>Copy Monitor Levels and Grids</li>
<li>View Properties and the Project Browser</li>
<li>New Views for HVAC Floor Plans, Ceiling Plans, 3D and Elevations</li>
<li>New Views for Plumbing Plans and 3D</li>
<li>New Views for Electrical Plans for Lighting, Power and Telecom</li>
<li>New Views for Fire Protection Plans and Ceiling Plans</li>
<li>New Views for Zones and Spaces</li>
<li>View and View Title Renaming</li>
<li>Project Browser Organization and Sub Disciplines</li>
<li>View Discipline, Sub Disciplines and Underlays</li>
<li>Intro to View Templates</li>
<li>HVAC, Space and Zone View Templates</li>
<li>Electrical and Plumbing View Templates</li>
<li>Visibility Tips</li>
<li>Add Spaces, View Templates and Wall Function</li>
<li>Adding Zones</li>
<li>Create Plenum Plans for HVAC and Zone Editing</li>
<li>RME / RAC Connectors and Copy Paste-Same Method</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<p>&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">46.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:09:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-pipe-and-tube-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-pipe-and-tube-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inventor2010_pt_trncou.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube training course give you a basic introduction and walkthrough of a basic tube and pipe run using Inventor 2010. How to setup styles, make a run, and to understand the file structure in Inventor 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="inventor-2010-pipe-and-tube-training.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Exam</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:26:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Framework Generator Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-framework-generator-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-framework-generator-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inventor2010_fwg_trncou.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Framework Generator Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Inventor 2010 Framework Generator training manual will show you how create a welded steel structural frame, create your own standards cross sections and how to modify a frame.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="inventor-2010-framework-generator-training.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Exam</li>
</ul>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:25:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Essentials Training Manuals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inventor2010_trnmanuals.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Essentials Training Manuals</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The 3 volume Inventor 2010 Essentials training manuals providing industry experts delivering instruction on commands and features within a live lecture format as real-world concepts. The training manuals are great for all user levels to learn the tools and techniques in Inventor 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h3>Topics covered include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Introduction to Sketching</li>
<li>Modeling</li>
<li>Patterns</li>
<li>Revolved Features and Stress Analysis</li>
<li>Shelling and Ribs</li>
<li>Repairing Someone Else's Part</li>
<li>Design Changes to Your Part</li>
<li>iParts Table Driven Parts</li>
<li>Publishing iParts into Your Content Center Catalog</li>
<li>Drawings</li>
<li>Assembly Modeling</li>
<li>Sheet Metal</li>
<li>AutoCAD into Inventor</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<p>&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:24:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Essentials Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-essentials-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-essentials-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_inventor2010_trncourse_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Essentials Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Inventor 2010 Essentials training course provides industry experts delivering instruction on commands and features within a live lecture format as real-world concepts. The training manuals are great for all user levels to learn the tools and techniques in Inventor 2010.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="inventor-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html">Training Manuals (3 volumes)</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Exam</li>
</ul>

<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">150.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:23:00 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Global Concepts in 3ds Max 2008-2009 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/global-concepts-in-3ds-max-2008-2009-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/global-concepts-in-3ds-max-2008-2009-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_093dsmax.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Global Concepts in 3ds Max 2008-2009 Bundle was created to deliver a basic 3 part introductory class on 3ds Max 2008 and 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch a portion of the training or the entire session.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Global Concepts in 3ds Max 2008-2009 Vol 1</li>
<li>Global Concepts in 3ds Max 2008-2009 Vol 2</li>
<li>Global Concepts in 3ds Max 2008-2009 Vol 3</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">69.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:11:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Google SketchUp Training Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-training-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-training-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_google_sketchup_trai.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Google SketchUp Training Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle introduces the basic concepts of Google SketchUp.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="google-sketchup-level-1-training.html">Google SketchUp Level 1 Training</a></li>
<li><a href="google-sketchup-level-2-training.html">Google SketchUp Level 2 Training</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">46.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:26:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2010 Geospatial Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-geospatial-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-geospatial-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d10_geospat_course.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Map 3D 2010 Geospatial Essentials training course is focused on Feature-Source technology allowing direct access to your geospatial data (Shape files, SDFs, Oracle, ESRI SDE, etc) without translating or importing that data into your drawing file.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The course starts off experimenting with the new ribbon-based user interface for accessing geospatial data including vectors, raster, and direct access to point data from a database. The course then walks the user through styling feature-sources for thematic representation followed by direct editing capabilities of your attached features. A section on Managing Features instructs the user on how to move data from one feature-source to another and extending your data with feature joins, calculations, and buffers.</p>
<p>Finally, we end the performance-based training with a look at 2010&rsquo;s new Feature Overlay technology and data workflows.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<br /><br /> 
<ul>
<li><a href="map-3d-2010-geospatial-training-manual.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:35:21 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2010 Essentials Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-essentials-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-essentials-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d10_essent_course.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Map 3D 2010 Essentials Training Course will explain the fundamentals of “Drawing-Based Objects” in a practical and easy-to-follow curriculum. The performance-based training focuses on both Non-Geospatial and Geospatial data.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The course covers Drawing Cleanup, Linking Source Drawings for Multi-User Access to your Drawing Files, Stylizing Drawings, and Plotting Maps. Geospatial specific topics include: Coordinate Systems, Working with Object Data (attributes), Classification (CAD Standards), Reprojecting Data, and Importing &amp; Exporting Geospatial Data (Shape files, SDFs, DGN, MapInfo).</p>
<p>The session wraps up with a complete workflow taking your CAD/Drawing-Based data, classifying it for geospatial integration, then exporting your data into a geospatial data format with a preview of feature-source technology highlighted in the Geospatial Essentials curriculum.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This course includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="map-3d-2010-essentials-training-manual.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>

</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:34:02 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Hydraulics & Hydrology in Civil 3D 2010 Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraulics-hydrology-in-civil-3d-2010-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraulics-hydrology-in-civil-3d-2010-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_hydro_trncou.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Hydrology and Hydraulics in Civil 3D 2010 training course provides the knowledge you need to practically apply the Hydraflow Extensions in an efficient manner.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The lecture contains a discussion of Hydrologic and Hydraulic Engineering principals required to apply the tools available to you in Civil 3D and the Hydraflow Extensions.</p>
<p>The user is then guided through numerous exercises demonstrating software use on applications such as runoff calculations, culverts, weirs, inlets, channels, detention basins and storm sewer networks.  Workflow when analyzing Civil 3D pipe networks in Hydraflow is also demonstrated.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="hydraulics-and-hydrology-in-civil-3d-2010-training.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 20:14:05 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-for-surveyors-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-for-surveyors-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_survytrn_course.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors training course is designed for the Surveyor looking to take advantage of the Survey functionality of AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>The course includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="civil-3d-2010-for-surveyors-training-manual.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:25:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2010 Essentials Training Manuals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_civil3d2010_trnmanuals.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This 3 volume set of training manuals will provide the essentials on the use of many key features in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>From the new users interface to the use of pipes each live-recorded lecture will provide instruction along with exercises to become familiar with the operation of AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>Topics include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Software Installation</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Points Features</li>
<li>Surfaces</li>
<li>Parcels</li>
<li>Alignments</li>
<li>Profiles</li>
<li>Assemblies/Corridors</li>
<li>Sections</li>
<li>Grading</li>
<li>Data Sharing</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<p>&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:22:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2010 Essentials Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-essentials-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-essentials-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_civil3d2010_trncourse_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2010 Essentials Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This training course will provide the essentials on the use of many key features in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This course includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a  href="civil-3d-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>

<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">150.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:23:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2010 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_c3d2010.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2010 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 Bundle contains 12 vBooks delivering essential knowledge on civil-related project work including creating and managing plan projects, designing intersections and cul-de-sacs, site grading, corridor design, &amp; more.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="alignments-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Alignments in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="corridors-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Corridors in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="design-environment-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Design Environment in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="grading-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Grading in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="new-features-in-civil-3d-2010.html">New Features in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="parcels-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Parcels in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="pipes-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Pipes in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="plan-production-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Plan Production in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="points-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Points in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="profiles-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Profiles in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Sample Lines, Sections &amp; Volumes in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
<li><a href="surfaces-in-civil-3d-2010.html">Surfaces in Civil 3D 2010</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">276.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:20:57 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2009 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_09c3d.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2009 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2009 Bundle contains 13 vBooks delivering essential knowledge on civil-related project work including creating and managing plan projects, designing intersections and cul-de-sacs, site grading, corridor design, &amp; more.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>

<ul>
<li><a href="getting-started-with-civil-3d-2009.html">Getting Started with Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="alignments-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Alignments in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="corridors-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Corridors in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="design-environment-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Design Environment in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="grading-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Grading in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="parcels-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Parcels in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="pipes-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Pipes in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="plan-production-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Plan Production in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="points-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Points in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="profiles-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Profiles in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Sample Lines, Sections &amp; Volumes in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="surfaces-in-civil-3d-2009.html">Surfaces in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="survey-using-civil-3d-2009.html">Survey in Civil 3D 2009</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">299.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 19:19:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk University 2008 Inventor PowerTrack Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-inventor-powertrack-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-inventor-powertrack-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_au08pt_inventor.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk University 2008 Inventor PowerTrack Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The Autodesk University 2008 Inventor PowerTrack Bundle contains 10 vBooks that are full video recordings of each of the 10 Inventor PowerTrack sessions from Autodesk University 2008.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">190.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2011 17:25:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk University 2008 Civil Engineering PowerTrack Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-civil-engineering-powertrack-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-civil-engineering-powertrack-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_au08pt_civeng.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk University 2008 Civil Engineering PowerTrack Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Autodesk University 2008 Civil Engineering PowerTrack Bundle contains 12 vBooks that are full video recordings of each of the 12 Civil Engineering PowerTrack sessions from Autodesk University 2008.</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">228.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2011 17:24:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk University 2008 Building Design PowerTrack Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-building-design-powertrack-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-building-design-powertrack-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_au08pt_blddesn.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk University 2008 Building Design PowerTrack Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The Autodesk University 2008 Building Design PowerTrack Bundle contains 12 vBooks that are full video recordings of each of the 12 Building Design PowerTrack sessions from Autodesk University 2008.
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">228.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2011 17:24:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Autodesk University 2008 All PowerTracks Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-all-powertracks-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autodesk-university-2008-all-powertracks-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_au08pt_all.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Autodesk University 2008 All PowerTracks Bundle
</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The Autodesk University 2008 All PowerTracks Bundle contains 34 vBooks that are full video recordings of each of the sessions from the Inventor, Building Design, and Civil Engineering PowerTrack sessions from Autodesk University 2008.
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">646.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2011 17:24:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2010 for Engineers and Surveyors Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-for-engineers-and-surveyors-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-for-engineers-and-surveyors-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acad10_srvyeng_course.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This training course is designed to teach Basic AutoCAD to those users in the Civil Engineering and Land Surveying Industries.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Through a series of classroom lectures the user will be taught how to navigate and use basic AutoCAD tools that are a recommended prerequisite for the Civil 3D 2010 Essentials training manuals. Even those who have used AutoCAD for many years can benefit from this course.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The course includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<br /> 
<ul>
<li><a href="autocad-2010-for-engineers-and-surveyors-training-manual.html">Training Manual</a></li>
<li>Exercises</li>
<li>Frequently Asked Questions</li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 18:57:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2010 Essentials Training Manuals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_autocad2010_trnmanuals.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>These training manuals introduce students to all the basics necessary to get up and running quickly and more importantly &ndash; accurately - in AutoCAD 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Students will learn to create and document two-dimensional drawings by viewing a variety of live-recorded reference-based and tutorial-based lessons which use a combination of architectural and mechanical drawings.<br /><br />Students will learn to use basic to intermediate commands to create drawings, use layers, add dimensions and text annotation, add titleblocks and then to plot the drawings to different formats. Students will also learn the basics of using annotative objects and how to create reusable symbols called blocks.<br /><br />Included are 14 lessons each of which include 1 or 2 sections of about 20 minutes each in length. If you are spending the semester learning AutoCAD, need to get up and running fast or just need a quick refresher course &ndash; this first level of the AutoCAD 2010 series will get you there.<br /><br /></p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Topics include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Tracking</li>
<li>Coordinates</li>
<li>OSNAPS</li>
<li>Circles and Polygons</li>
<li>Selection Sets</li>
<li>Text and Layouts</li>
<li>Dimensions</li>
<li>Editing</li>
<li>Inquiry</li>
<li>Symbols and Hatching</li>
<li>Parametric</li>
</ul>

<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">100.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 18:55:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2009 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2009-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2009-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_09autocad.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This bundle is great for all user levels to learn the tools and techniques in AutoCAD 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD 2009 Bundle contains 4 vBooks providing industry experts delivering instruction on commands and features within screen capture videos as real-world concepts.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="level-1-autocad-2009.html">Level 1 AutoCAD 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="level-2-autocad-2009.html">Level 2 AutoCAD 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="advanced-custom-autocad-2009.html">Advanced/Custom AutoCAD 2009</a></li>
<li><a href="update-for-autocad-2009.html">Update for AutoCAD 2009</a></li>
</ul>

<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">92.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 18:54:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Structure 2011 Essentials Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-structure-2011-essentials-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-structure-2011-essentials-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/u/bundle_11revitstruct.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit Structure 2011 Essentials Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>After completing these manuals, you will be able to: set up a new building information model project, work with basic structural elements (columns, walls, beams, slabs, foundations, bracing), create section and detail views; add annotations, including symbols, dimensions, and schedules; and share designs by printing.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Volume 1 Topics include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Introduction to Revit Structure</li>
<li>Elements and Family Organization</li>
<li>Creating a New Project</li>
<li>Walls and Columns</li>
<li>Floors and Footings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3><strong>Volume 2 Topics include:</strong></h3>
<ul>
<li>Columns and Beams</li>
<li>Beam Systems and Advanced Floors</li>
<li>Openings and Sloped Floors</li>
<li>Frames and 3D View Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
<div class="toc">
<h3><strong>Volume 3 Topics include:</strong></h3>
<ul>
<li>Dimensioning and Simple Annotations</li>
<li>Draft Views and Detail Views</li>
<li>Using Sheets and Printing</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">125.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:13:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit 2010 Essentials Training Course]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-2010-essentials-training-course.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-2010-essentials-training-course.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revit2010_trncourse_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit 2010 Essentials Training Course</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit 2010 Essentials training course provides industry experts delivering instruction on commands and features within a live lecture format as real-world concepts.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>This course includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="revit-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html">Training Manuals (5)</a></li>
<li>Test</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">175.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:03:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit 2010 Essentials Training Manuals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-2010-essentials-training-manuals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revit2010_trnmanuals.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Revit 2010 Essentials Training Manuals</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The 5 volume Revit 2010 Essentials training manuals provides industry experts delivering instruction on commands and features as real-world concepts within a live-recorded lecture format. The training manuals are great for all user levels to learn the tools and techniques in Revit 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Topics covered include:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Interface Overview</li>
<li>Levels, Grids and Walls</li>
<li>Walls Modifying and Dimensioning</li>
<li>Doors and Windows</li>
<li>Columns</li>
<li>Rooms and Tags</li>
<li>Adding Components</li>
<li>Text Symbols and Line Styles</li>
<li>Schedules</li>
<li>Sections and Floors</li>
<li>Ceiling Plans</li>
<li>Roofs</li>
<li>Stairs and Railings</li>
<li>Wall Construction</li>
<li>Detailing</li>
<li>Custom Families</li>
<li>Sheets and Plotting</li>
<li>Worksharing</li>
<li>and more</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">150.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Thu, 26 Apr 2012 21:04:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to Office 2007 Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-office-2007-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-office-2007-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_introffice2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Introduction to Office 2007 Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle introduces the basic concepts of the products in Microsoft Office 2007.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="">Office 2007 New Features</a></li>
<li><a href="access-2007-introduction.html">Access 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="excel-2007-introduction.html">Excel 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="outlook-2007-introduction.html">Outlook 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="powerpoint-2007-introduction.html">PowerPoint 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="word-2007-introduction.html">Word 2007 Introduction</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">135.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:32:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Office 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_office2007complete.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Office 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers the basic, intermediate and advanced concepts of the Access 2007, Excel 2007, Outlook 2007, PowerPoint 2007, and Word 2007.</p>

<div class="bundle">
<h3>This bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li><a href="office-2007-new-features.html">Office 2007 New Features</a></li>
<li><a href="access-2007-introduction.html">Access 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="access-2007-intermediate.html">Access 2007 Intermediate</a></li>
<li><a href="access-2007-advanced.html">Access 2007 Advanced</a></li>
<li><a href="excel-2007-advanced.html">Excel 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="excel-2007-intermediate.html">Excel 2007 Intermediate</a></li>
<li><a href="excel-2007-introduction.html">Excel 2007 Advanced</a></li>
<li><a href="outlook-2007-introduction.html">Outlook 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="outlook-2007-advanced.html">Outlook 2007 Advanced</a></li>
<li><a href="powerpoint-2007-introduction.html">PowerPoint 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="powerpoint-2007-advanced.html">PowerPoint 2007 Advanced</a></li>
<li><a href="word-2007-introduction.html">Word 2007 Introduction</a></li>
<li><a href="word-2007-intermediate.html">Word 2007 Intermediate</a></li>
<li><a href="word-2007-advanced.html">Word 2007 Advanced</a></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">315.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:40:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Alignment Offsets and Widenings in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignment-offsets-and-widenings-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignment-offsets-and-widenings-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_alignoffset_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Alignment Offsets and Widenings in Civil 3D 2011</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>View the 5 lessons in the AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 Alignment Offsets and Widening vBook to learn how to maximize the use of this functionality to generate offset alignments and lane tapers.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Offset Alignments
<ul>
<li>Create Centerline Alignment</li>
<li>Create Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Prospector</li>
<li>Object Reactivity</li>
<li>Offset Alignment Geometry</li>
<li>Edit Parameters</li>
<li>Modify Properties</li>
<li>Grips</li>
<li>Delete Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Multiple Offsets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Defined Widenings
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Add Widening</li>
<li>Modify Widening Parameters</li>
<li>Segmental Transitions on Curves</li>
<li>Edit Widening With Grips</li>
<li>Alignment Masks</li>
<li>Delete Widening Regions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Automatic Widenings
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Defined Parameters</li>
<li>Review Automatic Widening</li>
<li>Design Criteria</li>
<li>Review Design Criteria Widening</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practical Example
<ul>
<li>Offsets or Polylines</li>
<li>Median Geometry</li>
<li>Lane Centerline Geometry</li>
<li>Pavement Edge Geometry</li>
<li>Deceleration and Acceleration Lanes</li>
<li>Offset Alignment</li>
<li>Assign Styles</li>
<li>Alignment Mask</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Design Criteria Files
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Review Design Criteria File</li>
<li>Design Vehicles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:43:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Helpdesk Training for Outlook 2007 with Exchange 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/helpdesk-training-for-outlook-2007-with-exchange-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/helpdesk-training-for-outlook-2007-with-exchange-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cpw_outlook07exchg10_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Helpdesk Training for Outlook 2007 with Exchange 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Designed for Helpdesk professionals, this course will assist help desk professional troubleshoot user problems with Outlook 2007 and handling the general day to day management tasks using Exchange 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li> Introduction</li>
<li>Overview of Exchange 2010
<ul>
<li>Review of Active Directory</li>
<li>How Exchange Server 2010 Uses Active Directory</li>
<li>Exchange Server Roles Overview</li>
<li>How Message Routing Uses Active Directory Sites</li>
<li>How Exchange Servers Access Active Directory Information</li>
<li>Demo: Active Directory and Exchange Server Permissions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Recipient Objects
<ul>
<li>What are Recipients?</li>
<li>Creating and Managing Users</li>
<li>New Mailbox Wizard</li>
<li>User Options</li>
<li>Move Requests</li>
<li>Distribution Lists</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Email Addresses and Address Lists
<ul>
<li>What are Accepted Domains?</li>
<li>Email Address Policies</li>
<li>Address Lists</li>
<li>Offline Address Book Options</li>
<li>Overview of Bulk Recipient Management Tasks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Message Transport
<ul>
<li>What is an SMTP Connector?</li>
<li>How Messages are Routed in an Exchange Server Organization</li>
<li>Demo: Troubleshooting Message Transport with Exchange Queue Viewer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Office Outlook 2007
<ul>
<li>Navigating the User interface</li>
<li>Creating a Rule-driven Folder</li>
<li>Using the Calendar</li>
<li>Using Contacts</li>
<li>Setting Outlook Options</li>
<li>Creating a New Account and Changing Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Troubleshooting Office Outlook 2007
<ul>
<li>Offline vs Online Mode</li>
<li>Starting Outlook in Safe Mode and Disabling Plug-ins</li>
<li>Using the Outlook Tray Icon</li>
<li>Moving a Mailbox or Outlook Installation</li>
<li>Dealing with a Corrupted .ost File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Troubleshooting the Office Client Access Server
<ul>
<li>Catching Errors in the Outlook Web Application</li>
<li>The Outlook Web App</li>
<li>The Outlook Web App Interface</li>
<li>Using the Calendar</li>
<li>Changing Options</li>
<li>Using the Autodiscover Service</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Mobile Clients
<ul>
<li>Active Sync vs Blackberries</li>
<li>Loss of an Active Sync Phone</li>
<li>Loss of a Blackberry Phone</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">90.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:55:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[SharePoint 2007 End User Training - Level 1]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sharepoint-2007-end-user-training-level-1.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sharepoint-2007-end-user-training-level-1.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sharepoint07_lvl1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The objective of this course is to teach you how to share information and collaborate on projects in an efficient and cost-effective manner.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The objective of this course is to teach you how to share information and collaborate on projects in an efficient and cost-effective manner. More specifically, you will learn how to use Windows SharePoint Services to create virtual team Web sites to enable information sharing and collaboration between project team or department members.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction
<ul>
<li>Understanding the Different Versions of SharePoint</li>
<li>Key Features</li>
<li>Logging on to the SharePoint Site</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Document Libraries
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Document</li>
<li>Uploading a Document</li>
<li>Check-In and Check-Out</li>
<li>Major and Minor Versions</li>
<li>Workflows</li>
<li>Setting Up Alerts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>My Site
<ul>
<li>Edit My Profile</li>
<li>My Manager</li>
<li>Adding Colleagues</li>
<li>Using the Blog</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Searching</li>
<li>Creating and Modifying Sites
<ul>
<li>Creating a Team Site</li>
<li>Creating a Sub-Site</li>
<li>Customizing the Web Parts</li>
<li>Applying a Theme</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Permissions
<ul>
<li>Setting User Permissions</li>
<li>Using Groups for Permissions</li>
<li>Security Trimming</li>
<li>Creating a User</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Lists
<ul>
<li>Creating a New List</li>
<li>Creating a Custom List</li>
<li>-Managing Views</li>
<li>Creating a Custom View</li>
<li>Modifying a View</li>
<li>Filtering Items in a View</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:59:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[TCP/IP - Fundamentals]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/tcp-ip-fundamentals.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/tcp-ip-fundamentals.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_fund_tcpip_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>TCP/IP - Fundamentals</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook covers the fundamental TCP/IP concepts.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction
<ul>
<li>Using TCP/IP While Browsing</li>
<li>Using TCP/IP at the Office</li>
<li>Using TCP/IP from Wireless Devices</li>
<li>The History of TCP/IP</li>
<li>A Basic TCP/IP Network</li>
<li>Assigning IP Addresses</li>
<li>Automatic Private IP Addresses</li>
<li>TCP/IP Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fundamentals
<ul>
<li>The Department of Defense Network Model</li>
<li>Network Interface Layer</li>
<li>Internet Layer</li>
<li>Transport Layer</li>
<li>Application Layer</li>
<li>The OSI Network Model</li>
<li>Physical Layer</li>
<li>Data Link Layer</li>
<li>Network Layer</li>
<li>Transport Layer</li>
<li>Session Layer</li>
<li>Presentation Layer</li>
<li>Application Layer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>IP Addressing
<ul>
<li>IPv4</li>
<li>Assign an IP Address</li>
<li>Valid IP Addresses</li>
<li>IP Address Range</li>
<li>Special Addresses</li>
<li>Public and Private IP Addresses</li>
<li>More About Private IP Addresses</li>
<li>IPv6</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Subnetting
<ul>
<li>Why Subnets are Used</li>
<li>Subnet Masks</li>
<li>Subnet Examples</li>
<li>Subnets and Binary</li>
<li>Determining the Number of Available Hosts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>IP Routing
<ul>
<li>Phone Numbers vs. IP Addresses</li>
<li>A Routing Scenario</li>
<li>What is a Router?</li>
<li>A Technical Example</li>
<li>Big Picture Routing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
<ul>
<li>Advantages and Disadvantages</li>
<li>How DHCP Works</li>
<li>Information that DHCP Provides</li>
<li>Checking for use of DHCP</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>DNS Domain Name System
<ul>
<li>DNS Servers</li>
<li>DNS Example</li>
<li>The Ping Tool</li>
<li>The nslookup Tool</li>
<li>Internal DNS</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">60.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:02:05 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Project 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/project-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/project-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advproj2007_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course covers the features within Microsoft Project 2007 that every project manager needs to know.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course covers the features within Microsoft Project 2007 that every project manager needs to know. This includes setting Advanced Task settings, entering Overtime work and selecting the Cost Rate Table. After this course, you will know how to import a project from a different Microsoft Office application, create your own custom Tables and Views, and then create a custom report to answer questions for management.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Working with Other Applications
<ul>
<li>Preparing the Settings for Import and Export</li>
<li>Importing Tasks from Microsoft Excel</li>
<li>Exporting Project Data to Microsoft Excel</li>
<li>Copying Pictures of a Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Lead and Lag Times
<ul>
<li>Explaining Lag Time</li>
<li>Explaining Lead Time</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting Advanced Task Information
<ul>
<li>Setting a Deadline and Constraints</li>
<li>Setting the Task Type</li>
<li>Explaining Earned Value Method</li>
<li>Creating Custom Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting Advanced Resource Information
<ul>
<li>Entering an Email in the Resource Information</li>
<li>Setting Resource Availability</li>
<li>Setting the Cost Rate Tables</li>
<li>Creating Custom Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Tables
<ul>
<li>Explaining Tables</li>
<li>Viewing Different Tables</li>
<li>Copying an Existing Table</li>
<li>Adding and Removing Columns from a Table</li>
<li>Understanding the Organizer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Views
<ul>
<li>Explaining Views</li>
<li>Copying an Existing View</li>
<li>Creating Filters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Multiple Projects
<ul>
<li>Sharing Resources</li>
<li>Combining Project Files</li>
<li>Linking Tasks Between Projects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Custom Report
<ul>
<li>Entering the Resource Report Detail</li>
<li>Configuring the Page Setup</li>
<li>Previewing the Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:51:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[InfoPath 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/infopath-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/infopath-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_infopath07_intr_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course introduces the user to Microsoft InfoPath 2007.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces the user to Microsoft InfoPath 2007. This includes creating new Form Templates and properly utilizing the different controls and their associated properties to assist users.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Understanding InfoPath 2007 
<ul>
<li>Exploring the Interface</li>
<li>Creating a Simple Form</li>
<li>Filling Out the Form</li>
<li>Viewing the Resulting Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working With Controls and the Data Structure 
<ul>
<li>Adding Controls</li>
<li>Setting Data Validation Rules</li>
<li>Setting a Default Value</li>
<li>Using the Logic Inspector</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Repeating Groups 
<ul>
<li>Adding a Repeating Table</li>
<li>Setting Control Properties</li>
<li>Viewing the Changes Made to the Data Structure</li>
<li>Using the Expression Box Control</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing the Form 
<ul>
<li>Setting Conditional Formatting</li>
<li>Inserting Pictures and ClipArt</li>
<li>Customizing Tables</li>
<li>Creating a Template Part</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing, Exporting and Data Merging 
<ul>
<li>Importing a Word 2007 Form</li>
<li>Exporting Data to Microsoft Excel 2007</li>
<li>Exporting Data to the Web</li>
<li>Merging Data Within Forms</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Views 
<ul>
<li>Creating New Views</li>
<li>Switching Views</li>
<li>Creating a Print View</li>
<li>Adding Buttons to Switch Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Protecting and Publishing Forms 
<ul>
<li>Setting Simple Protection</li>
<li>Creating a Digital Certificate</li>
<li>Defining Digital Signatures</li>
<li>Managing Credentials</li>
<li>Publishing your Form</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:09:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Dreamweaver CS4 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dreamweaver-cs4-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/dreamweaver-cs4-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introdrmwvercs4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBook, you will learn how to use Dreamweaver CS4 to create and modify Web sites.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook, you will learn how to use Dreamweaver CS4 to create and modify Web sites. You will learn how to plan and define a Web site; create pages and format text; define structural elements; create and apply CSS style rules; insert and modify tables, images, and links; test and manage Web site files; and publish a site.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Terms and Graphic Types</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Workspaces 
<ul>
<li>Viewing Content</li>
<li>Using a Preset Workspace</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Intro to Web Design and CSS</li> 
<ul>
<li>Understanding a Website</li>
<li>Syncronize with Server</li>
<li>Different Browsers</li>
<li>Windows, Mac and Unix</li>
<li>Color Ranges</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>New Web Page 
<ul>
<li>HTML vs XHTML</li>
<li>Line Breaks</li>
<li>H1</li>
<li>Using Placeholder Text</li>
<li>Naming Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>New Web Site</li> 
<ul>
<li>Make a Root Folder</li>
<li>Hosting</li>
<li>The File Panel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add Pages and Browsers</li>
<ul>
<li>Rearrange Files</li>
<li>Bulleted Lists</li>
<li>Saving the Site</li>
<li>Preview in a Browser</li>
<li>Adding New Browsers for Testing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Link Basics and Library</li>
<ul>
<li>Using the Properties Bar</li>
<li>Point to File and Browse</li>
<li>Assets</li>
<li>Copy External Links</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Table Basics</li>
<ul>
<li>Table Behavior</li>
<li>Table Options</li>
<li>Floating vs Fixed Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Tumbnails in Tables</li>
<ul>
<li>Using Thumbnails</li>
<li>Setting Column Width</li>
<li>Align Text</li>
<li>Borders</li>
<li>Edit in Code View</li>
<li>Adding a Style to a Table</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dreamweaver CSS Layouts</li>
<ul>
<li>Save Style Sheet</li>
<li>ID and Class</li>
<li>Previewing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>CSS Basics</li>
<ul>
<li>What are Styles?</li>
<li>CSS Rules Dialog Box</li>
<li>Body Rules</li>
<li>Color</li>
<li>Box</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Free Public Templates</li>
<ul>
<li>Firefox Web Developer Toolbar</li>
<li>Modify in Code or Design View</li>
<li>Viewing Style Rules</li>
<li>Making Fonts Adjustable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Testing In Dreamweaver</li>
<ul>
<li>Finishing Pages</li>
<li>Checking Older Browsers</li>
<li>Linked vs Imported Style Sheets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Connect and Upload</li>
<ul>
<li>Files Panel Icons</li>
<li>Uploading to a Subdirectory</li>
<li>Working on Multiple Computers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Final Testing and Validation</li>
<ul>
<li>Local Validation</li>
<li>CSS, HTML and 508 Validation</li>
<li>Metatag Generator</li>
<li>Manual Checks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:13:14 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Illustrator CS4 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/illustrator-cs4-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/illustrator-cs4-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introilluscs4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook covers the fundamentals of Illustrator CS4, which is used primarily to work with vector-based graphics.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook covers the fundamentals of Illustrator CS4, which is used primarily to work with vector-based graphics. After getting familiar with the Illustrator CS4 environment, you will learn how to create a simple illustration by creating and manipulating shapes and by drawing and editing paths. You will also learn how to apply color, gradients, and transparency. You will then learn how to work with text and layers.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Workspaces  
<ul>
<li>The Toolbar</li>
<li>Using a Preset Workspace</li>
<li>Save a Custom Workspace</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preferences</li>
<li>New Document  
<ul>
<li>New Document Dialog Box</li>
<li>Change Measurement System</li>
<li>Bleed</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Navigation  
<ul>
<li>The Navigator Panel</li>
<li>View</li>
<li>Zoom Percent</li>
<li>Marquee Zoom</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Toolbar  
<ul>
<li>Tearoffs</li>
<li>HotKeys</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pen  
<ul>
<li>Points and Paths</li>
<li>Bounding Box</li>
<li>Undo</li>
<li>Convert Tool</li>
<li>Handlebars</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Draw Shapes  
<ul>
<li>Smart Guides</li>
<li>Draw Shape with Pen</li>
<li>Change Shapes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sample Files</li>
<li>Swatches  
<ul>
<li>Swatch Types</li>
<li>Swatch Libraries</li>
<li>Pantone Colors</li>
<li>Kuler</li>
<li>New Swatch</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Color  
<ul>
<li>The Color Panel</li>
<li>Web Safe Palette</li>
<li>Color Picker</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transform Shapes  
<ul>
<li>Bounding Box</li>
<li>Duplicate and Repeat Objects</li>
<li>Warp and Twist with Liquify Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Painting  
<ul>
<li>Paintbrush</li>
<li>Brush Libraries</li>
<li>Apply Brushes</li>
<li>Fill and Stroke</li>
<li>Blob Brush</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pencil  
<ul>
<li>Change Pencil Options</li>
<li>Smooth Tool</li>
<li>Path Eraser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Live Paint  
<ul>
<li>Swatch Library</li>
<li>Use Live Paint Bucket</li>
<li>Modify Stroke</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Live Trace  
<ul>
<li>Converting Pixels to Vector Shapes</li>
<li>Live Trace Options</li>
<li>Recolor Artwork</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Type  
<ul>
<li>Point Text</li>
<li>Paragraph Text</li>
<li>Text on a Path</li>
<li>Text in a Shape</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Ending</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:04:57 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS4 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interphtoshpcs4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to use color fills, gradients, patterns, and overlays. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to use color fills, gradients, patterns, and overlays. It will also show you how to create layer masks, grayscale masks, and clipping masks to show or hide various parts of an image, and how to create and edit paths and convert type to paths.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Point and Paragraph Type 
<ul>
<li>Point Type</li>
<li>Paragraph Type</li>
<li>Transforming Type</li>
<li>Character Panel</li>
<li>Paragraph Panel</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Quick Mask and Layer Mask 
<ul>
<li>Quick Mask</li>
<li>Isolating the Background Layer</li>
<li>Layer Masks</li>
<li>Fading an Image with a Layer Mask</li>
<li>Gradients</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blending Modes 
<ul>
<li>Multiply</li>
<li>Screen</li>
<li>Difference</li>
<li>Exclusion</li>
<li>Linear Light</li>
<li>Layer Order</li>
<li>Changing the Fill Opacity of Type</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Paths and Vector Mask 
<ul>
<li>The Pen Tool</li>
<li>Manipulating Handlebars</li>
<li>The Paths Panel</li>
<li>Selection from a Path</li>
<li>Modify a Custom Shapes' Path</li>
<li>Clipping Mask</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Smart Objects 
<ul>
<li>Canvas Size</li>
<li>Transforming Smart Objects</li>
<li>Embedded Smart Objects</li>
<li>Convert to a Smart Object</li>
<li>Text Smart Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adjustment Layers 
<ul>
<li>Create an Adjustment Layer</li>
<li>Layer Order</li>
<li>Adjustment Layers in Smart Objects</li>
<li>Layer Comps Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Content Aware Scale 
<ul>
<li>Using Photoshop's Sample Content</li>
<li>Content Aware Scale</li>
<li>Alpha Channels</li>
<li>Alpha Selections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Panoramic</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:38:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[InDesign CS4 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/indesign-cs4-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/indesign-cs4-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introdesigncs4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach students fundamental concepts and terminology and the basic features of Adobe InDesign CS4.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach students fundamental concepts and terminology and the basic features of Adobe InDesign CS4. You will learn how to create documents, place text and graphics, and create custom color swatches. You will also learn how to work with master pages and multi-page documents. In addition, you will learn how to format text, apply styles, work with threaded text frames, position and group objects, and work with layers. Finally, you will print documents, create print presets, and package documents for commercial printing.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</span></li>
<li>Workspaces
<ul>
<li>Using a Preset Workspace</span></li>
<li>Adjust Toolbar</span></li>
<li>Fill and Stroke</span></li>
<li>Opening New Panels</span></li>
<li>Save Custom Workspace</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preferences and Presets
<ul>
<li>Measurement System</span></li>
<li>Presets and Preferences</span></li>
<li>New Document</span></li>
<li>Change the View</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Document Preset Options
<ul>
<li>Single vs Facing Pages</span></li>
<li>Linked Margin Measurements</span></li>
<li>Bleed and Slug</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Shapes and Frames
<ul>
<li>Compare Containers</span></li>
<li>Compare Fills and Strokes</span></li>
<li>Stacking Order</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Page Layout Basics
<ul>
<li>Text Box</span></li>
<li>Placeholder Text</span></li>
<li>Overset Text</span></li>
<li>Fitting</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text and Color
<ul>
<li>Change Type Options</span></li>
<li>Type on a Path</span></li>
<li>Flip Direction</span></li>
<li>Align to Page</span></li>
<li>Change Text Color</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Spacing, Tint, and Swatches
<ul>
<li>Text Frame Options</span></li>
<li>Fonts</span></li>
<li>Tints</span></li>
<li>Drop Cap</span></li>
<li>Kerning and Tracking</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction to Styles
<ul>
<li>Styles</span></li>
<li>Choosing Fonts</span></li>
<li>Serif and Sans-Serif</span></li>
<li>Adding a Pantone Color</span></li>
<li>Based-on Styles</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>More Styles
<ul>
<li>Placing a Word File</span></li>
<li>Apply Styles</span></li>
<li>Modify Styles</span></li>
<li>Paragraph Rules</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Flow and Story Editor
<ul>
<li>Text Flow with Alt/Option and Shift</span></li>
<li>Using the Story Editor</span></li>
<li>Keep the Options</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layers
<ul>
<li>Layers</span></li>
<li>Naming Layers</span></li>
<li>Place a File</span></li>
<li>Text Flow with Alt or Shift</span></li>
<li>Using a Photoshop File</span></li>
<li>Object Layer Options</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Inset, Transparency, and Gradient
<ul>
<li>Text Inset</span></li>
<li>Apply Subheading Style</span></li>
<li>Effects Panel</span></li>
<li>Gradient and Eyedropper</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Libraries
<ul>
<li>Library</span></li>
<li>Name Color Swatches</span></li>
<li>Add Styles to Library</span></li>
<li>Add Library Items to a New Document</span></li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</span></li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:08:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_access2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Access 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This bundle covers basic, intermediate and advanced levels of Microsoft Access 2007.
<p>The bundle includes the following vBooks:<br />- Access 2007 - Introduction<br />- Access 2007 - Intermediate<br />- Access 2007 - Advanced</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 12:52:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Windows 7 - New Features]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-7-new-features.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-7-new-features.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_win7_newfeat_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Windows 7 - New Features</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course introduces students to the major new features and enhancements in Windows 7.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>The New Desktop 
<ul>
<li>The Start Menu</li>
<li>Viewing Gadgets</li>
<li>Using the Taskbar</li>
<li>Arranging Windows</li>
<li>Using Aero Shake</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing the Desktop 
<ul>
<li>Pinning Shortcuts to the Start Menu</li>
<li>Modifying the Shutdown Button</li>
<li>Pinning Shortcuts to the Taskbar</li>
<li>Modifying the Notification Area</li>
<li>Adding Gadgets</li>
<li>Customizing Gadgets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File Management 
<ul>
<li>Using Windows Explorer</li>
<li>Understanding Folder Structure</li>
<li>Understanding Libraries</li>
<li>Adding Locations to a Library</li>
<li>Searching Capabilities</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Devices 
<ul>
<li>Devices and Printers</li>
<li>Using the Device Manager</li>
<li>Using ReadyBoost</li>
<li>Keyboard Shortcuts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:28:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Service to Sales - Credit Union Edition]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/service-to-sales-credit-union-edition.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/service-to-sales-credit-union-edition.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_serv_to_salescu_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook teaches you how to transfer incoming customer calls to sales.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook teaches you how to transfer incoming customer calls to sales.</p>

<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Today's Consumer</li>
<li>Customer Expectations</li>
<li>Service to Sales</li>
<li>The Truth About Suggestions</li>
<li>Opportunities</li>
<li>What Matches Demand?</li>
<li>Customer Buying Cues</li>
<li>Handling Objections</li>
<li>Think About Products and Services</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 19:00:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_excel2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Excel 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This bundle covers basic, intermediate and advanced levels of Microsoft Excel 2007.
<p>The bundle includes the following vBooks: <br />- Excel 2007 - Introduction <br />- Excel 2007 - Intermediate <br />- Excel 2007 - Advanced</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:20:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_outlook2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Outlook 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This bundle covers basic and advanced levels of Microsoft Outlook 2007.
<p>The bundle includes the following vBooks: <br />- Outlook 2007 - Introduction <br />- Outlook 2007 - Advanced</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:44:51 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_ppt2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>PowerPoint 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This bundle covers basic and advanced levels of Microsoft PowerPoint 2007.
<p>The bundle includes the following vBooks:<br />- PowerPoint 2007 - Introduction<br />- PowerPoint 2007 - Advanced</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 13:54:37 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2007 Complete Bundle]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-complete-bundle.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-complete-bundle.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/b/n/bndle_cw_word2007.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Word 2007 Complete Bundle</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This bundle covers basic, intermediate, and advanced levels of Microsoft Word 2007.</p>
<div class="bundle">
<h3>The bundle includes the following vBooks:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Word 2007 - Introduction</li>
<li>Word 2007 - Intermediate</li>
<li>Word 2007 - Advanced</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">68.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Tue, 01 May 2012 14:03:02 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Advanced Object Display in Revit MEP 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-object-display-in-revit-mep-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-object-display-in-revit-mep-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitmep10_advobj_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Using filters correctly is an absolute must for all RME users.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Using filters correctly is an absolute must for all RME users. These lessons will make you the master of object styles, visibility graphics overrides, filters and color schemes. We also show you how to use view templates to keep things consistent.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction  
<ul>
<li>- Introduction to Object Styles</li>
<li>- Introduction to Visibility/Graphic Overrides</li>
<li>- Introduction to Filters</li>
<li>- Introduction to Color Schemes</li>
<li>- Filter Coloring will Override Color Scheme</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Styles  
<ul>
<li>- Turn Off all Filters and Color Schemes</li>
<li>- Check the Category of an Object</li>
<li>- Open the Object Styles Dialog Box</li>
<li>- Update Object Styles</li>
<li>- Override, Filters, and Color Schemes Take Precedence Over Object Style Settings</li>
<li>- Update Object Styles of Linked Architectural Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Visibility Graphic Overrides  
<ul>
<li>- Set Visibility/Graphic Overrides</li>
<li>- Turn Off Architectural Objects</li>
<li>- Visibility/Graphic Overrides are View Based</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Templates  
<ul>
<li>- Create a View Template from the Current View</li>
<li>- Search for Existing View Templates</li>
<li>- View Template Properties</li>
<li>- Apply View Template to Multiple Views</li>
<li>- Set Default View Template for a View</li>
<li>- View Templates Do Not Remove or Set Color Schemes</li>
<li>- Re-Apply a View Template to Propagate View Template Changes</li>
<li>- Show List of Views in View Template Dialog Window</li>
<li>- Duplicate a View Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Filters  
<ul>
<li>- Take a Look at Default Filters</li>
<li>- Filter by System Type or System Name</li>
<li>- Removing Filters from a View</li>
<li>- Add Filters to a View</li>
<li>- Apply Filter Settings to Other Views Using View Templates</li>
<li>- Filter Updates are Automatically Applied to a View</li>
<li>- 'Filter By List' is Dependent on Selected Categories</li>
<li>- Create a Filter to Turn Off Everything but Duct Objects</li>
<li>- Edit Display Settings within the Linked Architectural File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Filters in 3D Views  
<ul>
<li>- What are All My System Types?</li>
<li>- Create New Filters that will Distinguish Between Systems</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Filter for Duct Velocity Range  
<ul>
<li>- Create New Duct Velocity Filter</li>
<li>- Apply New Duct Velocity Filter to a 2D View</li>
<li>- Apply New Duct Velocity Filter to a 3D View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Color Scheme Theory  
<ul>
<li>- Color Schemes Can Only Be Applied to Seven Specific Categories</li>
<li>- Apply Existing Color Scheme to a View</li>
<li>- Color Scheme only Effects Fill Color</li>
<li>- Open your Color Scheme Dialog Box</li>
<li>- Edit your Color Scheme Legend Title</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Color Scheme by Duct Flow Range</li>
<li>Create a New Color Scheme  
<ul>
<li>- Add New Ranged Values</li>
<li>- Check Units of Measure</li>
<li>- Apply New Color Scheme to View</li>
<li>- Add Color Scheme Legend to the View</li>
<li>- Apply Color Scheme by Adding a New Legend</li>
<li>- Line Weights May Cover-Up Color Scheme Fill Color</li>
<li>- Color Scheme by Duct Size</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Color Scheme by Calculated Heat Loads  
<ul>
<li>- Add a 'Spacing' Color Scheme Legend</li>
<li>- Size of Legend is Dependant on View Scale</li>
<li>- Switch Color Scheme between Background and Foreground</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Combining Color Schemes and Filters  
<ul>
<li>- Apply a Filter Over a Color Scheme Open and show note&nbsp;&nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:40:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Parametric Garage Magic in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parametric-garage-magic-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parametric-garage-magic-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_gargmajc_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Well, it's time to learn 'Parametric Conceptual Massing'. BUT we take it two BIG steps further and incorporate the Building Maker Tools and Material Takeoffs.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This series will open your eyes to the potential of the latest in Building Information Modeling (BIM). First we teach you undocumented tips on creating a parametrically controlled conceptual mass using the CADclips '4b' approach.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Demonstration of the Series End Product</li>
<li>Brains and Bones for Garage Width and Depth</li>
<li>Create Form by Using Lines</li>
<li>Create Form by Using Reference Lines</li>
<li>Building Height Control Options</li>
<li>Load to Project and Balance with Mass Materials</li>
<li>Brains and Bones for Sloped Roof</li>
<li>Roof Body by Two Parameters</li>
<li>Roof Body by One Parameter</li>
<li>Roof Slope by Trigonometry Formula</li>
<li>Balance the Mass in the Project</li>
<li>Foundation Massing</li>
<li>Prepare the Project Content</li>
<li>Building Maker Walls</li>
<li>Building Maker Roof</li>
<li>Roof Overhangs</li>
<li>Roof Overhangs by Nested Parametric Reference Planes</li>
<li>Overhead Door and Constrain</li>
<li>Windows, Man Door and Constrain</li>
<li>Roof Level Fix</li>
<li>View and Sheet Preparation Part 1</li>
<li>View and Sheet Preparation Part 2</li>
<li>Schedule Material Takeoffs</li>
<li>Mass Floor and Takeoff</li>
<li>Siding, Roofing Takeoff and Final Balance</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:29:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Custom Family - Eyebrow Dormer in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-eyebrow-dormer-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-eyebrow-dormer-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_eyebrow_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Custom Family - Eyebrow Dormer in Revit Architecture 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This two part series explains how to use and in-place family with a solid blend and a vertical opening to create a sloping eyebrow roof dormer.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Part 1 - Sloping Eyebrow Roof Dormer Modeling 
<ul>
<li>- Create In Place Family with a Blend</li>
<li>- Model Front Profile</li>
<li>- Model Top Profile</li>
<li>- Finish Blend and Finish Model</li>
<li>- Manually Adjust Geometry</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Part 2 - Sloping Eyebrow Roof Dormer Cleanup 
<ul>
<li>- Join Geometry of Dormer Roof and Main Roof</li>
<li>- Remove Opening</li>
<li>- Attach Wall to New Roof</li>
<li>- Add a Window and Center Using Align Tool</li>
<li>- Remove Seam Lines Using Linework Tool</li>
<li>- Edit In Place Family</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:52:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Roof Basics in Revit Architecture 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/roof-basics-in-revit-architecture-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/roof-basics-in-revit-architecture-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch11_roofbsic_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This series covers the basics of creating roofs for Gable, Hip, Gambrel, Mansard, Butterfly and Shed conditions.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This series covers the basics of creating roofs for Gable, Hip, Gambrel, Mansard, Butterfly and Shed conditions.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Gable Roof</li>
<li>Hip / Cottage Roof</li>
<li>Intersecting Roof by Footprint</li>
<li>Intersecting Roof by Join Roof</li>
<li>Gambrel</li>
<li>Mansard</li>
<li>Butterfly / Folded Plate</li>
<li>Shed by Footprint</li>
<li>Shed by Extrusion</li>
<li>Shed By Slope Arrow</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:17:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Crystal Reports 2008 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/crystal-reports-2008.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/crystal-reports-2008.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introcrystalrpt_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course teaches the beginning user how to create useful reports using Crystal Reports 2008. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course teaches the beginning user how to create useful reports using Crystal Reports 2008. The primary focus is to give each student a solid foundation on effectively using the Crystal Reports interface and its many features.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Exploring the Crystal Reports 2008 Interface 
<ul>
<li>- Viewing the Start Page</li>
<li>- Viewing the Field Explorer</li>
<li>- Viewing the Report Explorer</li>
<li>- Viewing the Workbench</li>
<li>- Understanding the Design Mode</li>
<li>- Understanding the Preview Mode</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Simple Report 
<ul>
<li>- Using the Report Creation Wizard</li>
<li>- Designing a Report from Scratch</li>
<li>- Inserting Fields</li>
<li>- Formatting a Field</li>
<li>- Placing Text Objects on the Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Formulas within a Report 
<ul>
<li>- Using the Formula Editor</li>
<li>- Concatenating a String Fields</li>
<li>- Changing Numbers to Words</li>
<li>- Using Date Functions</li>
<li>- Creating Summary Calculations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Parameters to a Report 
<ul>
<li>- Adding Special Fields</li>
<li>- Populating Special Fields</li>
<li>- Creating Parameter Fields</li>
<li>- Working with Multiple Parameter Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sorting, Grouping and Summarizing 
<ul>
<li>- Sorting Records</li>
<li>- Working with Group Trees</li>
<li>- Deleting and Changing Groups</li>
<li>- Inserting a Summary Calculation</li>
<li>- Defining Other Summary Calculations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enhancing a Report 
<ul>
<li>- Adding a Picture to a Report</li>
<li>- Changing the Font of a Text Object</li>
<li>- Aligning Objects</li>
<li>- Using Templates</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Utilizing Conditional Formatting 
<ul>
<li>- Using the Highlight Expert</li>
<li>- Modifying and Deleting a Conditional Format</li>
<li>- Filtering Data</li>
<li>- Filtering Data Using a Dynamic Parameter</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Distributing Data 
<ul>
<li>- Creating Mailing Labels</li>
<li>- Exporting Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">75.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:08:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS4 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs4-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_intrphtoshpcs4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to identify the components of the Photoshop environment. It will also discuss the differences between raster and vector graphics, and teach you how to use Adobe Bridge.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to identify the components of the Photoshop environment. It will also discuss the differences between raster and vector graphics, and teach you how to use Adobe Bridge. It will also explore various methods of adjusting image areas and will teach you how to modify and manipulate ions, how to work with text, layers, and layer effects, and how to prepare images for printing and the Web.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Workspaces  
<ul>
<li>Using a default workspace</li>
<li>Modify the workspace panels</li>
<li>Modify the Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preferences</li>
<li>Using Adobe Bridge  
<ul>
<li>Opening a File</li>
<li>Browse in Bridge</li>
<li>Navigate in Bridge</li>
<li>The Metadata Panel</li>
<li>Marking graphics in Bridge</li>
<li>Open Photo from Bridge</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Navigation  
<ul>
<li>Using the Zoom Feature</li>
<li>The Navigator Palette</li>
<li>Panning Through a Picture</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Selections  
<ul>
<li>Marquee Tools</li>
<li>Add and Remove from a Selection</li>
<li>The Magic Wand</li>
<li>Quick Selector Tool</li>
<li>Tool Size and Shape</li>
<li>Save a Selection</li>
<li>Polygon Lasso Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layers  
<ul>
<li>Combining Pictures</li>
<li>Selecting the Working Layer</li>
<li>The Eraser Tool</li>
<li>Selective Editing</li>
<li>Using a Render Filter on a New Layer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Color Palette  
<ul>
<li>Using the Eye-Dropper</li>
<li>Setting the Foreground Color</li>
<li>Color Libraries</li>
<li>Saving a Custom Swatch</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Gradients  
<ul>
<li>Gradient Tool</li>
<li>Creating a Custom Gradient</li>
<li>Saving a Custom Gradient</li>
<li>Placing a Gradient</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Image History  
<ul>
<li>Create a New Document from the History State</li>
<li>History States</li>
<li>History Brush</li>
<li>History Brush Source</li>
<li>Using the Patch Tool</li>
<li>Using the Clone Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Text  
<ul>
<li>Type Tool</li>
<li>Change the Font, Size and Color</li>
<li>Layer Style</li>
<li>Text Transform Tools</li>
<li>Type Mask Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Image Sizing  
<ul>
<li>Resizing Versus Re-sampling</li>
<li>Progressive Resizing</li>
<li>Saving a Picture for the Web and Devices</li>
<li>Image Optimization</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">40.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:40:31 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Captivate 4 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/captivate-4-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_captivate4_intr_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course provides a foundation for using Adobe Captivate to create interactive elea ing courses product demos or presentations. #Lea  how to record software simulations add click boxes highlights boxes and images as well as audio.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course provides a foundation for using Adobe Captivate to create interactive elearning courses product demos or presentations. Learn how to record software simulations add click boxes highlights boxes and images as well as audio. Understand the workflow from project conception to a completed Flash movie.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction </li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Storyboard View</li>
<li>The Edit View</li>
<li>Branching View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Project&nbsp;  
<ul>
<li>New Project Options&nbsp; </li>
<li>Importing a Powerpoint Presentation&nbsp; </li>
<li>Previewing the Project</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Software Simulations 
<ul>
<li>Chosing the Screen Resolution</li>
<li>Understanding Recording Modes</li>
<li>Using the Timeline</li>
<li>Modifying Mouse Properties </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating an Interactive Software Simulation 
<ul>
<li>Modifying Training Simulation Options</li>
<li>Recording a Training Simulation</li>
<li>Understanding Click Boxes and Text Captions</li>
<li>Editing Success and Failure Captions</li>
<li>Recording Additional Slides </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Enhancing a Project 
<ul>
<li>Adding New Slides</li>
<li>Inserting Text Captions</li>
<li>Inserting Animated Text</li>
<li>Adjusting Object Timing</li>
<li>Using Highlight Boxes</li>
<li>Adding Zoom Boxes</li>
<li>Inserting Images </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Audio 
<ul>
<li>Finding Audio Options</li>
<li>Using Slide Notes as a Script</li>
<li>Recording and Modifying Audio</li>
<li>Creating Closed Captioning </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Course Navigation 
<ul>
<li>Navigating with Click Boxes</li>
<li>Creating Buttons</li>
<li>Understanding the Branching View </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Quizzes 
<ul>
<li>Inserting Question Slides</li>
<li>Editing Question Properties</li>
<li>Modifying Quiz Preferences</li>
<li>Creating a Question Pool </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Publishing a Project 
<ul>
<li>Resizing the Project</li>
<li>Using the Skin Editor</li>
<li>Publishing Options</li>
<li>Exporting to Word</li>
<li>Publishing to Flash</li>
<li>Viewing Published File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">52.5000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:54:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Project 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/project-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/project-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introproj2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course gives the user a beginning orientation to Microsoft Project 2007.  The primary focus of this course is to teach the user how to properly use Project 2007 by leveraging the different tools within the application.  This includes creating new projects and calendars entering tasks and relationships managing resources and lea ing how to use the different tools to effectively implement a project plan.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course gives the user a beginning orientation to Microsoft Project 2007.  The primary focus of this course is to teach the user how to properly use Project 2007 by leveraging the different tools within the application.  This includes creating new projects and calendars entering tasks and relationships managing resources and learning how to use the different tools to effectively implement a project plan.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Introducing the User Interface</li>
<li>Opening an Existing Project</li>
<li>Changing the Project Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a New Project Plan 
<ul>
<li>Adding Tasks</li>
<li>Adding a Note</li>
<li>Creating a Recurring Task</li>
<li>Setting the Task Duration</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Outlining Tasks 
<ul>
<li>Indenting Tasks</li>
<li>Understanding Summary Tasks</li>
<li>Editing Durations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Linking Tasks 
<ul>
<li>Working with Finish-to-Start Links</li>
<li>Linking Multiple Tasks</li>
<li>Linking Summary Tasks</li>
<li>Working with Start-to-Start Links</li>
<li>Setting up a Task for a Non-Working Day</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Resources 
<ul>
<li>Assigning Resources to a Task</li>
<li>Viewing the Resource Sheet</li>
<li>Viewing Resource Usage</li>
<li>Changing Working Time</li>
<li>Leveling Resources</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finalizing the Project 
<ul>
<li>Viewing the Tracking Gantt</li>
<li>Setting the Baseline</li>
<li>Completing Tasks</li>
<li>Printing and Exporting Reports</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">45.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:53:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Superelevation in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/superelevation-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/superelevation-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_superelev_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 Superelevation vBook offers 2 full hours of instructor led teaching on superelevation concepts and how to apply superelevation to alignments in Civil 3D.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2011 Superelevation vBook offers 2 full hours of instructor led teaching on superelevation concepts and how to apply superelevation to alignments in Civil 3D. The first lesson discusses the superelevation concepts for crowned planar divided and undivided roads.  Superelevation parameters such as runout length runoff length transition length and superelevation attainment are also discussed. The other lessons in this vBook address single curve superelevation (with and without spirals) overlap resolution for reverse curves and curves in the same direction superelevation and the design criteria files and shoulder superelevation.  Each lesson has datasets you can download so you can practice on your own.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Superelevation Concepts 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Undivided Crowned Roadway</li>
<li>Undivided Planar Roadway</li>
<li>Divided Planar Roadway</li>
<li>Divided Crowned Roadway</li>
<li>Runout Length</li>
<li>Runoff Length</li>
<li>Transition Length</li>
<li>Civil 3D Superelevation Variables</li>
<li>Calculated Superelevation Parameters</li>
<li>Attainment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Superelevation in Civil 3D 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Alignments</li>
<li>Subassemblies</li>
<li>Corridors and Corridor Sections</li>
<li>Alignment Superelevation Settings</li>
<li>Superelevation Tabular Editor</li>
<li>Superelevation View Object</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Single Curve Superelevation 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Alignment</li>
<li>Calculate Superelevation</li>
<li>Superelevation Tabular Editor</li>
<li>Superelevation View With Curve</li>
<li>Runoff % Before BC</li>
<li>Add Spirals Calculate Super</li>
<li>Superelevation View With Spirals</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Overlap Resolution 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Same Direction Curves</li>
<li>Resolve Overlap Automatically</li>
<li>Resolve Overlap Manually</li>
<li>Create Alignment Reverse Curve</li>
<li>Calculate Superelevation</li>
<li>Resolve Overlap Automatically</li>
<li>Superelevation Labels</li>
<li>Edit Superelevation Graphically</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Design Criteria 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Access Design Criteria Editor</li>
<li>Review Design Criteria Files</li>
<li>Create Design Criteria File</li>
<li>Assign Design Criteria File</li>
<li>Minimum Radius Tables</li>
<li>Superelevation Tables</li>
<li>Attainment Methods</li>
<li>Superelevation by Formula</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Shoulder Superelevation 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Default Slopes</li>
<li>Breakover Removal</li>
<li>Match Lane Slopes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:33:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[New Features in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-features-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-features-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_newfeat_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBook you will find over 2 hours of instructional video that highlights the new features in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. The vBook opens with a high level introduction to the new release and discusses how you can best leverage the new 64 bit software application.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook you will find over 2 hours of instructional video that highlights the new features in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011. The vBook opens with a high level introduction to the new release and discusses how you can best leverage the new 64 bit software application. Many of the new features in AutoCAD Civil 3D are transportation engineering focused.  In this vBook watch instructor led video lessons and download the accompanying datasets for practice on your own.  Topics of discussion include new features relating to corridors point clouds superelevation data shortcuts alignments roundabout section view and other new features in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Corridors 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Rebuild All Corridors</li>
<li>Corridor Elements</li>
<li>Region Editing</li>
<li>Baselines and Regions in Prospector</li>
<li>Assembly Insertion Graphical</li>
<li>Assembly Insertion</li>
<li>Target Geometry</li>
<li>Region</li>
<li>Edit Targets</li>
<li>Region</li>
<li>Edit Frequency</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Clouds 
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Summary</li>
<li>Create Point Cloud</li>
<li>Display Point Cloud</li>
<li>Point Cloud Database</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Superelevation 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Assign Superelevation Parameters</li>
<li>Calculate Superelevation</li>
<li>Overlap Detection</li>
<li>Superelevation View Object</li>
<li>Resolve Superelevation Overlaps</li>
<li>Reverse Curve</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Shortcuts 
<ul>
<li>Data Shortcut Project</li>
<li>Assign Project Current Drawing</li>
<li>Assign Project Multiple Drawings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Summary</li>
<li>Alignment Widenings</li>
<li>Widening Segmental Transitions</li>
<li>Improved Station Locking</li>
<li>Create Alignment From Alignment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Section Views 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Multiple Section Views</li>
<li>Create Section Sheets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roundabouts 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Create Roundabout</li>
<li>Add Approach Road</li>
<li>Add Slip Lane</li>
<li>Edit Roundabout Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Other New Features 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Label Features</li>
<li>Station Equation ID</li>
<li>Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Point Features</li>
<li>QTO Feature</li>
<li>Reporting</li>
<li>Line of Sight Analysis</li>
<li>Surfaces</li>
<li>Create Best Fit Profile</li>
<li>Ribbon Changes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:21:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Points in Civil 3D 2011]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2011.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2011.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d11_points_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In the AutoCAD Civil 3D 2011 vBook you learn how to create edit display and manage point objects.  </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In the Points in Civil 3D 2011 vBook you learn how to create edit display and manage point objects.  Learn about the different components of the user interface that can be used to work with points.  In the Create Points chapter you create points by importing points from an external text file and use manual methods to create points.  You also learn how to adjust the settings to facilitate point creation.  In the Point Styles and Point Label Styles chapters you learn how to create and apply styles which are used to control the display of points.  The Point Groups chapter addresses the organization of commonly related points and how to control the display of points using point group sort order.  You also learn how to create point clouds to work with large LiDAR data sets.  Other topics of discussion in this vBook include point grips point tables transparent commands and command settings.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface  
<ul>
<li>Points Menu</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
<li>Create Ground Data Panel</li>
<li>Points Contextual Menu</li>
<li>Points in Prospector</li>
<li>Column Management</li>
<li>Right Click Menu</li>
<li>Points in Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Points  
<ul>
<li>Interface Review</li>
<li>Import Points From File</li>
<li>Points in Prospector</li>
<li>Point File Formats</li>
<li>Point Creation Settings</li>
<li>Convert Land Desktop Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Styles  
<ul>
<li>Review Point Styles</li>
<li>Apply Point Styles</li>
<li>Default Point Style</li>
<li>Cross "X" Point Style</li>
<li>Water Valve Point Style</li>
<li>Symbol Scaling and Orientation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Label Styles  
<ul>
<li>Apply Point Label Styles</li>
<li>Create Elevation Only</li>
<li>Create Num Elev Desc</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Description Keys  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Enable Description Keys</li>
<li>Create a description key</li>
<li>Apply Description Keys</li>
<li>Description Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Groups  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Update Point Group Definitions</li>
<li>Point Group by Description</li>
<li>Point Group by Other Point Groups</li>
<li>Point Group by Exclusion Criteria</li>
<li>Case Sensitivity Matching</li>
<li>Style Priority</li>
<li>Point Group Sort Order</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Grips  
<ul>
<li>Drag Point</li>
<li>Drag Label</li>
<li>Reset Point Label</li>
<li>Toggle Sub-ItemGrips</li>
<li>Rotate Point Grip</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Cloud  
<ul>
<li>Create a Point Cloud</li>
<li>Review Point Cloud</li>
<li>Point Cloud Styles</li>
<li>Point Cloud Visualization</li>
<li>Create a Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transparent Commands  
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Point Number</li>
<li>Point Object</li>
<li>Northing and Easting</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Tables  
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Create Point Table</li>
<li>Point Table Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Command Settings  
<ul>
<li>Default Point Layer</li>
<li>Default Point Style</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp:</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:58:30 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_intraccess2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you the basics of Microsoft Access 2007. The primary focus it getting acquainted in how to create the basic database objects within the interface and how to use these objects effectively.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you the basics of Microsoft Access 2007. The primary focus it getting acquainted in how to create the basic database objects within the interface and how to use these objects effectively.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Access Overview 
<ul>
<li>Opening Access</li>
<li>Using a Template</li>
<li>Viewing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Working with the Navigation Pane</li>
<li>Viewing the Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Opening an Existing Database 
<ul>
<li>Viewing the Start-Up Form</li>
<li>Understanding Tables</li>
<li>Explaining the ID Field</li>
<li>Using the Quick-Search</li>
<li>Using the Field AutoFilter</li>
<li>Changing the Table Layout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Table in Datasheet View 
<ul>
<li>Using the 'Add New Field' feature</li>
<li>Reviewing the Data Types</li>
<li>Using a Lookup Column</li>
<li>Saving your Table</li>
<li>Deleting a Field</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating a Table in Design View 
<ul>
<li>Using the Design View</li>
<li>Viewing all Data Types</li>
<li>Understanding the Field Properties</li>
<li>Using an Input Mask</li>
<li>Understanding Indexes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Find and Replace 
<ul>
<li>Using Access Wildcards</li>
<li>Replacing Data</li>
<li>Deleting a Record</li>
<li>Hiding and Showing Fields</li>
<li>Freezing and Unfreezing Columns</li>
<li>Setting the Row Height</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Queries 
<ul>
<li>Introducing the Select Query</li>
<li>Using the Query Wizard to Create a New Query</li>
<li>Understanding the Resulting Dataset</li>
<li>Working with the Query Tools, Design Ribbon for Query</li>
<li>Working in the Query Table View and QBE Grid</li>
<li>Adding Criteria</li>
<li>Creating a Query from Scratch</li>
<li>Using Criteria for your Queries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Forms 
<ul>
<li>Introducing the Form</li>
<li>Understand the different types of Forms</li>
<li>Using the Form Wizard</li>
<li>Working in the Form Design View</li>
<li>Understanding Form Controls</li>
<li>Understanding Properties</li>
<li>Understanding the Dialog Box and the Pop-up Form</li>
<li>Changing Properties for a Text Box</li>
<li>Modifying the Order of Controls</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Simple Reports 
<ul>
<li>Creating Labels</li>
<li>Using the Report Wizard</li>
<li>Using Layout View</li>
<li>Using Design View</li>
<li>Understanding the Report Header and Footer</li>
<li>Grouping and Sorting your Reports</li>
<li>Creating a Report From a Query</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:49:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2007 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interaccess2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to make the database objects more interactive within Microsoft Access.  It does this by showing the viewer how to leverage table design to filter data as it gets entered into the database.  In addition it shows users how to manipulate action queries to make data management easier thus reducing workloads.  Finally the course shows viewers how to create interactive forms by adding calculated controls on forms and reports.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to make the database objects more interactive within Microsoft Access.  It does this by showing the viewer how to leverage table design to filter data as it gets entered into the database.  In addition it shows users how to manipulate action queries to make data management easier thus reducing workloads.  Finally the course shows viewers how to create interactive forms by adding calculated controls on forms and reports.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Understanding Table Relationships 
<ul>
<li>-Understanding the Three Types of Table Relationships</li>
<li>-Using the Relationships View</li>
<li>-Understanding the 1 to 1 Relationship</li>
<li>-Understanding the 1 to Many Relationship</li>
<li>-Understanding the Simple Join</li>
<li>-Understanding Referential Integrity</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Table Design 
<ul>
<li>-Working in the Design View</li>
<li>-Reviewing the Data Type</li>
<li>-Setting the Field Size</li>
<li>-Setting the Format Property</li>
<li>-Working with the Input Mask</li>
<li>-Setting Field Captions</li>
<li>-Setting Default Values</li>
<li>-Setting Validation Rules and Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Query Calculations 
<ul>
<li>-Using Concatenation</li>
<li>-Using Expressions</li>
<li>-Using Functions Within a Query Calculation</li>
<li>-Creating Numeric Calculations</li>
<li>-Calculating Totals</li>
<li>-Grouping Totals</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Multi-Table Queries 
<ul>
<li>-Setting up a Multi-Table Query</li>
<li>-Creating Calculated Fields</li>
<li>-Grouping Totals</li>
<li>-Linking Queries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Action Queries 
<ul>
<li>-Reviewing the different Action Queries</li>
<li>-Using the Make Table Query</li>
<li>-Using the Append Query</li>
<li>-Using the Update Query</li>
<li>-Using the Delete Query</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Parameter Queries 
<ul>
<li>-Hiding a Field</li>
<li>-Adding Parameter Query Criteria</li>
<li>-Using the Like Statement</li>
<li>-Using Date Ranges in a Parameter Query</li>
<li>-Missing Data Validation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calculating Dates on Forms 
<ul>
<li>-Creating a Simple Form</li>
<li>-Working in the Form Design View</li>
<li>-Setting Forms for Printing</li>
<li>-Creating a Calculated Control</li>
<li>-Working with the Control Source Property</li>
<li>-Locking a Text Box</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manipulate Controls on a Form 
<ul>
<li>-Changing Control Properties</li>
<li>-Changing the Control Type</li>
<li>-Using the Combo Box Wizard</li>
<li>-Calculate a Date Difference</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Advanced Report Functions 
<ul>
<li>-Using the Report Wizard</li>
<li>-Creating a Calculated Field</li>
<li>-Adding Page Numbers</li>
<li>-Using a Query as a Source for a Report</li>
<li>-Understanding Report Bands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:47:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Access 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/access-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advaccess2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This course builds on the Introduction and Intermediate courses to show how to bring all of the different Access objects together to make a cohesive application. It also shows the viewer many different  techniques to make Access even more interactive. Finally the course shows the viewer how to create different macros and how to select the proper Control and Event for the best possible outcome.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This course builds on the Introduction and Intermediate courses to show how to bring all of the different Access objects together to make a cohesive application. It also shows the viewer many different  techniques to make Access even more interactive. Finally the course shows the viewer how to create different macros and how to select the proper Control and Event for the best possible outcome.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Designing and Deploy a Database Solution  
<ul>
<li>Designing the Application</li>
<li>Configuring your Database Deployment Structure</li>
<li>Deploy the Entire Database on a Server</li>
<li>Splitting a Database</li>
<li>Creating a Database Project (SQL Server)</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Subforms  
<ul>
<li>Working with the Master/Subform Form</li>
<li>Designing a Subform</li>
<li>Placing a Subform on a Form</li>
<li>Creating Advanced Calculated Controls</li>
<li>Using the Expression Builder</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Dialog Boxes<br /> 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Dialog Box</li>
<li>Understanding the Dialog Box Properties</li>
<li>Using Events</li>
<li>Using the Macro Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Advanced Form Controls  
<ul>
<li>Creating an Option Group Control</li>
<li>Creating a Command Button</li>
<li>Creating a Combo Box</li>
<li>Customizing a Combo Box</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Passing Data from Forms to Queries  
<ul>
<li>Checking the Query for Integrity</li>
<li>Preparing the Combo Box</li>
<li>Running the Report</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Simple Macros  
<ul>
<li>Creating an Embedded Macros</li>
<li>Using the Macro Builder</li>
<li>Understanding Macro Arguments</li>
<li>Running a Report with a Macro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Macro Groups  
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Macro File</li>
<li>Understanding Multiple Macro Sequences</li>
<li>Assigning a Macro to a Control</li>
<li>Using the Report 'No Data' Event</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Conditional Macros  
<ul>
<li>Viewing the Condition Column</li>
<li>Setting the Else Conditio</li>
<li>Assigning Conditional Macros and EventsWrapping up the System</li>
<li>Using the Database Documenter</li>
<li>Setting the Database Autostart Options</li>
<li>Setting a Database Password</li>
<li>Reviewing Programming Tips</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 16:46:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2007 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interexcel2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to use multiple worksheets and workbooks efficiently how to use more advanced formatting options including styles themes backgrounds and watermarks. It also covers how to create outlines and subtotals how to create and apply cell names and how to work with lists and tables. Also it covers advanced charting techniques worksheet auditing and protection file sharing and merging workbook templates how to save workbooks as Web pages how to insert and edit hyperlinks and how to save a workbook as a PDF file.  </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to use multiple worksheets and workbooks efficiently how to use more advanced formatting options including styles themes backgrounds and watermarks. It also covers how to create outlines and subtotals how to create and apply cell names and how to work with lists and tables. Also it covers advanced charting techniques worksheet auditing and protection file sharing and merging workbook templates how to save workbooks as Web pages how to insert and edit hyperlinks and how to save a workbook as a PDF file.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Workbooks 
<ul>
<li>Adding and Naming Worksheets</li>
<li>Inserting and Deleting Worksheets</li>
<li>Moving and Copying a Worksheet</li>
<li>Setting the Tab Color</li>
<li>Grouping Worksheets</li>
<li>Entering 3D Formulas</li>
<li>Using the Watch Window</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Outlines 
<ul>
<li>Grouping Rows</li>
<li>Ungrouping Rows</li>
<li>Using the Automatic Outline Feature</li>
<li>Grouping Columns</li>
<li>Saving to the Web and Hyperlinks</li>
<li>Saving a Workbook to HTML</li>
<li>Using Hyperlinks</li>
<li>Linking to a Specific Cell</li>
<li>Linking to an External File</li>
<li>Linking to a URL</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Paste Special 
<ul>
<li>Pasting a Value</li>
<li>Pasting a Formula</li>
<li>Combining Worksheets</li>
<li>Using the Paste Special Dialog Box</li>
<li>Pasting a Link</li>
<li>Using the Arrange Windows Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Range Names 
<ul>
<li>Naming a Range of Cells</li>
<li>Using the Define Name Tool</li>
<li>Viewing Rules for Range Names</li>
<li>Performing Calculations with Range Names</li>
<li>Using Range Names Across Worksheets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Charts 
<ul>
<li>Inserting a Basic Chart</li>
<li>Selecting Chart Designs and Styles</li>
<li>Moving a Chart</li>
<li>Selecting a Chart Layout</li>
<li>Adding Axis Labels</li>
<li>Creating a Chart Legend</li>
<li>Adding Data Labels</li>
<li>Adding a Data Table</li>
<li>Formatting the Chart Axis</li>
<li>Changing the Chart Type</li>
<li>Adding Chart Effects and Formatting Text</li>
<li>Working With Arrows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Objects 
<ul>
<li>Inserting a Text Box</li>
<li>Adding and Formatting Shapes</li>
<li>Adding Shape Effects and Styles</li>
<li>Using Connector Lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:22:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advexcel2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you about advanced formulas as well as lookup functions such as VLOOKUP MATCH and INDEX. In addition it covers data validation and database functions such as DSUM. It also covers PivotTables and PivotCharts how to import and export data and how to query external databases. Finally it teaches you about the analytical features of Excel (such as Goal Seek and Solver) running and recording macros and sharing Excel data via the Web.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you about advanced formulas as well as lookup functions such as VLOOKUP MATCH and INDEX. In addition it covers data validation and database functions such as DSUM. It also covers PivotTables and PivotCharts how to import and export data and how to query external databases. Finally it teaches you about the analytical features of Excel (such as Goal Seek and Solver) running and recording macros and sharing Excel data via the Web.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp; &nbsp;</li>
<li>Using Advanced Functions 
<ul>
<li>Financial Functions</li>
<li>Logical Functions</li>
<li>Text Functions</li>
<li>Statistical and Math Functions</li>
<li>Lookup Functions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formula Auditing 
<ul>
<li>Displaying Formulas</li>
<li>Tracing Cell Precedents and Dependents</li>
<li>Using the Formula Evaluator</li>
<li>Error Checking</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Analyzing Data 
<ul>
<li>Using Subtotals</li>
<li>Using Goal Seek</li>
<li>Using the Scenario Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Understanding and Creating a Custom Format</li>
<li>Applying a Custom Format</li>
<li>Using Conditional Formatting</li>
<li>Adding Data Bars, Color Scales, and Icon Sets</li>
<li>Managing Formatting Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Data 
<ul>
<li>Planning a Database and Understanding Database Terms</li>
<li>Formatting and Sorting Tables</li>
<li>Filtering a Table</li>
<li>Using the Advanced Filter</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with PivotTables 
<ul>
<li>Creating a Simple PivotTable</li>
<li>Using the PivotTable Field List Pane</li>
<li>Working with PivotTable Options</li>
<li>Sorting in a PivotTable</li>
<li>Formatting a PivotTable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PivotCharts 
<ul>
<li>Creating a PivotChart</li>
<li>Working with PivotCharts</li>
<li>Formatting a PivotChart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing and Exporting Data 
<ul>
<li>Importing from Access</li>
<li>Importing a Text File</li>
<li>Managing Updates</li>
<li>Exporting Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Macros 
<ul>
<li>Recording a Macro</li>
<li>Running a Macro</li>
<li>Running a Macro from a Custom Button</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:20:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advoutlk2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you advanced techniques for managing stored e-mail messages. It also shows you how to work with notes and Jou al entries schedule and manage meetings share Outlook content and customize templates and forms.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you advanced techniques for managing stored e-mail messages. It also shows you how to work with notes and Journal entries schedule and manage meetings share Outlook content and customize templates and forms.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Using Find 
<ul>
<li>Running a Search</li>
<li>Using the Query Builder</li>
<li>Creating Search Folders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Changing the View 
<ul>
<li>Sorting</li>
<li>Using Pre-Defined Views</li>
<li>Customizing the Current View</li>
<li>Creating a New View</li>
<li>Using the Field Chooser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Organizing Outlook 
<ul>
<li>Organizing with Folders</li>
<li>Organizing with Color</li>
<li>Creating Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Archiving Mail 
<ul>
<li>Using Mailbox Cleanup</li>
<li>Creating a Personal Folder</li>
<li>Working with AutoArchive</li>
<li>Running the Archive Manually</li>
<li>Managing Datafiles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Permissions 
<ul>
<li>Creating Delegates</li>
<li>Viewing a Shared Folder</li>
<li>Setting Permissions on a Folder Manually</li>
<li>Opening Shared Folders</li>
<li>Creating Group Schedules</li>
<li>Sending a Message on Behalf of Someone</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Outlook and the Web 
<ul>
<li>Saving Calendars as Web Pages</li>
<li>Emailing Calendars</li>
<li>Publishing an Internet Calendar</li>
<li>Using RSS Feed</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Stationery and Templates 
<ul>
<li>Applying Stationery</li>
<li>Creating a Template</li>
<li>Using a Template</li>
<li>Modifying a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing Outlook 
<ul>
<li>Using Outlook Today</li>
<li>Creating Favorite Folders</li>
<li>Creating a Custom Toolbar</li>
<li>Customizing E-mail</li>
<li>Customizing the Calendar</li>
<li>Customizing Tasks, Notes, Contacts and the Journal</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating and Using the Journal 
<ul>
<li>What is the Journal?</li>
<li>Recording Journal Entries Automatically</li>
<li>Recording Journal Entries Manually-Changing the View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:27:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advppt2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to customize PowerPoint by modifying the Quick Access Toolbar and creating macros. It also shows you how to apply themes and templates and work with SmartArt graphics and tables. It will teach you how to add multimedia content and interactive elements to slides and it will discuss presentation distribution options including PDF and HTML. Finally it teaches you how to integrate PowerPoint with Word and Excel.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to customize PowerPoint by modifying the Quick Access Toolbar and creating macros. It also shows you how to apply themes and templates and work with SmartArt graphics and tables. It will teach you how to add multimedia content and interactive elements to slides and it will discuss presentation distribution options including PDF and HTML. Finally it teaches you how to integrate PowerPoint with Word and Excel.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Adding a Table 
<ul>
<li>Resizing and Moving a Table</li>
<li>Using Table Styles</li>
<li>Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns</li>
<li>Work with Table Borders and Formatting Options</li>
<li>Splitting Cells</li>
<li>Using Text Alignment and Direction</li>
<li>Importing a Table from Microsoft Word</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Charts in a Presentation 
<ul>
<li>Inserting a Chart</li>
<li>Editing Chart Data</li>
<li>Customizing a Chart</li>
<li>Adding Data Labels and Titles</li>
<li>Data Table</li>
<li>Chart Formatting and Styles</li>
<li>Inserting an Excel Chart</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Customizing a Design Template 
<ul>
<li>Adding Headers and Footers</li>
<li>Editing Headers and Footers Globally in the Slide Master</li>
<li>Customizing Bullets in the Slide Master</li>
<li>Inserting a Second Slide Master</li>
<li>Inserting a New Layout to Customize</li>
<li>Saving the Design Theme</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Special Effects 
<ul>
<li>Inserting a Movie Clip from the Clip Organizer</li>
<li>Inserting a Movie Clip from a File</li>
<li>Adding Movie Object Options</li>
<li>Inserting a Sound Clip</li>
<li>Utilizing Sound Object Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Motion Effects 
<ul>
<li>Incorporating Slide Transition Effects</li>
<li>Animating a Slide</li>
<li>Organizing and Ordering Effects</li>
<li>Using Advanced Animations with Text</li>
<li>Animating SmartAr</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Advanced Presentation Techniques 
<ul>
<li>Defining a Custom Slide Show</li>
<li>Setting Slide Timings</li>
<li>Creating a Presenter Independent Presentation</li>
<li>Creating Action Buttons</li>
<li>Adding an Action to an Object</li>
<li>Hiding Slides</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finalizing the Presentation 
<ul>
<li>Adding a Comment to a Presentation</li>
<li>Marking a Presentation as Final</li>
<li>Saving a Presentation for Viewing on the Web</li>
<li>Creating Handouts in Microsoft Word</li>
<li>Packaging a Presentation for a CD or Flash Drive</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:45:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Google SketchUp Level 2 Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-level-2-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-level-2-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sketchup_lvl2_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to: manage 3D geometry by creating and manipulating groups and components; import information into SketchUp from Google Earth; use Photomatch to add photographs to you model; create edit mix and apply styles; create a basic presentation.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to: manage 3D geometry by creating and manipulating groups and components; import information into SketchUp from Google Earth; use Photomatch to add photographs to you model; create edit mix and apply styles; create a basic presentation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Stickiness</li>
<li>Components 
<ul>
<li>Creating Components</li>
<li>Nested Components</li>
<li>Editing Components</li>
<li>Make a Component Unique</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Gathering Online Content</li>
<li>Using Dynamic Components</li>
<li>Google Earth</li>
<li>Match Photo</li>
<li>Using Scenes</li>
<li>Export Animation</li>
<li>Google Layout</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div>
</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 May 2012 14:11:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Google SketchUp Level 1 Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-level-1-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-sketchup-level-1-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_sketchup_lvl1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to: use the various tools for creating and manipulating 3D forms; create and apply surfaces to a model; import components from Google Warehouse; position and export SketchUp models to Google Earth.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to: use the various tools for creating and manipulating 3D forms; create and apply surfaces to a model; import components from Google Warehouse; position and export SketchUp models to Google Earth.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Basic Line Geometry</li>
<li>Other Basic Geometry</li>
<li>Views</li>
<li>3D Geometry Using a Lin</li>
<li>3D Geometry Using Push/Pull</li>
<li>The Polygon Tool</li>
<li>Auto-Folding</li>
<li>The Offset Tool</li>
<li>Mirroring and Cloning</li>
<li>Applying Materials</li>
<li>Creating Text</li>
<li>Using Components</li>
<li>Display Styles</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:36:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Utility Design with Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/utility-design-with-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/utility-design-with-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_utildesn_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Utility Design Using Civil 3D will provide in depth instruction on using the Pipe Features of Civil 3D to design Sanitary Water Gas and Electric Utilities on a site. Additional instruction is provided on using the AutoCAD Map 3D Features in AutoCAD Civil 3D to generate the base map used to tie in the new utilities.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Utility Design Using Civil 3D will provide in depth instruction on using the Pipe Features of Civil 3D to design Sanitary Water Gas and Electric Utilities on a site. Additional instruction is provided on using the AutoCAD Map 3D Features in AutoCAD Civil 3D to generate the base map used to tie in the new utilities.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Setup Software</li>
<li>Aquire Data</li>
<li>Create Project</li>
<li>Create Basemap</li>
<li>Add Proposed Buildings</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Sanitary Design</li>
<li>Service Utilities Design</li>
<li>Produce Documents</li>
<li>Multiple Sheets</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:04:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Pipes in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pipes-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pipes-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_pipes_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Pipes in Civil 3D 2010 vBook is designed to cover the pipe feature of Civil 3D 2010. This vBook provides video instructions on how to configure and setup the styles and part list along with creating and laying out gravity and pressure pipes networks.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 Pipes vBook is designed to cover the pipe feature of Civil 3D 2010. This vBook provide video instructions on how to configure and setup the styles and part list along with creating and laying out gravity and pressure pipes networks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
<li>Pipe Catalog</li>
<li>Part List</li>
<li>Part Styles</li>
<li>Part Rules</li>
<li>Create Pipe Network From Object</li>
<li>Edit Pipe Network</li>
<li>Create Network By Layout</li>
<li>Create a Pressure Pipe Network</li>
<li>Draw in Profile 
<ul>
<li>Pipe Style Override</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment from Parts</li>
<li>Part Properties</li>
<li>Apply Rules</li>
<li>Utility Trench</li>
<li>Labels 
<ul>
<li>Toggle Leader</li>
<li>Label Profile</li>
<li>Span Lables </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Rename Parts</li>
<li>Quantity Take Off</li>
<li>Interference Check</li>
<li>Tables</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:51:24 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Custom Family - Architectural Column with Sweep and Reveal in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-architectural-column-with-sweep-and-reveal-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-architectural-column-with-sweep-and-reveal-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_colswp_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Custom Family - Architectural Column with Sweep and Reveal in Revit Architecture 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This is a great series with tons of non documented tips on creating a custom architectural column. We cover solids voids sweeps reveals extrusions parameters materials visibility and much more. These tips can be easily utilized in your own custom family challenges. We also instill the CADclips coined approach of Brains Bones Balance and Body when making custom families.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Final Product Demonstration</li>
<li>Start with the Column Family Template File</li>
<li>Model the Base Column Extrusion</li>
<li>Create the Sweep Reference Planes and Parameters</li>
<li>Model the Round Solid Sweep</li>
<li>Create the Void Sweep Reveal Reference Planes and Parameters</li>
<li>Model the Void Sweep Reveal</li>
<li>Make New Family Types</li>
<li>Make Column and Sweep Materials</li>
<li>Add Some Visibility Options to the Sweeps</li>
<li>Demonstrate More Versions of the Same Column Family</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp:</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:49:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[My First Parametric Conceptual Mass in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/my-first-parametric-conceptual-mass-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/my-first-parametric-conceptual-mass-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_my1stpara_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>We are off to the races with Parametric Conceptual Massing and this series will get you on the right track. Within the new conceptual massing environment we create a loadable massing family.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>We are off to the races with Parametric Conceptual Massing and this series will get you on the right track. Within the new conceptual massing environment we create a loadable massing family.   We cover some tips on reference planes reference lines lines parameters mass offset properties materials and the project building maker tools. Of course we instill the CADclips coined 4b Approach to creating families. Brains Bones Balance &amp; Body.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Completed Parametric Conceptual Mass Demo Part 1 
<ul>
<li>Place a Mass on Work Plane</li>
<li>Set Material of Mass</li>
<li>Have a Look at Some Parameters</li>
<li>Create a Curtain System on the Mass</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Completed Parametric Conceptual Mass Demo Part 2 
<ul>
<li>Loadable Mass Versus In-Place Mass</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Box Brains Bones and Balance 
<ul>
<li>Create New Conceptual Mass</li>
<li>Create Reference Planes</li>
<li>Create Parameters</li>
<li>Align Reference Planes to be Symmetrical</li>
<li>Add Dimensions to Reference Planes for Use by Parameters</li>
<li>Tie Dimensions to Parameters</li>
<li>Check Balance of the Mass</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Box Body and Balance 
<ul>
<li>Use Line Tool to Create Line-Work for Solid Form</li>
<li>Use Reference Line Tool to Create Line-Work for Solid Form</li>
<li>Tie Positive and Negative Offsets of the Solid Form to Our Extrusion Parameters</li>
<li>Save Mass as a Family</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Balance in the Project 
<ul>
<li>Load Mass Family Into a Project</li>
<li>Update Dimension Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cylinder Brains Bones Balance and Body 
<ul>
<li>Create a Reference Plane for the Cylinder</li>
<li>Add Dimensions to the Reference Plane and Tie to Cylinder Parameters</li>
<li>Test Cylinder Location Parameter</li>
<li>Change to South Elevation to Create Cylinder</li>
<li>Draw Circle for the Cylinder</li>
<li>Tie Circle Radius Dimension to a Parameter</li>
<li>Move Circle from Front Face to Center Reference Plane</li>
<li>Create Void Form for the Cylinder</li>
<li>Tie Positive and Negative Offsets of the Void Form to Our Cylinder Extrusion Parameters</li>
<li>What if My Void is Not Removing/Cutting Geometry?</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Materials and Balance in the Project 
<ul>
<li>Add Material Parameters</li>
<li>Associate the Material Parameter to the Mass</li>
<li>Loading Updated Mass Family into a Project May Cause Problems</li>
<li>Test Material Parameter</li>
<li>Add a Curtain System to a Mass</li>
<li>Update Curtain Systems to Face After You Change the Mass Dimensions</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:13:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introoutlk2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to create e-mail accounts and send e-mail messages using several techniques how to manage e-mail messages contacts tasks and meeting requests. It will also show you how to customize Outlook for maximum efficiency.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to create e-mail accounts and send e-mail messages using several techniques how to manage e-mail messages contacts tasks and meeting requests. It will also show you how to customize Outlook for maximum efficiency.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>What is Outlook?&nbsp;&nbsp; <br /> 
<ul>
<li>Opening Outlook</li>
<li>Viewing the Navigation Bar</li>
<li>Viewing Icons in the Navigation Pane</li>
<li>Viewing the Reading Pane</li>
<li>Viewing the To-Do Bar</li>
<li>Understanding Your Mailbox</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with E-mail 
<ul>
<li>Opening e-mail</li>
<li>Composing and Addressing e-mail</li>
<li>Formatting e-mail</li>
<li>Replying</li>
<li>Using Spelling and Grammar Check</li>
<li>Receiving e-mail</li>
<li>Forwarding e-mail</li>
<li>Working with Received Attachments</li>
<li>Sending an Attachment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setting E-mail Options 
<ul>
<li>Selecting Importance Options</li>
<li>Using a Follow Up Flag-Setting E-mail Options-Assigning Categorie</li>
<li>Changing the Views in the Inbox</li>
<li>Creating a Signature</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing E-mail 
<ul>
<li>Deleting E-mail Messages</li>
<li>Creating and Managing Folders</li>
<li>Using the Out of Office Assistant</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Calendar 
<ul>
<li>Adding Events and Appointments</li>
<li>Applying Categories to Appointments</li>
<li>Setting up a Recurring Appointment</li>
<li>Planning a Meeting</li>
<li>Sending and Accepting Meeting Invitations</li>
<li>Changing the Time of an Event</li>
<li>Setting the Show As Status for an Event</li>
<li>Printing the CalendarWorking with Tasks-Adding a Tas</li>
<li>Add a Recurring Task</li>
<li>Marking a Task as Complete</li>
<li>Submitting a Task to Another Person</li>
<li>Showing Tasks in Groups</li>
<li>Printing Tasks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Contacts 
<ul>
<li>Opening and Updating a Contact</li>
<li>Creating a Contact</li>
<li>Using a Distribution List</li>
<li>Getting Directions to a Contact</li>
<li>Performing Actions on a Contact</li>
<li>Printing Contacts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Notes 
<ul>
<li>Creating a New Note</li>
<li>Applying a Category to a Note</li>
<li>Printing a Note</li>
<li>Placing a Note on the Desktop</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:29:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpoint-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introppt2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to create new presentations that include text graphics WordArt tables charts and diagrams. It also discusses how to edit and format slide content and how to apply transition effects.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to create new presentations that include text graphics WordArt tables charts and diagrams. It also discusses how to edit and format slide content and how to apply transition effects.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Overview of User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Opening a File</li>
<li>Using and Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Switching between Slide and Outline View</li>
<li>Viewing Speaker Notes</li>
<li>Using Zoom on the Status Bar</li>
<li>Switching Views: Normal, SlideSorter, SlideShow, Notes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Starting a New Presentation</li>
<li>Entering Text on a Slide</li>
<li>Saving the Presentation</li>
<li>Inserting, Moving and Resizing a Text Box</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating and Formatting Slides 
<ul>
<li>Using Content Slides</li>
<li>Building a Bulleted List in Normal View</li>
<li>Building a Bulleted List in Outline View</li>
<li>Changing the Slide Layout</li>
<li>Adding Levels to a Bulleted List</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Applying Design Themes and Formatting to the Presentation 
<ul>
<li>Adding a Design Theme</li>
<li>Customizing Design Themes</li>
<li>Formatting Text</li>
<li>Using the Slide Master</li>
<li>Changing Bullets in the Slide Master</li>
<li>Changing Bullets on an Individual Slide</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Drawing Tools 
<ul>
<li>Using Insert Picture Command</li>
<li>Duplicating a Slide</li>
<li>Searching for and Inserting Clip Art</li>
<li>Moving and Resizing Images</li>
<li>Working with Picture Styles</li>
<li>Drawing Basic Shapes</li>
<li>Manipulating Shapes</li>
<li>Creating Advanced Shapes</li>
<li>Duplicating and Adding Text in a Drawn Object</li>
<li>Using Alignment Tools to Align Objects</li>
<li>Attaching Drawn Objects With Connectors</li>
<li>Formatting Objects</li>
<li>Formatting Text Using WordArt Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding SmartArt 
<ul>
<li>Deleting a Slide</li>
<li>Converting an Existing Bulleted List to SmartArt</li>
<li>Editing Text in a Smart Art Graphic</li>
<li>Creating SmartArt from Scratch</li>
<li>Adding a Unit to SmartArt</li>
<li>Formatting SmartArt</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finalizing the Presentation 
<ul>
<li>Using Speaker Notes</li>
<li>Checking the Spelling</li>
<li>Launching the Presentation</li>
<li>Using Annotation and Navigation Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:46:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introexcel2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to navigate worksheets and workbooks enter and edit text values formulas and pictures and how to save workbooks in various formats. Furthermore it will teach you about absolute and relative references and how to work with ranges rows and columns. It also covers simple functions basic formatting techniques printing and basic charts.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to navigate worksheets and workbooks enter and edit text values formulas and pictures and how to save workbooks in various formats. Furthermore it will teach you about absolute and relative references and how to work with ranges rows and columns. It also covers simple functions basic formatting techniques printing and basic charts.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Getting to Know Excel 
<ul>
<li>Launching Microsoft Excel 2007</li>
<li>Viewing a Tour of the User Interface</li>
<li>Navigating and Utilizing Worksheets</li>
<li>Entering Data into Cells</li>
<li>Saving an Excel Worksheet</li>
<li>Entering Basic Formulas</li>
<li>Using Cell Addresses in a Formula</li>
<li>Using the SUM Function</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the AutoFill Feature 
<ul>
<li>Using AutoFill to Repeat a Sequence within Cells</li>
<li>Manipulating AutoFill</li>
<li>Using Various Data Types with AutoFill</li>
<li>Using AutoFill with Formulas and Functions</li>
<li>Using AutoSum and other Automatic Functions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Functions 
<ul>
<li>Utilizing the Function Library</li>
<li>Using the Insert Function Button</li>
<li>Accessing Function Help</li>
<li>Selecting the Function Input Arguments</li>
<li>Average, Minimum, and Maximum Functions</li>
<li>Editing a Function</li>
<li>Using Manual Arithmetic</li>
<li>Understanding the Order of Operator Precedence</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Cell Addressing 
<ul>
<li>Using Relative Cell Addressing</li>
<li>Using Absolute Cell Addressing</li>
<li>Using Dates in Formulas</li>
<li>Understanding How Dates are Stored as Numbers</li>
<li>Clearing the Formatting of a Cell</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting Columns and Rows 
<ul>
<li>Inserting and Deleting Columns and Rows</li>
<li>Changing Column Widths and Row Heights</li>
<li>Using the AutoFit Feature</li>
<li>Hiding and Unhiding Columns and Rows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting Cells 
<ul>
<li>Adding Cell Borders</li>
<li>Changing the Number Format of a Cell</li>
<li>Formatting and Styling Text</li>
<li>Filling Cells</li>
<li>Merging Cells</li>
<li>Using Alignment Options</li>
<li>Wrapping Text Within a Cell</li>
<li>Using the Format as a Table Command</li>
<li>Applying Excel's Styles to your Worksheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finalizing Your Spreadsheet 
<ul>
<li>Using the Spell Checker</li>
<li>Applying Page Setup Options</li>
<li>Understanding Layout Options</li>
<li>Adding a Header and Footer</li>
<li>Understanding the Page Setup Options</li>
<li>Printing a Spreadsheet or Workbook</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:24:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2007 - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_advword2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to set up mail merges create and use forms and create master documents that include a table of contents a table of figures footnotes endnotes an index bookmarks cross-references and Web frames. It also covers how to create macros customize the Quick Access toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and work with XML documents.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to set up mail merges create and use forms and create master documents that include a table of contents a table of figures footnotes endnotes an index bookmarks cross-references and Web frames. It also covers how to create macros customize the Quick Access toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and work with XML documents.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Inserting Objects    
<ul>
<li>Inserting an Image</li>
<li>Manipulating an Image</li>
<li>Inserting Shapes</li>
<li>Adding Clip Art</li>
<li>Formatting an Image</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inserting SmartArt    
<ul>
<li>Converting a List to SmartArt</li>
<li>Formatting and Design SmartArt</li>
<li>Adding SmartArt within a Word table</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inserting a Table of Contents    
<ul>
<li>Using Header Styles</li>
<li>Generating a Table of Contents</li>
<li>Manually Marking Headers</li>
<li>Selecting Styles and Items to include in a Table of Contents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inserting a Table of Figures    
<ul>
<li>Adding Captions</li>
<li>Automatically Adding Captions to New Items</li>
<li>Generating the Table of Figures</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Bookmarks and Cross References    
<ul>
<li>Creating a Cross Reference</li>
<li>Creating a Bookmark</li>
<li>Cross Referencing a Bookmark</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding an Index to a Document    
<ul>
<li>Marking an Index Entry</li>
<li>Using a Subentry</li>
<li>Marking a Page Range</li>
<li>Generating the Index</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inserting Footnotes and Endnotes    
<ul>
<li>Creating a Footnote</li>
<li>Creating an Endnote</li>
<li>Editing Notes via the Dialog Box</li>
<li>Deleting a Footnote or Endnote</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using a Master Document    
<ul>
<li>Creating a Master Document</li>
<li>Adding a Subdocument</li>
<li>Editing Subdocuments</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Multiple Levels of Numbering    
<ul>
<li>Applying a Style to Numbering</li>
<li>Customizing a Style</li>
<li>Linking Styles to Multi-Level Numbering</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tracking Changes Made to a Document    
<ul>
<li>Toggling Track Changes On/Off</li>
<li>Reviewing and Accepting Changes</li>
<li>Adding Comments</li>
<li>Comparing/Combining Documents</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Macros    
<ul>
<li>Recording a Macro</li>
<li>Adding a Macro Button</li>
<li>Using a Macro</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:29:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2007 - Intermediate]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-intermediate.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-intermediate.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_interword2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to work with styles sections and columns format tables print labels and envelopes work with graphics use document templates manage document revisions and work with Web features.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to work with styles sections and columns format tables print labels and envelopes work with graphics use document templates manage document revisions and work with Web features.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Automation 
<ul>
<li>Using AutoCorrect</li>
<li>Customizing AutoCorrect</li>
<li>Using Math AutoCorrect</li>
<li>Inserting a Symbol</li>
<li>Inserting Equations</li>
<li>Using AutoFormat as You Type</li>
<li>Find and Replace</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles 
<ul>
<li>Using Built-In Styles</li>
<li>Using Custom Styles</li>
<li>Applying Style Shortcuts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Tables 
<ul>
<li>Editing Table Properties</li>
<li>Repeating a Header Row</li>
<li>Using the Table Layout Tab</li>
<li>Sorting a Table</li>
<li>Using a Formula in a Table</li>
<li>Using Tabs and Indents in Tables</li>
<li>Creating Nested Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Headers, Footers and Section Breaks 
<ul>
<li>Inserting Page Breaks</li>
<li>Adding Section Breaks</li>
<li>Inserting a Cover Page</li>
<li>Using Section Breaks in Long Documents</li>
<li>Inserting Headers &amp; Footers</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Building Blocks in a Document 
<ul>
<li>Accessing the Building Block Organizer</li>
<li>Inserting a Building Block</li>
<li>Creating a Custom Building Block</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Templates 
<ul>
<li>Using an Existing Template</li>
<li>Saving a Custom Template</li>
<li>Saving Styles into a Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Performing a Mail Merge 
<ul>
<li>Using the Mail Merge Wizard</li>
<li>Selecting Recipients and Creating Labels</li>
<li>Editing Individual Labels</li>
<li>Creating a Manual Mail Merge</li>
<li>Inserting a Merge Field</li>
<li>Using Merge Rules</li>
<li>Finishing &amp; Printing the Mail Merge</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:31:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2007 - Introduction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-introduction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2007-introduction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_introword2007_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you how to enter and edit text save and browse documents enhance the appearance of a document by using various formatting options create tables insert headers and footers proof and print documents and insert graphics.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you how to enter and edit text save and browse documents enhance the appearance of a document by using various formatting options create tables insert headers and footers proof and print documents and insert graphics.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction&nbsp;&nbsp; </li>
<li>Application Overview 
<ul>
<li>Using the Office Button</li>
<li>Using and Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Browsing and Navigation</li>
<li>Viewing the Status Bar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Documents 
<ul>
<li>Opening a File</li>
<li>Navigating the Document</li>
<li>Using the Browse Button</li>
<li>Selecting Text</li>
<li>Using Undo &amp; Redo Features</li>
<li>Moving Text</li>
<li>Using the Different Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Basic Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Applying Character Formats</li>
<li>Using Advanced Character Formatting</li>
<li>Applying Paragraph Formatting</li>
<li>Using the Show/Hide Paragraph Marks Feature</li>
<li>Adding Bullets and Numbering</li>
<li>Adjusting Paragraph and Line Spacing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Formatting 
<ul>
<li>Applying Paragraph Styles</li>
<li>Editing a Style</li>
<li>Manipulating Page Margins and Page Breaks</li>
<li>Adding a Watermark</li>
<li>Adding Page Borders</li>
<li>Applying a Theme</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tabs and Tables 
<ul>
<li>Creating Custom Tabs</li>
<li>Inserting a Table</li>
<li>Converting Tabbed Text into a Table</li>
<li>Manipulating Rows and Columns</li>
<li>Manipulating Tables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Finishing your Document 
<ul>
<li>Using Spelling &amp; Grammar Check</li>
<li>Using the Built-In Thesaurus</li>
<li>Using Print Preview</li>
<li>Printing a Document</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 19:32:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Office 2007 - New Features]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2007-new-features.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/office-2007-new-features.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_cw_newfeat2007_sm_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook will teach you about the Microsoft Office button Ribbon tabs and Ribbon groups galleries contextual Ribbon tabs Live Preview the Dialog Box Launcher the Document Information Panel and the Mini toolbar. It will also show you how to work with the XML file format and the macro and non-macro file formats. Additionally dedicated units for Word Excel PowerPoint Outlook and Access introduce the new features of each application.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will teach you about the Microsoft Office button Ribbon tabs and Ribbon groups galleries contextual Ribbon tabs Live Preview the Dialog Box Launcher the Document Information Panel and the Mini toolbar. It will also show you how to work with the XML file format and the macro and non-macro file formats. Additionally dedicated units for Word Excel PowerPoint Outlook and Access introduce the new features of each application.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Microsoft Office 2007 
<ul>
<li>Understanding the Ribbon</li>
<li>Introducting the Office Button</li>
<li>Locating the Options</li>
<li>Using the Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Minimizing the Ribbon</li>
<li>Keyboard Shortcuts</li>
<li>Accessing Online Help</li>
<li>Toggling the Ruler</li>
<li>Using the Zoom Control Bar</li>
<li>Switching Between Views</li>
<li>Using the Status Bar</li>
<li>Using Galleries and Live Preview</li>
<li>Contextual Tabs</li>
<li>Using the Dialog Box Launcher</li>
<li>Using Additional Features Found in the Office Button</li>
<li>Understanding the XML File Format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Microsoft Word 2007 
<ul>
<li>Working with Themes and Paragraph Styles</li>
<li>Using Quick Parts and the Building Blocks Organizer</li>
<li>Inserting a Table</li>
<li>Drawing and Formatting Objects</li>
<li>Applying Picture Effects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 
<ul>
<li>Customizing Slide Layouts</li>
<li>Using the Slide Master</li>
<li>Charting</li>
<li>Working with Design Themes</li>
<li>Customizing a Design Theme</li>
<li>Applying Effects to Graphics</li>
<li>Using Picture Styles</li>
<li>Converting a List to SmartArt</li>
<li>Editing SmartArt</li>
<li>Understanding the Content Slide Layout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Microsoft Outlook 2007 
<ul>
<li>Using Tasks</li>
<li>Searching Folders</li>
<li>Sending a Calendar via E-mail</li>
<li>Working with Shared Calendars</li>
<li>Using Categories</li>
<li>Adding RSS Feeds</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Microsoft Excel 2007 
<ul>
<li>Using Charts</li>
<li>Applying Conditional Formatting</li>
<li>Using Lists</li>
<li>Working with PivotTables</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Microsoft Access 2007 
<ul>
<li>Templates</li>
<li>Using the Ribbon Based User Interface</li>
<li>Creating a New Table</li>
<li>Sorting and Filtering</li>
<li>Forms</li>
<li>Reports</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Summary</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 18:25:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Surfaces in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surfaces-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surfaces-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_surfaces_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Civil 3D 2010 Surfaces vBook is designed to provide information on the tools and processes used to create edit analyze and manage surfaces and surface data in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 Surfaces vBook is designed to provide information on the tools and processes used to create edit analyze and manage surfaces and surface data in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Concepts</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Surface Concepts</li>
<li>Data Creation Tools 
<ul>
<li>Points</li>
<li>Feature Lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface Definition</li>
<li>Surface Properties</li>
<li>Surface Styles</li>
<li>Simple Surface 
<ul>
<li>Import Points</li>
<li>Create Point Group</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
<li>Add Point Data</li>
<li>Add Breakline</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface from Contours 
<ul>
<li>Fix Errors</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface from DEM 
<ul>
<li>Acquire Data</li>
<li>Unzip STDS Data</li>
<li>SDTS to DEM</li>
<li>Create Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface Edits 
<ul>
<li>Add Line</li>
<li>Delete Line</li>
<li>Swap Edge</li>
<li>Paste Surface</li>
<li>Raise Lower</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface Labels 
<ul>
<li>Label Styles</li>
<li>Add Contour Labels</li>
<li>Add Surface Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surface Tools 
<ul>
<li>Export to DEM</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Analyze 
<ul>
<li>Volumes</li>
<li>Water Drop</li>
<li>Catch Area</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:37:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Connecting the RME and RAC Connectors in Revit MEP and Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/connecting-the-rme-and-rac-connectors-in-revit-mep-and-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/connecting-the-rme-and-rac-connectors-in-revit-mep-and-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_rmerac_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>REVIT is 90% there when it comes to linking the RAC model into RME and using the RAC linked fixtures for MEP design. However until we see that last 10% we are faced with some workaround's and some options.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>These lessons are an absolute necessity for all RME and RAC managers and users involved in collaboration between REVIT MEP and Architecture. REVIT is 90% there when it comes to linking the RAC model into RME and using the RAC linked fixtures for MEP design. However until we see that last 10% we are faced with some workaround's and some options. These lessons unfold this perplexing mystery and explain the "next best thing" to actually using the linked RAC "connectors" in the RME model.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Theory Part 1 
<ul>
<li>It is Critical to Link RAC Into RME</li>
<li>Wait Until the RAC Model is Well Established Before Starting With REM</li>
<li>Move or Re-Use Existing Hosting Objects Rather than Deleting and Re-Creating</li>
<li>RME Uses Connectors as a Gateway to Communicate the System Information Within a Project</li>
<li>Use RME Friendly Families</li>
<li>Connectors Do Not Work Through Linked Files</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Theory Part 2 
<ul>
<li>Attach Free Standing RME Connectors to the Linked RAC Objects</li>
<li>Challenges with Attaching Free Standing RME Connectors</li>
<li>Copy &amp; Paste RME Friendly Families into your RME Project</li>
<li>Group Objects in RAC Model to Make Copy &amp; Paste Easier</li>
<li>Hide Original RAC Objects</li>
<li>RME Objects Will Be Orphaned if the Hosting RAC Object is Deleted</li>
<li>Pasted Objects will Attach to Near By Hosting Objects</li>
<li>Challenges with Selecting Objects In a Linked File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Check the RAC model for RME Friendly Content 
<ul>
<li>Open an RAC File From Within RME</li>
<li>Check if RAC Objects are RME Friendly</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Link the RAC Model into RME and Add Connectors 
<ul>
<li>Link a RAC File Origin-to-Origin</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Attach Plumbing Connectors to Linked RAC Objects 
<ul>
<li>Import Connector Families</li>
<li>Place Connectors on a Service</li>
<li>Selecting a Service for a Connector can be Very Tricky</li>
<li>Turn Off Linked Walls to Help with Selecting a Service for a Connector</li>
<li>Check Connector Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Same with Linked RAC Model 
<ul>
<li>Selecting RAC Linked Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Same Place 
<ul>
<li>Warning Messages Due to No Host for Ceiling Hosted Objects</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Ceiling in Same Place</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Ceiling Hosted Objects</li>
<li>Hide RAC Model So that Only RME Objects are Displayed</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add Connectors to RAC Families 
<ul>
<li>Adding Connectors to an Existing Domestic Toilet Family</li>
<li>Adding Connectors to an Existing Sink Family</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:03:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Intersection Design in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/intersection-design-in-civil-3d-2010-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/intersection-design-in-civil-3d-2010-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_intrsctdsn_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In the Intersection Design cloudDVD you learn  how to create intersections objects and corridor models in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  A live recorded instructor guides you through the process for modeling both 4-way and 3-way intersections.  Create intersections with skew angles include them in existing corridor models and incorporate existing offset alignment geometry.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In the Intersection Design cloudDVD you learn how to create intersections objects and corridor models in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  A live recorded instructor guides you through the process for modeling both 4-way and 3-way intersections.  Create intersections with skew angles include them in existing corridor models and incorporate existing offset alignment geometry.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Intersection Overview 
<ul>
<li>Review Intersection Components</li>
<li>Create Corridor From Intersection</li>
<li>Review Intersection Object</li>
<li>Review Corridor Object</li>
<li>Assemblies for Intersection Corridor</li>
<li>Primary Road Baseline</li>
<li>Secondary Road Baseline</li>
<li>Curb Return Baselines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Intersection 
<ul>
<li>Delete Data</li>
<li>Review Data Requirements</li>
<li>Review Secondary Road Profile</li>
<li>Create Intersection</li>
<li>General Page</li>
<li>Geometry Details Page</li>
<li>Offset and Curb Return Alignments</li>
<li>Offset and Curb Return Profiles</li>
<li>Corridor Regions Page</li>
<li>Assembly Sets</li>
<li>Prospector</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Alignment Geometry 
<ul>
<li>Review Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Offset Alignments in Prospector</li>
<li>Review Curb Return Alignments</li>
<li>Curb Return Alignment Style</li>
<li>Intersection Object Alignment Geometry</li>
<li>Modify Alignment Offset Parameters</li>
<li>Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor</li>
<li>Fix Connected Feature Lines</li>
<li>Fix Corridor Regions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Profile Geometry 
<ul>
<li>Modify Assembly</li>
<li>Review Profile Data</li>
<li>Offset Alignment Profiles</li>
<li>Curb Return Alignment Profiles</li>
<li>Summarize Profile Calculation</li>
<li>Profile Views</li>
<li>Update Regions and Rebuild Corridor</li>
<li>Edit Curb Return Profile Data</li>
<li>Secondary Road Profiles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Additional Intersection Functionality 
<ul>
<li>Chapter Overview</li>
<li>Erase Data</li>
<li>Secondary Road Skew Angle</li>
<li>Secondary Road Profile</li>
<li>Extend Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Create Intersection</li>
<li>Existing Corridor</li>
<li>Select Existing Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Review Corridor Object</li>
<li>Assembly Sets</li>
<li>Secondary Road Profile</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create 'T' Intersection 
<ul>
<li>Secondary Alignment Geometry</li>
<li>Adjust Stations</li>
<li>Layout Profile</li>
<li>Create 'T' Intersection</li>
<li>Review 'T' Intersection</li>
<li>Review Secondary Road Profile</li>
<li>Create Corridor Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:26:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Part Builder in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/part-builder-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/part-builder-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3partblder_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Part Builder in Civil 3D 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Part Builder Civil 3D 2009 vBook provides videos to provide the users with a basic understanding on how to use the Part Builder to create custom parts used in the AutoCAD Civil 3D Pipe Networks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Content</h3>
<ul>
<li>Creating Overview&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Part Configuration</li>
<li>Part Type</li>
<li>Part Modeling</li>
<li>Work Planes</li>
<li>Offset and Reference Work Planes</li>
<li>Geometry</li>
<li>Dimensions</li>
<li>Constraints</li>
<li>Profiles</li>
<li>Modifiers</li>
<li>Placement Points</li>
<li>Model Parameters</li>
<li>Size Parameters</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating Parts 
<ul>
<li>Cylindrical Manhole</li>
<li>Create Catalog</li>
<li>Part Configuration</li>
<li>Create Rim Work Plane</li>
<li>Create Offset Workplane</li>
<li>Add Profile</li>
<li>Add Dimensions</li>
<li>Create Additional Profiles</li>
<li>Add Transitions</li>
<li>Add Barrel</li>
<li>Model-Size Parameters</li>
<li>Modify Size Parmeters</li>
<li>Map Body Parameters</li>
<li>Verify Body Parameters</li>
<li>Set AutoLayout</li>
<li>Add Variables</li>
<li>Create Bitmap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manhole Drop Inlet 
<ul>
<li>Create Part Family</li>
<li>Part Configuration</li>
<li>Create Work Planes</li>
<li>Add Geometry</li>
<li>Add Constraints</li>
<li>Add Dimensions</li>
<li>Add Profiles</li>
<li>Modifiers</li>
<li>Merge Components</li>
<li>Set Placement Point</li>
<li>Size Parameters</li>
<li>Model Parameters</li>
<li>Edit Configuration</li>
<li>Edit Equations</li>
<li>Reload Part</li>
<li>Edit Configuration to List</li>
<li>Set Visual Style</li>
<li>Set Constraint</li>
<li>Create Bitmap</li>
<li>Create Part List</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Vault Box 
<ul>
<li>Part Catagory</li>
<li>Work Plane</li>
<li>Create Frame</li>
<li>Add Constraints</li>
<li>Add Dimensions</li>
<li>Add Modifiers</li>
<li>Model Dimensions</li>
<li>Model Parameters</li>
<li>Size Parameters</li>
<li>Size Parameters Continued</li>
<li>Vault Box Work Plane</li>
<li>Projected Geometry</li>
<li>Create Box Geometry</li>
<li>Ad Box Constraints</li>
<li>Add Box Extrusion</li>
<li>Boolean Subtract</li>
<li>Size-Model Parameters</li>
<li>Modify Model Parameters</li>
<li>Modify Size Parameters</li>
<li>Set AutoLayout</li>
<li>Create BitMap</li>
<li>Creating Class III RCP</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:35:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Get Your Feet Wet with Revit Structure 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/get-your-feet-wet-with-revit-structure-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/get-your-feet-wet-with-revit-structure-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitstruc10_feetwet_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>We cannot say enough about this amazing new Ribbon interface. After watching these 9 CADclips you will be prepared to move ahead using Revit Structure 2010 and get on with your day.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>We cannot say enough about this amazing new Ribbon interface. After watching these 9 CADclips you will be prepared to move ahead using Revit Structure 2010 and get on with your day.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Where is My Command Tool?</li>
<li>Help</li>
<li>Windows Panel</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Interface Overview</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Conceptual Massing</li>
<li>Slanted Columns Intro</li>
<li>Project Settings Panel</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:44:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Sample Lines, Sections, and Volumes in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_smpleline_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this cloudDVD you learn how to create sample lines in an alignment sample line group. After you create the sample lines you then compute end area volumes for pavement structure and earth cut and fill materials.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you learn how to create sample lines in an alignment sample line group.  After you create the sample lines you then compute end area volumes for pavement structure and earth cut and fill materials.  The final step is to generate section views at specific station locations.  Download a data set and accompany a live recorded instructor as he guides you through the steps to calculate volumes and generate design sections along a corridor model.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Overview 
<ul>
<li>Sample Lines</li>
<li>Section Data</li>
<li>Section Views</li>
<li>Prospector</li>
<li>Object reactivity</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines 
<ul>
<li>Delete Sample Line Group</li>
<li>Create Sample Lines</li>
<li>Assign Styles</li>
<li>Attach Section Data</li>
<li>Sample Line Tools Toolbar</li>
<li>Sample Line Increment</li>
<li>Over Modeling</li>
<li>Swath Width</li>
<li>Sample Lines in Prospector</li>
<li>Sample Line Group Properties</li>
<li>Sample More Sources</li>
<li>Graphical Edit</li>
<li>Styles</li>
<li>Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calculate and Report Volumes 
<ul>
<li>Process Description</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff Criteria</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff Criteria</li>
<li>Earthworks</li>
<li>Compute Earthworks Volumes</li>
<li>Material List</li>
<li>Volume Reports</li>
<li>Earthworks</li>
<li>Static Volume Report</li>
<li>Earthworks</li>
<li>Dynamic Volume Table</li>
<li>Object Reactivity</li>
<li>Table Styles</li>
<li>Fill Factor</li>
<li>MS Excel</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff Criteria</li>
<li>Pavement Structure</li>
<li>Compute Pavement Structure Materials</li>
<li>Pavement Structure</li>
<li>Static Volume Report</li>
<li>Pavement Structure</li>
<li>Dynamic Volume Table</li>
<li>Delete Sample Lines</li>
<li>Modify Sheet Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Section Views 
<ul>
<li>Section View Definition</li>
<li>Review Sample Line Group and Section Data</li>
<li>Create Section Views</li>
<li>Section Data in Section Views</li>
<li>Section Views in Prospector</li>
<li>Zoom to Section Views</li>
<li>Section View Group Properties</li>
<li>Section Data Display</li>
<li>Delete Section Views</li>
<li>Section Data Styles</li>
<li>Code Set Style</li>
<li>Table Styles</li>
<li>Generate Tables</li>
<li>Section View Styles</li>
<li>Group Plot Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Section Views in Sheets 
<ul>
<li>Review Group Plot Styles</li>
<li>Review Sheet Styles</li>
<li>Page Setup Definition</li>
<li>Create Sheet Style</li>
<li>Create Group Plot Style</li>
<li>Assign Group Plot Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:21:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Corridors in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/corridors-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/corridors-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_corridors_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBook you will lea  how to create corridor models in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. The live instructor led recordings will guide you through the process of understanding subassemblies creating assemblies creating corridor models creating corridor surfaces and viewing and modifying cross sections. There is also a practical example that demonstrates how to incorporate a median for divided highways.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook you will learn how to create corridor models in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. The live instructor led recordings will guide you through the process of understanding subassemblies creating assemblies creating corridor models creating corridor surfaces and viewing and modifying cross sections. There is also a practical example that demonstrates how to incorporate a median for divided highways.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Corridors Overview 
<ul>
<li>Corridor Applications</li>
<li>Requirements</li>
<li>Corridor Data in Prospector</li>
<li>Corridor Model Overview</li>
<li>Object Viewer</li>
<li>Feature Lines</li>
<li>Corridor Properties</li>
<li>Baselines</li>
<li>Regions</li>
<li>Assembly Insertion Frequency</li>
<li>Targets</li>
<li>Over Modeling Subassemblies</li>
<li>Subassembly Overview</li>
<li>Assembly Properties</li>
<li>Subassemblies on Tool Palette</li>
<li>Tool Palette Overview</li>
<li>LaneOutsideSuper</li>
<li>Subassembly Help File</li>
<li>Help - Input Parameters </li>
<li>Help - Target Parameters</li>
<li>Help - Coding Diagram</li>
<li>Subassembly Points</li>
<li>Subassembly Links</li>
<li>Subassembly Shapes</li>
<li>Subassembly Catalog </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Assembly 
<ul>
<li>Workspace Configuration</li>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
<li>Assembly Style</li>
<li>Add lanes</li>
<li>Add Curb</li>
<li>Subassembly Groups</li>
<li>Rename Groups and Subassemblies</li>
<li>Add Sidewalk</li>
<li>Subassembly Properties on Tool Palette</li>
<li>Daylight Subassemblies</li>
<li>Mirror Subassembly</li>
<li>Rename Subassemblies</li>
<li>Modify Input Parameters</li>
<li>Assemblies in Prospector</li>
<li>Command Settings </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Corridor 
<ul>
<li>Create Corridor</li>
<li>Naming Template</li>
<li>Baselines and Regions</li>
<li>Set Region Limits</li>
<li>Assembly Insertion Frequency</li>
<li>Set Corridor Targets</li>
<li>Corridor Feature Lines</li>
<li>Feature Line Style</li>
<li>Assign Feature Line Style</li>
<li>Corridor Regions</li>
<li>Add Corridor Region</li>
<li>Null Assembly</li>
<li>Object Reactivity</li>
<li>Region and Baseline Graphics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Target Mapping 
<ul>
<li>Modify Subassembly Parameters</li>
<li>Lane Width</li>
<li>Polyline</li>
<li>Modify Target Geometry</li>
<li>Lane Width</li>
<li>Alignment</li>
<li>Surface Targets</li>
<li>Create a Stripping Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridor Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Top and Datum Corridor Surfaces</li>
<li>Isolate Corridor Region</li>
<li>Corridor Datum Surface</li>
<li>Boundary</li>
<li>Feature Line</li>
<li>Suppress Corridor Surface</li>
<li>Corridor Surfaces in Prospector</li>
<li>Corridor Top Surface</li>
<li>Remove Boundary</li>
<li>Boundary</li>
<li>Interactively</li>
<li>Sidewalk Subassembly</li>
<li>Add Marked Poin</li>
<li>Review Feature Lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridor Section Editor 
<ul>
<li>Corridor Section Editor</li>
<li>Code Set Style</li>
<li>Review Section Data</li>
<li>Navigate Stations</li>
<li>View Specific Section</li>
<li>Parameter Editor</li>
<li>Apply to Station Range</li>
<li>Graphical Edit</li>
<li>Clear Overrides</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridor Command Settings 
<ul>
<li>Access Command Settings</li>
<li>Create Corridor Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Extract Corridor Data 
<ul>
<li>Review Data</li>
<li>Create Profile</li>
<li>Create Polyline</li>
<li>Create Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Median Example 
<ul>
<li>Review Geometry</li>
<li>Create Surface Profile</li>
<li>Create Design Profile</li>
<li>Review Median Subassemblies</li>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
<li>Locate EB WB Lane Subassemblies</li>
<li>Add EB WB Lane Subassemblies</li>
<li>Omit Link</li>
<li>Review Help Files</li>
<li>Add Marked Point</li>
<li>Add Median Depressed</li>
<li>Rename Groups and Subassemblies</li>
<li>Create Corridor With Median</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:45:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Grading in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/grading-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/grading-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_grading_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Civil 3D 2010 Grading vBase demonstrates the grading and feature line commands found in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 Grading vBook demonstrates the grading and feature line commands found in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. This application vBook is designed for the user to familiarize themselves with the tools they will use during the process of grading a project or site.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Feature Lines Overview  
<ul>
<li>Create Feature Line</li>
<li>Create from Object</li>
<li>Create from Alignment</li>
<li>Create from Corridor</li>
<li>Stepped Offset</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Feature Line Characteristics</li>
<li>Feature Line Edit Geometry  
<ul>
<li>Insert Delete PI</li>
<li>Break Feature Line</li>
<li>Trim Feature Line</li>
<li>Join Feature Line</li>
<li>Reverse Direction</li>
<li>Edit Curve</li>
<li>Fillet a Feature Line</li>
<li>Fit Curve</li>
<li>Smooth Feature Line</li>
<li>Weed Feature Line</li>
<li>Stepped Offset</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Feature Line Elevation Editor</li>
<li>Feature Line Elevation Edit  
<ul>
<li>Insert/Delete Elevation</li>
<li>Quick Elevation Edit</li>
<li>Edit Elevations</li>
<li>Set Grade/Slope</li>
<li>Insert High/Low Point</li>
<li>Raise by Reference</li>
<li>Set Elevation by Reference</li>
<li>Adjacent Elevation by Reference</li>
<li>Elevation from Surface</li>
<li>Raise/Lower Feature Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Feature Line Styles</li>
<li>Grading Feature Fundementals  
<ul>
<li>Grading Criteria</li>
<li>Create Grading</li>
<li>Grade to Distance</li>
<li>Grade to Surface</li>
<li>Create Transition</li>
<li>Create Infill</li>
<li>Edit Grading</li>
<li>Grading Editor</li>
<li>Grading Volumes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add to Surface</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:53:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Slab Thickening Family in Revit Structure 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/slab-thickening-family-in-revit-structure-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/slab-thickening-family-in-revit-structure-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitstruc09_slabthk_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Here we create a custom Floor Based Slab Thickening Family to include instance and type parameters as well as materials.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Here we create a custom Floor Based Slab Thickening Family to include instance and type parameters as well as materials. We use a Solid Blend to create the physical geometry after we create and flex the skeletal constraining geometry.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Slab Thickening Family Placement and Introduction</li>
<li>Create the Family Skeleton</li>
<li>Create the Solid Blend</li>
<li>Flex the Family in the Project and Fix Materials Parameter</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:31:00 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Architectural Beam Family in Revit Architecture 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/architectural-beam-family-in-revit-architecture-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/architectural-beam-family-in-revit-architecture-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch09_archbeam_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In these free CADclips I create an architectural beam with some abutments (for lack of better word). The lessons lea ed over the course of these 7 videos should get the wheels turning and can then be used to further you own REVIT family creation ideas.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In these CADclips I create an architectural beam with some abutments (for lack of better word). The lessons learned over the course of these 7 videos should get the wheels turning and can then be used to further you own REVIT family creation ideas.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Creating Parameters and Reference Planes</li>
<li>Modeling the Main Beam and Flexing It</li>
<li>Modeling the Abutments and Flexing It</li>
<li>Setup Yes / No Parameters to Control Object Visibility</li>
<li>Getting Sneaky with Model Lines and the Linework Tool</li>
<li>Create Mental Ray Materials and Render the Beam</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:47:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Curved Wall Tricks in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/curved-wall-tricks-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/curved-wall-tricks-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_viewtitle_s_3.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Extend a curved wall to the underside of a curved stair in seconds. Lea  how to embed one curved wall into another curved wall and edit the profiles of the top or bottoms of those curved walls.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Extend a curved wall to the underside of a curved stair in seconds. Learn how to embed one curved wall into another curved wall and edit the profiles of the top or bottoms of those curved walls.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Modify Top and Bottom Profile of Curved Wall</li>
<li>Modify Top and Bottom Profile of Curved Wall with Embedded Wall</li>
<li>Extend Top of Curved Wall toUnderside of a Curved Stair</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:48:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Custom Family - View Titles in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-view-titles-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-view-titles-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_viewtitle_s_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This is a great series for customizing your View Titles with Labels and Linework so they look like they used to.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Here we build on the existing View Title annotation family which is embedded in the system family Viewport.  This is a great series for customizing your View Titles with Labels and Linework so they look like they used to. Once you get the hang of this you can then use that exact same knowledge to customize other REVIT annotation families such as View Reference families.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Edit and Create a View Title Family</li>
<li>View Title Family Labels</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:54:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Custom Family - Basic Arched Window in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-basic-arched-window-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-basic-arched-window-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_bascarch_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inside are 23 very detailed lessons that teach you 100's of tips on creating useful robust families by means of a Window.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Inside are 23 very detailed lessons that teach you 100's of tips on creating useful robust families by means of a Window. We cover family templates categories parameters types sketching tips sweeps extrusions reference planes join geometry visibility control symbolic lines object styles materials type catalogs and our newly coined "4b" approach of creating families. Watch learn and create because the lessons learned here give you the tools you need to make REVIT get up and dance.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction and Final Outcome</li>
<li>New Family with CADclips '4b' Approach</li>
<li>Create the Arc Height Parameter</li>
<li>Create the Arc Rise Body</li>
<li>Balance the Height, Width and Rise Parameters</li>
<li>Create the Batten Brains, Bones and then Balance</li>
<li>Create the Exterior and Interior Reference Planes</li>
<li>Model the Batten Board</li>
<li>Balance the Family in the Project</li>
<li>Create the Window Frame Brains</li>
<li>Create the Front Window Frame Body</li>
<li>Create the Interior Window Frame Body</li>
<li>Model the Glass Extrusion Body</li>
<li>Balance the Family in the Project</li>
<li>Add a Yes/No Parameter for Visibility Control of the Batten</li>
<li>More Visibility Controls</li>
<li>Create Symbolic Linework</li>
<li>Family Materials and Render the Window</li>
<li>Materials by Category and Sub-Category</li>
<li>Materials with New Sub-Category</li>
<li>Materials by Parameter</li>
<li>Add a Flip Control</li>
<li>Create New Family Types</li>
<li>Create a Family Type Catalog</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:50:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Custom Family - Fancy Metal Railing in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-fancy-metal-railing-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/custom-family-fancy-metal-railing-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_metlrail_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Become a wiz at parametric formula driven arrays using nested family components and nested parameters within a generic linear based family.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>It's all here starting with the CADclips newly coined "4b"; approach to making families (see below).  Become a wiz at parametric formula driven arrays using nested family components and nested parameters within a generic linear based family.  Not to mention a few priceless lessons on sketch lines and reference planes. "4b" - Brains, Bones, Balance and Body.  This newly adopted method of explaining how to successfully create REVIT content is a wonderful thing. What does it mean?  Always create the parameters reference planes and constraints (Brain and Bones) and flex those objects (Balance) before you ever create the solid geometry (Body). You will get MUCH better results if everything flexes ok BEFORE you start to create the Body and align and constrained that solid geometry to the reference planes (Bones). The tendency is to jump to the Body aspect too soon and to NOT use enough reference planes. Sketch lines LOVE reference planes and reference planes are easy to control. Most people are not aware that you can also align and constrain the end points of sketch lines and arcs to reference planes.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>4b - Brains Bones Balance Body</li>
<li>Top Rail and End Posts</li>
<li>Bottom Rail, Project Flex and Flip Control</li>
<li>Straight Picket Family</li>
<li>Load Picket and Dynamic Array with Formula</li>
<li>Picket Fix with Nested Parameter</li>
<li>Parameters Family Type Category</li>
<li>Curved Picket</li>
<li>Nested Family and Picket Style</li>
<li>Materials and Render</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:53:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Walkthroughs in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/walkthroughs-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/walkthroughs-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_walkthru_sm_3.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>These 9 lessons are packed with tips on creating, editing, and exporting various walkthroughs in Revit Architecture 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>These 9 lessons are packed with tips on creating, editing, and exporting various walkthroughs. Along with maneuvering up and down stairs we also provide tips on optimizing your walkthrough editing time.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Walkthrough Stair Demo</li>
<li>Introduction to Walkthroughs</li>
<li>Make New Walkthrough</li>
<li>Walkthrough Flyover</li>
<li>Walkthrough Flyover Editing and Controls</li>
<li>Walkthrough Exterior and Interior with Controls</li>
<li>Export Walkthrough to Avi</li>
<li>Walkthrough Stairs Using Tiled Windows</li>
<li>Walkthrough Camera and Path - 3D Controls</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:15:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Site Plans and Topo Surfaces in Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/site-plans-and-topo-surfaces-in-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/site-plans-and-topo-surfaces-in-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_siteplan_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>We practice several different ways of creating Site Plans and Topo Surfaces by importing a DWG importing a Points file or manually creating new data.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>We practice several different ways of creating Site Plans and Topo Surfaces by importing a DWG importing a Points file or manually creating new data.  We also learn to use the surface editing tools site settings project base point true north / project north contours merge surface split surface materials property lines tagging parking components site (landscape) components scheduling building pads with or without wall constraints and much more.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Import a Dwg File for Site Plan</li>
<li>Topo Surface By Manually Placing Geodetic Points</li>
<li>Topo Surface By Imported 3D Dwg File</li>
<li>Topo Surface By Imported 3D Points File</li>
<li>Property Lines and Tagging</li>
<li>Sub Regions</li>
<li>Split and Merge Surfaces</li>
<li>3D Section Box and Poche Depth</li>
<li>Project North and True North Using Project Base Point</li>
<li>Foundation Walls</li>
<li>Building Pads</li>
<li>Building Pad Using Wall Constraints</li>
<li>Parking Components</li>
<li>Site Components and Planting</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:29:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Get Your Feet Wet with Revit Architecture 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/get-your-feet-wet-with-revit-architecture-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/get-your-feet-wet-with-revit-architecture-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_revitarch10_walkthru_sm_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Get Your Feet Wet with Revit Architecture 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Here we provide a nice easy set of lessons to help introduce you to RAC 2010 and educate you on some of the major changes and new features.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Where is My Command?</li>
<li>Help</li>
<li>The Windows Ribbon Panel</li>
<li>Recording Issue Fixed</li>
<li>Application Pull-Down Menu</li>
<li>User Interface Overview</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Conceptual Massing Environment</li>
<li>Load Conceptual Mass Into Project</li>
<li>Settings</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:43:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Alignment Offsets and Widenings in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignment-offsets-and-widenings-in-civil-3d-2010-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignment-offsets-and-widenings-in-civil-3d-2010-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_alnoffsetweb_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this cloudDVD you will learn  how to use the alignment offset and widening features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this cloudDVD you will learn how to use the alignment offset and widening features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  A live recorded instructor shows you the tips and techniques for modeling turn lanes acceleration lanes and deceleration lanes using alignment offsets and widenings. The final chapter walks you through a practical example for creating the geometry for a "T" intersection.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Offset Alignments 
<ul>
<li>- Offset Alignment and Widening Overview</li>
<li>- Create Centerline Alignment</li>
<li>- Review Alignment Categories</li>
<li>- Create Offset Alignment</li>
<li>- Offset Alignment Reactivity</li>
<li>- Offset Alignments in Prospector</li>
<li>- Offset Alignment Properties</li>
<li>- Edit Offset Alignment Parameters</li>
<li>- Delete Offset Alignments</li>
<li>- Create Variable Offsets</li>
<li>- Command Settings</li>
<li>- Offset Alignment Grips</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Widenings 
<ul>
<li>- Widening Overview</li>
<li>- Create Widening</li>
<li>- Widening Offset Value</li>
<li>- Edit Offset Parameters</li>
<li>- Regions and Transitions</li>
<li>- Edit Widenings Using Grips</li>
<li>- Model Acceleration or Deceleration Lane</li>
<li>- Widening Command Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Practical Example 
<ul>
<li>- Review Geometry</li>
<li>- Median Geometry</li>
<li>- Change Styles</li>
<li>- Lanes and Pavement Edges</li>
<li>- Acceleration or Deceleration Lane</li>
<li>- Modify Widening Offset</li>
<li>- Reposition Transitions</li>
<li>- Shoulders</li>
<li>- Masking</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp:</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:41:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Alignments in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignments-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignments-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_align_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBase you will learn how to create manage and modify horizontal alignments in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook you will learn how to create manage and modify horizontal alignments in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  Watch and listen to an instructor guide you through the steps required to create and edit alignment geometry modify alignment properties use design criteria and superelevation and create and apply both object and label styles.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Alignments Overview 
<ul>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Contextual Ribbon</li>
<li>Prospector</li>
<li>Settings - Command Settings</li>
<li>Drawing Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments From Objects 
<ul>
<li>Alignment From Polyline</li>
<li>Alignments and Sites</li>
<li>Rename Alignment</li>
<li>From Lines and Arcs</li>
<li>Reverse Direction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools 
<ul>
<li>Delete Alignment</li>
<li>Alignment Creation Tools</li>
<li>Alignment Layout Tools Toolbar</li>
<li>Convert Lines and Arcs</li>
<li>Create Tangents</li>
<li>Delete Sub-Entity</li>
<li>Create Tangents With Curves</li>
<li>Create Tangents with Curves and Spirals</li>
<li>Create Curves Between Tangents</li>
<li>Create Curve Through Point</li>
<li>Best Fit Curve</li>
<li>Spiral Curve Spiral</li>
<li>Insert PI</li>
<li>Delete PI</li>
<li>Break Apart PI</li>
<li>Edit Alignment Geometry</li>
<li>Fixed Floating Free</li>
<li>Reverse Curve</li>
<li>Compound Curve</li>
<li>Compound Spiral</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Methods</li>
<li>Graphical Editing</li>
<li>Tangent Azimuth</li>
<li>Move Tangent </li>
<li>Curve Radius</li>
<li>Break Apart PI</li>
<li>Floating Curve Grips</li>
<li>Radius Snap</li>
<li>Edit Data in Table</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Properties 
<ul>
<li>Access Alignment Properties</li>
<li>Alignment Properties Overview</li>
<li>Assign Station Values</li>
<li>Station Equations</li>
<li>Design Speed</li>
<li>Design Criteria Overview </li>
<li>Superelevation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Styles 
<ul>
<li>Settings</li>
<li>Strategies</li>
<li>Components</li>
<li>Radius Snap</li>
<li>Create Alignment Style</li>
<li>Assign an Alignment Style</li>
<li>Default Alignment Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Labels 
<ul>
<li>Settings</li>
<li>Label Sets and Station Labels</li>
<li>Other Label Styles</li>
<li>Station Label Styles</li>
<li>Apply Station Labels</li>
<li>Station Label Increment</li>
<li>Add Geometry Point Label</li>
<li>Label Specific Geometry Points</li>
<li>Apply Label Set</li>
<li>Create a Label Set</li>
<li>Superelevation Labels</li>
<li>Major Station Label Style</li>
<li>Station Offset Label Styles</li>
<li>AutoCAD Properties</li>
<li>Create Station Elevation Label Style</li>
<li>Apply Station Elevation Label Style</li>
<li>Geometry Labels</li>
<li>Apply Multiple Segment Labels</li>
<li>Tag Labels and Tables</li>
<li>Alignment Table Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:45:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Geospatial for Engineers in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/geospatial-for-engineers-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/geospatial-for-engineers-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_geospat_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Geospatial for Engineers is a 90 min class on using GIS data in Civil 3D. The class covers how connect stylize and analysis GIS data to produce and create Maps typically used in a Civil Engineering Design project.  Queries Transparencies Zoning Maps and Slope Analysis Maps are some of the topics covered in this class.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Geospatial for Engineers is a 90 min class on using GIS data in Civil 3D. The class covers how connect stylize and analysis GIS data to produce and create Maps typically used in a Civil Engineering Design project.  Queries Transparencies Zoning Maps and Slope Analysis Maps are some of the topics covered in this class.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Agenda</li>
<li>Raster vs Vector Data 
<ul>
<li>Connect to Raster Data</li>
<li>Connect to Vector Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Coordinate Systems 
<ul>
<li>Set Coordinate System-Civil 3D</li>
<li>Set Coordinate System-Map 3D</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Queries 
<ul>
<li>Location Query</li>
<li>Property Query</li>
<li>Combination Query</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Mapping with GIS Data 
<ul>
<li>Style Data</li>
<li>Style By Rule</li>
<li>Create Transparency</li>
<li>Add Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Spatial Analysis 
<ul>
<li>Buffer Analysis</li>
<li>Overlay Analysis</li>
<li>Zoning Map</li>
<li>Slope Analysis</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:41:49 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Plan Production in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/plan-production-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/plan-production-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_planprd_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This 90 min Plan Production class covers setting up a project directory structure project drawings and then using the Sheet Set Manager to create a set of construction drawings.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This 90 min Plan Production class covers setting up a project directory structure project drawings and then using the Sheet Set Manager to create a set of construction drawings. Creating Cross Section Sheets Plan and Profile Sheets Cover sheets are all covered in this class. Additionally we will show you how to setup the Drawing Templates and configure the Sheets Set  to make creating Construction Documents a breeze.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Directory Structure</li>
<li>Project Working Folder</li>
<li>Design Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Existing Ground</li>
<li>Create Data Shortcut</li>
<li>Design Layout Drawing</li>
<li>Create Reference</li>
<li>Corridors and Sections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create New Sheet Set 
<ul>
<li>Sheet Details</li>
<li>Sheet Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Sheets 
<ul>
<li>Site Plan Sheet</li>
<li>X-Section Sheets</li>
<li>Centerline Profile Shee</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Elevation Analysis Drawing</li>
<li>Create Plan Profile Sheets 
<ul>
<li>Create View Frames</li>
<li>Create Sheet Manual</li>
<li>Plan Profile Sheets</li>
<li>Adjust Profile View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Plot and Publish 
<ul>
<li>Page Setup Overrides</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Configure DWT and DST 
<ul>
<li>Insert Field</li>
<li>Edit Custom Properties</li>
<li>Save DWT</li>
<li>Map DWT to Sheet Set</li>
<li>Cover Sheet</li>
<li>Plan Profile DWT</li>
<li>Page Setups</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tips 
<ul>
<li>Create Shortcut to folder</li>
<li>Rename Renumber</li>
<li>Import Drawings</li>
<li>Create Custom Scale</li>
<li>Set Sheet Properties</li>
<li>DVIEW Twist </li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Conclusion</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:54:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Google Earth for Engineers and Surveyors]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-earth-for-engineers-and-surveyors.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/google-earth-for-engineers-and-surveyors.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_googleearth_es_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Learn how you can incorporate this free yet powerful software application Google Earth to enhance your engineering planning and surveying work flows.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Learn how you can incorporate this free yet powerful software application Google Earth to enhance your engineering planning and surveying work flows. This vBook will present Google Earth tools and features and demonstrate how to incorporate these tools with AutoCAD Civil 3D.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Presentation</li>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Download</li>
<li>Compare Products</li>
<li>Navigation</li>
<li>File Menu</li>
<li>Edit Menu</li>
<li>View Menu</li>
<li>Tools Menu</li>
<li>Options</li>
<li>Layers</li>
<li>Street View</li>
<li>Add Data</li>
<li>Insert Image in Civil 3D</li>
<li>Publish Civil 3D to Google Earth</li>
<li>Virtual Site Visit</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:34:45 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Hydraulics and Hydrology in Civil 3D 2010 Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraulics-and-hydrology-in-civil-3d-2010-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraulics-and-hydrology-in-civil-3d-2010-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_hydro_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Hydrology and Hydraulics in Civil 3D 2010 training manual provides the knowledge you need to practically apply the Hydraflow Extensions in an efficient manner. The lecture contains a discussion of Hydrologic and Hydraulic Engineering principals required to apply the tools available to you in Civil 3D and the Hydraflow Extensions.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Hydrology and Hydraulics in Civil 3D 2010 training manual provides the knowledge you need to practically apply the Hydraflow Extensions in an efficient manner.  The lecture contains a discussion of Hydrologic and Hydraulic Engineering principals required to apply the tools available to you in Civil 3D and the Hydraflow Extensions.  The user is then guided through numerous exercises demonstrating software use on applications such as runoff calculations culverts weirs inlets channels detention basins and storm sewer networks.  Workflow when analyzing Civil 3D pipe networks in Hydraflow is also demonstrated.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction Hydrology Basics 
<ul>
<li>Drainage Areas</li>
<li>Time of Concentration</li>
<li>Rainfal</li>
<li>Runoff Coefficients</li>
<li>Hydrographs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hydraulic Applications 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Hydraflow Express Software</li>
<li>IDF Curves</li>
<li>SCS Precipitation Data</li>
<li>Rational Hydrograph</li>
<li>Modified Rational Hydrograph</li>
<li>SCS Hydrograph</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hydraulic Applications 
<ul>
<li>Culvert Basics</li>
<li>Culvert Analysis</li>
<li>Open Channel Analysis</li>
<li>Inlet Basics</li>
<li>Inlet Analysis</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Storm Network Analysis 
<ul>
<li>Description of Pipe Network</li>
<li>Exporting Pipes to Hydraflow</li>
<li>Network Data Entry</li>
<li>Design Codes &amp; IDF Curves</li>
<li>Pipe Flow Data</li>
<li>Computing the System</li>
<li>Import Network back into Civil 3D</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Detention Ponds 
<ul>
<li>IDF and Precipitation Data</li>
<li>Pre-Development Hydrograph</li>
<li>Post-Development Hydrograph</li>
<li>Pond Stage-Storage Design</li>
<li>Pond Tools</li>
<li>Outlet Structure</li>
<li>Pond Routing</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:18:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Profiles in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/profiles-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/profiles-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_profiles_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBase you will learn  how to efficiently work with profiles and profile views in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook you will learn how to efficiently work with profiles and profile views in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  Watch and learn as an instructor guides you through topics such as surface profiles layout profiles profile views object and label styles design criteria profile projections and superimposed profiles.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Profiles Overview 
<ul>
<li>Profiles and Profile Views</li>
<li>Create Surface Profile</li>
<li>Dynamic Profile</li>
<li>Prospector</li>
<li>Command Settings Layout Profiles</li>
<li>Create Layout Profile</li>
<li>Naming Templates</li>
<li>Command Review</li>
<li>Vertical Curve Settings</li>
<li>Draw Tangents</li>
<li>Draw Tangents With Curves</li>
<li>Delete Vertical Curves</li>
<li>Create Curves Between Tangents</li>
<li>Pass Through Point</li>
<li>Profile Styles</li>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Station and Elevation</li>
<li>Grade and Station</li>
<li>Grade and Length</li>
<li>Profile From Plan</li>
<li>Station Elevation From Plan</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Layout Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Grips</li>
<li>Edit in a Table</li>
<li>Column Display</li>
<li>Edit Grades</li>
<li>Lock PVI</li>
<li>Edit PVI Data</li>
<li>Edit Entity Data</li>
<li>Copy Profile</li>
<li>Profile Display</li>
<li>Rename Profile</li>
<li>Raise Lower a Profile</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile View Properties 
<ul>
<li>Profile View Properties Command</li>
<li>Rename Profile View</li>
<li>Assign a Profile View Style</li>
<li>Move a Profile View</li>
<li>Profile Display</li>
<li>Display Bands</li>
<li>Elevations in Bands</li>
<li>Delete Profile View</li>
<li>Multiple Profile Views</li>
<li>Split Profile Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile View Styles 
<ul>
<li>Profile View Style Overview</li>
<li>Create Profile View Style</li>
<li>Grid Settings</li>
<li>Title Annotation</li>
<li>Axis Display</li>
<li>Profile View Components</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile View Label Styles 
<ul>
<li>Settings</li>
<li>Station Elevation Label Style</li>
<li>Apply Profile View Label</li>
<li>Anchor and Attachment</li>
<li>Change Label Style</li>
<li>Projection Label Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile View Bands 
<ul>
<li>Bands in Settings</li>
<li>Band Set</li>
<li>Remove a Band</li>
<li>Horizontal Geometry Band</li>
<li>Relative Band Position</li>
<li>Review the Band Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Design Criteria 
<ul>
<li>Requirements</li>
<li>Assign Design Speeds</li>
<li>Design Criteria File</li>
<li>Remove Passing Sight Distance</li>
<li>Enable Criteria Based Design</li>
<li>Warning Symbol</li>
<li>Profile Style Strategies</li>
<li>Substandard Curves</li>
<li>Graphically</li>
<li>Substandard Curves</li>
<li>Table</li>
<li>Create Profiles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Projections and Hatching 
<ul>
<li>Supported Objects</li>
<li>Project Feature Line</li>
<li>Project Points</li>
<li>Projection Point Label Style</li>
<li>Zoom to Source</li>
<li>Profile View Hatching</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile Types and Superimposed</li>
<li>Quick Profile</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp:</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:07:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Points in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_points_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBase addresses point related functionality in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. Watch and listen to an instructor discuss all aspects of creating, managing, displaying, and working with points.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook addresses point related functionality in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  Watch and listen to an instructor discuss all aspects of creating managing displaying and working with points.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Point Groups 
<ul>
<li>Point Group Overview</li>
<li>Delete Point Group</li>
<li>Point Group - Desc</li>
<li>Point Group - Elev</li>
<li>Point Group - Surface</li>
<li>Case Sensitivity</li>
<li>Point Group</li>
<li>Groups</li>
<li>Update Point Group</li>
<li>Point Group Sort Order</li>
<li>Point Groups in DWT</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Points 
<ul>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
<li>Ribbon</li>
<li>Import Points</li>
<li>Land Desktop Points</li>
<li>Create Manually</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Points in Prospector 
<ul>
<li>Item View Area</li>
<li>Column Display</li>
<li>Sort Data</li>
<li>Transformation Settings</li>
<li>Styles</li>
<li>Hide Columns</li>
<li>Relocate a Column</li>
<li>Right Click Menu</li>
<li>Edit Points</li>
<li>Zoom and Pan</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Styles 
<ul>
<li>Point Style</li>
<li>Drawing Scale</li>
<li>Viewport Scale</li>
<li>Z Coordinate</li>
<li>Label Style Overview</li>
<li>Label Styles Collection</li>
<li>Create Point Label Style</li>
<li>Apply Label Style</li>
<li>Point Label Rotation</li>
<li>Create Point Style</li>
<li>Apply Point Style</li>
<li>Rotate Point Style</li>
<li>Expressions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Grips 
<ul>
<li>Drag Point</li>
<li>Rotate Point</li>
<li>Drag Label</li>
<li>Dragged State Display</li>
<li>Sub-Item Grip</li>
<li>Reset Label Location</li>
<li>Override Point Label</li>
<li>Clear Label Override</li>
<li>Resize Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Description Keys 
<ul>
<li>Description Keys Overview</li>
<li>Alternate Point Descriptions</li>
<li>Apply Description Keys</li>
<li>Disable Description Keys</li>
<li>Enable Description Keys</li>
<li>Create Description Key</li>
<li>Re-Apply Description Keys</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Tables 
<ul>
<li>Create Point Table</li>
<li>Edit Table Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Command Settings 
<ul>
<li>Command Settings in Toolspace</li>
<li>Create Points</li>
<li>Create Points Toolbar</li>
<li>Default Layer</li>
<li>Default Description</li>
<li>Default Elevation</li>
<li>Default Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transparent Commands 
<ul>
<li>Transparent Commands Toolbar</li>
<li>Point Object</li>
<li>Point Number</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:56:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-pipe-and-tube-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-pipe-and-tube-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_invntr10_pt_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Inventor 2010 Pipe and Tube training manual give you a basic introduction and walkthrough of a basic tube and pipe run using Inventor 2010. How to setup styles make a run and to understand the file structure in Inventor 2010. Captioning is available in the training manual in English French German Spanish and Italian.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Basics 
<ul>
<li>Folder Structure</li>
<li>Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>First Route 
<ul>
<li>File Naming</li>
<li>Picking</li>
<li>3D Dynamic Route Tool</li>
<li>Populate</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Outputs 
<ul>
<li>Place from Content Center</li>
<li>Isogen Output</li>
<li>Gravity</li>
<li>BOM</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drafting 
<ul>
<li>Drafting of Pipe run</li>
<li>Annotation</li>
<li>Parts List</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:37:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Inventor 2010 Framework Generator Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-framework-generator-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/inventor-2010-framework-generator-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_invntr10_fwg_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2010 Framework Generator Training</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Inventor 2010 Framework Generator training manual will show you how create a welded steel structural frame create your own standards cross sections and how to modify a frame. Captioning is available in the training manuals in English French German Spanish and Italian.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Benefits of Frame Generator</li>
<li>Basic Frames 
<ul>
<li>Skeleton Part in an Assembly</li>
<li>Insert Frames</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Frames (continued) 
<ul>
<li>End Conditions on a Frame</li>
<li>Frame Member Information</li>
<li>Beam Column Calculator</li>
<li>Modifying a Frame Member</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Advanced Frame Generator 
<ul>
<li>Best Practices with Frame Generator</li>
<li>Moving and rotating assembly components into place</li>
<li>Drawing of the Frame</li>
<li>Modifying the Overall Size of the Frame</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">30.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:36:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Parcels in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_parcels_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Parcels in Civil 3D 2010 vBase goes deeper into the parcel creation tools in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010 using live recorded lectures.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Parcels in Civil 3D 2010 vBook goes deeper into the parcel creation tools in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010 using live-recorded lectures. This vBook will cover the basic characteristics styles and object creation methods relating to the Parcel Object feature.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Prepare the Data</li>
<li>Parcel Characteristics</li>
<li>Parcel Properties</li>
<li>Parcel Styles</li>
<li>Create Parcel from Objects</li>
<li>Create Parcel by Layout  
<ul>
<li>Free Form Create</li>
<li>Add Fixed Line</li>
<li>Add Fixed Curve</li>
<li>Draw Tangent-Tangent</li>
<li>Slide Line</li>
<li>Swing Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Parcel Segments  
<ul>
<li>Slide Angle Edit</li>
<li>Swing Line Edit</li>
<li>Insert PI</li>
<li>Delete PI</li>
<li>Delete Sub-Entity</li>
<li>Parcel Union</li>
<li>Break Apart PI</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel Labels</li>
<li>Create a Cul-de-sac</li>
<li>Drainage Area Parcels</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:32:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Design Environment in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_dsnenv_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Design Environment in Civil 3D 2010 vBase provides live recorded lecture and knowledge on many of the features found in Civil 3D 2010 that are not Civil 3D Object specific.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Design Environment in Civil 3D 2010 vBook provides live recorded lecture and knowledge on many of the features found in Civil 3D 2010 that are not Civil 3D Object specific. The features covered in this vBook include; the workspace, the toolspace, the tool pallets, design center, tool tips, etc. These are the dialog boxes and tools used everyday in AutoCAD Civil 3D but not typically covered in depth in many classes. We will dig deeper into the feature and its use in this vBook.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Workspace</li>
<li>Tool Palettes 
<ul>
<li>Create Palette</li>
<li>Share Palette</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Design Center</li>
<li>Drawing Recovery Manager 
<ul>
<li>Fix Corrupted Drawings</li>
<li>RECOVER Command</li>
<li>INSERT Command</li>
<li>WBLOCK Command</li>
<li>DXFOUT-DXFIN Command</li>
<li>Restore Layout Tabs</li>
<li>Map 3D</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Object Viewer</li>
<li>Event Viewer</li>
<li>Notes</li>
<li>Viewports</li>
<li>Tool Tips</li>
<li>Toolspace</li>
<li>Inquiry Tools</li>
<li>Named Views</li>
<li>&nbsp;Layer Manager 
<ul>
<li>Unreconciled Layers</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:15:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2010 Geospatial Training Manual]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-geospatial-training-manual.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-geospatial-training-manual.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d10_geospat_1_sm.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Map 3D 2010 Geospatial Essentials training vBook is focused on Feature-Source technology allowing direct access to your geospatial data (Shape files SDFs Oracle ESRI SDE etc) without translating or importing that data into your drawing file.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Map 3D 2010 Geospatial Essentials training manual is focused on Feature-Source technology allowing direct access to your geospatial data (Shape files SDFs Oracle ESRI SDE etc) without translating or importing that data into your drawing file. The course starts off experimenting with the new ribbon-based user interface for accessing geospatial data including vectors raster and direct access to point data from a database. The course then walks the user through styling feature-sources for thematic representation followed by direct editing capabilities of your attached features. A section on Managing Features instructs the user on how to move data from one feature-source to another and extending your data with feature joins calculations and buffers. Finally we end the performance-based training with a look at 2010's new Feature Overlay technology and data workflows.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>CAD vs. GIS</li>
<li>Geospatial Data Stores</li>
<li>Autodesk Geospatial Value Chain</li>
<li>Map 3D interface</li>
<li>AutoCAD Map 3D 2010 Essentials Agenda</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Connecting Features 
<ul>
<li>Connecting to Feature Sources Introduction</li>
<li>About Feature Sources</li>
<li>File-Based Feature Source</li>
<li>Database Feature Sources</li>
<li>Open GIS Feature Sources</li>
<li>Examples of Feature Sources in Map 3D</li>
<li>Guidelines for Connecting to Feature Sources</li>
<li>Connecting to an Autodesk SDF3 Feature Source</li>
<li>Connecting to Raster Reature Source</li>
<li>Connecting to a Shapefile</li>
<li>Add Feature Source to Map with Query</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Points 
<ul>
<li>Working with Point Data</li>
<li>About Point Data</li>
<li>Viewing a Point Database</li>
<li>Create an ODBC Connection (DSN)</li>
<li>Connect to the Point DB in Map 3D</li>
<li>Reorder Layers in Display Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>L3: DEM 
<ul>
<li>Working with Digital Elevation Models</li>
<li>DEM Formats</li>
<li>When to use DEM Data - DEM Styles</li>
<li>Surface Exaggeration</li>
<li>Connecting to a DEM in Map 3D</li>
<li>Stylizing a DEM in Map 3D</li>
<li>Viewing DEM in 3D</li>
<li>Build Contours from DEM</li>
<li>Overlay Imagery and Vectors on DEM</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Stylizing Features 
<ul>
<li>Stylizing Features</li>
<li>Add Data to Map</li>
<li>Theme Polygons from Attributes</li>
<li>Applying a Scale Range</li>
<li>Theme Parcels based on Land Value</li>
<li>Create Composite Line Style</li>
<li>Create Line Labels - Advanced and Multi-Line</li>
<li>Thematic Line Stylization</li>
<li>Saving Stylization to a .Layer File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Feature 
<ul>
<li>Editing Feature Attributes and Geometry</li>
<li>Editable Feature Sources</li>
<li>Editing Process &amp; Workflow</li>
<li>Create a New Parcel Feature</li>
<li>Update Features from Geometry</li>
<li>Extract Geometry From Feature</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Data 
<ul>
<li>Feature Source Data Management and Analysis</li>
<li>Introduction to Bulk Copy</li>
<li>Introduction to the Schema Editor</li>
<li>Introduction to Joins and Calculations</li>
<li>Introduction to Feature Overlays</li>
<li>Workflow - Create a single SDF from Multiple Shapefiles</li>
<li>Using the Schema Editor to Create a New SDF</li>
<li>Creating Attribute Constraints in Schema Editor</li>
<li>Joining Feature Sources with external database</li>
<li>Exporting Layer Data to New SDF</li>
<li>Creating Attribute Calculations</li>
<li>Feature Overlay Analysis</li>
<li>Create a Feature Buffer</li>
<li>Select by Location</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wrap-up and Re-Cap</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:50:58 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2010 Essentials Training Manual]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-essentials-training-manual.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2010-essentials-training-manual.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_map3d10_essent_1_sm_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Map 3D 2010 Essentials training vBook will explain the fundamentals of "Drawing-Based Objects" in a practical and easy-to-follow curriculum. The performance-based training focuses on both Non-Geospatial and Geospatial data.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Map 3D Essentials training manual will  explain the fundamentals of "Drawing-Based Objects" in a practical and easy-to-follow curriculum. The performance-based training focuses on both Non-Geospatial and Geospatial data. The manual covers Drawing Cleanup Linking Source Drawings for Multi-User Access to your Drawing Files Stylizing Drawings and Plotting Maps. Geospatial specific topics include: Coordinate Systems Working with Object Data (attributes) Classification (CAD Standards) Reprojecting Data and Importing and Exporting Geospatial Data (Shape files SDFs DGN MapInfo).  The session wraps up with a complete workflow taking your CAD/Drawing-Based data classifying it for geospatial integration then exporting your data into a geospatial data format with a preview of feature-source technology highlighted in the Geospatial Essentials curriculum.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>CAD vs. GIS</li>
<li>Geospatial Data Stores</li>
<li>Autodesk Geospatial Value Chain</li>
<li>AutoCAD Map 3D 2010 Essentials Agenda</li>
<li>Map 3D interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>CoGo 
<ul>
<li>CoGo Interface and Tools</li>
<li>CoGo Dynamic Input</li>
<li>CoGo Distances and Inverse Reports</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Cleanup 
<ul>
<li>Drawing Cleanup Introduction and Cleanup Parameters</li>
<li>Select Objects</li>
<li>Cleanup Actions</li>
<li>Cleanup Methods</li>
<li>Error Markers and Correcting Errors</li>
<li>Cleaning Imported Shapefile Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Data 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Object Data</li>
<li>Viewing Object Data</li>
<li>Define Object Data</li>
<li>Attach Object Data</li>
<li>Editing Object Data Fields</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Importing and Exporting Data</li>
<li>Importing Geospatial Data</li>
<li>Viewing and Editing Imported Data</li>
<li>Exporting Drawing Data to Geospatial Data Format</li>
<li>Creating a Multi-Feature SDF File from different Layers</li>
<li>Connecting to SDF File with Multiple Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Raster 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Raster Data</li>
<li>Raster Design Object Enabler</li>
<li>Inserting a Raster Image</li>
<li>Image Tools</li>
<li>Adjust Image Settings</li>
<li>Using Data Connect for Imagery</li>
<li>Using Data Connect for DEMs</li>
<li>Viewing DEMs in 3D</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Source Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Source Drawings</li>
<li>About Source Drawings</li>
<li>Accessing Source Drawings</li>
<li>How are Source Drawings Used</li>
<li>Multi-User Access</li>
<li>Tiled and Coincident Drawings</li>
<li>Source Drawing Projections</li>
<li>Drive Alias</li>
<li>Creating a Drive Alias Exercise</li>
<li>Select Drawings to Attach</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Coordinate Systems 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Coordinate Systems</li>
<li>Reprojecting Source Drawings in Map 3D</li>
<li>Reprojecting Using Map Import</li>
<li>Reprojecting Using Map Export</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Source Drawing Query 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Source Drawing Queries</li>
<li>Query Modes</li>
<li>Location and Property Conditions</li>
<li>Define Query of Attached Drawings</li>
<li>Compound Query</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Save Backs 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Save Backs</li>
<li>Editing Process</li>
<li>Save Back Options</li>
<li>Save Query</li>
<li>User Login</li>
<li>Save Set and Save Back</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Topology 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Drawing-Based Topology</li>
<li>Network Topology</li>
<li>Polygon Topology Overlays</li>
<li>Creating Network Topology</li>
<li>Network Analysis</li>
<li>Creating Polygon Topology</li>
<li>Polygon Topology Analysis</li>
<li>Editing Polygon Topology</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Stylizing Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Stylizing and Displaying Maps</li>
<li>Creating a New Map</li>
<li>Adding Style Elements</li>
<li>Thematic Styling of Source Drawing</li>
<li>Create Legend</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Map Books 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Map Books</li>
<li>Creating a Map Book</li>
<li>Template Source</li>
<li>Tiling Scheme</li>
<li>Naming Schemes</li>
<li>Key</li>
<li>Generate SheetSet</li>
<li>Viewing the Map Book Layouts</li>
<li>Publish to Autodesk DWF Format</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Workflow 
<ul>
<li>Moving your data from Drawing Objects to Feature Sources</li>
<li>Load a Classification Template</li>
<li>Understanding Metadata</li>
<li>Bring in Base Data</li>
<li>Map Import of SDF3 Data</li>
<li>Classify Pipe Data using Classification Template</li>
<li>Modifying Classification Properties</li>
<li>Create a New Classification</li>
<li>Add DEM &amp; Imagery via Data Connect</li>
<li>Export Classified Data to SDF3</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">65.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:49:27 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2010 for Engineers and Surveyors Training Manual]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-for-engineers-and-surveyors-training-manual.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2010-for-engineers-and-surveyors-training-manual.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_acad10_srvyeng_1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This training manual is designed to teach Basic AutoCAD to those users in the Civil Engineering and Land Surveying Industries.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This training manual is designed to teach Basic AutoCAD to those users in the Civil Engineering and Land Surveying Industries. Through a series of classroom lectures the user will be taught how to navigate and use basic AutoCAD tools that are a recommended prerequisite for the Civil 3D 2010 Essentials training manuals. Even those who have used AutoCAD for many years can benefit from this course.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li> User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Home Tab</li>
<li>Insert Tab</li>
<li>Annotate Tab</li>
<li>Parametric Tab</li>
<li>View Tab</li>
<li>Manage Tab</li>
<li>Output Tab</li>
<li>Express Tools Tab</li>
<li>Minimize Panels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Options 
<ul>
<li>Files Tab</li>
<li>Display Tab</li>
<li>Open and Save Tab</li>
<li>Plot and Publish Tab</li>
<li>System Tab</li>
<li>User Preferences Tab</li>
<li>Drafting Tab</li>
<li>3D Modeling Tab</li>
<li>Selection Tab</li>
<li>Profiles Tab</li>
<li>AEC Editor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Control 
<ul>
<li>ESC Key</li>
<li>Space Bar &amp; Enter Key</li>
<li>Ctrl Z, Ctrl C &amp; Ctrl V</li>
<li>Left Click &amp; Ctrl Left Click</li>
<li>Right Click</li>
<li>Short Cut Menu</li>
<li>Shift Right Click</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Open New Drawing</li>
<li>Save Drawing</li>
<li>Open AutoCAD Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Commands 
<ul>
<li>Drawing a Line</li>
<li>Dynamic Input</li>
<li>Drawing an Arc</li>
<li>Drawing a Polyline</li>
<li>Drawing a Circle</li>
<li>Drawing a Rectangle</li>
<li>Ellipse / Hatch</li>
<li>Spline / Polygon</li>
<li>Construction Line / Ray</li>
<li>Boundary</li>
<li>Region, Revision Cloud, and Wipeout</li>
<li>3D Polyline, Helix, and Donu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>&nbsp;Snaps 
<ul>
<li>Object Snaps</li>
<li>Temporary Snap Override</li>
<li>Extension Snap</li>
<li>Tracking Tools</li>
<li>Ortho / Polar Tracking</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modifying Objects 
<ul>
<li>Grips</li>
<li>Move / Copy</li>
<li>Rotate</li>
<li>Stretch</li>
<li>Scale</li>
<li>Offset</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Extend / Trim</li>
<li>Erase</li>
<li>Explode</li>
<li>Array</li>
<li>Fillet / Chamfer</li>
<li>Lengthen</li>
<li>Polyline</li>
<li>Break / Break at Point</li>
<li>Join</li>
<li>Reverse</li>
<li>Wrapup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Properties 
<ul>
<li>Object Properties Manager</li>
<li>Quick Properties</li>
<li>Customize Quick Properties</li>
<li>Match Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layer Control 
<ul>
<li>Layer Overview</li>
<li>Layers Panel</li>
<li>Layer State</li>
<li>Layer Drop-down</li>
<li>Layer Tools</li>
<li>Layer Properties</li>
<li>Layer Filters</li>
<li>Wrapup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text</li>
<li>Dimensions 
<ul>
<li>Dimensions Overview</li>
<li>Dimension Options Multileader</li>
<li>Multileader Overview</li>
<li>Add and Delete Multileader</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hatch 
<ul>
<li>Hatch a Parcel</li>
<li>Edit a Hatch Pattern</li>
<li>Add a Hatch Pattern with an Island</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blocks 
<ul>
<li>Create Blocks</li>
<li>Insert Block</li>
<li>Edit Block</li>
<li>Dynamic Block</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inquiry Tools 
<ul>
<li>ID Point</li>
<li>Measure</li>
<li>Radius</li>
<li>Area</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parametric</li>
<li>Layout Tabs</li>
<li>Plotting 
<ul>
<li>Rotate View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Data Sets</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:49:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[New Features in Civil 3D 2010]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-features-in-civil-3d-2010.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-features-in-civil-3d-2010.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_newfeat_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>In this vBase watch and listen to an instructor walk you through the new features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. Highlights of the discussion include intersection design quantity takeoff storm sewer design and alignments offsets and widenings.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In this vBook watch and listen to an instructor walk you through the new features available in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.  Highlights of the discussion include intersection design quantity takeoff storm sewer design and alignments offsets and widenings.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Static Ribbons</li>
<li>Contextual Ribbons</li>
<li>Application Menu</li>
<li>Quick Access Toolbar</li>
<li>Infocenter</li>
<li>Where Is My Command</li>
<li>Object Tooltips</li>
<li>Ribbon Tooltips</li>
<li>Prospector Tooltips</li>
<li>Object Properties</li>
<li>Match Properties</li>
<li>Prospector Select Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments and Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Alignment Categories</li>
<li>Offset Alignments</li>
<li>Offset Alignment Grips</li>
<li>Widening Overview</li>
<li>Add Widening</li>
<li>Widening Grips</li>
<li>Edit Offset and Widening Parameters</li>
<li>Create Acceleration Lane</li>
<li>Create Alignments From Objects</li>
<li>Mask Alignment</li>
<li>Project Objects to Profile</li>
<li>Profile Hatching</li>
<li>Lock Profile PVI</li>
<li>Stagger Labels </li>
<li>Edit Band Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcels 
<ul>
<li>Parcel Creation Tools</li>
<li>Parcel Creation Parameters</li>
<li>Frontage Offset Overview</li>
<li>Command Preview Graphics</li>
<li>Minimum Area or Frontage</li>
<li>Slide Line Create</li>
<li>Parcel Creation Preview</li>
<li>Frontage Offset</li>
<li>Minimum Depth</li>
<li>Maximum Depth</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey and Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Survey Toolspace</li>
<li>Import Survey Data</li>
<li>Data Source Types</li>
<li>Linework Code Set Overview</li>
<li>Import Events Overview</li>
<li>Point Identifier Offsets</li>
<li>Linework Code Set</li>
<li>Import Events</li>
<li>Surfaces</li>
<li>Polylines from Contour Data</li>
<li>Data Clip Boundaries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Quantity Takeoff (QTO) 
<ul>
<li>Objects for Takeoff</li>
<li>QTO on Ribbon</li>
<li>QTO Manager</li>
<li>Pay Item List</li>
<li>Categorization File</li>
<li>Pay Item Favorites</li>
<li>Pavement Markings</li>
<li>Review Assigned Pay Items</li>
<li>Lamp Standards</li>
<li>Topsoil Seed Water</li>
<li>Summery Takeoff</li>
<li>Draw Report</li>
<li>Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Detailed Takeoff</li>
<li>Corridor Quantity Takeoff</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridors 
<ul>
<li>Naming Templates</li>
<li>View Edit Corridor Sections</li>
<li>Subassembly Overrides</li>
<li>Edit Region</li>
<li>Isolate Region</li>
<li>Highlight Baseline</li>
<li>Highlight Region</li>
<li>Zoom to Region</li>
<li>Insert Region</li>
<li>Surface Target Assignments</li>
<li>Corridor Surface Boundaries</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Intersections 
<ul>
<li>Intersection Design Overview</li>
<li>Create Intersection Wizard</li>
<li>Centerline Profiles</li>
<li>General Parameters</li>
<li>Geometry Details</li>
<li>Curb Return Alignments</li>
<li>Curb Return Profiles</li>
<li>Corridor Regions</li>
<li>Assembly Sets</li>
<li>Create Intersection</li>
<li>Review Corridor Parameters</li>
<li>Review Intersection Object</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Labeling 
<ul>
<li>Label Leaders</li>
<li>Band Labels</li>
<li>Staggered Labels</li>
<li>Expressions</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:19:53 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors Training Manual]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-for-surveyors-training-manual.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2010-for-surveyors-training-manual.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/v/cvr_c3d10_survytrn_1_sm_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors training vBook is designed for the Surveyor looking to take advantage of the Survey functionality of AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2010 for Surveyors training manual is designed for the Surveyor looking to take advantage of the Survey functionality of AutoCAD Civil 3D 2010. This training manual through a series of live-recorded lectures will provide the instruction on how to properly collect field data reduce this field data manually input data adjust and balance traverse using compass and least squares adjustment methods and demonstrate how to perform stakeout computations.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Overview of Course</li>
<li>Demonstrations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Setup 
<ul>
<li>US Survey Feet</li>
<li>Edit Survey Database Settings</li>
<li>Export Settings</li>
<li>Edit User Settings</li>
<li>Survey User Settings</li>
<li>Equipment Database</li>
<li>Figure Prefix Database</li>
<li>Linework Code Sets</li>
<li>New Figure Styles</li>
<li>Point Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Field Collection 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Collecting Points</li>
<li>Curb and Gutter</li>
<li>Curve</li>
<li>Handicap Ramp</li>
<li>How to Use Code Sets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey Database Translation 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Survey Translation</li>
<li>Inquiry Tool</li>
<li>Inverse Between Points</li>
<li>Translate Survey Database</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fieldbook Conversion 
<ul>
<li>Raw Data Files</li>
<li>Create New Local Survey Database</li>
<li>Survey Data Collection Link</li>
<li>Fieldbook File</li>
<li>Create Network / Import Fieldbook File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Least Square Adjustments 
<ul>
<li>Least Squares Adjustment Concepts</li>
<li>Sample Data Set</li>
<li>Create Survey Database</li>
<li>Create Network</li>
<li>Convert Fieldbook File</li>
<li>Import Fieldbook</li>
<li>Survey Network</li>
<li>Adjustments to Setups to Properly Define Network</li>
<li>Update Network</li>
<li>Least Squares Analysis</li>
<li>Reprocess Input File</li>
<li>Perform Least Squares Analysis</li>
<li>2 Dimensional</li>
<li>Display Output File</li>
<li>Compass Rule Adjustment</li>
<li>New Traverse Loop</li>
<li>Traverse Loop</li>
<li>Traverse Analysis</li>
<li>Remove Point from Least Squares Analysis</li>
<li>Perform Least Squares Analysis</li>
<li>Traverse Fieldbook File</li>
<li>Re-Import Fieldbook File</li>
<li>Perform Least Squares Analysis</li>
<li>Control Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Manual Data Entry 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Manual Data Entry</li>
<li>Create New Drawing</li>
<li>Create New Local Survey Database</li>
<li>Verify Survey Database Settings</li>
<li>Create Network</li>
<li>Create New Control Point</li>
<li>Enter New Direction</li>
<li>Enter First Setup</li>
<li>Edit Observations of Setup</li>
<li>Create Setups</li>
<li>Tolerance Error</li>
<li>Create New Traverse</li>
<li>Traverse Analysis</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import Multiple Fieldbooks 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Import Multiple Fieldbooks</li>
<li>Open Drawing</li>
<li>Set Working Folder</li>
<li>Create Survey Database</li>
<li>Create New Network</li>
<li>Import Fieldbook</li>
<li>Look at Imported Points for Potential Problems</li>
<li>Insert Points in Drawing from a Fieldbook</li>
<li>Modify Survey Point Properties</li>
<li>Identify Points at Curve</li>
<li>Create Point Group and Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add Breaklines to Surface 
<ul>
<li>Add Points to Drawing</li>
<li>Point Group Properties</li>
<li>Create New Surface</li>
<li>Add Breakline Data to Surface</li>
<li>Remove Survey Information</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">50.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:14:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Essentials for Inventor 2009 ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/essentials-for-inventor-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/essentials-for-inventor-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_invntr09_essent_small_3.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Inventor 2009 Essentials is a collection of lessons designed to give the Beginner and Intermediate user a good understanding of how the Inventor Platform works.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Inventor 2009 Essentials is a collection of lessons designed to give the Beginner and Intermediate user a good understanding of how the Inventor Platform works. Video Lessons on Parts Assemblies Drawings Presentations and we even preview some more advanced features as well. Common pitfalls are noted and good foundation aspects are reinforced. If you want to learn how to use Inventor or are simply experiencing trouble with a portion of the application this vBook is for you.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Contents Overview</li>
<li>Download Sample Content</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>Project Editor</li>
<li>Create Project</li>
<li>Create New File</li>
<li>Inventor Interface</li>
<li>View Tools</li>
<li>Measurement Tools</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parts 
<ul>
<li>Environment and Workflow</li>
<li>2D Sketching</li>
<li>2D Geometric Constraints</li>
<li>2D Dimensional Constraints</li>
<li>Sketch Edits</li>
<li>Solid Features</li>
<li>Feature Edits</li>
<li>Sketched Features</li>
<li>- Placed Features</li>
<li>Patterns</li>
<li>Work Features</li>
<li>Intermediate Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawings 
<ul>
<li>Options</li>
<li>Sheets and Views</li>
<li>Annotations</li>
<li>Additional References</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Assemblies 
<ul>
<li>Create New Assembly</li>
<li>Place Component</li>
<li>Assembly Component Properties</li>
<li>Constraints</li>
<li>Manage Assembly Components</li>
<li>Sub-Assembly Navigation</li>
<li>Representations</li>
<li>Adaptive Features</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Presentations 
<ul>
<li>Create Presentation File</li>
<li>Tweak Components</li>
<li>Edit Trails</li>
<li>Animate</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:23:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD for the Microstation User]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-for-the-microstation-user.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-for-the-microstation-user.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_acad_microstation_sma_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD for the Microstation Use is designed to aid with the translation of basic fundamental Microstation Commands to the equivalent AutoCAD command.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD for the Microstation User is designed to aid with the translation of basic fundamental Microstation Commands to the equivalent AutoCAD command. Using the search tools index or Table of contents in the vBook you enter and look for a Microstation command and you will be shown the AutoCAD equivalent. (i.e. Enter Move Parallel and you'll be shown the Offset Command.)</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction 
<ul>
<li>Data Sets</li>
<li>User Interface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Application Settings 
<ul>
<li>Workspaces</li>
<li>Options</li>
<li>Projects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Operational Difference 
<ul>
<li>Noun/Verb</li>
<li>Save Often</li>
<li>Precision Input</li>
<li>Mouse Functions</li>
<li>Keyboard</li>
<li>Key In Commands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>View Control 
<ul>
<li>Redraw/Regen</li>
<li>Pan</li>
<li>Zoom Extents</li>
<li>Rotate View</li>
<li>Named View</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
<li>Creating Drawings</li>
<li>Snaps</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Drawing Commands 
<ul>
<li>Line</li>
<li>Polyline</li>
<li>Circle</li>
<li>Arc</li>
<li>Rectangle</li>
<li>Polygon</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Modify Objects 
<ul>
<li>Grip Editing</li>
<li>Copy</li>
<li>Move</li>
<li>Rotate</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Offset</li>
<li>Scale</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Altering Objects 
<ul>
<li>Explode</li>
<li>Pedit</li>
<li>Break</li>
<li>Join</li>
<li>Extend</li>
<li>Trim</li>
<li>Fillet</li>
<li>Chamfer</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Object Properties 
<ul>
<li>Match Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layers (Levels) 
<ul>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text 
<ul>
<li>Text Style</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensions 
<ul>
<li>Dimension Styles</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hatch (Fill) 
<ul>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blocks (Cells) 
<ul>
<li>Measure/Divide</li>
<li>Dynamic Block</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Inquiry Tools 
<ul>
<li>List</li>
<li>Distance</li>
<li>ID Point</li>
<li>Area</li>
<li>Additional Tools</li>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Layout Tabs 
<ul>
<li>Practice Exercise</li>
<li>Plotting</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Terminology 
<ul>
<li>Design Plane and Origins</li>
<li>Working Units</li>
<li>Paper Space Model Space</li>
<li>Layers (Levels)</li>
<li>Linetypes (Line Styles)</li>
<li>Color</li>
<li>Color/Lineweight</li>
<li>XREF Reference</li>
<li>Text</li>
<li>Dimensions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Translation</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:57:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Steering Wheel in Revit Architecture 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/steering-wheel-in-revit-architecture-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/steering-wheel-in-revit-architecture-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_sw_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Watch these videos and quickly lea  everything you need to know about taking FULL advantage of all the new Steering Wheel tools and options.  You can take a day or two to read up and practice yourself or you can sit back and let me do it for you in about 30 minutes!</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In the Steering Wheel in Revit Architecture 2009 vBook you will quickly learn everything you need to know about taking FULL advantage of all the new Steering Wheel tools and options.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Tour Building Wheel - Full Size</li>
<li>Tour Building Wheel - Mini</li>
<li>View Objects Wheel - Full Size</li>
<li>View Objects Wheel - Mini</li>
<li>Full Navigation Wheel</li>
<li>2D Wheel</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:32:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[View Cube in Revit Architecture 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/view-cube-in-revit-architecture-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/view-cube-in-revit-architecture-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_vc_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>All of the Revit&#174; 2009 products have the new View Cube feature. It makes maneuvering around the 3D model quite simple. This is a big leap forward in the world of 3D interface and once again CADclips is here to show you the way.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>In the View Cube in Revit Architecture 2009 vBook you will learn about the new View Cube feature. It makes maneuvering around the 3D model quite simple. This is a big leap forward in the world of 3D interface and once again CADclips is here to show you the way.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Fit to View and Animation Settings</li>
<li>Home, Set Front View and Compass</li>
<li>Lock to Selection</li>
<li>Orient to View and Orient to Direction</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:11:36 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training - Vol 5]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-5.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-5.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_tr5_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Editing Tools and Annotation</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Volume 5 vBook contains live instruction on editing tools and annotation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Thin Lines</li>
<li>Align Tool 
<ul>
<li>Tools Overview</li>
<li>Align Tool - Example</li>
<li>Align Tool - Multiple</li>
<li>Align Tool - Vertical</li>
<li>Align Tool - Plan View</li>
<li>Align Tool - 3D View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Split Tool 
<ul>
<li>Split Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Split Tool - Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Trim Tool 
<ul>
<li>Trim Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Trim Tool - Example</li>
<li>Trim Tool - Extend</li>
<li>Trim Tool - Extend Multiple Elements</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Offset Tool 
<ul>
<li>Offset Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Offset Tool - Chain</li>
<li>Offset Tool - Tab Key</li>
<li>Offset Tool - Hallway/Corridor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Linework Tool 
<ul>
<li>Linework Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Linework Tool - Elevation - Hidden Line</li>
<li>Linework Tool - Elevation - Heavy Line</li>
<li>Linework Tool - Plan - Wide Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Paint Tool 
<ul>
<li>Paint Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Return to Original State</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Match Type Tool 
<ul>
<li>Match Type Tool - Overview</li>
<li>Match Type Tool - Single</li>
<li>Match Type Tool - Multiple</li>
<li>Match Type Tool - Floor Plan</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General Annotation 
<ul>
<li>General Annotation - Overview</li>
<li>General Annotation - Add Text/Adjust Size</li>
<li>General Annotation - Scale Factor</li>
<li>General Annotation - Text Height</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Placement and Types 
<ul>
<li>Text Overview</li>
<li>Insert Text</li>
<li>Move Existing Text</li>
<li>Change Font Color</li>
<li>Add Leader Line to Existing Text</li>
<li>Move, Copy, Edit Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensions - Aligned 
<ul>
<li>Dimensions Alignment Overview</li>
<li>Dimension Type Properties Overview</li>
<li>Insert Dimensions</li>
<li>Change Dimensions</li>
<li>Change Dimensions Style</li>
<li>Dimension Locks</li>
<li>EQ (Equal)</li>
<li>Dimension a Complex Wall</li>
<li>Dimension in Elevation and Plan View</li>
<li>Add/Remove Witness Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimensions - Radial, Arc, and Angle 
<ul>
<li>Angular Dimension</li>
<li>Radial (Circular) Dimension</li>
<li>Arc Length Dimension</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tagging 
<ul>
<li>Tag Overview</li>
<li>Tag By Category</li>
<li>Edit a Tag</li>
<li>Remove All Tags</li>
<li>Tag All Not Tagged&nbsp;&nbsp;</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:53:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training - Vol 4]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-4.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-4.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_tr4_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Floors .Roofs, and Stairs</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Volume 4 vBook contains live instruction on Floors, Roofs, and Stairs.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Floors 
<ul>
<li>Check Floor Properties</li>
<li>Check Floor Type</li>
<li>Draw Floor with Line Command Rectangle Option</li>
<li>Draw Floor with Line Command Chain Option</li>
<li>Level Underlay Property</li>
<li>Floor Structure</li>
<li>Trim Floor with Trim Tool</li>
<li>Fill Floor Gap with Trim Tool</li>
<li>Fill Floor Gap by Extending Existing Lines</li>
<li>Edit Finished Floor to Get Back into Sketch Mode</li>
<li>Unfinished Floor Warning</li>
<li>Create a Hole in a Floor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Floors by Picking Walls 
<ul>
<li>Draw Floor with Pick Wall Command by Selecting Individual Walls</li>
<li>Draw Floor with Pick Wall Command by Selecting a Chain of Walls</li>
<li>Extend Floor Into Wall Core</li>
<li>Flip Floor Edge Between Inside and Outside Wall Edge</li>
<li>Automatically Attach Lower Level Walls to New Floor</li>
<li>Detach Walls Warning Message</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tools 
<ul>
<li>Floor Shape Tool - Add New Points</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tool - Edit Existing Points</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tool - Reset Shape</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tool - Add Valleys and Ridges</li>
<li>Floor Shape Tool - Pick Beam</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Floor Slope Arrow 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Floor Slope Arrow</li>
<li>Floor Slope Arrow Properties</li>
<li>Draw Straight Floor Slope Arrow</li>
<li>Draw Diagonal Floor Slope Arrow</li>
<li>One Floor Slope Arrow per Slab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roof by Footprint 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Roof by Footprint</li>
<li>Warning Message Regarding Roof Placement on Wrong Level</li>
<li>Draw Roof with Pick Wall Command</li>
<li>Update Roof Slope</li>
<li>Add Gable to Roof</li>
<li>Cleanup Wall Notch with Roof</li>
<li>Remove Gable from Roof</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roof by Extrusion 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Roof by Extrusion</li>
<li>Set Work Plane for Roof by Extrusion</li>
<li>Create New Roof Type</li>
<li>Draw Roof by Extrusion Using Line Command</li>
<li>Mirror Roof by Extrusion Sketch</li>
<li>Set Roof by Extrusion Start and End Position</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roof Shape Tools 
<ul>
<li>Create a Flat Roof</li>
<li>Update Roof Structure</li>
<li>Insert Roof Drain in Flat Roof</li>
<li>Add Variable Thickness Insulation Layer to Floor Structure</li>
<li>Lower Drain Hole Elevation</li>
<li>Create Roof Cross Section to View Variable Thickness</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Stairs 
<ul>
<li>Create a Floor Opening for Stairs</li>
<li>Use Reference Planes when Drawing Stairs</li>
<li>Set Railing Type</li>
<li>Set Stair Properties</li>
<li>Create Stairs with Run Command</li>
<li>Create Stairs by Defining Individual Risers</li>
<li>Adjust Floor Opening for Stairs</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:53:35 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training - Vol 3]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-3.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-3.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_tr3_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Walls, Doors, Windows, and Stairs</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Volume 3 vBook contains live instruction on walls, doors, windows, and stairs.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Wall Placement 
<ul>
<li>First Three Steps of Wall Placement</li>
<li>Structural versus Architectural Walls</li>
<li>Top and Base Wall Constraints</li>
<li>Drawing Walls</li>
<li>Drawing Walls with Top and Base Offsets</li>
<li>Instance versus Type Parameters</li>
<li>Location Line Parameter</li>
<li>Chain Option</li>
<li>Drawing a Half Wall</li>
<li>Unconnected Wall</li>
<li>Golden Rule - Always Check Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wall Types and Properties 
<ul>
<li>Simple Wall Structure</li>
<li>Complex Wall Structure</li>
<li>Material Settings</li>
<li>Show and Hide Wall Structure Detail</li>
<li>Update Wall Thickness</li>
<li>Duplicate Wall Type</li>
<li>Automatic Wall Cleanup Based on Structure Layer Function</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wall Structure - Sweep and Reveal 
<ul>
<li>Sweep and Reveal Sample</li>
<li>Edit Wall Structure to Add Sweep</li>
<li>Edit Wall Structure to Add Reveal</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Flip Controls 
<ul>
<li>Flip Walls</li>
<li>Flip While Drawing Walls</li>
<li>Flip Doors</li>
<li>Flip Windows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wall Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Sketch Mode is Used to Edit a Wall Profile</li>
<li>Remove Sketched Profile</li>
<li>Edit Sketched Profile</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wall Attach and Detach 
<ul>
<li>Attach Walls to Roof</li>
<li>Detach Walls from Roof</li>
<li>Attach Walls to Floor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Wall Openings 
<ul>
<li>Wall Opening Command</li>
<li>Select and Edit Wall Opening</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Doors 
<ul>
<li>Delete Doors by Filter</li>
<li>Place Doors in Wall</li>
<li>Tag Doors on Placement</li>
<li>Toggle Spacebar to Flip Door While Placing</li>
<li>Update Door Type</li>
<li>Match Door Type</li>
<li>Load Door Types to Project</li>
<li>Edit Door Properties After Placement</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Windows 
<ul>
<li>Load Window Types to Project</li>
<li>Place Windows in Wall from Project Browser</li>
<li>Window Level is Automatically Set</li>
<li>Align and Lock Windows</li>
<li>Align and Lock Multiple Windows</li>
<li>Place Corner Window</li>
<li>Match Window Type</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:49:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training - Vol 2]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-2.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-2.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_tr2_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Datums, Views and More</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Volume 2 vBook contains live instruction on on datums, views and more.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Grid Lines 
<ul>
<li>Grid Tool</li>
<li>Drawing Grid Lines</li>
<li>Update Grid Line Text</li>
<li>Using Letters for Horizontal Grid Lines</li>
<li>Nudging Objects</li>
<li>Nudging Objects Using Shift Key</li>
<li>Grid Lines Locked Together</li>
<li>Adjusting Grid Lines to New Level Lines</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Introduction to Levels 
<ul>
<li>Draw Level Lines in Elevation or Section Views</li>
<li>Draw Level Lines</li>
<li>Change Level Line Spacing by Modifying Main Dimension</li>
<li>Change Level Line Spacing by Modifying Temporary Dimension</li>
<li>Break and Reshape Level Lines</li>
<li>Adjust Level Line Length</li>
<li>Lock and Unlock Level Lines</li>
<li>Add a Level Line Without Adding a Plan View</li>
<li>Delete a Level Line</li>
<li>Add a Plan View for an Existing Level Line</li>
<li>Level Line Options Toolbar</li>
<li>Associate a Wall to Levels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Reference Planes 
<ul>
<li>Draw a Reference Plane</li>
<li>Name a Reference Plane</li>
<li>What are Reference Planes Used For</li>
<li>eference Plane Not Visible on Plan View</li>
<li>Delete a Reference Plane</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Datum Demo 1</li>
<li>Datum Demo 2</li>
<li>Elevation Views 
<ul>
<li>Add a New Elevation View from an Existing Elevation Marker</li>
<li>Elevation Clipping Plane</li>
<li>Add a New Elevation View with a New Elevation Marker</li>
<li>Elevation View Crop Region</li>
<li>Interior Elevation View</li>
<li>Move Elevation Vantage Point without Moving Elevation Marker</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Views 
<ul>
<li>Section View</li>
<li>Change Detail of a Section View</li>
<li>Callout in a Section View</li>
<li>New Sheet</li>
<li>Elevation View</li>
<li>Move an Elevation Marker on a Sheet</li>
<li>Callout in a Plan View</li>
<li>Exterior Camera View</li>
<li>Interior Camera View</li>
<li>Browse Camera Views</li>
<li>Add a Duplicate Floor Plan</li>
<li>Drafting View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Sheets 
<ul>
<li>New Sheet</li>
<li>Load a Titleblock</li>
<li>Update View Scale Factors to Fit Sheet Size</li>
<li>Add Views to a Sheet</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Siteplan and Topo Surface 
<ul>
<li>Create a Site Plan View</li>
<li>Set View Range</li>
<li>Turn on Topo Surface Categories</li>
<li>Sketch Topo Surface</li>
<li>Edit Topo Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scheduling 
<ul>
<li>New Door Schedule</li>
<li>Select Door Schedule Fields</li>
<li>Add Schedule to Sheet</li>
<li>Move Fields and Change Sort Order</li>
<li>New Window Schedule</li>
<li>Split Schedule to Fit on Sheet</li>
<li>Edit Column Width</li>
<li>More Schedule Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing 
<ul>
<li>Measure Sheet Size</li>
<li>Select Printer</li>
<li>Page Setup</li>
<li>Print Preview</li>
<li>Select Sheets to Print</li>
<li>Start Print Job</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:53:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training - Vol 1]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-1.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/revit-architecture-2009-fundamentals-training-vol-1.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_revitarch09_tr1_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Getting Started using Revit Architecture 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Revit Architecture 2009 Fundamentals Training Volume 1 vBook contains live instruction on how to get started using Revit Architecture 2009.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Overview 
<ul>
<li>Recent Files</li>
<li>Zero State Mode</li>
<li>Last File</li>
<li>General Topics</li>
<li>Project Windows</li>
<li>Zooming</li>
<li>Modeling</li>
<li>Datums</li>
<li>Nested Objects</li>
<li>Views</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Families 
<ul>
<li>System Families</li>
<li>Non-System Families</li>
<li>Annotation</li>
<li>Sheets</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File Extensions 
<ul>
<li>Project File</li>
<li>Project Template File</li>
<li>Family File</li>
<li>Family Template File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File Open Save 
<ul>
<li>Open File</li>
<li>Close File and Window</li>
<li>Save File</li>
<li>New File</li>
<li>Default Template File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File New</li>
<li>New Project 
<ul>
<li>Default Template</li>
<li>Browse for Template</li>
<li>New Family</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Simple House 
<ul>
<li>Sample Training Files</li>
<li>Project Upgrade Dialog Window</li>
<li>Navigate the Project Browser</li>
<li>Window for Each View</li>
<li>Tile Windows</li>
<li>3D View</li>
<li>Quick Edits</li>
<li>Undo Button</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Interface 
<ul>
<li>Help Menu</li>
<li>Type Selector</li>
<li>Menu Bar</li>
<li>Toolbars</li>
<li>Options Bar</li>
<li>Design Bar</li>
<li>Status Bar</li>
<li>Project Browser</li>
<li>View Control Bar</li>
<li>Drawing Area</li>
<li>Communication Center</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Toolbars 
<ul>
<li>Resize Toolbars</li>
<li>Show/Hide Toolbars</li>
<li>Moving and Docking the Project Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Design Bar 
<ul>
<li>Show/Hide Design Bars</li>
<li>More Tools Flyout</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Project Settings</li>
<li>Project Units 
<ul>
<li>Suppress Zero Feet</li>
<li>Units Based on Template</li>
<li>Override Units</li>
<li>Line Weights</li>
<li>Annotations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>More Project Settings</li>
<li>Options Menu 
<ul>
<li>Workset Username</li>
<li>Save Settings</li>
<li>Graphics</li>
<li>File Locations</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Select Window 
<ul>
<li>Rotate Around a Selection</li>
<li>Select with Ctrl Key</li>
<li>Unselect with Shift Key</li>
<li>Crossing Box and Window Box</li>
<li>Clear Selection</li>
<li>Toolbar Options for Selected Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tab Key Selection 
<ul>
<li>Select Chain</li>
<li>Select Chain to Specified End Point</li>
<li>Cycle Through Objects</li>
<li>Cycle Through Objects Using Ctrl Key</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Filter Selection 
<ul>
<li>Filter Dialog Window</li>
<li>Select Objects Using Filter Selection</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Zooms</li>
<li>Categories 
<ul>
<li>Visibility Graphics</li>
<li>Turning Off Categories</li>
<li>All Families Have a Category</li>
<li>Visibility Per View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Transfer Project Standards 
<ul>
<li>Transfer Project Standards Dialog Window</li>
<li>Duplicate Types Warning</li>
<li>Non-System Familes Do Not Transfer</li>
<li>System Familes Can Be Transferred</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Families 
<ul>
<li>Families Listed by Category in Project Browser</li>
<li>Copy and Paste from Drawing Area</li>
<li>Copy and Paste from Project Browser</li>
<li>Copy and Paste Exceptions</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Visibility Toolbar 
<ul>
<li>Visibility Tools Dependent on View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scale Factor 
<ul>
<li>Update Scale Factor</li>
<li>Detail Level</li>
<li>Visual Modes</li>
<li>Shadows</li>
<li>Rendering</li>
<li>Crop Region</li>
<li>Temporary Hide Objects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Keyboard Shortcuts 
<ul>
<li>Shortcut File</li>
<li>Create New Shortcut</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:53:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[2D Environment in Inventor 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/2d-environment-in-inventor-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/2d-environment-in-inventor-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_invntr09_2denv_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>2D Environment in Inventor 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Autodesk inventor 2009- 2D Environment is a complete reference covering the procedures and options regarding the beginning steps of creating Inventor parts.  This volume contains video lessons on Sketching profiles and references Constraints Dimensions and Parameters Edit features Inserting objects and even settings and options.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Introduction </li>
<li>Content Overview</li>
<li>General Information 
<ul>
<li>Create Sketch</li>
<li>Model Browser</li>
<li>Measure Tools</li>
<li>Grid and Snap</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>2D Geometry 
<ul>
<li>Outline Tips</li>
<li>Outline Proceedure</li>
<li>Outline Proceedure 2</li>
<li>Line and Spline Tool</li>
<li>Arc Tool</li>
<li>Circle and Ellipse Tool</li>
<li>Rectangle Tool</li>
<li>Fillet and Chamfer Tool</li>
<li>Point and Polygon Tool</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>2D Constraints 
<ul>
<li>Understanding 2D Constraints</li>
<li>Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints</li>
<li>Tangent, Coincident, and Colinear Constraints</li>
<li>Horizontal and Vertical Constraints</li>
<li>Fix, Symetric, and Equal Constraints</li>
<li>Concentric and Smooth Constraints</li>
<li>2D Constraints Application Settings and Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exercise for Constraints 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Part 1</li>
<li>Part 2</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dimension Sketch and Parameters 
<ul>
<li>Dimension Introduction</li>
<li>Options and Settings</li>
<li>Apply Dimensions</li>
<li>Offset Dimensions</li>
<li>Parameters</li>
<li>Auto Dimension</li>
<li>Display and Tolerance</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exercise for Dimensions 
<ul>
<li>Overview</li>
<li>Part 1</li>
<li>Part 2</li>
<li>Part 3</li>
<li>Part 4</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Editing Geometry Features 
<ul>
<li>Move</li>
<li>Copy</li>
<li>Rotate</li>
<li>Stretch Edit</li>
<li>Offset</li>
<li>Mirror</li>
<li>Trim Extend and Split</li>
<li>Rectangular Pattern</li>
<li>Circular Pattern</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Exercise for Edits 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Exercise</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Insert Images, Text, Point File, and Data</li>
<li>DWG data 
<ul>
<li>DWG Data Copy Paste</li>
<li>DWG Import and Options</li>
<li>Text and Text Box</li>
<li>Geometry Text</li>
<li>Images</li>
<li>Point File</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:19:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[VBA Customization for Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vba-customization-for-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/vba-customization-for-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3dvbacust_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>VBA Customization for Civil 3D 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook will demonstrate the procedures and functions for creating custom programs for AutoCAD Civil 3D using VBA.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Intro&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Loading a VBA File</li>
<li>VBA Project Components</li>
<li>Debugging</li>
<li>Code Samples</li>
<li>Object/Land Model</li>
<li>Roadway/Corridor Object Model</li>
<li>Pipe Object Model</li>
<li>Survey Object Model</li>
<li>References</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Land Library</li>
<li>Sites</li>
<li>Site</li>
<li>Land Feature Lines 
<ul>
<li>Land Feature Line</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcels 
<ul>
<li>Parcels Properties</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel</li>
<li>Parcel Loops and Parcel Loop 
<ul>
<li>Parcel Segments, Parcel Segment and and Parcel Segment Element</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Alignment Methods</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Properties</li>
<li>Sample Line Groups</li>
<li>Sample Line Group</li>
<li>Sample Lines 
<ul>
<li>Sample Line</li>
<li>Section Views and Section View</li>
<li>Sections and Section</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignment Entities 
<ul>
<li>Alignment Entity</li>
<li>Design Speeds</li>
<li>Super Elevation Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profiles</li>
<li>Profile 
<ul>
<li>ProfileEntities</li>
<li>ProfilePVIs</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile Views</li>
<li>Profile View 
<ul>
<li>Profile View Overrides</li>
<li>Siteless</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>AddGridSurface Method</li>
<li>AddGridVolumeSurface Method</li>
<li>AddTinSurface Method</li>
<li>AddTinVolumeSurface Method</li>
<li>Import Methods</li>
<li>Grid Surface</li>
<li>Grid Volume Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>TIN Surface 
<ul>
<li>Surface Contours</li>
<li>TIN Volume Surface</li>
<li>Surface</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Points 
<ul>
<li>Point</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PointGroups 
<ul>
<li>PointGroup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Land Examples 
<ul>
<li>Weighted Average Slope</li>
<li>Tc Calculator</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipe Library</li>
<li>Pipe Networks 
<ul>
<li>Pipe Network</li>
<li>Pipes and Pipe</li>
<li>Connectors, Connector and Network Part</li>
<li>Profile Parts</li>
<li>Part Data Record</li>
<li>Pipe Styles</li>
<li>Structure Styles</li>
<li>Pipe Network Labels</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>InterferenceChecks 
<ul>
<li>Interference Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipe Rules 
<ul>
<li>XML File</li>
<li>Pipe Rule Structure</li>
<li>Custom Pipe Rule Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipe Examples 
<ul>
<li>Pipe Flip</li>
<li>Pipe Quantities</li>
<li>Pipe Run Slope</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Roadway Library</li>
<li>Corridors</li>
<li>Corridor Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Feature Line Components</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Baselines</li>
<li>BaselineRegions 
<ul>
<li>Offset Baselines</li>
<li>Applied Assemblies</li>
<li>Subassemblies</li>
<li>Assemblies and Assembly Styles</li>
<li>Roadway Link and Shape Styles</li>
<li>Roadway Style Sets</li>
<li>Roadway Example</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Survey Library 
<ul>
<li>Survey Settings Root</li>
<li>Survey Figure Prefix Databases</li>
<li>Survey User Settings</li>
<li>Survey Equipment Databases</li>
<li>Survey Network Styles</li>
<li>Survey Figure Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:07:41 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2009 Subdivision Design Webinar]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-subdivision-design-webinar.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-subdivision-design-webinar.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_c3d09subdivwebinar_sm_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Civil 3D 2009 Subdivision Design Webinar</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Civil 3D 2009 Subdivision Design Webinar vBook contains 4 hours of instructional material on subdivision design using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009.  Topics include parcel layout and creation alignments preliminary grading final grading quantity calculations design adjustments to optimize volume and pipe networks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3><strong>Table of Contents:</strong></h3>
<ul>
<li>Part 1 - Alignment and Parcel Layout&nbsp; &nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Subdivision Layout Strategies</li>
<li>Working With Sites</li>
<li>Create a Boundary Parcel</li>
<li>Create ROW</li>
<li>Parcel Union</li>
<li>Delete Parcel Segments</li>
<li>Create Parcel Segments</li>
<li>Delete Parcel PI's</li>
<li>Create Parcels By Layout</li>
<li>Create Parcels From Objects</li>
<li>Renumber Parcels</li>
<li>Label Parcels</li>
<li>Alignment Layout Strategies</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Part 2 - Corridors and Grading (a) 
<ul>
<li>Grading Strategy</li>
<li>Feature Lines Toolbar</li>
<li>Feature Line From Alignment</li>
<li>Grade Label Style</li>
<li>Water Drop</li>
<li>Draw Feature Line</li>
<li>Elevations From Surface</li>
<li>Feature Line From Corridor</li>
<li>Interim Grading Surface</li>
<li>Breaklines - Supplementing Factors</li>
<li>Volume Surface</li>
<li>Adjust Interim Grading Surface</li>
<li>Optimize Layout Profile</li>
<li>Create Cul-de-sac</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Part 3 - Corridors and Grading (b) 
<ul>
<li>Preliminary Grading Surface</li>
<li>Final Grading Strategy</li>
<li>Cul-de-sac Corridor</li>
<li>Feature Line Strategies</li>
<li>Marked Points</li>
<li>Feature Lines in Sites</li>
<li>Feature Lines From Corridor</li>
<li>Join Feature Lines</li>
<li>Weed Vertices</li>
<li>Stepped Offset</li>
<li>Temporary Grading Surface</li>
<li>Elevations From Surface</li>
<li>Grade to Surface</li>
<li>Final Grading Surface</li>
<li>Set Points On Surface</li>
<li>Volume Cut Fill Factor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Part 4 - Pipe Networks 
<ul>
<li>Introduction to Pipes</li>
<li>Parts List</li>
<li>Profiles as Pipe Networks</li>
<li>Part Builder</li>
<li>Invert Elevation Calculation</li>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
<li>Part Rules</li>
<li>Pipe Network by Layout</li>
<li>Design Surface</li>
<li>Pipe Network Vista</li>
<li>Draw Parts in Profile View</li>
<li>Pipe Style</li>
<li>Structure Style</li>
<li>Label Pipe Network</li>
<li>Structure Label Placement</li>
<li>Pipe to Pipe Match Rule</li>
<li>Connected Pipes to Structures</li>
<li>Crossing Pipes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:13:04 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Coordinate Systems]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/coordinate-systems.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/coordinate-systems.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_coordsys_small_3.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The purpose of this will be to discuss coordinate systems and grid to ground conversions. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Coordinate Systems vBook discusses the history of Map Projections and Coordinate systems and demonstrates the use of Coordinate Systems within Software Applications such as AutoCAD Civil 3D. This vBook is a must for Engineers Surveyors Planners or anyone who wants to understand and learn more about working coordinate systems.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />AutoCAD Civil 3D<br />- Assign a Coordinate System<br />- Transformation Settings<br />- Survey Database Settings<br />- Survey Field Book Settings<br />- Transformation Concepts<br />- Sea Level Correction<br />Map 3D<br />- Assign Zone<br />- Import Data<br />- Connect Data<br />- Track Coordinates<br />- Digitize Data<br />Map Properties<br />Rectangular Coordinate System<br />Geodesy<br />Clarke 1866<br />- Mercator<br />- Lambert<br />Map Projections<br />- Cylindrical<br />- Cones<br />- Mercator<br />- Transverse Mercator<br />- Lambert Conic<br />- State Projections<br />Latitude and Longitude<br />- Latitude<br />- Longitude<br />Conformal Maps<br />Geodetic Azimuth to Grid Azimuth<br />Field Angles<br />Data Corrections<br />- Reduction to Sea Level<br />- Multiplicative Factors<br />- Reduction for Scale<br />- Reduction for Curvature<br />Geographic and Grid Positions<br />- Lat Long to XY<br />- XY to Lat Long<br />- Station and AZ Mark<br />- Zone to Zone<br />State Coordinate Systems<br />- NAD 27<br />- NAD 83<br />Ellipse<br />- Ellipsoid of Revolution<br />- Ellipsoid<br />UTM Grid<br />Geoid<br />GRS80<br />Deflection of Vertical<br />Foot-Meter<br />Grid to Ground<br />Retrieve Data Sheets<br />NGS Tools<br />OPUS<br />Glossary of Terms<br />Notes and References</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Mon, 30 Apr 2012 17:06:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML205 Working with Neutral Format Surface and Solid Models]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml205-working-with-neutral-format-surface-and-solid-models.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml205-working-with-neutral-format-surface-and-solid-models.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML205_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML205-1P: Working with Neutral Format Surface and Solid Models in Autodesk Inventor. In this class we will lea  how to utilize neutral format data such as IGES STEP and ACIS files in Autodesk Inventor. Particular attention will be focused on techniques for repair of flawed data in the Inventor Construction Environment. The Feature Recognition functionality for imported neutral and proprietary format files will also be covered.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this class we will learn how to utilize neutral format data such as IGES STEP and ACIS files in Autodesk Inventor.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:03:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML215 Using Skeletal Design Techniques for Tube and Pipe Modeling]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml215-using-skeletal-design-techniques-for-tube-and-pipe-modeling.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml215-using-skeletal-design-techniques-for-tube-and-pipe-modeling.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ml215_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML215-1P: Using Skeletal Design Techniques for Tube and Pipe Modeling. Modeling the tube and pipe member of a large machine can be very challenging. We'll explain special skeletal modeling techniques in Autodesk Inventor&#174; Professional that will allow users to model up to 1500 tube and pipe members into their product design.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>We'll explain special skeletal modeling techniques in Autodesk Inventor&#174; Professional that will allow users to model up to 1500 tube and pipe members into their product design. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:06:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML305 The Proof is in the Simulation]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml305-the-proof-is-in-the-simulation.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml305-the-proof-is-in-the-simulation.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML305_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML305-1P: The Proof is in the Simulation: Autodesk Inventor Dynamic Simulation for Designers. In this lab users will complete a partially finished design using dynamic simulation to test different iterations of components to optimize their fit function and durability. In the course of finishing this project the users will review the Dynamic Simulation environment lea  the differences between assembly constraints and joints create joints in the mechanism (where required) create welded components for groups of components that will function as a unit in the mechanism and test modifications made to the design of components in the mechanism. As a bonus the results of the simulation will be exported to Autodesk Inventor Studio to quickly create a basic animation of the finished mechanism.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Use Dynamic Simulation throughout the design process to make changes that affect the design and see the results of the change determine the optimum shape of parts and conduct failure analysis. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:08:54 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML211 Stop Stringing It!]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml211-stop-stringing-it.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml211-stop-stringing-it.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML211_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML211-1P: Stop Stringing It! Digitally Prototype those Wires and Harnesses. Learn  to use Inventor&#174; Routed Systems to digitally prototype your wires and cables. Stop using the &quot;old school&quot; method and add more value to your mechanical design. Time and money have been wasted on electrical design. Now you can virtually eliminate that waste. No more issues with tight radius bends and rework of mechanical components to allow proper clearance for cables. Lea  how to communicate with AutoCAD&#174; Electrical using XML imports and exports. Finally document those designs effectively for manufacturing with nailboards run lists cut tables.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Learn to use Inventor&#174; Routed Systems to digitally prototype your wires and cables. Stop using the &quot;old school&quot; method and add more value to your mechanical design. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:05:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML311 Practical Routed Systems for Fluids]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml311-practical-routed-systems-for-fluids.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml311-practical-routed-systems-for-fluids.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML311_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML311-1P: Practical Routed Systems for Fluids. Learn  best practices for routing and managing routes and runs in small and large assemblies. You will also learn  how to include your own custom fittings and conduits in the Content Center and how to use them in your designs.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>A practical introduction to the Tube and Pipe in Autodesk Inventor&#174; Routed Systems and Autodesk Inventor Professional.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:10:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML315 Extending Inventor Understanding Autodesk Labs Applications]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml315-extending-inventor-understanding-autodesk-labs-applications.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml315-extending-inventor-understanding-autodesk-labs-applications.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ml315_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML315-1P: Extending Inventor: Understanding Autodesk Labs Applications. This class will provide an overview and demonstration of Autodesk Labs functionality for Inventor 2009. Autodesk Labs is home to numerous workflow improvements for products up to and including the 2009 releases. This class will give you behind-the-scenes considerations for inclusion and show you how to apply these additional tools to your workflows.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This class will provide an overview and demonstration of Autodesk Labs functionality for Inventor 2009. Autodesk Labs is home to numerous workflow improvements for products up to and including the 2009 releases. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:11:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML115 Create Your Own Custom Content Center]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml115-create-your-own-custom-content-center.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml115-create-your-own-custom-content-center.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML115_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML115-1P: Create Your Own Content Center in Autodesk Inventor&#174; 2009. This class will illustrate the steps required to convert standard Inventor parts to Content Center components while creating all new defined categories within Content Center. Lea  how to move existing Content Center components into a custom library of your choosing. Supercharge Content Center performance with the tips and workflows obtained from this class.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Learn how to create components and categories in Autodesk Inventor 2009 Content Center.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:02:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML101 Complex Assembly Modeling with Inventor Professional]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml101-complex-assembly-modeling-with-inventor-professional.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml101-complex-assembly-modeling-with-inventor-professional.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML101_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML101-1P: Complex Assembly Modeling with Inventor Professional. Using a customer case this class will show how to build very large (5000+ parts) and parametric-driven assembly models using skeleton design techniques. By utilizing the modeling strength of Inventor Professional to its maximum this class will demonstrate how to plan model and document large assemblies in an actual and daily-use design environment.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Using large assemblies in Inventor can be a challenging job but with the right tools quite impressive results can be achieved. Also the use of parametric designs can take the design task to another level.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:00:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML111 Best Practices for Working with Large Assembly Prototypes]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml111-best-practices-for-working-with-large-assembly-prototypes.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml111-best-practices-for-working-with-large-assembly-prototypes.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML111_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML111-1P: Autodesk Inventor&#174;: Best Practices for Working with Large Assembly (Digital Prototypes). This session will provide methodologies and best practices for working with large Autodesk Inventor assemblies. With the last few releases of Autodesk Inventor purpose-built tools have become part of the product for managing and working with large assemblies that consist of thousands of components. With the addition of these new tools standard processes need to be implemented to ensure that desired productivity levels are achieved. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This session will provide methodologies and best practices for working with large Autodesk Inventor assemblies.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:01:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ML301 Advanced Sheet Metal Modeling Techniques in Inventor]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml301-advanced-sheet-metal-modeling-techniques-in-inventor.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ml301-advanced-sheet-metal-modeling-techniques-in-inventor.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ML301_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ML301-1P: Advanced Sheet Metal Modeling Techniques in Autodesk Inventor. This session will familiarize you with the abilities and limitations of unfolding sheet metal components so that judicious model choices can be made. Several surface-based design workflows will be explored to illustrate how true sheet metal conditions can be ensured when adding and removing material. Punch tool authoring and placement will be explored with an emphasis on punch feature construction alternate representations and embedded manufacturing information.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This session will familiarize you with the abilities and limitations of unfolding sheet metal components so that judicious model choices can be made.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:07:37 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV400 We Can Rebuild It Road Reconstruction]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv400-we-can-rebuild-it-road-reconstruction.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv400-we-can-rebuild-it-road-reconstruction.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV400_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV 400-1P: We Can Rebuild It: Road Reconstruction Using AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This 90-minute lab takes students through a reconstruction of a rural road. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:10:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV304 The Secrets of Cutting Plan and Profile Sheets in AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv304-the-secrets-of-cutting-plan-and-profile-sheets-in-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv304-the-secrets-of-cutting-plan-and-profile-sheets-in-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_cv304_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV304-1P: The Secrets of Cutting Plan and Profile Sheets in AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this class you'll learn how to set up the Sheet Set Manager for your AutoCAD Civil 3D projects and how to streamline the process of cutting Plan and Profile sheets using the 2008 Plan Production wizard. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:05:00 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV300 The Power of Pipes - Drainage Design Using AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv300-the-power-of-pipes-drainage-design-using-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv300-the-power-of-pipes-drainage-design-using-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_cv300_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV300-1P: The Power of Pipes - Drainage Design Using AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this session we will learn how to create and modify parts lists pipe rules and structure rules and how to lay out structures and pipes. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:03:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV210 The Art of Implementing AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv210-the-art-of-implementing-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv210-the-art-of-implementing-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV210_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV210-1P: The Art of Implementing AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Civil 3D is not difficult to wrap your head around but change is. Join Scott as he reveals the secrets to successfully implementing Civil 3D in firms of all sizes.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:01:23 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV310 Styles - The Musical]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv310-styles-the-musical.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv310-styles-the-musical.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV310_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV310-1P: Styles the Musical</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this class you'll see how styles can sing and dance to produce drawings that will win rave reviews from the critics. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:06:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV214 Let's Get to the Core with AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv214-let-apos-s-get-to-the-core-with-autocad-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv214-let-apos-s-get-to-the-core-with-autocad-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV214_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV214-P: Let's Get to the Core with AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This session will provide roadway civil engineers and designers the seeds of knowledge beyond the base materials about dealing with corridors.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:02:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV204 Labelicious! Label This, Label That]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv204-labelicious-label-this-label-that.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv204-labelicious-label-this-label-that.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV204_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV204-1P: Labelicious! Label This Label That Labeling Through X-refs is Where It's At!</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this class we will explore the new xref labeling functions in Civil 3D. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:00:08 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV110 Incorporating Survey Data into AutoCAD Civil 3D]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv110-incorporating-survey-data-into-autocad-civil-3d.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv110-incorporating-survey-data-into-autocad-civil-3d.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV110_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV110-1P: Incorporating Survey Data into AutoCAD Civil 3D</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Learn to harness the power of the survey database and survey functionality in Civil 3D. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:57:32 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV114 Go Commando! Utilizing Data Shortcuts and Xref's]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv114-go-commando-utilizing-data-shortcuts-and-xref-apos-s.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv114-go-commando-utilizing-data-shortcuts-and-xref-apos-s.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV114_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV114-1P: Go Commando! Utilizing Data Shortcuts and Xref's to Manage Civil 3D Data</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>During this session we will dig into the tools and explore tips and techniques that will allow you successfully manage your Civil 3D project data without utilizing the Vault solution.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:58:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV318 Gets Lots Out of Your Corridors, Parking Lots That Is]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv318-gets-lots-out-of-your-corridors-parking-lots-that-is.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv318-gets-lots-out-of-your-corridors-parking-lots-that-is.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV318_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV318-1P: Gets Lots Out of Your Corridors: Parking Lots That is</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this class you'll learn how to leverage the ability to target feature lines and the ability to assign multiple targets to quickly build commercial site models that can be easily revised. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:08:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV100 Field to Finish - No More Connecting the Dots]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv100-field-to-finish-no-more-connecting-the-dots.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv100-field-to-finish-no-more-connecting-the-dots.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV100_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV100-1P - &quot;Field to Finish&quot; No More Connecting the Dots</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Join Lucy Kuhns and Jerry Bartels of Autodesk as they demonstrate how to accomplish &quot;Field to Finish&quot; using AutoCAD&#174; Civil 3D&#174; 2009.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:56:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[CV314 Caffeinated Grading]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv314-caffeinated-grading.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/cv314-caffeinated-grading.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_CV314_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>CV314-1P: Caffeinated Grading</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This high-octane class is led by David Garrigues (Mr. Caffeine) of Kimley-Horn as well as Glen Albert (Mr. Feature Line) and Chris Putnam (Mr. Grading) the lead programmers from Autodesk on all things grading. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:07:29 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB100-1P Managing Large Projects in Revit Architecture]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab100-1p-managing-large-projects-in-revit-architecture.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab100-1p-managing-large-projects-in-revit-architecture.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_AB100_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB100-1P: Managing Large Projects in Revit Architecture. In this session we will talk about what not to do when dropping in a multi-$billion multi-million SF/M2 multi-use project into Revit.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In this session we will talk about what not to do when dropping in a multi-$billion multi-million SF/M2 multi-use project into Revit. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:20:55 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[SE204-1P Tips and Techniques for Analysis with Revit Structure]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se204-1p-tips-and-techniques-for-analysis-with-revit-structure.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se204-1p-tips-and-techniques-for-analysis-with-revit-structure.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_-SE204_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>SE204-1P: Tips and Techniques for Analysis with Revit Structure. This session will highlight the latest tips and best practices for using Revit Structure with analysis for concrete and steel systems. Additionally foundation modeling will be addressed.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This session will highlight the latest tips and best practices for using Revit Structure with analysis for concrete and steel systems. Additionally foundation modeling will be addressed. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:22:59 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB210-1P Massing Design with Revit Architecture]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab210-1p-massing-design-with-revit-architecture.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab210-1p-massing-design-with-revit-architecture.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_AB210_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB210-1P: Massing Design with Revit Architecture. In this session we will look at using the massing tools in Revit to design schedule and increase flexibility in the working building model. The massing tools allow the designer to quickly put a building together and schedule areas and volumes. A cost estimate can also be produced at the very concept of a project. Materials can be added to a mass for a visual reference and a solar study. The massing tools allow cost-effective design solutions.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>In today's complex world of building design architectural designers have long wrestled with the ability to show the end result of a building without having to design the entire architectural project. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:26:20 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[SE300-1P Managing Large and Complex Revit Models]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se300-1p-managing-large-and-complex-revit-models.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se300-1p-managing-large-and-complex-revit-models.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_SE300_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>SE300-1P: Managing Large and Complex Revit Models. This class identifies best practices using Revit Architecture and Revit Structure for use on projects with complex geometry. Learn  to manage your complex project correctly to save time and effort. You'll explore techniques to quickly and accurately model non-orthogonal geometry sloped columns and curved beams and learn  tricks to improve speed. You will also understand possible pitfalls so they may be avoided.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This class identifies best practices using Revit Architecture and Revit Structure for use on projects with complex geometry. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:24:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB318-1P Inside the Factory How Revit is Designed]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab318-1p-inside-the-factory-how-revit-is-designed.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab318-1p-inside-the-factory-how-revit-is-designed.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_AB318_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB318-1P: Inside the Factory: How Revit is Designed. This session will provide insight into the process for making decisions about how requirements and feature requests are transformed into actual designs. Participants will also see how product design evaluates products from concept through release. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This session will provide insight into the process for making decisions about how requirements and feature requests are transformed into actual designs. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:30:47 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ME214-1P How to Create Construction Documents with Revit MEP]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/me214-1p-how-to-create-construction-documents-with-revit-mep.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/me214-1p-how-to-create-construction-documents-with-revit-mep.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ME214_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ME214-1P: How to Create Construction Documents with Revit MEP. This session will cover how to modify/create pipe fittings valve families mechanical elbows connectors and damper families to make them look right in documents some tips for quick drafting and other workaround stuff such as show double line / single line duct lining setting large pipe up/dn symbols within the same sheet with view overlay.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>From this session you will be able to prepare and produce company standards looking Construction Documents Plan Set with Revit MEP.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:56:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[SE404-1P Horrible Hacks and Other Tips and Tricks for Revit Power Users]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se404-1p-horrible-hacks-and-other-tips-and-tricks-for-revit-power-users.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se404-1p-horrible-hacks-and-other-tips-and-tricks-for-revit-power-users.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_se404_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>SE404-1P: Horrible Hacks and Other Tips and Tricks for Revit Power Users. This panel-style class presents the latest tips tricks and hacks developed by the Revit Experts of the Autodesk Consulting Team.  Years on the front lines of the most complicated projects have fostered out-of-the-box thinking to create solutions in ways you would never imagine. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This panel-style class presents the latest tips tricks and hacks developed by the Revit Experts of the Autodesk Consulting Team. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:26:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB310-1P Detailing in Revit Architecture]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab310-1p-detailing-in-revit-architecture.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab310-1p-detailing-in-revit-architecture.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_AB310_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB310-1P: Detailing in Revit Architecture. This session will explore the process of extracting views from your model and then detailing them within Revit Architecture. You will lea  about model views and drafting views. You'll gain understanding on when to model when to draft and when to import graphics from other CAD programs. We'll cover detail components drafting elements symbolic lines text annotation and keynotes.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>When it comes to graphical embellishment Revit Architecture offers a powerful suite of detailing tools. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:27:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB314-1P Collaboration and Large Project BIM Implementation with Revit]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab314-1p-collaboration-and-large-project-bim-implementation-with-revit.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab314-1p-collaboration-and-large-project-bim-implementation-with-revit.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ab314_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB314-1P: Collaboration and Large Project BIM Implementation with Revit. In this session you will lea  critical things to remember when working on large projects in Revit and a few essential model-management procedures that include how to potentially prevent or respond to &quot;low on virtual memory&quot; warnings.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This presentation will demonstrate the challenges faced when coordinating large projects in multiple technologies and multiple offices where BIM documentation in Revit is the leading focus. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:29:15 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[ME114-1P Better Understanding of Revit MEP Families - Advanced]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/me114-1p-better-understanding-of-revit-mep-families-advanced.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/me114-1p-better-understanding-of-revit-mep-families-advanced.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ME114_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>ME114-1P: A Better Understanding of Revit MEP Families: Advanced. This class will quickly cover the basic concepts and then move into exercises demonstrating and providing a better understanding of some more advanced procedures including making tags nesting a component creating arrays using formulas making detail components making a new supply air register family making a new air handling unit family making a type catalog and shared families. </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Confidently creating Revit families is an empowering and essential skill for any Revit user. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:54:57 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AB110-1P All in the Family Creating Parametric Parts in Revit&#174; Architecture]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab110-1p-all-in-the-family-creating-parametric-parts-in-revit-174-architecture.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/ab110-1p-all-in-the-family-creating-parametric-parts-in-revit-174-architecture.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_ab110_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>AB110-1P All in the Family: Creating Parametric Parts in Revit&#174; Architecture. This class will give you a solid background in the critical tools and rules of parametric part design. We'll focus mainly on parametric 3D model families; however we'll also explore 2D detail and annotation families as well.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>Once you have become comfortable working with Revit Architecture tools and understand the general concepts behind model-based design you'll need to begin developing your own library of custom parametric components.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:24:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[SE304-1P Advanced Revit Families for Structural Engineering and Design]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se304-1p-advanced-revit-families-for-structural-engineering-and-design.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/se304-1p-advanced-revit-families-for-structural-engineering-and-design.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_au08_se304_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>SE304-1P: Advanced Revit&#174; Families for Structural Engineering and Design. This class focuses on creating structural families to help you meet deadlines and simplify everyday engineering tasks. If you attended this class last year make sure to come back because it is updated with the latest "must-have" families to aid your design process.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This class focuses on creating structural families to help you meet deadlines and simplify everyday engineering tasks. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">24.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:25:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Map 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/map-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09map_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 vBook will teach you the basic fundamentals of using the tools provided in the Map 3D application. This vBook contains short video clips along with a Data set for you to easily follow along and lea  how to get the most out of AutoCAD Map 3D 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 vBook will teach you the basic fundamentals of using the tools provided in the Map 3D application. This vBook contains short video clips along with a Data set for you to easily follow along and learn how to get the most out of AutoCAD Map 3D 2009.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong></p>
<p>Overview&nbsp; &nbsp;<br />-Download Data<br />Menu Overview<br />-File Menu<br />-Edit Menu<br />-View Menu<br />-Create Menu<br />-Modify Menu<br />-Analyze Menu<br />-Setup Menu<br />-Map Menu<br />-Window, Help &amp; Express Menus<br />Drawing Cleanup<br />-Break Crossing Objects<br />-Extend Undershoots<br />-Delete Duplicates<br />-Erase Zero Length Objects<br />-Erase Dangling Objects<br />-Apparent Intersections<br />-Dissolve Pseudo Nodes<br />-Simplify Linear<br />Object Data<br />-Overview<br />-Creating Object Data Tables<br />-Attaching Object Data to Objects<br />-Edit Object Data<br />Attaching Object While Digitizing<br />-Digitize Setup<br />-Digitize<br />External Data<br />-Attaching External Databases<br />-Working with the Data Viewer<br />-Applying SQL Filters<br />-Defining Link Templates<br />Attaching Database Records<br />-Generating Links to Blocks<br />-Highlighting Object by Records<br />-Highlighting Records by Objects<br />Annotation<br />Annotation Templates<br />-Defining a Template<br />-Create Attributes<br />-Annotating Objects<br />-Updating Annotation<br />Formatting Annotation<br />-Adding Text to Annotation<br />-Using Symbols in Annotation<br />-Adding Length to Annotation<br />Feature Classes<br />Definition Files<br />-Login as Superuser<br />-Create Definition File<br />-Define a Feature Class<br />Working with Feature Classes<br />-Creating New Features<br />-Classifying Existing Objects<br />-Selecting Objects by Feature Class<br />-Removing Classification from Objects<br />Coordinate Tracking<br />-Assigning a Coordinate System<br />-Coordinate Tracking<br />-Digitizing Points<br />Importing Data<br />-Importing ESRI Shapefile<br />Queries<br />Source Drawings<br />-Attaching Source Drawings<br />-Viewing Attached Source Drawings<br />-Deactivating Drawings<br />-Location Queries<br />Data Queries<br />-Query By Size<br />-Compound Queries<br />-Saving Queries<br />-Report Queries<br />Save Backs<br />Save Back to a Single DWG<br />-Create the Query<br />-Saving Queried Objects<br />-Saving New Objects<br />-Save Back to Multiple DWGs<br />-Managing the Saved Set<br />Coordinate Conversions<br />-Assigning a Coordinate System<br />-Attaching Source Drawings<br />-Assigning a Coordinate System to Source Drawings<br />-Querying and Converting Objects<br />Topologies<br />Network Topologies<br />-Creating a Network Topology<br />-Network Analysis<br />Polygon Topologies<br />-Creating a Polygon Topology<br />-Editing a Polygon Topology<br />-Buffer Analysis<br />-Overlay Analysis<br />-Topology Statistics<br />Exporting Data<br />-Exporting ESRI Shapefiles<br />Data Connect<br />-Connect to Data<br />-View Data<br />-Edit Display<br />-Copyright<br />About the Authors<br />-Andrew Walther<br />-Mike Carris</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:48:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 3]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-3.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-3.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09revitarchtrvol3_sma_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 3</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 3 vBook was created to deliver a basic 3 part introductory class on Revit Architecture 2009. This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch a portion of the training or the entire session.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Introduction to Revit - GUI<br />Sheets<br />- Selecting Schedules<br />- Creating Door Schedules<br />- Legends<br />Drawing List<br />- Place Drawing List on Sheet<br />- Remove Sheet from Drawing List<br />- Modifying Drawing List<br />Details and Annotation<br />- Filled Regions<br />- Detail Components<br />- Loading Detail Components<br />- Adding Insulation<br />Drafting Views<br />- Room Tags<br />- Creating Filled Regions<br />- Creating Filled Region Family Types<br />- Dimension Style Properties<br />- Placing Drafting Views on Sheet<br />3d Views<br />- Creating Camera Views<br />- Walkthroughs</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:36:41 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 2]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-2.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-2.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09revitarchtrvol2_sma_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 2</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 2 vBook was created to deliver a basic 3 part introductory class on Revit Architecture 2009. This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch a portion of the training or the entire session.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Multiple Level Development<br />- Object Filtering<br />- Modifying Curtain Wall Grids<br />Renaming Levels<br />- Creating Levels<br />- Copy Floors Up<br />- Copy Columns Up<br />- Extending Walls for Parapet<br />- Creating Roof Hat<br />- Rehosting Doors<br />- Tagging Doors<br />- Multiple Tagging<br />Windows<br />- Adding Windows<br />- Modifying Windows<br />- Creating Interior Elevations to edit Windows<br />- Dimensioning Windows<br />Architectural Columns<br />Ceilings<br />Views<br />- Floor Plan Views<br />- Level questions within Elevations and Sections<br />- View Cubes<br />- Elevation Views<br />- Section Views<br />- Modifying Crop Regions<br />- Hiding Objects<br />- Call Out Views<br />- Zoom and Scale</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:36:33 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 1]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-1.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-revit-architecture-2009-vol-1.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09revitarchtrvol1_sma_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 1</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Training for Revit Architecture 2009 Vol 1 vBook was created to deliver a basic 3 part introductory class on Revit Architecture 2009. This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch a portion of the training or the entire session.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong>:<br />Introduction to Revit - GUI<br />Levels and Grids<br />- Levels<br />- Grids<br />- File Organization<br />Walls<br />Floors<br />- Floor Properties<br />- Floor Sketch<br />Beam Systems<br />- Load Beams<br />- Filtering<br />Curtain Wall<br />- View Detail<br />- Predefined Curtain Walls<br />- Pinning<br />- Selecting Curtain Wall<br />- Duplicating Curtain Walls<br />- Curtain Grids<br />- Creating Mullions<br />- Adjusting Mullions<br />- Adding Curtain Wall Doors<br />- Load Curtain Wall Doors<br />Core, Doors and Shaft<br />- Creating Core Walls<br />- Reference Planes<br />- Creating Stairs<br />- Adjusting Walls<br />- Adding Doors<br />- Creating Shaft Openings</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:36:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Performance Tuning Your Computer]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performance-tuning-your-computer.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/performance-tuning-your-computer.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_performtiming_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vbook offers instruction to users that want to "clean up" their computer so that it performs better.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vBook offers instruction to users that want to "clean up" their computer so that it performs better.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Tuning an existing computer<br />Vista<br />- Windows Update Vista<br />Removing Spyware from Windows Vista<br />Ad Aware 2007<br />- Working with Ad Aware 2007<br />- Ad Aware Conclusion<br />- Spybot Search &amp; Destroy<br />- Microsoft Defender<br />Freeing Hard Drive Space Vista<br />- Using Disk Cleanup Vista<br />- Removing Unwanted Software Vista<br />- Defragmenting a hard drive Vista<br />- Control Panel Settings Vista<br />Windows XP / Win2000<br />- Windows Update XP<br />Removing Spyware from Windows XP<br />Ad Aware 2007<br />- Working with Ad Aware<br />- Ad Aware Conclusion<br />- Spybot Search &amp; Destroy<br />- Windows Defender<br />Freeing hard drive space XP<br />- Using Disk Cleanup XP<br />- Removing Unwanted Software XP<br />- Defragmenting a hard disk drive XP<br />- Control Panel Settings XP<br />Upgrading an existing computer<br />Adding Memory<br />- Installing more RAM<br />- Replacing the CPU and Motherboard<br />Replacing the hard drive<br />- Adding another hard disk drive<br />- Setting Hard Drive Jumper<br />Advanced System Settings<br />- Using MSConfig<br />- Updating Device Drivers</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:37:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Training for Civil 3D 2009 Vol 1]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-civil-3d-2009-vol-1.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/training-for-civil-3d-2009-vol-1.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3trvol1_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook is a 2 day introductory course that covers the basic fundamentals of Civil 3D 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 2-day Basic Training vBook was created to deliver an introductory class on Civil 3D 2009. This is an instructor lead training class that has been video recorded and indexed so you can watch the entire 2 days of information or just a section at a time. It covers the all the main features of Civil 3D from the User interface to Corridors and Pipes.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Forward&nbsp;&nbsp; <br /> 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Getting Started</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Interface 
<ul>
<li>Workspaces</li>
<li>UI Orientation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Options 
<ul>
<li>Files Settings</li>
<li>Display</li>
<li>Open Save</li>
<li>User Preferences</li>
<li>Extended Help</li>
<li>Windows Manipulation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Toolspace 
<ul>
<li>Prospector</li>
<li>Settings</li>
<li>Survey</li>
<li>Menu Browser</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>File Menu 
<ul>
<li>Import Data</li>
<li>Export Data</li>
<li>Migrate Drawings</li>
<li>Edit Menu</li>
<li>View Menu</li>
<li>Insert Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General Menu 
<ul>
<li>Inquiry</li>
<li>Toolbox</li>
<li>Plan Production</li>
<li>Data Short Cuts</li>
<li>Add Labels</li>
<li>Map Check Analysis</li>
<li>Survey Menu</li>
<li>Points Menu</li>
<li>Surfaces Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Line/Curves Menu 
<ul>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
<li>Parcels Menu</li>
<li>Grading Menu</li>
<li>Alignments Menu</li>
<li>Profiles Menu</li>
<li>Corridors Menu</li>
<li>Sections Menu</li>
<li>Pipes Menu</li>
<li>Map Menu</li>
<li>Raster Design</li>
<li>Help Menu</li>
<li>Express Menu</li>
<li>UI Changes</li>
<li>UI Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Points 
<ul>
<li>Points Introduction</li>
<li>Settings/Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Import Points 
<ul>
<li>File Format</li>
<li>Select Point File</li>
<li>Point Group</li>
<li>Review Points</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Point Display 
<ul>
<li>Description Key File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Point Group 
<ul>
<li>Information Tab</li>
<li>Include Tab</li>
<li>Point List</li>
<li>Point Style</li>
<li>Point Label Style</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>DTM Points Group 
<ul>
<li>Exclude</li>
<li>Boundary Point Group</li>
<li>Assign Styles</li>
<li>Sort Order</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Surfaces 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Surface 
<ul>
<li>Name Surface</li>
<li>Surface Description</li>
<li>Surface Style</li>
<li>Add Surface Data</li>
<li>View in 3D</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Surface 
<ul>
<li>Display Triangles</li>
<li>Review Triangulation</li>
<li>Tool Tip</li>
<li>Swap Edge</li>
<li>Remove Edit</li>
<li>Rebuild</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Breaklines 
<ul>
<li>Create Point Groups</li>
<li>Draw Breakline</li>
<li>Add Breakline</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add Boundary 
<ul>
<li>Draw Boundary</li>
<li>Add Boundary</li>
<li>Cleanup</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add Surface Labels 
<ul>
<li>Edit Lable Style</li>
<li>Hide Label Line</li>
<li>Surface Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcels 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
<li>Xref Drawing</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Parcels 
<ul>
<li>Sites</li>
<li>Parcel Styles</li>
<li>Label Styles</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create ROW 
<ul>
<li>ROW Settings</li>
<li>Preview in Toolspace</li>
<li>Move to Site</li>
<li>Change Style</li>
<li>Edit Parcel</li>
<li>Create Cul-de-Sac</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Parcel by Layout 
<ul>
<li>Fixed Line</li>
<li>Curves</li>
<li>Free Form Create</li>
<li>Slide Angle</li>
<li>Renumber Parcels</li>
<li>Label Parcel Lines</li>
<li>Line/Curve Tables</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Alignments 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create by Layout 
<ul>
<li>Alignment Style</li>
<li>Label Sets</li>
<li>Layout Toolbar</li>
<li>Curve Settings</li>
<li>Tangent-Tangent w/Curves</li>
<li>Add Second Alignment</li>
<li>Grip Edit Alignment</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profiles 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile From Surface 
<ul>
<li>Profile Style</li>
<li>Sample Offsets</li>
<li>Draw in Profile</li>
<li>View Characteristics</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Profile by Layout 
<ul>
<li>Profile Tool Bar</li>
<li>Draw by Tangent and Curves</li>
<li>Transparent Commands</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Edit Geometry 
<ul>
<li>Grip Edit</li>
<li>PVI Edit</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Corridor 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Assembly 
<ul>
<li>Create Assembly</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Simple Corridor 
<ul>
<li>Target Mapping</li>
<li>Edit Corridor</li>
<li>View Corridor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create Corridor Surface 
<ul>
<li>Corridor Properties</li>
<li>Add Data</li>
<li>Add Boundary</li>
<li>Volume</li>
<li>Review</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipes 
<ul>
<li>Introduction</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pipe Settings 
<ul>
<li>Part List</li>
<li>Part Rules</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Create by Layout 
<ul>
<li>Pipe Toolbar</li>
<li>Draw in Profile View</li>
<li>Label Parts</li>
<li>Network Update</li>
<li>Review Pipe Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Review </li>
<li>About the Instructotor
<ul>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:31:50 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Civil 3D 2009 Setup]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-setup.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/civil-3d-2009-setup.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/c/vcover_c3d09etup_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vClass will guide you through the setup of a Stand Alone Software Deployment Image. Creating an install image is an effective way to install and configure multiple seats of AutoCAD Civil 3D at one time.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>This vClass will guide you through the setup of a Stand Alone Software Deployment Image. Creating an install image is an effective way to install and configure multiple seats of Civil 3D at one time.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong></p>
<p>Introduction&nbsp; &nbsp;<br />-Create Deployment Image<br />-Start Up Screen<br />-Network Location<br />-Select Products<br />-Accept License<br />-User Information<br />-General Settings<br />Configure Product<br />-License Type<br />-Installation Type<br />-Support Directories<br />-Search Paths<br />-Additional Files<br />-User Preferences<br />-Service Packs<br />-Information Center<br />-Online Resource</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:11:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Windows XP Control Panel]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-xp-control-panel.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-xp-control-panel.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_winctrlpanel_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Windows XP Control Panel vBook discusses all the elements of the Control Panel in Windows XP.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Windows XP Control Panel vBook is designed to introduce computer users to the icons located in the control panel and how they work. Each icon and its associated tabs will be broken out and discussed. Users will be left with a strong fundamental understanding of how these settings can affect their computing experience.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong></p>
<p>Windows XP Control Panel Overview&nbsp; &nbsp;<br />Accessibility Options<br />Keyboard<br />-Sticky Keys<br />-Filter Keys<br />-Toggle Keys<br />-Sound<br />-Display<br />-General<br />Add Hardware<br />-Add Hardware - Detail<br />Add / Remove Programs<br />-Installed Programs<br />-Windows Components<br />-Set Access &amp; Defaults<br />-Auto Update<br />-Bluetooth<br />-Date &amp; Time Zone<br />Display<br />-Themes<br />-Desktop<br />-Screensaver<br />Settings<br />-Screen Resolution<br />-Color Quality<br />-Appearance<br />-Power Options<br />Folder Options<br />-General<br />-View<br />-File Types<br />-Off Line Files<br />-Fonts<br />-Game Controllers<br />Internet Options<br />-General Options<br />Security Options<br />-Trusted / Restricted Web Sites<br />-Privacy Options<br />Content Options<br />-SSL Certificates<br />-Connection Options<br />-Default Program Options<br />-Advanced Options<br />-Java Plug In<br />-Keyboard Properties<br />-Mail<br />-Mouse Properties<br />Network Connections<br />Networking Overview<br />-Network Setup Wizard<br />Network Connections Overview<br />-Network Connection Wizard<br />-Phone and Modem<br />-Power Options<br />Printers and faxes<br />-Printer Installation - Completion<br />-Quicktime<br />Regional and Language options<br />-Text Services<br />-Scanners and Cameras<br />-Scheduled Tasks<br />-Security Center<br />Sounds and Devices<br />-Volume Control<br />-Sound Schemes<br />-Audio<br />-Voice<br />-Hardware<br />-Speech<br />Taskbar and Start Menu<br />-Start Menu<br />-User Accounts<br />-Windows Firewall<br />Wireless Network Setup Wizard<br />-Wireless Link<br />-Administrative Options<br />-Glossary</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:48:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[New Hampshire Health Plan - Information and Resources]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-hampshire-health-plan-information-and-resources.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/new-hampshire-health-plan-information-and-resources.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_nhhp_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Find out how the NH Health Plan (NHHP) operates. Lea  who is eligible how it is sold review application and coverage forms and become aware of important provision.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Find out how the NH Health Plan (NHHP) operates. Learn who is eligible how it is sold review application and coverage forms and become aware of important provision.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Course Introduction &amp; Mission Statement<br />What is NHHP?<br />So What's in it for You?<br />Who is Eligible for NHHP?<br />Who is NOT Eligible for NHHP?<br />NHHP Program Options<br />Plan Brochure Overview<br />NHHP Coverages<br />Other Covered Services<br />Excluded Services<br />Pre-Certification Requirements<br />Case Management<br />Pre-Existing Conditions<br />Grievance Procedure &amp; Appeal Process<br />Appeal Process - Independent Review<br />Grace Period<br />Application Review<br />Other Application Information<br />Application Process<br />How to File a Medical Claim<br />Things to Remember<br />FAQ Section - Questions 1-4<br />FAQ Section - Questions 5-7<br />FAQ Section - Questions 8-11<br />Dave Trudo Testimonial Video<br />Closing Comments<br />NHHP Course Exam</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">10.0000</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:48:03 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[AutoCAD 2009 Training]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2009-training.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/autocad-2009-training.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_acad09training_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The AutoCAD 2009 Training vBook captures the experience of sitting in a class by providing an industry expert delivering instruction of an overview of AutoCAD 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The AutoCAD 2009 Training vBook captures the experience of sitting in a class by providing an industry expert delivering instruction of an overview of AutoCAD 2009.  The instructional videos go through exercises and demonstrations to teach concepts while adding in tips-and-tricks along the way.<br /><br /></p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>This vBook includes the following topics:</h3>
<ul>
<li> System Tracking Functionality</li>
<li>Coordinate Entry</li>
<li>Editing Geometry</li>
<li>Creating Multiple Point Geometry</li>
<li>Dimensioning</li>
<li>Creating Reusable Symbols</li>
<li>Drawing Architectural Symbols</li>
<li>Creating Mechanical Parts</li>
<li>And many other features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">49.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:48:22 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Hydraflow Storm Sewers in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraflow-storm-sewers-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/hydraflow-storm-sewers-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3hydraflow_small_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook covers topics such as: modeling guidelines IDF curves design codes line and inlet data cost estimating and plotting graphs.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Hydraflow Storm Sewers in Civil 3D 2009 vBook demonstrates how to run the Hydraflow Storm Sewer extension with Civil 3D 2009.  General modeling guidelines working with pipe networks and tutorials are provided to review concepts.<br /><br />The Hydraflow Storm Sewers in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Modeling Guidelines<br />- IDF Curves- Design Codes<br />- Line and Inlet Data<br />- Cost Estimating<br />- Plotting Graphs<br />- Working with Pipe Networks in Civil 3D<br />- Recommended Workflows<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:17:17 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Plan Production in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/plan-production-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/plan-production-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3planprod_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook shows how to use plan production tools in Civil 3D 2009 to create plan sets or construction documents from design or model drawings.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Plan Production in Civil 3D 2009 vBook shows how to use plan production tools in Civil 3D to create plan sets or construction documents from design or model drawings.  Plan production objects are created first then plan sheets are created for use in Sheet Set Manager from these objects. Click on this title for more details.<br /><br />The Plan Production in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Preparing Data<br />- Creating Plan Production Objects<br />- Creating Sheets<br />- Modifying Plan Sheet Sets<br />- Annotating Sheets<br />- Sheet Sets<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:52:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Surfaces in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surfaces-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/surfaces-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3surfaces_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook is designed to provide information on the tools and processes used to create edit and manage surfaces and surface data in Civil 3D.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Surfaces in Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to provide information on the tools and processes used to create edit and manage surfaces and surface data in Civil 3D within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Surfaces in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Surface Concepts<br />- Data Creation Tools<br />- Surface Styles and Properties<br />- Surface from Contours<br />- Large Surfaces<br />- Reducing Surface Data<br />- Surface from DEM<br />- Edit Surface<br />- Surface Labels<br />- Utilities<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:36:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Pipes in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pipes-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/pipes-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3pipes_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook is designed to cover the basic tools used in laying out gravity based networks such as storm and sanitary.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Pipes in Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to cover the basic tools used for laying out gravity based networks such as storm or sanitary.  The vBook covers the use of common tools and then demonstrates methods and techniques within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Pipes in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Preparing Data<br />- Pipe Concepts<br />- Part Rules<br />- Network and Structure Settings<br />- Draw in Profile<br />- Apply Rules<br />- Change Flow<br />- Tables<br />- Utilities<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:50:07 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Getting Started with Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-started-with-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/getting-started-with-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3getstarted_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Getting Started with Civil 3D 2009 vBook is your starting point for information on Civil 3D 2009.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Getting Started with AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 vBook is your starting point for information on Civil 3D.  This vBook is designed to provide a general overview of Civil 3D from how to work with parcels and points to transitioning from Land Desktop and AutoCAD to Civil 3D within narrated screen capture videos.<br /><br />The Getting Started with Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- What's New in Civil 3D 2009<br />- Transitioning from Land Desktop<br />- Transitioning from AutoCAD<br />- Model Based Design<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:45:42 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Design Environment in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/design-environment-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3desnenv_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook cover topics including workspace tool palettes design center drawing recovery manager dynamic input object viewer and event viewer.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Design Environment in Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to cover the user interface of Civil 3D along with many features that will aide in the design process within narrated screen capture videos.<br /><br />The Design Environment in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Workspace<br />- Tool Palettes<br />- Design Center<br />- Drawing Recovery Manager<br />- Dynamic Input<br />- Object Viewer<br />- Event Viewer<br />- Notes<br />- Viewports<br />- Tool Tips<br />- Toolspace<br />- Inquiry Tools<br />- Named Views<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:14:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Survey using Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-using-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/survey-using-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3survey_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook covers topics including field collection process migrating data survey tools import field book and traverse adjustments.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Survey using Civil 3D 2009 vBook demonstrates the features of survey functionality of Civil 3D within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Survey using Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Field Collection Process<br />- Migrating Data- Survey Tools<br />- Setup Civil 3D<br />- Import Field Book<br />- Traverse Adjustments<br />- Survey Translation<br />- Drafting Tools<br />- Survey Link<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:41:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Sample Lines, Sections, and Volumes in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/sample-lines-sections-and-volumes-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3sampleline_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Sample Lines Sections &amp; Volumes in Civil 3D 2009 cloudDVD is designed to demonstrate topics such as creating and working with sample lines calculating quantities and working with section views within narrated screen capture videos.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Sample Lines Sections &amp; Volumes in Civil 3D 2009 cloudDVD is designed to demonstrate topics such as creating and working with sample lines calculating quantities and working with section views within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Sample Lines Sections &amp; Volumes in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Section Settings<br />- Sample Lines Geometry Elements<br />- Quantities and Material Lists<br />- Quantity Reports<br />- Section Views and Annotation<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:20:16 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Profiles in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/profiles-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/profiles-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3profiles_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook is designed to demonstrate profile functionality including layout views design criteria labeling and bands.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Profiles in Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to demonstrate profile functionality including layouts and views design criteria labeling and bands within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Profiles in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Surface Profiles<br />- Profiles by Layout<br />- Design Criteria<br />- Edit Layout Profile<br />- Profile Views<br />- Profile View Labels<br />- Profile Labels<br />- Profile Bands<br />- Transparent Commands<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 17:05:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Points in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/points-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3points_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook demonstrates the aspects of points from the Points menu to settings and point groups.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Points in Civil 3D 2009 vBook demonstrates the aspects of points from the Points menu to settings and point groups within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Points in Civil 3D 2009 covers topics including:<br />- Create Points<br />- Styles<br />- Edit Point Data<br />- Description Keys<br />- Grips<br />- Point Groups<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:55:32 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Parcels in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/parcels-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3parcels_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook demonstrates the creation editing and labeling of the sectioning of areas of land along with other features.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Parcels in Civil 3D 2009 vBook demonstrates the creation editing and labeling the sectioning of areas of land along with other features such as easements right-of-ways drainage &amp; wetland areas soil types and contamination areas within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts<br /><br />The Parcels in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Parcel Characteristics<br />- Parcel Properties<br />- Creating Parcels from Objects<br />- Creating Parcels by Layout<br />- Creating ROW Parcel<br />- Editing Parcel Segments<br />- Parcel Labels<br />- Parcel Tables<br />- Creating a Cul-de-sac<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 16:31:12 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Grading in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/grading-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/grading-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3grading_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook covers topics including basic tools surface concepts  grading features grading tools and many other features.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Grading in Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to cover the basic tools used for grading site objects along with demonstrations of methods and techniques within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 - Grading vBook covers topics including:<br />- Basic Tools<br />- Surface Concepts<br />- Grading Features<br />- Grading Tools<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 14:52:25 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Corridors in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/corridors-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/corridors-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3dcorridor_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Corridors in Civil 3D 2009 vBook provides instructions on items such as assembly layouts corridor creation aspects and corridor utilities within narrated screen capture videos.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Corridors in Civil 3D 2009 - vBook provides instruction on items such as assembly layouts corridor creation aspects and corridor utilities within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Corridors in Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Subassembly Information<br />- Creating Assemblies<br />- Create Corridor<br />- Corridor Surface<br />- Line Widening<br />- Corridor Utilities<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 13:43:43 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Alignments in Civil 3D 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignments-in-civil-3d-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/alignments-in-civil-3d-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09c3dalign_small.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Alignments in Civil 3D 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Alignments in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 vBook is designed to provide instruction on concepts from the creation and editing of alignments to alignment styles and labeling within narrated screen capture videos.  Follow along with a downloadable dataset as the instructor guides you through the concepts.<br /><br />The Alignments in AutoCAD Civil 3D 2009 vBook covers topics including:<br />- Alignments Menu and Settings<br />- Alignments from Polyline<br />- Alignments by Layout<br />- Fixed Floating and Free Alignment Entities<br />- Editing Alignments<br />- Alignment Properties<br />- Alignment Styles<br />- Alignment Labels<br />- And many other features</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:44:28 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Advanced/Custom AutoCAD 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-custom-autocad-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/advanced-custom-autocad-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09acadadv2_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Advanced/Custom AutoCAD 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Advanced/Custom AutoCAD 2009 vBook provides information to allow users to customize AutoCAD 2009 by using actual examples to demonstrate concepts within narrated screen capture videos.  Click on this title for more details.<br /><br /></p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>This vBook includes the following topics:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Customizing the AutoCAD Interface</li>
<li>&nbsp;Automating with Scripts</li>
<li>Creating New Linetypes</li>
<li>&nbsp;Programming in AutoLISP</li>
<li>&nbsp;Programming in VBA</li>
<li>&nbsp;And many other features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 12:39:09 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Update for AutoCAD 2009 ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/update-for-autocad-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/update-for-autocad-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09acadupdate2_small_2.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Update for AutoCAD 2009 </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Update for AutoCAD 2009 vBook utilizes real-world exercises to demonstrate the new features and enhancements in AutoCAD 2009 within narrated screen capture videos.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>This vBook includes the following topics:</h3>
<ul>
<li> Setting User Options </li>
<li>Tool Palettes </li>
<li>Strategies for Increasing Drawing Efficiency </li>
<li>Extracting Information from Drawings </li>
<li>Fixing a Problem Drawing </li>
<li>Dealing with Tricky Layout Problems </li>
<li>Creating Blocks Containing Attributes </li>
<li>Creating and Managing Dynamic Blocks </li>
<li>Working with External References</li>
<li>DWG DWF and Image Files </li>
<li>Overview of Working in 3D </li>
<li>And many other features.</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 18:03:39 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Level 2 AutoCAD 2009 ]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/level-2-autocad-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/level-2-autocad-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09acadlevel2-2_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Level 2 AutoCAD 2009 </div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Level 2 AutoCAD 2009 vBook provides narrated screen capture videos utilizing real-world exercises for using AutoCAD 2009 for those users who already have experience with AutoCAD or are looking for more in-depth feature use.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>This vBook includes the following topics:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Setting User Options</li>
<li>Tool Palettes </li>
<li>Strategies for Increasing Drawing Efficiency</li>
<li>Extracting Information from Geometry</li>
<li>Fixing a Problem Drawing File</li>
<li>Layout Problems and Strategies</li>
<li>Blocks with Attributes and Dynamic Properties</li>
<li>External References</li>
<li>Introduction to 3D Modeling</li>
<li>And many other features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:44:01 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Level 1 AutoCAD 2009]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/level-1-autocad-2009.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/level-1-autocad-2009.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_09acadlevel1-2_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Level 1 AutoCAD 2009</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Level 1 AutoCAD 2009 vBook provides an overview of interacting with AutoCAD 2009 and background information helpful to new users within narrated screen capture videos.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>This vBook includes the following topics:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Understanding the Interface</li>
<li>Drawing Setup</li>
<li>Tracking System for Geometry Creation</li>
<li>Coordinate Entry</li>
<li>Basic Geometry Creation</li>
<li>Drawing Repeatable Patterns</li>
<li>Editing AutoCAD Geometry</li>
<li>Annotation of Drawings</li>
<li>Blocks</li>
<li>Getting Information in AutoCAD 2009</li>
<li>Sheet Layout</li>
<li>Plotting Drawings</li>
<li>And many other features</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">29.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Fri, 27 Apr 2012 15:42:48 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[A Guide to Wireless Networking]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/a-guide-to-wireless-networking.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/a-guide-to-wireless-networking.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_wirelessguide_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The guide to wireless networking is designed for the home or small business user that wants help setting up their wireless network.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The guide to wireless networking is designed for the home or small business user that wants help setting up their wireless network. vBook readers will be shown the entire process from opening the box to establishing wireless encryption parameters. Several popular brand wireless access points are discussed in detail (Linksys Netgear and DLink) including a chapter on configuring wireless networks for subscribers of TDS Internet services. The vBook becomes a strong support and troubleshooting resource as vBook owners are encouraged to submit specific problems that they are experiencing to the author for resolution. Once resolved the issue will be added to the troubleshooting section of the vBook allowing many other users to benefit from the same solution.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />An Overview of Wireless Networking<br />- Wireless Interferance<br />- A Basic Network Explained<br />Defining Terms<br />- Router<br />- Firewall<br />- DHCP<br />- Gateway<br />- Access Point<br />- Infrastructure Mode<br />- Which Access Point Should I Use?<br />LinkSys WAP54G<br />- Opening up the Box<br />- Setting up the WAP 54G<br />- Running the Setup Program<br />- Connecting the WAP 54G<br />- Basic Wireless Setup<br />- Advanced Setup<br />- Discussing Wireless Security Options<br />Connecting to the Access Point 1<br />- Security Setup<br />- MAC Filtering<br />- WEP Setup<br />Netgear WG302<br />- Opening up the box<br />- Setting up the WG302<br />Basic WG302 Setup<br />- Checking our Connection<br />- Advanced WG302 Setup<br />- Using the Built in Help<br />Security<br />- Security Profiles<br />- Editing Security Profiles<br />- Resetting the Access Point<br />D-Link DWL 2130AP<br />- Opening up the box<br />- Connecting to the DWL2130<br />- Running the DWL 2130 Installation program<br />- Connecting to the Access Point Manager<br />- Basic DWL-2130 Configuration<br />- DWL 2130 Security &amp; Filtering<br />Setting up Client Computers<br />- Generic PC Card<br />Built in Wireless<br />- IBM<br />- Apple<br />- Compaq<br />- Changing your TCP/IP address<br />- Glossary of Terms</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:46:52 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Yoga for Beginners]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/yoga-for-beginners.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/yoga-for-beginners.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_yogabegin_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Yoga for Beginners vBook is designed to show and take you through 30 and 60 minute flows.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The Yoga for Beginners vBook is designed to show and take you through 30 and 60 minute flows. Follow the poses in the order they are listed as each pose naturally flows into the next one. </div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:46:46 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Word 2003]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2003.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/word-2003.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_word_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Word 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Word.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Word 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Word.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Preview <br /> 
<ul>
<li>Symbols and Special Characters</li>
<li>Bulleted Lists</li>
<li>Add a WordArt image</li>
<li>Print Part of a Document</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Entry and Editing 
<ul>
<li>Entry and Editing</li>
<li>Overtype and Insert</li>
<li>Insert the Date</li>
<li>Replace Text</li>
<li>Symbols and Special Characters</li>
<li>Looking Up Words</li>
<li>AutoCorrect</li>
<li>AutoCorrect Options</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Display 
<ul>
<li>Document Views</li>
<li>Magnifying the Display</li>
<li>Show/Hide Display</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text 
<ul>
<li>Bolding Text</li>
<li>Italicizing Text</li>
<li>Underlining Text</li>
<li>Text Fonts</li>
<li>Text Size</li>
<li>Text Color</li>
<li>Removing Text Color</li>
<li>Background Color</li>
<li>Removing Background Color</li>
<li>Copy Text Formatting</li>
<li>Text Attributes</li>
<li>Moving Text</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Paragraphs 
<ul>
<li>Align Text</li>
<li>Numbered Lists</li>
<li>Bulleted Lists</li>
<li>Line Spacing</li>
<li>Borders</li>
<li>Shading</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Pages 
<ul>
<li>Page Margins</li>
<li>Add Footers</li>
<li>Add Headers</li>
<li>Page Borders</li>
<li>Center Document</li>
<li>Print Lengthwise</li>
<li>Manual Page Breaks</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing 
<ul>
<li>Print Part of a Document</li>
<li>Print Preview</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Files 
<ul>
<li>Change File Location</li>
<li>Change File Name</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Graphics</li>
<li>Picture Files 
<ul>
<li>Add a Picture</li>
<li>Set Picture Parameters</li>
<li>Resize Picture</li>
<li>Add a Picture Border</li>
<li>Move a Picture</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>WordArt 
<ul>
<li>Add a WordArt image</li>
<li>Edit an Image</li>
<li>Format an Image</li>
<li>Set Image Parameters</li>
<li>Change Text Shape</li>
<li>Move an Image</li>
<li>Brightness and Contrast</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Miscellaneous 
<ul>
<li>Word Search</li>
<li>Check Spelling</li>
<li>Check Gramma</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:45:18 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Excel 2003]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2003.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/excel-2003.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_excel_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Excel 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Excel.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Excel 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Excel.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Preview
<ul>
<li>Display Toolbar</li>
<li>Print Part of Worksheet</li>
<li>Sort Cell Data</li>
<li>Name Worksheet Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Entry and Editing 
<ul>
<li>Digit data</li>
<li>Change Cell Contents</li>
<li>Clear Cell Contents</li>
<li>Replace Existing Data</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Display</li>
<li>Toolbars 
<ul>
<li>Display Toolbar</li>
<li>Remove Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Format 
<ul>
<li>Underline Cell</li>
<li>Align Text</li>
<li>Center Text</li>
<li>Change Font</li>
<li>Change Background Color</li>
<li>Change Text Color</li>
<li>Display Negative Sign</li>
<li>Copy Cell Formatting</li>
<li>Format Automatically</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Scrolling and Splitting 
<ul>
<li>Stop Row Scrolling</li>
<li>Resume Scrolling</li>
<li>Split Screen</li>
<li>Widen Column</li>
<li>Auto Widen Column</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Borders 
<ul>
<li>Create Border</li>
<li>Draw Border</li>
<li>Erase Borde</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Hiding 
<ul>
<li>Hide Column</li>
<li>Unhide Column</li>
<li>Unhide All Columns</li>
<li>Hide Row</li>
<li>Unhide Row</li>
<li>Unhide All Rows</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Comments 
<ul>
<li>Add Comment</li>
<li>Edit Comment</li>
<li>Display Comment</li>
<li>Display All Comments</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formulas 
<ul>
<li>Make Formula Manually</li>
<li>Make Formula by Pointing</li>
<li>Copy Formula</li>
<li>Absolute and Relative</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Functions 
<ul>
<li>Add Numbers</li>
<li>Average numbers</li>
<li>Count entries</li>
<li>Insert Date and Time</li>
<li>Highest Number</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Worksheets</li>
<li>Columns 
<ul>
<li>Insert a Column</li>
<li>Move a Column</li>
<li>Delete a Column</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Rows 
<ul>
<li>Insert a Row</li>
<li>Move a Row</li>
<li>Delete a Row</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Worksheet Tabs 
<ul>
<li>Name Worksheet Tab</li>
<li>Color Worksheet Tab</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printing 
<ul>
<li>Set Margins</li>
<li>Print Lengthwise</li>
<li>Print Headers and Footers</li>
<li>Print Column Headings</li>
<li>Print Part of Worksheet</li>
<li>Print Formulas</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Miscellaneous 
<ul>
<li>Search for Data</li>
<li>Sort Cell Data</li>
<li>Protect Cell</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:45:11 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[PowerPoint 2003]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpointandtrade-2003.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/powerpointandtrade-2003.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_powerpoint_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Microsoft's Powerpoint Application is the premier application for creating and sharing applications of all kinds.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Microsoft's Powerpoint Application is the premier application for creating and sharing applications of all kinds.  This vBook teaches a beginner how to get up and running quickly for their first presentation or help an advanced user incorporate powerful animations and advanced graphics and design features into their presentation.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Preview&nbsp;&nbsp; 
<ul>
<li>Starting with a Template</li>
<li>Adding an Animation Scheme</li>
<li>Find and Replace</li>
<li>Importing an Outline from Word</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PowerPoint Workspace
<ul>
<li>Working with Toolbars</li>
<li>Task Pane Overview</li>
<li>Slide and Outline Pane Window</li>
<li>Navigating the Workspace</li>
<li>Presentation or Slide Window</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Starting a New Presentation
<ul>
<li>AutoContent Wizard</li>
<li>Starting with a Template</li>
<li>Starting with a Blank Presentation</li>
<li>Open an Existing File</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>PowerPoint Viewing Options
<ul>
<li>Normal View</li>
<li>Slide Show Preview</li>
<li>Slide Sorter View</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Content Overview
<ul>
<li>Adding A New Slide</li>
<li>Delete a Slide</li>
<li>Choose a Slide Layout</li>
<li>Options for Placing Content</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing Images, Charts, Tables and Media
<ul>
<li>Importing Clip Art</li>
<li>Clipart Task Pane Overview</li>
<li>Importing Images from File</li>
<li>Importing Audio and Video</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Importing and Creating Charts, Diagrams and Tables
<ul>
<li>Import a Chart</li>
<li>Create a Chart</li>
<li>Change Chart Type</li>
<li>Edit Existing Chart</li>
<li>Change Chart Title, Legend and Labels</li>
<li>Create Diagram or Organizational Chart</li>
<li>Insert a Table</li>
<li>Modify Table Fill and Borders</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Content and Formatting
<ul>
<li>Text Placeholder, Text Labels, Word Processing Boxes</li>
<li>Add Text</li>
<li>Text Edits from Slides or Outline</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Tools
<ul>
<li>AutoCorrect</li>
<li>Spell Checker</li>
<li>Find and Replace</li>
<li>Format Dialog Box</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Text Box Modification
<ul>
<li>Rotate Text Box</li>
<li>Resize Text Box</li>
<li>Auto shape to Fit</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with the Outline Pane
<ul>
<li>Importing an Outline from Word</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Entering and Editing Content Using the Outline Pane
<ul>
<li>How to resize an image, object or graphic</li>
<li>How to rotate an image, object or graphic</li>
<li>How to group objects and elements</li>
<li>How to ungroup objects and elements</li>
<li>How to rearrange or reorder objects and elements</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Applying Graphic and Image Content Using the Drawing Toolbar
<ul>
<li>Placing Images from Drawing Toolbar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Creating New Shapes
<ul>
<li>How to modify a shape using shape attributes</li>
<li>How to add or change shape fill effects</li>
<li>How to modify or change a shapes color</li>
<li>Applying WordArt</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Design Templates and Slide Layouts
<ul>
<li>Template Design Task Pane</li>
<li>Applying a Template</li>
<li>Modifying a Template</li>
<li>Save Presentation as a Template</li>
<li>Revert to Original Template</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Working with Masters
<ul>
<li>Slide Master and Title Master</li>
<li>Handout Master</li>
<li>Notes Page Master</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Presentation Notes and Handouts
<ul>
<li>Notes View</li>
<li>Adding Notes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Presentation Colors
<ul>
<li>Selecting and Modifying Color Schemes</li>
<li>Add a Color Scheme</li>
<li>Creating Custom Slide Backgrounds</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Adding Multimedia and Animation
<ul>
<li>Slide Transition</li>
<li>Adding an Animation Scheme</li>
<li>Custom Animation</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Preparing the Presentation
<ul>
<li>Presentation Preview</li>
<li>Using the Print Preview</li>
<li>Spell Check Document</li>
<li>Rehearsing Presentation Timing</li>
<li>Package the Presentation</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:44 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Outlook 2003]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2003.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/outlook-2003.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_outlook_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Outlook 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Outlook.  The book covers everything from email configuration organizing and managing contact</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Outlook 2003 vBook is a guide designed to help you maximize your ability to leverage all of the features and functionality available in Microsoft Outlook.  The book covers everything from email configuration organizing and managing contacts managing your schedule and emailing tips and tricks.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Preview&nbsp;&nbsp; <br /> 
<ul>
<li>-Create and Send a Message</li>
<li>-View activities related to a contact</li>
<li>-Add a reminder to a task</li>
<li>-Add holidays to your calendar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Getting Started 
<ul>
<li>-Outlook Overview</li>
<li>-Customize Outlook Today</li>
<li>-Workspace Description</li>
<li>-Add an Email Account</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Mail</li>
<li>Sending and Receiving 
<ul>
<li>-Create and Send a Message</li>
<li>-Check for Incoming Messages</li>
<li>-Change Notification Options</li>
<li>-Preview Messages</li>
<li>-Open and Save Attachments</li>
<li>-Send Attachments</li>
<li>-Email Photos</li>
<li>-Send to multiple recipients without revealing addresses</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using the Address Book 
<ul>
<li>-Add a name to the Address Book</li>
<li>-Create a Distribution List</li>
<li>-Find a name in the Address Book</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Formatting in messages 
<ul>
<li>-UseMicrosoft Word as your text editor</li>
<li>-Change the appearance of text</li>
<li>-Insert WordArt</li>
<li>-Format a bulleted list</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Tables 
<ul>
<li>-Insert a table into your message</li>
<li>-Add a row or column to a table</li>
<li>-Change the width of a table column</li>
<li>-UseTable AutoFormat</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Spelling and Grammar 
<ul>
<li>-Check spelling and grammar</li>
<li>-Check spelling and grammar as you type</li>
<li>-Automatically check spelling before sending</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Using Signatures and Stationery 
<ul>
<li>-Create a default signature in Outlook</li>
<li>-Create multiple signatures in Word for use in Outlook</li>
<li>-Choose stationery for all your messages</li>
<li>-Choose stationery for one message</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing messages 
<ul>
<li>-Create Folders and Subfolders for Storing Messages</li>
<li>-Rename a folder</li>
<li>-Empty a folder</li>
<li>-Move messages to a folder</li>
<li>-Insert Autotext into a mail message</li>
<li>-Create Autotext for use in mail messages</li>
<li>-Flag messages for follow up</li>
<li>-Set a reminder on your message</li>
<li>-Mark a follow up flag complete</li>
<li>-Clear a follow up flag from a message</li>
<li>-View all messages with follow up flags</li>
<li>-Create a Search folder</li>
<li>-Mark a message as ""Junk"" or block a sender</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Contacts</li>
<li>Contact Basics 
<ul>
<li>-Add a contact</li>
<li>-Send an email message to a contact</li>
<li>-Quickly find a contact</li>
<li>-Change to a different view</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Contacts 
<ul>
<li>-Flag a contact for Follow-up</li>
<li>-Clear a follow up flag from a contact</li>
<li>-Mark a Contact's follow up item Complete</li>
<li>-View activities related to a contact</li>
<li>-Create categories for Outlook items</li>
<li>-Assign a category to a contact</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Tasks</li>
<li>Task Basics 
<ul>
<li>-Create a new task</li>
<li>-Mark a task complete</li>
<li>-Delete a task</li>
<li>-Create a recurring task</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Managing Tasks 
<ul>
<li>-Add a reminder to a task</li>
<li>-Work with reminders</li>
<li>-Attach a file to a task</li>
<li>-Attach an Outlook item to a task</li>
<li>-Assign a category to a task</li>
<li>-View tasks by category</li>
<li>-Create a task from a mail message</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Calendar 
<ul>
<li>-Add an appointment to the calendar</li>
<li>-Add an all day event to your calendar</li>
<li>-Add Birthdays and Anniversaries</li>
<li>-Add a recurring event</li>
<li>-Add holidays to your calendar</li>
<li>-Remove holidays from your calendar</li>
<li>-Change calendar views</li>
<li>-Add an appointment from mail message</li>
<li>-Color code items on the calendar</li>
<li>-Print a calendar</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Notes 
<ul>
<li>-Open a new note</li>
<li>-Color code a note</li>
<li>-Categorize notes</li>
<li>-Delete a note</li>
<li>-Forward a note</li>
<li>-Print a note</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span>
</div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:32 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Bike Guide]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/bike-guide.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/bike-guide.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_bikerepair_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The  Bike Guide vBook is designed as both a Bike guide and a Biking guide.  It contains videos displaying common maintenance and bike fixing tutorials and tips on selecting the right kind of clothing and preparing for your bike rides.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>The Bike Guide vBook is designed as both a Bike guide and a Biking guide.  It contains videos displaying common maintenance and bike fixing tutorials and tips on selecting the right kind of clothing and preparing for your bike rides.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:13 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Photoshop CS2]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs2.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/photoshop-cs2.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_photoshop_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>Photoshop CS2 is used to retouch photos manipulate existing images and create original artwork and photo montages.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>Photoshop CS2 is used to retouch photos manipulate existing images and create original artwork and photo montages. This guide will cover basic workspace management provide a comprehensive overview of the tools and demonstrate custom art filters and photo retouching techniques.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong></p>
<p>Preview&nbsp; &nbsp;<br />-Workspace Overview<br />-Healing Brush<br />-Using the Swatch Pallette<br />-Add and Delete a Layer<br />-Welcome<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Photoshop Workspace<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;History Pallette<br />-Channel Basics<br />-Workspace Overview<br />-Managing Pallettes<br />-Opening Files<br />-Making Annotations<br />-Resizing the Image Canvas<br />-Saving a File<br />-Saving a New File Name or Format<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Photoshop Tools<br />-Crop tool<br />-Type Tool<br />-Shape Tool<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Selection Tools<br />-Marquee Tool<br />-Marquee Proportional Selection<br />-Maquee Selection from a Central Point<br />-Lasso Tool<br />-Magic Wand Tool<br />-Move Tool<br />-Move and deselect selection<br />-Adding and Subtracting from Selections<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Photo retouching<br />-Healing Brush<br />-Spot Healing Brush<br />-Red Eye Tool<br />-Patch Tool<br />-Blur Tool<br />-Sharpen Tool<br />-Dodge and Burn Tools<br />-Sponge Tool<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Color Tools<br />-Eyedropper Tool<br />-Color Replacement Tool<br />-Paint Bucket Tool<br />-Forground and Background Colors<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Navigation<br />-Hand Tool<br />-Zoom Tool<br />-Measure Tool<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Painting Tools<br />-Brush Tool<br />-Pencil Tool<br />-Clone Stamp Tool<br />-Pattern Stamp Tool<br />-Smudge Tool<br />-Eraser Tool<br />-Magic Eraser Tool<br />-Gradient Tool<br />-Gradient Editor<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Pen Tool<br />-Add a Point<br />-Delete an Anchor Point<br />-Convert an Anchor Point<br />-Transforming a Path<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Color Selection<br />-Changing Forground and Background Colors<br />-Using the Color Picker<br />-Using the Swatch Pallette<br />-Using Custom Swatch Libraries<br />-Using the Color Pallette<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Special Effects and Filters<br />-Using the Filter Gallery<br />-Liquify Filter<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Layer Basics<br />-Rearranging Layer Order<br />-Merging Layers<br />-Linking Layers<br />-Rendering Layers<br />-Layer visibility<br />-Layer Blending Mode<br />-Layer Opacity Setting<br />-Layer Styles<br />-Add and Delete a Layer<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Image Transformation<br />-Rotate Image<br />-Flip Image<br />-Scale, Skew and Distort<br />Expand/Collapse &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp;Auto Image Corrections<br />-Auto Color Adjustments<br />-Auto Contrast Adjustment</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:38 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Nonni's Italian Cooking]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/nonni-apos-s-italian-cooking.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/nonni-apos-s-italian-cooking.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_book_nonnis_small_1.jpg" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Nonni's Italian Cooking vBook contains both basic cooking skills to "soup to nuts" video lessons showing how to prepare and serve Appetizers Main Courses and desserts.  Professional chef Mathew Mitnisky reveals the secrets behind his famous Italian dish.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Nonni's Italian Cooking vBook contains both basic cooking skills to "soup to nuts" video lessons showing how to prepare and serve Appetizers Main Courses and desserts.  Professional chef Mathew Mitnisky reveals the secrets behind his famous Italian dishes such as Bruschetta Chicken Marsala and Chocolate Mousse.  The average recipe is broken down into approximately 8-12 60-second video tutorials.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Kitchen Basics<br />- Preparing Your Workspace<br />- 2 Basic Knives<br />- Peeled Garlic<br />- Slicing Garlic<br />- Chopping Garlic<br />- Flat Leaf Italian Parsely ~ Cleaning it<br />- Drying The Parsley<br />- Parsely 101<br />- Roll and Slice Parsely<br />- Dicing/Chopping the Parseley<br />- Washing Plum Tomatos<br />- Preparing the Tomato to Dice<br />- Dicing a Tomato<br />- Dicing Mozzarella<br />- Preparing the Basil<br />- Heart of Romaine (Escarole)<br />- Julianning the Romaine<br />- Romaine for Ceasar Salad<br />- Julianning the Basil<br />- Boiling Basics<br />- Pasta 101<br />- Adding the Pasta to the water<br />- Checking the Pasta<br />- Finishing the Pasta<br />- Flashing Pasta Step 1<br />- Flashing Pasta Step 2<br />- Dicing an Onion<br />- Dice and Render Bacon<br />- Lemon<br />The Staples<br />- Sauce<br />- Meatballs<br />Appetizers<br />- Bruschetta Rustica<br />- Zuppa Mariatta<br />- Escarole and Bean Soup<br />- Stromboli<br />- Zuppa di Mussels and Clams<br />Pasta Dishes<br />- Fettuccini Alfredo<br />- Fettuccini Carbonara<br />- Linguine with Shrimp Fra Diavlo<br />- Penne Vodka ala Rosa<br />Main Courses<br />- Chicken Marsala<br />- Chicken Especiale<br />- Steak Pizziola<br />- Lemon Veal</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:26 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Computer Basics]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computer-basics.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/computer-basics.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_compbasics_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Computer Basics vBook is designed to be a resource that walks you through the basic steps of connecting your computer components*** and getting started on using your PC.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Computer Basics vBook is designed to be a resource that walks you through the basic steps of connecting your computer components and getting started on using your PC.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents</strong>:<br />Setting up your computer<br />- Connecting your microphone to a laptop<br />- Connecting a standard or USB microphone to a desktop<br />- Connecting powersource to your computer<br />- Connecting monitor to power source<br />- Connecting monitor cord to desktop<br />- Connecting keyboard and mouse<br />- Connecting your speakers<br />- Comparing your ethernet cord and phone cord<br />- Connecting to the internet with phone cord<br />- Connecting to the internet with ethernet cord<br />- Overview of connections<br />General Computer Tips<br />- How do I compress or zip a group of files?<br />- How do I extract or uncompress a compressed file<br />- Unable to receive / send e-mail<br />- How do I restore Windows XP back to an earlier copy<br />- How to load last known good configuration<br />- Setup the printer as default in Windows 9x / NT / 2000 / ME / XP<br />Computer Maintenance<br />- Control Panel Settings<br />- Removing Software<br />- Swap File Settings<br />- Using msconfig<br />- Windows Update<br />- Using Ad Aware<br />- Using Spybot<br />- Using Windows Defender<br />Wireless Networking<br />- Linksys Adapter<br />- Install Antenna in PC<br />- Connecting Adapter to Router<br />- Increasing footprint<br />- Modify Radio Signal<br />- Receiving antennas<br />- Connecting USB adapter to PC<br />Troubleshooting<br />- Reset Equipment<br />- Install antenna in laptop<br />Customize your computer<br />- Change Your Desktop Background<br />- Add a screen saver<br />- Create a slideshow screen saver<br />- Changing your screen size<br />- Working with Themes<br />Working with Folders<br />- Creating Folders<br />- Rename a Folder<br />- Delete folders<br />- Recover deleted folder<br />Web Browser Tips<br />- Internet Explorer<br />- How do I clear my Internet browser history?<br />- Cache<br />- My web browser has been hijacked<br />- How do I stop pop-up or pop-under Internet ads?<br />- How to change my browser's home page<br />- How do I enable / disable or delete Internet cookies?<br />- Does capitalization and spaces matter in Internet addresses?<br />Communication<br />- Email<br />Instant Messaging (IM)<br />- Yahoo<br />- MSN<br />- AOL<br />- Video</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:44:21 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Windyledge Recipes]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windyledge-recipes.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windyledge-recipes.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/c/o/cover_windyledge_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>The Windyledge Recipes vBook contains a wide-range of breakfast offerings including such time honored classics as Blueberry stuffed French toast Eggs benedict and a variety of hand made Muffins. The recipes are shown by using step-by-step video instruction.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>The Windyledge Recipes vBook contains a wide-range of breakfast offerings including such time honored classics as Blueberry stuffed French toast Eggs benedict and a variety of hand made Muffins.  The recipes are shown by using step-by-step video instruction.</p>
<p><strong>Table of Contents:</strong><br />Cooking Basics&nbsp;&nbsp; Open and show note&nbsp; Open and show note<br />- Utensils<br />- Food prep and tips<br />French Toast<br />- Baked<br />- Blueberry-Stuffed French Toast<br />- Apricot Glazed<br />- Streusel with Berry Sauce<br />- Fluffy with Orange Sauce<br />- Apple Walnut with Strawberry<br />Pancakes<br />- Sunflower Apple<br />- Honey'n Spice Blueberry<br />- Ginger with Lemon Sauce<br />- German Apple<br />- Festive Pancakes<br />Egg Dishes<br />- French Scrambled<br />- Fabulous Frittata<br />- Breakfast Egg Casserole<br />- Eggs Benedict<br />Main Dishes<br />- Asparagus Goldenrod<br />- Ricotta Souffle with Raspberry Sauce<br />- Chili Relleno Casserole<br />- Potato Sausage Bake<br />- Ham &amp; Egg Muffin with Cheese Sauce<br />Muffins<br />- Pumpkin Raisin<br />- Blueberry<br />- Orange Tea<br />- Lemon<br />- Pecan Orange<br />- Apple Spice<br />- Raspberry Streusel<br />- Cranberry Oat<br />- Peach Cobbler<br />- Cinnamon Raspberry&nbsp;&nbsp;</p></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:44:34 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Introduction to ArcGIS]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-arcgis.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/introduction-to-arcgis.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_arcgis_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>This vBook is an introductory look at ESRI ArcGIS software. A brief theoretical section explores the fundamental GIS concepts based upon the ESRI's Authorized Training Program (ATP).</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3>This vBook is an introductory look at ESRI ArcGIS software. A brief theoretical section explores the fundamental GIS concepts based upon the ESRI's Authorized Training Program (ATP). However the main focus of the vBook is to give demonstrations on how to use the basic tools of ArcMap and ArcCatalog. It is an excellent reference guide for using GIS tools and a compliment to further theoretical instruction.</div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">19.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:47:19 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title><![CDATA[Windows XP]]></title>
      <link>http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-xp.html</link>
      <description><![CDATA[<table border="0" width="100%" class="product"><tr><td width="80px" valign="top" class="image"><a href="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/windows-xp.html"><img class="image" src="http://retrieve.rguidestore.com/media/catalog/product/cache/2/thumbnail/75x75/9df78eab33525d08d6e5fb8d27136e95/v/b/vbook_cover_xp_small_1.gif" border="0" align="left" height="75" width="75"></a></td><td><div class="short_description"><h3>Short Description</h3>With the Windows XP vBook you will have access to information such as an overview of the folder file structure and basic XP navigation. You will also lea  how to access the inte et and how to setup a network.</div><div class="long_description"><h3>Description</h3><p>With Retrieve's Windows XP vBook you will have access to information such as an overview of the folder file structure and basic XP navigation. You will also learn how to access the internet how to setup a network how to change settings in the control panel how to access and view the operating system settings and more.</p>
<div class="toc">
<h3>Table of Contents:</h3>
<ul>
<li>Welcome 
<ul>
<li>The Windows XP Website</li>
<li>Windows Help and Support Center</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>General Navigation Overview  
<ul>
<li>Adding Shortcuts to Your Desktop</li>
<li>The Notification Area</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Task Bar 
<ul>
<li>Adding Toolbars to the Task Bar</li>
<li>Setting the Task Bar Properties</li>
<li>The Task Manager</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Start Menu 
<ul>
<li>Turning Off the Computer From the Start Menu</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>My Computer 
<ul>
<li>System Properties</li>
<li>Hard Disk Drives and Removable Devices</li>
<li>My Network Places</li>
<li>My Documents</li>
<li>The Recycle Bin</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Folders and Files 
<ul>
<li>Create and Delete Folders and Files</li>
<li>Moving Folders and Files</li>
<li>Sharing Folders and Files between User Accounts</li>
<li>Searching for Folders and Files</li>
<li>Creating shortcuts</li>
<li>Windows Explorer</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The Control Panel 
<ul>
<li>Date, Time, Language, and Regional Options</li>
<li>Sound, Audio and Portable Media Devices</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Appearance and Themes 
<ul>
<li>Display Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Printers and Other Hardware 
<ul>
<li>Mouse</li>
<li>Keyboard</li>
<li>Printers and Faxes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Network and Internet Connections 
<ul>
<li>Internet Options</li>
<li>Windows Firewall</li>
<li>Network Setup Wizard</li>
<li>Wireless Network Setup Wizard</li>
<li>Network Connections</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>User Accounts 
<ul>
<li>Create and Change User Accounts</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Add, Change or Remove Programs 
<ul>
<li>Add or Remove Windows Components and Set Program Defaults</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Performance and Maintenance 
<ul>
<li>Adjusting visual effects</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Windows Accessories 
<ul>
<li>System Information</li>
<li>Disk Clean Up</li>
<li>Disk Defragmenter</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<span>&nbsp;</span></div></div></td></tr></table><p class="price" style="display:none">9.9500</p>]]></description>
      <pubDate>Sat, 14 Apr 2012 18:44:40 +0000</pubDate>
    </item>
  </channel>
</rss>

